V31_Manual(www.iran-plc.ir) by heidar ghaedi

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual INTRODUCTION Â&#x201E; Preface Thank you for choosing the TECO high-performance V31 series vector inverter. The V31 series of general-purpose inverters provides V/F control and vector control as standard features along with a user-friendly LCD keypad for ease of control. This instruction manual provides all the necessary information for the installation, standard functions, and operating functions for the V31. Please read this manual thoroughly before installing, operating, performing maintenance, or inspection of the inverter. Incorrect handling of the inverter can prevent proper operation and equipment damage as well as danger to personnel. The information contained herein such as product specifications is subject to change without prior notice. Manuals are revised as necessary to incorporate the latest changes, therefore insure that you have the latest edition of the operating manual. Â&#x201E; Before Installation and Use 1. Ensure nameplate data corresponds with your requirements. 2. Ensure the equipment is undamaged.

! The following safety precautions must be observed: 1.Electrical equipment electricity can cause serious or fatal injury if the equipment is improperly installed, operated or maintained. Responsible personnel must be fully trained to understand the hazards to themselves and others before being involved in installing, operating, maintaining and decommissioning electrical equipment. European Union Safety information can be obtained from regulations such as: BS4999, EN60204-11, EN292-1 and EN294 IEE Wiring Regulations Particular industries and countries have further safety requirements. Refer to their trade safety bodies, British Standards Institution, Dept. of Trade & Industry, etc, for further information. For instance, in the USA, refer to NEMA MG2, the National Electrical Code, local safety requirements, etc. 2. When servicing, all power sources to the equipment and to the accessory devices should be de-energized and disconnected and all moving parts at standstill. 3. Safety guards or other protective devices must not be bypassed nor rendered inoperative. 4. The equipment must be grounded. Refer to relevant standards such as EN60204-1, IEE Wiring Regulation etc. 5. A suitable enclosure must be provided to prevent access to electrically live parts. Extra caution should be observed around equipment that is automatically started, has automatic resetting relays or is remotely started. In such cases if the equipment has not been properly disabled, restart can occur and pose a danger to personnel. Â&#x201E;

Safety Instructions Please read this manual thoroughly before installing, operating, performing maintenance or inspection on the inverter. Only authorized personnel should be permitted to perform maintenance, inspections or parts replacement.

In this manual, notes for safe operation are classified as:

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual “ WARNING ” or “ CAUTION ”

WARNING - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.

CAUTION - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury to personnel and damage to equipment. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. . Confirmations upon Delivery

. Instructions on use

. Installation

. Wiring

! WARNING . Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals. －Otherwise, electric shock or fire can occur. . Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work. －Otherwise, electric shock or fire can occur. . Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (230 V class: Ground to 100Ω or less, 460 V class: Ground to 10Ω or less) －Otherwise, and electric shock or fire can occur. . Always test the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired. －Otherwise, injury can result. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.) . Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits. －Otherwise, electric shock or a ground short can occur. . Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the wiring without first disconnecting the inverter form the circuit being tested. －Otherwise, inverter damage my occur.

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual CAUTION

. Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the Inverter. －Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct. . Connect braking resistors, Braking resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring examples. －Otherwise, fire can occur. . Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. －Otherwise, fire may occur. . Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W. －The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals. . Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. －The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts damaged if these devices are connected. . Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits. －If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the over-current protection circuit inside the Inverter to operate. . Ensure that the noise generated by the inverter, motor, or wiring does not adversely affect peripheral sensors and equipment. －Otherwise, an accident may occur.

. Parameters setting

CAUTION

. Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing rotational auto tuning. －The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to the equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set with the motor connected to a load. . Stay clear of the motor during rotational auto-tuning. －The motor may start operating suddenly when stopped, possibly resulting in injury.

. Operation

CAUTION

Do not touch the heatsink, braking resistor, or braking resistor unit. These can become very hot. －Otherwise, a burn injury may occur. . Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation. －Otherwise, an injury may occur. . As the inverter can set high speed operation easily, carefully check the performance of motor or machine before changing speed settings. －Otherwise, injury may occur. . Do not use the inverter braking function for mechanical holding. Provide a separate holding brake if necessary. －Otherwise, injury may occur. . Do not check signals while the Inverter is running. －Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged. . Be cautious when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings. －Otherwise, the equipment be damaged.

iii

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . Maintenance, Inspection and Replacement.

! WARNING . After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out before performing maintenance, inspection, or replacement. (Also confirm that the DC voltage between terminal 1/ 2 and Ə does not exceed 25V) －The DC Link capacitor(s) maintain a charge and electric shock can occur. . Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous. －Doing so can result in electric shock. . Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB. －Not doing so can result in electric shock. . Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel. －Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools. Failure to heed these warnings can result in electric shock.

. Maintenance, Inspection and Replacement. (continued)

CAUTION

. CMOS IC is used on the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully using proper technique. －The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly. . Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation. －Doing so can result in personal injury.

. Disposal

. Others

. Conformity to Low voltage Directive in Europe

Compliance with RoHS New lead-free components and manufacturing processes comply with the latest RoHS Directive in Europe. iv

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Â&#x201E;

Warning Label and Position There is warning label on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration. Inverter with a small capacity (15Kw or lower)

Inverter with large capacity (18.5Kw or higher)

. Warning Label

NOTES -

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Contents Page 1. INSTALLING THE INVERTER -----------------------------------------------------------------------------1-1 1.1 Inspection after Receipt ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-2 1.2 Installation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-2 1.2.1 Mounting spaces------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-2 1.2.2 External cooling system---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-3 1.3 Location ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-4 1.4 External View of the V31 and Warning Label Information ---------------------------------------1-5 1.5 Handling of the Product ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-1 2.1 V31 Basic Connection Diagram------------------------------------------------------------------------2-1 2.2 Main Circuit Terminal Functions------------------------------------------------------------------------2-2 2.2.1 Main Circuit Terminal Layouts-------------------------------------------------------------------2-3 2.3 Main Circuit Diagrams ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-5 2.4 Connections to Peripheral Devices -------------------------------------------------------------------2-6 2.5 Main Circuit Recommended Wiring -------------------------------------------------------------------2-7 2.6 Main Circuit Terminal Screws and Tightening Torques ----------------------------------------- 2-12 2.7 Cable Entry Stepped Collar --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-12 2.8 Control Terminal Functions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-14 2.9 Control Terminal Layout---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-16 2.10 Sink / Source Mode-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-17 2.11 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Cards-----------------------------------------------------2-18 3. TEST OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE --------------------------------------------------------------3-1 3.1 Test Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-1 3.1.1 Check Before Test Operation---------------------------------------------------------------------3-1 3.1.2 Power ON and Display status --------------------------------------------------------------------3-1 3.2 Maintenance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-2 3.2.1 Periodic Inspection----------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-2 3.2.2 Spare parts --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-3 4. SPECIFICATIONS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-1 4.1 Standard Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-1 4.2 Dimensions and Weights --------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-5 5. DIGITAL OPERATOR AND MODES----------------------------------------------------------------------5-1 5.1 Appearance of Digital Operator ------------------------------------------------------------------------5-1 5.2 Digital Operator Key Functions-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2 5.3 Screen Modes ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-3 5.3.1 Drive Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-6 5.3.2 Quick Programming Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------5-9 5.3.3 Advanced Programming Mode------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-11 5.3.4 Auto-tuning Mode (A. TUNE Mode)------------------------------------------------------------ 5-13 5.4 Diagnostic Assistant------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-15 5.5 Quick Programming Mode Parameters ------------------------------------------------------------ 5-16 5.6 Examples of Changing Parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5-19 6. TRIAL OPERATION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-1 6.1 Trial Operation Flowchart --------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-1 6.2 Trial Operation Procedures------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2 6.3 Control Method Selection--------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-4 6.3.1 Introduction to Various Control Methods-------------------------------------------------------- 6-4 6.3.2 Closed Loop Control System---------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-5 6.3.3 Control Method Characteristics------------------------------------------------------------------- 6.6 6.4 Auto-tuning --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-7 6.4.1 Setting the Auto-tuning------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-7 6.4.2 Precautions for Auto-tuning------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-7 6.5 Optimum Parameter Adjustments ---------------------------------------------------------------------6-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 7. PARAMETERS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-1 7.1 Descriptions of Parameter/Function List -------------------------------------------------------------7-1 7.2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ---------------------------------------------------7-2 7.3 Parameter Tables ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-3 7.3.1 Quick and Advanced Programming Mode Parameters (G code) -------------------------7-3 7.3.2 Auto-Tuning Mode Parameters (T code) ----------------------------------------------------- 7-53 7.3.3 Drive Mode Parameters (U code) -------------------------------------------------------------- 7-55 8. CONTROL AND OPERATION------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-1 8.1 Description of G Code Parameters--------------------------------------------------------------------8-1 8.1.1 Group01 ─ Start-up ------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-1 8.1.2 Group02 ─ Operation Mode Selections-----------------------------------------------------8-8 8.1.3 Group03 ─ Acceleration/Deceleration Time---------------------------------------------- 8-17 8.1.4 Group04 ─ Carrier Frequency Selection-------------------------------------------------- 8-20 8.1.5 Group05 ─ Preset Reference and Process Operation -------------------------------- 8-23 8.1.6 Group06 ─ V/F Pattern Setting-------------------------------------------------------------- 8-27 8.1.7 Group07 ─ Motor Parameter ---------------------------------------------------------------- 8-31 8.1.8 Group08 ─ Motor Overload/Overheat ----------------------------------------------------- 8-33 8.1.9 Group09 ─ Stall Prevention ------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-35 8.1.10 Group10 ─ Multi-Function Digital Inputs (DI) -------------------------------------------- 8-38 8.1.11 Group11 ─ Multi-Function Digital Outputs (DO)----------------------------------------- 8-50 8.1.12 Group12 ─ Analog Inputs (AI) Setting ----------------------------------------------------- 8-54 8.1.13 Group13 ─ Multi-Function Analog Outputs (AO) Setting------------------------------ 8-63 8.1.14 Group14 ─ Pulse Input/Output (PI/PO) Setting ----------------------------------------- 8-65 8.1.15 Group15 ─ S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration ----------------------------------------- 8-70 8.1.16 Group16 ─ DC Injection Braking ----------------------------------------------------------- 8-71 8.1.17 Group17 ─ Jump Frequencies -------------------------------------------------------------- 8-73 8.1.18 Group18 ─ OV Prevention ------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-74 8.1.19 Group19 ─ Frequency Detection ----------------------------------------------------------- 8-77 8.1.20 Group20 ─ Fault Restart---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-79 8.1.21 Group21 ─ Reserved-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-80 8.1.22 Group22 ─ Timer Function ------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-80 8.1.23 Group23 ─ PID Control ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-81 8.1.24 Group24 ─ Energy Saving ------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-88 8.1.25 Group25 ─ Hold Function -------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-90 8.1.26 Group26 ─ Droop Control -------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-91 8.1.27 Group27 ─ Zero Servo------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-91 8.1.28 Group28 ─ Motor Slip Compensation ----------------------------------------------------- 8-93 8.1.29 Group29 ─ Torque Compensation --------------------------------------------------------- 8-96 8.1.30 Group30 ─ Speed Control (ASR) Setting------------------------------------------------- 8-97 8.1.31 Group31 ─ PG Feedback Set-up--------------------------------------------------------- 8-103 8.1.32 Group32 ─ Torque Control Function ----------------------------------------------------- 8-106 8.1.33 Group33 ─ Torque Detection and Limitation--------------------------------------------8-111 8.1.34 Group34 ─ Motor 2 V/F Pattern Setting ------------------------------------------------ 8-115 8.1.35 Group35 ─ Motor 2 Parameter------------------------------------------------------------ 8-115 8.1.36 Group36 ─ Power Loss Ride Through and Speed Search ------------------------- 8-115 8.1.37 Group37 ─ Hardware Protection --------------------------------------------------------- 8-119 8.1.38 Group38 ─ Communication Parameter ------------------------------------------------- 8-121 8.1.39 Group39 ─ Reserved------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-123 8.1.40 Group40 ─ Reserved------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-123 8.1.41 Group41 ─ KEB Function ------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-123 8.1.42 Group42 ─ RTC Timer Function ---------------------------------------------------------- 8-124 8.1.43 Group43 ─ Reserved------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-130 8.1.44 Group44 ─ Digital Operator Selection--------------------------------------------------- 8-130 8.1.45 Group45 ─ Multi-Function Selection----------------------------------------------------- 8-132 8.1.46 Group46 ─ Copy Function ----------------------------------------------------------------- 8-139 8.1.47 Group47 ─ Traverse Operation ----------------------------------------------------------- 8-142 8.2 Reserved ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-145 8.3 Description of T Code Parameters Settings----------------------------------------------------- 8-145 9. FAULT MESSAGE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ------------------------------------------------------9-1 9.1 General-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-1 9.2 Fault Detection Function ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-1 vii

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 9.3 Warning / Self-Diagnosis Detection Function -------------------------------------------------------9-6 9.4 Auto-tuning Faults --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-11 9.5 Display for Diagnostic Assistant---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-12 10. INSTALLING AND WIRING OPTION CARDS------------------------------------------------------ 10-1 10.1 Option Card Models and Specification------------------------------------------------------------ 10-1 10.2 Installation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-1 10.2.1 PG-O Encoder Feedback Option Card------------------------------------------------------ 10-2 10.2.2 PG-L Encoder Feedback Option Card------------------------------------------------------- 10-4 10.3 PG (Encoder) Connection Examples and Specifications------------------------------------- 10-6 10.3.1 PG Interface for Terminal Cards TER-001-------------------------------------------------- 10-7 11. DERATING GUIDELINES -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1 12. PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND OPTIONS-------------------------------------------------------------12-1 12.1 AC and DC Reactor ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-1 12.2 Input Noise Filter --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-2 12.3 Braking Resistor and Braking Unit----------------------------------------------------------------- 12-3 12.4 Sinusoidal Output Filter------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-3 12.5 AC Fuses------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-5 12.6 Others----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-6

viii

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 1. INSTALLATING THE INVERTER 1.1.

Inspection After Receipt !

CAUTION

The V31 has been put through demanding tests at factory before shipment. After unpacking, check the following. Verify that the equipment received is in accordance with that which was purchased. Check that there is no damage to the drive do to shipment. If there is damage immediately notify TECO for further instructions.

Â&#x201E;

Nameplate Data (230V Class 7.5HP Example)

Inverter Model and Motor Rating Input Power Specifications Output Power Specifications

UL and CE Marks

Blank: Enclosed, wall-mounted (IEC IP20, NEMA1) N4: IP55 Type (NEMA12)

JNV31: V31 Series

2: 230V Class (200-240 VAC) 4: 460V Class (380-480 VAC)

Blank: No RFI (No EMC emission protection) F: RFI Built-in (Meets standard IEC61800-3)

0024: 24 A 0096: 96 A 3: Three phase *1 The current ratings are based on HD mode (Heavy Duty mode). H: No brake chopper B: Brake chopper built-in

1-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 1.2.

Installation !

CAUTION

Do Not move, lift or handle the V31 cabinet by the front cover. Do Not lift the cabinet from the bottom. Do Not drop the inverter.

1.2.1.

Mounting Spaces

(1)

Install the V31 vertically and allow sufficient space for effective cooling as shown in Fig.1.2.1. Do Not install upside down or in the horizontal direction.

(2)

The cooling fins of the heatsink can reach a temperature of almost 90â&#x201E;&#x192; during inverter operation. Therefore the inverter mounting surface should be made of a material capable of withstanding this temperature. When operating the inverter in a control panel, use sufficient ventilation so that the ambient temperature will not exceed +45Â°C within the enclosure. Note - Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1) The inverter is constructed so that it is shielded from the exterior environment, and can be mounted directly to an interior wall of a standard building. The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA1 in the USA.

NOTES-

1-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 1.2.2. External Cooling System The inverter is configured to be mounted in a control panel when delivered. It maybe externally cooled using a option kit for 15KW (or less) or with the mounting legs relocated for 18.5KW (or higher).With the inverter externally cooled, the heat generated inside the unit or control panel is dissipated through the heatsink cooling fins. Refer to Fig. 1.2.2 for external cooling system.

(a) 18.5 KW or higher

(b) 15 KW or less Fig. 1.2.2 External Cooling System

Fig. 1.2.3 Mounting Legs

To externally cool inverters rated 18.5KW or higher, relocate the upper and lower mounting legs as shown in Fig. 1.2.3

1-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 1.3.

Location

Install the inverter in accordance with the following environmental conditions: Item

Requirement

Location

Indoor

Ambient Temperature

-10°C to +50°C *1 (+14°F to +122°F)

Relative Humidity

5% to 95% RH, non - condensating or dripping water. (Conforms to IEC600068-2-3)

Altitude

1000 m or less

. Protected from rain or moisture . Protected from direct sunlight . Protected from corrosive gases or liquids Atmosphere . Free from airborne dust or metallic particles . Free from EMI noise (e.g. welding machines, power units) . Free from combustible materials, gases. etc. . Maximum acceleration amplitude : 0.5G (5m/s2) at 9 to 200 Hz . Displacement amplitude : 1.5mm (peak) at 2 to 9 Hz Vibration (conforms to IEC60721-3-3-3 M3) *1. The max ambient temperature without de-rating is 45°C. At higher temperatures (up to +50°C) the de-rating is 1%/1°C.

CAUTION

When mounting multiple inverters in a common enclosure, install a cooling fan or use some other means to cool the air entering the enclosure to at least 113°F (45°C ) or below.

NOTES-

1-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 1.4.

External View of the V31 and Warning Label Information

The external appearance and component names of the V31 inverter are shown in Fig.1.4.1 (a)

15kw or less Metal Plate Front Cover Digital Operator

Nameplate & Bar Code Label

Warning Information Terminal Cover

V31 Series Logo

(Wall-mounted type, IEC IP 20, NEMA 1)

(IP55 type, NEMA 12)

(b) 18.5kw or higher De-attachable mounting leg Front cover

Lefting holes (4 in total) Digtal operator

Terminal cover

Nameplate & bar code label

(Wall-mounted type, IEC IP 20, NEMA 1)

(IP55 type, NEMA 12)

Fig. 1.4.1 External View of V31 Always review the warning information on the front cover of the Inverter as shown in Fig. 1.4.2 below.

WARNING

Read the manual before installation and operation Do not remove the terminal cover while applying power and wait at least 5 min. after disconnecting power. Securely ground the inverter.

(a) 15KW or less

! WARNING Read the manual before installation and operation Do not remove the terminal cover while applying power and wait at least 10 min. after disconnecting power. Do not insert fingers or anything else into the inverter. Securely ground the inverter.

(b) 18.5KW or higher Fig. 1.4.2 Warning Label

1-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 1.5 Handling of the Product !

â&#x2013;

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover or Front Cover To access the main circuit or the control circuit terminals, proceed as follows: (1) Remove the Cover (a) Inverters of 15KW or Less . Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1)

. Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1. . Press on the sides of the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2. . Lift up on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 3.

. IP55 Type, NEMA 12

1 1

The IP55 type enclosure does not have a terminal cover. To remove the front cover and rubber gasket carefully follow these steps. . Remove the Digital Operator first. . Loosen the screws on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1. . Press on the sides of the front cover in the direction of arrow 2. . Lift up on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 3.

1-6

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (b) Inverter of 18.5KW or Higher. . Wall-mounted Type( IEC IP20, NEMA 1)

. Loosen the screws on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1. . Pullback on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2. . Lift up on the terminal cover.

. IP55 Type, NEMA 12

The IP55 type enclosure does not have a terminal cover. To remove the front cover and rubber gasket carefully follow these steps. . First remove the Digital Operator. . Loosen the screws on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1. . Lift up on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2.

(2) Attaching the terminal cover . Attach the terminal cover by reversing the above removal procedure. . Carefully attach the front cover with rubber gasket for the IP55 type (NAME 12) enclosure.

1-7

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2013;

Removing and Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover To install option cards or change the terminal card, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover.

(1) Removing the Digital Operator and Front Cover (a) Inverter of 15KW or less. .Wall-mounted Type, IEC IP20, NEMA 1

Removing the Digital Operator . Press on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1. . Lift up the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2. . Pull up the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 3. . Disconnect the Digital Operator cable.

Removing the front cover . First remove the terminal cover. . Loosen the screws on the front cover in the direction of arrow 4. . Press on the sides of the front cover in the direction of Arrow 5. . Lift up the front cover in the direction of arrow 6.

1-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x20AC;§ IP55 Type, NEMA 12

Rubber gasket 1 3

4 4

Removing the front cover

Rubber gasket 1

. Loosen the screws on the front cover in the direction of arrow 4. . Take off the front cover in the direction of arrow 4, and insure the rubber gasket 2 does not pull away from the front cover.

4 4

Rubber gasket 2

1-9

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (b) nverter of 18.5KW or more. Wall-mounted Type, IEC IP20, NEMA 1

6 7

5 4

Removing the front cover .Take off the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 4,5. .Loosen the 4 screws on the front cover in the direction of arrow 6. .Take off the front cover in the direction of arrow 7.

1-10

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . IP55 Type, NEMA 12

Rubber gasket 1

Removing the front cover . Loosen the screws on the front cover in the direction of . Take off the front cover in the direction of arrow 5, and

arrow 4. insure

that the rubber gasket 2 does not pull away from the inverter. enclosure.

Rubber gasket 2

(2) Attaching the Front Cover and Digital Operator . Attach the front cover and Digital Operator by reversing the above removal procedures. . For IP55 type (NEMA 12) enclosure, attach the front cover and Digital Operator ensuring that the rubber gaskets 1, 2 are in the proper position.

1-11

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2. ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS 2.1. V31 Basic Connection Diagram The basic connection diagram of V31 is shown in Fig. 2.1.1 The control circuit terminal boards are removable for wiring convenience. Using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by providing only input power and no other connections are necessary. Cooling Fan

E/G

3Ø INDUCTION MOTOR

FWD (RUN / STOP) S1 REV (RUN / STOP) A

S2 External Fault

B S3

JP3

Fault Reset

PG Encoder

Vcc Vss

S4 Multi Speed Ref.1

E(G)

S5 Multi Speed Ref.2

MULTIFUNCTION DIGITAL INPUTS

Jog Command

AO1 Multi-functional Analog Output 1 (0-10V /- 10V +10V)

External B.B. AO1

+24V (250mA)

AO2

JP4 *3 SC

AO2 Multi-functional Analog Output 2 (0-10V /- 10V +10V)

PO1 Multi-functional Pulse Train Output 1 (0-32 KHz, 2K)

PO1

E(G)

PO2

PO2 Multi-functional Pulse Train Output 2 (0-32 KHz, 2K)

CN3 UPS / Battery 48V

GND

DC / DC

R1A Pulse Train input (0 – 32 KHz)

R1B

+12V (20 mA) 2K

Analog input input terminal: (0 -10VDC) / (-10V - +10V)

R1C

AI1

Default: Fault Signal

R2A Analog input input terminal: (0 -10VDC) / (-10V - +10V) (4 – 20 mA) Analog input input terminal: (0 -10VDC) / (-10V - +10V) (4 – 20 mA)

AI2

R3C

SW1-2 R3A

SW1-3 AI3

R3C -12V (20mA) R4A

GND (0V) Motor PTC Thermistor

R4C

MT GND (0V)

NOTES: *1 Shielded Wire *2 Shielded Twisted Wire *3 SC and 24V shorted at factory.

Default: Zero Speed

MULTIFUNCTION RELAY OUTPUTS Dry contacts rated (250 VAC / 30 VDC @ 1A)

Default: Frequency Agree

24V SW1-1 24VG

R(+) ModBus Communications (RS422 / RS485)

Default: Running Signal

+24V Output (250mA max.)

R(-) USB

S(+) S(-)

Mini USB Port

E(G)

Cont.

2-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 1. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors. 2. Connector CN3 connects 48V battery power to provide power to the control board. 3. There is an LED1 on the upper center of the control board. This LED will light or blink to indicate the operating status of the control board. . When power is on, the LED will blink once per second if the control board is normal. . The LED will blink at a rate of 0.2 seconds when the inverter is communicating with any external devices through the RS-422/485 or USB ports. . The LED will be OFF if the control board is abnormal.

2.2. Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized in the following Table 2.2.1 and the recommended terminal tightening torques are shown in Section 2.6. Refer to Section 2.3 for the main circuit diagrams. Table 2.2.1 Main circuit terminals Terminals Symbols

230V class

460V class

7.5 - 30HP

7.5 - 40HP

R/L1,S/L2, T/L3

Main Circuit Input Power Supply

U/T1,V/T2,W/T3

Inverter Output

B1, B2

Braking Resistor connection*1

♁1 ♁2

DC Reactor connection*2

B1, B2,\

( PE)

DC power supply input (DC+, DC-) Braking Unit connection Ground

*1. 460V Class 20HP (15KW) and below, only the braking transistor built-in type (JNV31-口口口口口-B3 口口口 can connect braking resistor directly between terminal B1 and B2. *2. Remove the shorting bar between terminal ♁1 and ♁2 before connecting a DC reactor.

2-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.2.1 Main Circuit Terminal Layouts The following figures show the main terminal layouts for the various horsepowers and frame sizes. The terminal screw sizes are also included.

Terminal Screw Size

Voltage Class

Frame

230V & 460V

7.5 - 10

FR1

Terminal Screw Size

Voltage Class

Frame

230V & 460V

15- 20

FR2

Cont.

2-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

R/L1

S/L2

+ 1

+ 2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Terminal Screw Size

Voltage Class

Frame

230V

25-30

FR3

Fig. 2.2.1(c) V31 Main Terminals

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

+ 1

+ 2

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Terminal Screw Size

Voltage Class

460V

25 -40

Frame

FR3 M8 M10 Fig. 2.2.1(d) V31 Main Terminals

2-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.3 Main Circuit Diagrams

2-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.4 Connections to Peripheral Devices Example of connections between the inverter and peripheral power devices.

B MCC

2-6

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.5 Main Circuit Recommended Wiring Table 2.5.1 below shows the recommended wiring sizes for the main circuit. Be sure to connect MCCBs between the power supply and V31 input terminals L1(R),L2(S), L3(T). Recommended MCCBs are also listed in Table 2.5.1. When a ground fault interrupter is used, select the one that is suitable for high frequency. The current setting should be 200mA or higher and the operating time, 0.1 second or higher to prevent premature tripping. Table 2.5.1 230V and 460V Class Wire Size and MCCB and MC Max. Applicable Motor Output HP(KW) (Note 1)

230V

460V

7.5 (5.5) 10 (7.5) 15 (11) 20 (15) 25 (18.5) 30 (22) 7.5 (5.5) 10 (7.5) 15 (11) 20 (15) 25 (18.5) 30 (22) 40 (30)

Cable Size-mm2 (AWG)

Power Cable (Note 2) 8.4 (8) 8.4 (8) 13.3 (6) 21.2 (4) 21.2(4) 33.6 (2) 3.3-5.3 (12-10) 5.3 (10) 8.4-13.3 (8-6) 13.3 (6) 13.3 (6) 13.3 (6) 21.2 (4)

Ground Cable E 8.4 (8) 8.4 (8) 8.4 (8) 8.4 (8) 13.3 (6) 21.2 (4) 3.3-5.3 (12-10) 5.3 (10) 8.4 (8) 8.4 (8) 8.4 (8) 8.4 (8) 13.3 (6)

Molded-case Circuit Breaker (Note 3)

Magnetic Contactor (Note 3)

T0-100S(50A) T0-100S(60A) T0-100S(100A) T0-100S(100A) T0-225S(150A) T0-225S(175A) T0-50EC(20A) T0-50EC(30A) T0-50EC(30A) T0-100S(50A) T0-100S(75A) T0-100S(100A) T0-100S(100A)

CN-18 CN-25 CN-50 CN-65 CN-80 CN-100 CN-18 CN-25 CN-25 CN-35 CN-50 CN-50 CN-65

Notes – 1. For a constant torque load 2. Power cable include cables to the terminals L1(R), L2(S), L3(T), \, ♁1, ♁2, T1(U), T2(V), T3(W), B1, B2. (Use 600V vinyl power cables) 3. The Molded-Case Circuit breaker and magnetic contactors shown in table are TECO products and are for reference only. Other manufactures’ equivalent products may be selected.

■ Main Circuit Input / Output (1) Phase rotation of input terminals L1(R), L2(S), L3(T) can be in either direction. (Clockwise or counter clockwise). (2) When inverter output terminals, T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W) are connected to motor terminals T1(U), T2(V) and T3(W) respectively, the motor rotates clockwise as viewed from the shaft end, with a forward operation command input. To reverse the rotation, swap any two of the motor leads. (3) Never connect AC main circuit power supply to output terminals, T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W). This can cause damage to the inverter. (4) Care should be taken to prevent the wiring leads from contacting the V31 cabinet. If this occurs, a short -circuit can result. (5) Never connect power factor correction capacitors or noise filters to the V31 output. (6) Never open or close contactors in the output circuit unless inverter is properly sized. (7) Do not start or stop the inverter by turning the main power switch ON or OFF. Use the control circuit terminals or Digital Operator to start or stop the inverter.

2-7

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual !

■ Installing a Magnetic Contactor (MC) The input power supply can be connected in any phase sequence to the input terminals L1(R), L2(S), and L3(T) is not critical. If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during operation, a magnetic contactor (MC) can be used. (Refer to the Fig. 2.5.1 for the main circuits wiring) (1) The inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the MC on the primary side. Frequent opening and closing the MC, however, may cause the inverter to be damaged. (Limit the starting and stopping of the inverter via the MC to once every 30 minutes). (2) When the inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption. (3) To decrease electrical noise interference, add a R-C surge suppressor (snubber) (R:10Ω/W, C:0.1uf/1000Vdc), at the two terminals of coils of the magnetic contactor. V31 Inverter Power Supply

MCCB

AC Fuses R/L1

S/L2 T/L3 *1

R1B

230V class: 7.5 to 30HP, 200 to 240Vac 50/60Hz, 3 phase 460V class: 7.5 to 40HP, 380 to 480Vac 50/60Hz, 3 phase

OFF

MC *1. For 460V class inverters, connect a 460/220V transformer

R1C

R-C Snubber

■ Installing AC Fuses Fuses are principally used to isolate a catastrophic failure within the inverter (e.g. IGBT shorted) or more likely, a short circuit between the mains-to-inverter cables. For the entire v31 models have a standard built-in DC fuse to isolate the short-circuit inside the inverter. Separate AC fuses provided by the end user are required to protect models without built-in fuses. Refer to Chapter 12.5 for the recommended AC fuses. Fuses from other manufactures’ can be used provided they meet the requirements covered in Chapter 12.5.

WARNING

. Do not remove the AC fuses when the inverter is running. . Check to ensure that there are no obvious short circuits or overloads in the protected circuit when the fuse is blown. Extensive damage can be caused to both electronic equipment and associated electrical equipment by replacing fuses or resetting circuit breakers without correcting the problem.

2-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual !

■ Installing a Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Always connect the power input terminals L1(R), L2(S) and L3(T) to the power supply using a molded-case circuit breaker with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter’s rated current. For the MCCB’s time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter’s overload protection (150%, 1 minute). If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the power supply will be turned off by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.5.1. ■ Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter(GFI) On the inverter primary side, when a ground fault interrupter (or ELCB: Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker) is used, select one with a fault current detection of 200mA or more per inverter, and with an operating time of 0.1sec or more. For a special-purpose ground fault interrupter, select one with a fault current detection of 30mA per inverter. In this case, the RFI jumper connector for the IT mains shown in Fig. 2.5.2 must be placed to the OFF position to reduce the earth leakage currents. (Note that the EMC performance will be reduced, when the RFI connector is opened)

Fig. 2.5.2 Earth Leakage Current ■ RFI Jumper for IT Mains By placing the RFI Jumper to the OFF position removes the Y capacitor on IT main supplies. (Refer to fig 2.5.3 for the RFI jumper connection location) Cont.

2-9

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

(a) 7.5KW or less

(b) 15KW

(b) 18.5KW or more

Fig. 2.5.3 RFI Connections ■ Driving a 440V Motor If the wiring length between inverter and motor is excessively long, the insulation of the motor that is driven with a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) type inverter, may be deteriorate do to the high dv/dt voltage generated by PWM. This is especially true for 440V class motors, so any of the following measures should be taken when operating a 440V class motor. (1) Use a motor with reinforced insulation (the TECO’s inverter duty motors have reinforced insulation). (2) The wiring between the motor and inverter should be as short as possible (less than 10m). (3) Connect an optional sinusoidial filter to the inverter output terminals (Refer to Chapter 12.4). ■ Grounding ( PE: Protective Earth ) (1) The inverter grounding terminals PE ( ), must be grounded to ensure your safety and to minimize Electrical noise. Table 2.5.2 is the technical standard for the grounding of electric equipment having metal frames to prevent electric shock and fire. Table 2.5.2 Grounding Resistance Voltage class

Grounding work class

Grounding resistance

230V

Type D

100Ω or less

460V

Type C

10Ω or less

(2) Never connect the ground of the V31 in common with welding machines, motors, and other large-current electrical equipment. Run the ground lead for the V31 in separate conduit from leads for large-current electrical equipment. (3) Use the ground leads which comply with AWG standards and make sure the length is as short as possible. (4) Where several V31 units are used side by side, it is preferable to ground each unit separately, Fig. 2.5.4 (a). However, connecting all the ground terminals of V31 in parallel while grounding only one of the V31 to the ground pole is also permissible, Fig.2.5.4 (b). Do not to form a loop with the ground leads, Fig. 2.5.4 (c).

Fig 2.5.4 Example of Grounding of Three V31 Units

2-10

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Braking Resistor Connecting Terminals There is a braking transistor built-in as standard for 230V/460V, 20HP (and below). A braking transistor can be optionally built in for 460V, 25HP (and above) (select the models: JNV31-4 口口口口-B3 口口). A braking resistor (unit) can be connected to the braking resistor terminals B1 and B2 directly for those models. Refer to Fig 2.5.5. Keep the wiring length of braking resistor to less than 5m, and the two leads should be twisted.

Fig. 2.5.5 Braking Resistor Connecting Diagram

(1) When a braking transistor is required for 230V, 25HP (and above) or 460V, 25 to 40HP without a braking transistor built-in (Models: JNV31- 2 口口口口-H3 口口口 , JNV31- 4 口口口口-H3 口口口), a braking unit should be used. Overheat Protection

Braking Resistor

Braking Unit

Fig. 2.5.6 Braking Unit Connecting Diagram

CAUTION

. Arrange the braking resistor and/or braking unit layout so that the wiring length will not exceed 5 m. Also the two leads should be twisted. . Since the externally mounted braking resistor generates heat during dynamic braking, install on a noncombustible surface in a location away from other equipment.

2-11

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.6 Main Circuit Terminal Screws and Tightening Torque

Voltage (V)

230V

460V

Inverter Capacity (HP) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3 U/T1,V/T2,W/T3 Tightening Terminal Torque Screws (Nm) M4 1.76 M4 1.76 M6 2.94 M6 2.94 M8 6.47 M8 6.47 M4 1.76 M4 1.76 M6 2.94 M6 2.94 M6 2.94 M6 2.94 M6 2.94

\, ♁1, ♁2 Terminal Screws M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M8 M4 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6

Tightening Torque (Nm) 1.76 1.76 2.94 2.94 6.47 6.47 1.76 1.76 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94

B1, B2 Terminal Screws M4 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M4 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6

Tightening Torque (Nm) 1.76 1.76 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94 1.76 1.76 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94

Terminal Screws M4 M4 M6 M6 M8 M8 M4 M4 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6

) Tightening Torque (Nm) 1.76 1.76 2.94 2.94 6.47 6.47 1.76 1.76 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94

2.7 Cable Entry Stepped Collar Table 2.7.1 Cable Entry Voltage 230V

460V

Inverter Capacity﹐HP 7.5 - 10 15 - 20 25 - 30 7.5 - 10 15 - 20 25 - 40

Frame FR 1 FR 2 FR 3 FR 1 FR 2 FR 3

Cable Entry Reference Figure (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c)

Notes

. For cable entry, simply cut off at the required level to match the cable diameter. IP 55 protection category with careful cable entry. Cont.

2-12

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (a) FR1 (230 / 460V: 7.5 – 10 HP)

(b) FR2 (230 / 460V: 15 – 20 HP)

NOTES

2-13

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.8 Control Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals (TER-001) are shown in Table 2.8.1.

Table 2.8.1 Control circuit terminals Type

Termi -nal

Signal Name

Multi-function Digital input 1 Multi-function Digital input 2 Multi-function Digital input 3 Multi-function Digital input 4 Multi-function Digital input 5 Multi-function Digital input 6 Multi-function Digital input 7 Multi-function Digital input 8 Digital nput common

24V

+24V Power output

Digital input common +24V power supply (with short circuit protection).

24VG

+24V Ground (OV)

+24V ground (0V)

S2 S3 Digital input signals

S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

24V Power Supply

Analog input signals

Signal level

Factory setting : Forward Run/Stop Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF Factory setting : Reverse Run/Stop Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF Factory setting : External fault when ON Factory setting : Fault reset when ON Factory setting : Multi-step speed reference 1 effective when ON Factory setting : Multi-step speed reference 2 effective when ON Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when ON

24 VDC, 8 mA photo coupled isolation (30 Vdc max., 9.03kΩ input resistance)

Factory setting: External baseblock when ON See Sec. 2.9 ±15%, 250 mA max (all boards total)

+12V +12V power output

+12V power supply for analog reference (with short circuit protection)

+12V (max.current, 20mA)

-12V

-12V power supply for analog reference (with short circuit protection) 0 to +10V / 100% -10V to +10V / -100% to +100% (applicable potentiometer : 1KΩ to 10KΩ (typical: 2KΩ))

-12V (max.current, 20mA) 0 to +10V, -10V to +10V (input resistance: 2MΩ) (11bit + 1 sign Resolution)

-12V power output

AI1

Master speed frequency reference

AI2

Multi-function analog input

0 to +10V / 100% -10V to +10V / -100% to +100% 4 to 20 mA / 100% Factory setting: added to terminal AI1(G1205=12)

AI3

Multi-function analog input

0 to +10V / 100% -10V to +10V / -100% to +100% 4 to 20 mA / 100% Factory setting: Aux. freq. reference (G1209=0)

Analog reference common

----

Shielded wire, optional ground connection point

----

GND

E (G) Earth Ground

Multi-function Analog Output 1

0 to +10V / 100% -10V to +10V / -100% to +100% Factory setting: output frequency, 0 - 10V (G13-02=2)

AO2

Multi-function Analog Output 2

0 to +10V / 100% -10V to +10V / -100% to +100% Factory setting: output current, 0 - 10V (G1306=3)

GND

Analog reference common

AO1 Analog output signals

Function

2-14

0 to +10V, -10V to +10V (input resistance:2MΩ) 4 to 20 mA (input resistance: 250Ω) (11 bit + 1 sign resolution)

0 to 10V, -10V to +10V (max.current:2mA) 4 to 20 mA (load resistance:900Ω or less) (16 bit resolution)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Pulse Output Signals

Pulse Input Signals

PG input signals

PO1

Multi-function Pulse Train Output 1

P02

Multi-function Pulse Train Output 2

GND

Analog reference common

PI GND

Multi-function Pulse train Input Analog reference common

B phase pulse input

VCC VSS

Power supply for PG (+5V or +12V) GND (0V)

Power supply for PG +5V or +12V selected by JP3

E (G)

Earth Ground

Shield connection terminal

Multi-function contact output 1

Function set by G11-01. R1A-R1C: Closed during fault condition R1B-R1C: Open during fault condition

Default: fault signal

R2A-R2C Multi-function contact output 2

Multi-function digit output. Function set by G11-02. Closed during running.

Default: running signal

R3A-R3C Multi-function contact output 3

Multi-function digit output. Function set by G11-03. Closed during zero speed

Default: zero speed

R4A-R4C Multi-function contact output 4

Multi-function digit output. Function set by G11-04. Closed during inverter ready

Default: inverter ready

MT GND

R (-) S (+) S (-) E (G) USB

5VDC/12VDC ±5% 200mA max. ----

Motor temperature sensor input Analog common

Motor temperature sensor input (PTC thermistor) 0V

MODBUS communications input

. When using 2-wire RS-485 communications, connect R (+) to S (+) , and R (-) to S (). . Set the terminating resistor by setting the dip switch SW1-1 for the last Inverter only.

MODBUS communications output Earth Ground USB communications port

L: 0.0 to 0.5V H: 4.0 to 13.2V 0-32 KHz (resistance: 3.89 KΩ) A/B phase input, open-collector or complementary interface Maximum frequency : 100KHz) With internal +5V/+12V power supply for PG

R (+)

USB port

0V A phase pulse input

R1C

RS-422/ 485 Port

Pulse input frequency reference. (duty cycle 30% to 70 %) Factory Setting: Frequency reference (G14-01=0 )

A phase pulse input

R1B

PTC Thermistor Input

R1A

Relay output

Pulse train output 1 Factory setting: output frequency (G1406=2) 0 to 32 KHz Pulse train output 2 +5V output Factory setting: PG A-phase pulse monitor (load: 2.2kΩ) output (G14-08=7)

Form C Dry contacts capacity: 1A max. at 250Vac 1A max. at 30Vdc

Form A Dry contacts capacity: 1A max. at 250Vac 1A max. at 30Vdc

Active: 1330Ω return: 550Ω Photo isolation, differential input Photo isolation, differential input

Shield connection terminal

----

Mini USB ports (connection to a PC)

----

2-15

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.9. Control Terminal Layout

The following Fig. 2.9.1 shows the Control board layout for the V31 Inverter.

Notes 1. Digital input signals S1 to S8 can operate in the Sink (NPN) mode where (SC = 0V) is common or Source (PNP) mode where (SC = +24V Factory default) is common and is selected by jumper JP4. An external 24V power supply can also be used. (Refer to table 2.8.1) 2. The output current capacity of the 24V terminal is 250mA max. This is inclusive of all boards, the VCC power supply and when used as external power back-up for the control unit. 4. The output current capacity of the +12V and -12V power supply is 20mA max.. 5. Dip switch SW1-2 sets analog input terminal AI2 for voltage (V position) or current (I position factorydefault). 6. Dip switch SW1-3 sets analog input terminal AI3 for a voltage (V position factory default) or current (I position) 7. The internal resistance of the analog inputs AI1, AI2 and AI3 is 2MΩ for voltage signals, and 250Ω for current signal. 8. Dip switch SW1-1 in the ON position internally connects a 110Ω terminating resistor to the RS-422 /RS-485 communication input terminals R(+), R(-). The resistor is disconnected in the OFF position which is the factory default. 9. The PG (Encoder) interface is built-in as standard, and no external PG feedback option card is required. The PG interface is designed for open-collector inputs. Shield twisted-pair cable less than 100 meters in length should be used between the inverter and the PG. The PG circuit wiring (terminals A, B, VCC, VSS) is not required for operation without a PG. The direction of rotation of the PG can be set by parameter G31-10 (PG Rotation Direction), and the factory preset phase-A leads phase-B by 90° when the motor operates in the forward direction (CCW). PG phase-A and phase-B pulses can be monitored by using the pulse output terminals PO1 and PO2 (Set G14-6 to 9). For a single A/B line driver encoder feedback interface, please select optional terminal card TER-002. (Refer to Chapter 10.4) 10. Depending on the PG input voltage rating, place the shorting jumper of JP3 to the +5V (factory default) or +12 position to supply power to the PG. The internal +5V/+12V power supply capacity is 200mA. If the PG power requirements are greater than 200mA, a separate power supply is required. (Refer to Chapter 10.5). 11.Pulse input specifications are given in Table 2.9.1. Table 2.9.1 Pulse input specifications Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.5V High level voltage

4.0 to 13.5V

Duty cycle (ON/OFF)

30% to 70%

Pulse frequency

0 to 32 KHz

2-16

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.10. Sink / Source Mode

The common for the Multi-function Digital Input terminals can be selected for SINK (NPN) or SOURCE (PNP) mode by placement of the jumper JP4. An external power supply can also be connected. (Refer to Table 2.10.1) Table 2.10.1 Sinking / Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Supply

External Power Supply

Sink Mode

Source Mode

NOTES-

2-17

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2.11. Removing and Mounting the Terminal Cards The V31 has two different removable control circuit terminal cards referenced in Table 2.11.1. The terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring. Table 2.11.1 Removable Terminal Cards Model (Code No.)

Features Number of terminals: 42 Digital input: Multi-functional Sink/Source Analog input: Multi-functional Analog output : Multi-functional

Pulse output: Multi – functional TER-001 Pulse input: Multi-functional ( ) Relay output : Multi-functional RS-485 Port : R(+), R(-), S(+), S(-) USB port : mini USB port +24V power output PTC thermistor input PG input Number of terminals: 44 Digital input: same as TER-001 Analog input: same as TER-001 Analog output: same as TER-001 Pulse output: same as TER-001 Pulse input: same as TER-001 TER-002 Relay output: same as TER-001 ( ) RS-422/485 port: same as TER-001 USB port: same as TER-001 +24V power: same as TER-001 PTC thermistor input PG input

Signal level

Notes

-Pitch:5.08mm, 300V/13.5A Wire range: 0.82mm2, M2.5 screw -24VDC, 8mA, photo-couple isolation -24V power output (250mA max) -AI1: 0 - 10V / -10V- 10V -AI2: 0 - 10V /-10V - 10V /4 - 20mA -AI3: 0 - 10V /-10V - 10V /4 - 20mA - +12V, -12V power output (20mA max) -AO1: 0 - 10V /- 10V -10V /4 - 20mA -AO2: 0 - 10V /- 10V -10V /4 - 20mA .Factory standard -PO1: 0 - 32KHz, +5V output . Reference connection -PO2: 0 - 32KHz, +5V output diagram: Fig.2.1.1 -0 - 32KHz, H = 4.0 to 13.2V . Reference figure: Fig. -1A max. at 250 Vac 2.11.1(a) -1A max. at 30 Vdc -MODBUS RS-422/RS-485 Communication. -Mini USB port (connecting to PC) -+24V ± 15% / max. @ 250mA. Active: 1330Ω, Return: 550Ω -A/B phase input, open-collector or complementary interface -Maximum frequency : 100KHz) -With internal +5V/+12V power supply for PG Same as TER-001 Same as TER-001 Same as TER-001 Same as TER-001 Same as TER-001 . Optional Same as TER-001 . Reference connection Same as TER-001 diagram: Fig.10.4.1 Same as TER-001 . Reference figure: Fig. Same as TER-001 2.11.1(b) Same as TER-001 Same as TER-001 -A/B phase input line-driver interface -Maximum frequency : 300KHz -With internal +5V/+12V power supply for PG

! Always confirm that input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the terminal card.

2-18

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Removing the Terminal Card (1) Depending on the model remove the terminal cover on the Inverter or remove the LCD Digital Operator and front cover from the inverter. (2) Remove the green wire connected to “E” on the terminal card. (3) Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card. (4) Using caution Pull-up and unplug the terminal card from connector CN5 on the control board in the direction of the arrow. Mounting the Terminal Card (1) Confirm that the terminal card and the control PCB are properly aligned at connector CN5 and using caution insert the card. (2) Reverse the removal procedure to complete the mounting of the terminal card.

(a)

Terminal Card TER-001 (factory standard)

(b) Terminal Card TER-002 (optional) Fig 2.11.1 Terminal Card Removal Procedure

Control Circuit Wiring Connections Use the following procedure to connect wires to the control circuit terminal block. . Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slotted screwdriver. . Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block. . Tighten the terminal screws firmly.

2-19

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Control Circuit Wiring Layout (1) All signal leads must be separated from the main circuit leads L1(R), L2(S), L3(T), \, ♁1, ♁2, T1(U), T2(V), T3(W), B1, B2 and other power cables to prevent erroneous operation caused by electrical noise interference. (2) Output relay contact leads (R1A-R1B-R1C, R2A-R2C, R3A-R3C, R4A-R4C), must be separated from other control circuit leads. (3) Use shielded or twisted pair shielded control wiring and connect the shield to the inverter terminal E end only to prevent erratic operation caused by electrical noise. (Refer to Fig.2.11.3) The wiring distance should be less than 164ft (50m). Wrap with insulating Tape

Twisted Pair

Shield

Ground Shield at this end

Ground Shield at Inverter end

Fig 2.11.3 Control Cable

NOTES-

2-20

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 3.

TEST OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

3.1. Test Operation To insure safety prior to test operation, disconnect the motor from the load. If an operation must be performed with the motor connected to the load, use extreme caution to avoid any possible hazardous condition. 3.1.1. Check Before Test Operation Perform the following checks before test operation. (1) Check that the inverter is correctly wired. Most importantly, the inverter output terminals T1(U), T2(V) and T3(W) should not be connected to a power source, and the ground terminals should be correctly secured. (2) Check that the motor is disconnected from the load. (3) Check for possible short circuits or grounds. (4) Check for loose terminals, connectors and screws (5) Set all of the inverter control circuit terminals to OFF so that the inverter will not start when power is applied. 3.1.2. Power ON and Display Status . Check that the input power supply voltage is correct and then apply power. 230V Class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC , 50/60Hz 460V Class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC , 50/60Hz . After powering-up the inverter, the Digital Operatorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s display should read as follows:

. If the Digital Operatorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s display reads other than shown, a fault message will be displayed. To determine the cause of the fault, refer to chapter 9 FAULT MESSAGE AND TROUBLE SHOOTING.

3-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 3.2.

Maintenance

3.2.1 Periodic Inspection The V31 Inverter requires very few routine checks. It will provide trouble free operation longer if it is kept clean, cool and dry. Observe the precautions listed in “Location”. Check for loose electrical connections, parts discoloration or other signs of overheating. Use Table 3.2.1 as an inspection guide. Before servicing, turn OFF the AC input power and be sure that CHARGE lamp is OFF. Table 3.2.1 Periodic Inspection Check

Component External terminals, unit mounting bolts, connectors, etc.

Loose screws

Tighten

Loose connectors

Cooling fins

Build-up of dust and dirt

Printed circuit board

Accumulation of conductive dust or oil

Tighten Blow with dry compressed air of 39.2x104 to 58.8x104 pa (57 to 85psi.) pressure. Blow with dry compressed air of 39.2x104 to 58.8x104 pa (57 to 85psi.) pressure. If dust and oil cannot be removed, replace the board.

Cooling fan

Abnormal noise and vibration. Whether the cumulative operation time exceeds 20,000 hours or not. (Check the cooling fan operating time by U1-35)

Power elements

Accumulation of dust and dirt

Main DC capacitor(s) Discoloration or odor Note- Operating conditions as follows: . Ambient temperature: Yearly average 30°C, 86°F . Load factor: 80% or less . Operating time: 12 hours or less per day

Corrective Action

Replace the cooling fan.

Blow with dry compressed air of 39.2 x104 to 58.8x104 pa (57 to 85psi.) pressure. Replace the capacitor or inverter unit.

Table 3.2.2 Standard Parts Replacement Replacement Cycle Remarks 2 or 3 years Replace with a new product Replace with a new product. (Determine DC Main capacitor(s) 5 years after examination) Circuit Breakers and relays Determine after examination. － Fuse 10 years Replace with a new product. Aluminum capacitor on PC Replace with a new product. (Determine 5 years board after examination) Note-Operating conditions as follows: . Ambient temperature: Yearly average 30°C, 86°F . Load factor: 80% or less . Operating time: 20 hours or less per day Item Name Cooling fan

3-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 3.2.2 Spare Parts As insurance against costly downtime, it is strongly recommended that spare parts be kept on hand in accordance with the table below. When ordering spare parts, please specify to your local distributor or TECO representative the following informationďź&#x161;Part Name, Part Code No. and quantity. Table 3.2.3 Spare Parts for 230V class Inverter & Part Name HP Spec 7.5

Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty

Control Board

Terminal Board

Power Board

Main Circuit Rectifier

Main Circuit IGBT

Main Cooling Fan

DC Fuse

7MBR50SB060-50

PMD2408PTB1-A

BS88-50

1 7MBR75U2B060-50

2 PMD2408PMB1-A

1 BS88-63

SKKH57/16E

1 CM100RL-12NF

2 PMD2408PMB1-A

1 BS88-120

3 SKKH57/16E

1 CM150RL-12NF

2 PMD2408PMB1-A

1 BS88-120

3 SKKH72/16E

1 CM200DY-12NF

2 PMD2409PMB1-A

1 A50Q150-4L

3 SKKH106/16E

3 CM200DY-12NF

2 PMD2409PMB1-A

1 A50Q150-4A

Table 3.2.4 Spare Parts for 460V class Inverter & Part Name HP Spec 7.5

Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty Model Code Qty

Control Board

Termina l Board

Power Board

Main Circuit Rectifier

Main Circuit IGBT

Cooling Fan (Main)

DC Fuse

7MBR50UB120-50

PMD2408PTB1-A

BS88-35

1 7MBR50UB120-50

2 PMD2408PMB1-A

1 BS88-40

SKKH57/16E

1 CM75RL-24NF

2 PMD2408PMB1-A

1 BS88-50

1 SKKH57/16E

1 CM100RL-24NF

2 PMD2408PMB1-A

1 BS88-63

1 SKKH42/16E

1 CM100DY-24A

2 PMD2409PMB1-A

1 A50Q100-4

3 SKKH42/16E

3 CM150DY-24A

2 PMD2409PMB1-A

1 A50Q100-4

3 SKKH72/16E

3 CM150DY-24A

2 PMD2409PMB1-A

1 A50Q150-4

3-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 4.

SPECIFICATIONS 4.1. Standard Specifications ■ Basic Specifications Table 4.1.1

VT Mode*7

Output Ratings

CT Mode*7

MODEL Number JNV31-2□□□□-xxxxx Max. Applicable Motor Output HP (KW)*2 Rated Output Capacity (KVA) Rated Output Current (A)*8 Overload Capacity Carrier Frequency (KHz) Max. output frequency Max. Applicable Motor Output HP (KW)*2 Rated Output Current (A) Overload Capacity

230V Class Basic Specifications

0024

0032

0048

0064

0080

0096

7.5 (5.5)

10 (7.5)

15 (11)

20 (15)

25 (18.5)

30 (22)

9.1

150% of rated output current for 1 minute(200%, 2 sec) 8(14)*1

8 (12) *1 400.00Hz

10 (7.5)

15 (11)

20 (15)

25 (18.5)

30 (22)

40 (30)

111

120% of rated output current for 1 minute

Carrier Frequency (KHz)

6(12)*1

6 (10) *1

Max. Output Frequency Power Supply Characteristics

6(10)*1

4(8)*1

120.00Hz

Rated Voltage. Frequency

3 – phase, 200 - 240V / 50,60HZ

Allowable Voltage Fluctuation

+10%, -15%

Allowable Frequency Fluctuation

± 5%

Rated Input Current*3

CT Mode

106

VT Mode

123

Measures for Power Supply Harmonics

DCL (Built-in)*4

EMC

Noise Filter (External Optional)*6

Enclosure

IEC IP20 (NEMA 1) and IEC IP55 (NEMA12)

4-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 4.1.2

Power Supply Characteristics

VT Mode*7

Output Ratings

CT Mode*7

MODEL Number JNV31-4□□□□-xxxxx Max. Applicable Motor Output HP (KW)*2 Rated Output Capacity (KVA) Rated Output Current (A)*8 Overload Capacity Carrier Frequency (KHz) Max. output frequency Max. Applicable Motor Output HP (KW)*2 Rated Output Current (A) Overload Capacity Carrier Frequency (KHz) Max. Output Frequency Rated Voltage. Frequency Allowable Voltage Fluctuation Allowable Frequency Fluctuation CT Rated Input Mode Current *3 VT Mode Measures for Power Supply Harmonics

460V Class Basic Specifications

0014

0018

0027

0032

0040

0050

0065

7.5 (5.5)

10 (7.5)

15 (11)

20 (15)

25 (18.5)

30 (22)

40 (30)

10.7

150% of rated output current for 1 minute(200% 2 sec) 8(14)*1

8 (12)*1

6(10)*1

400.00Hz 10 (7.5)

15 (11)

20 (15)

25 (18.5)

30 (22)

40 (30)

50 (37)

22.7

120% of rated output current for 1 minute 6(12)

6(10)*1

4(8)*1

120.00Hz 3 – phase, 380 - 480V / 50,60HZ +10%, -15% ± 5% 17

DCL (Built-in)*4

EMC

Noise Filter (Built-in Optional) *5

Enclosure

IEC IP20 ( NEMA 1 ) and IEC IP55 (NEMA12)

*1. The maximum selectable carrier frequency (Refer to the de-rating guideline in Chapter11). *2. The maximum motor output based on TECO’s standard 4 poles motor. *3. The value is calculated. *4. There is a DC reactor built-in for 18.5kW and above, 15kW and below is optional. *5. The RFI noise filter is internally built-in for the type (JNV31-4□□□□-□3F□□) *6. The noise filter is external option. *7. Use the parameter G02-08 (CT/VT mode selection) to switch between the CT and VT mode. *8. Designed and tested to meet the maximum continuous output current of up to 112% of rated current for the CT mode. (i.e. the S.F=1.12)

4-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Common Characteristics . Perform rotational Auto-tuning to obtain the performance specification given below. . For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment meets the required specifications

Operation Mode

CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS

Control Method

Table 4.1.3 Common Characteristics Graphic LCD display (multi-language, waveform display available) .Sinusoidal PWM (with Soft PWM) .Control modes (selected by parameter settings) − V/F control − V/F+PG control (PG interface built-in as standard) − Sensorless Vector Control (with Auto-Tuning)*3 − Flux Vector Control (PG interface built-in as standard)*4

Starting Torque

. V/F Control : 150% at 3 Hz . Sensorless Vector Control : 200% at 0.6 Hz . Flux Vector Control : 200% at 0 Hz

Speed Control Range

. V/F Control : 1:40 . Sensorless Vector Control : 1:100 . Flux Vector Control : 1:1000

Speed Control Response

. 10Hz (Sensorless Vector) . 30Hz (Flux Vector)

Speed Control Accuracy

. ± 0.5% (Sensorless Vector Control, 25°C ± 10°C) ± 0.1% (Flux Vector Control, 25°C ± 10°C)

Torque Limits

Provided for Sensorless Vector Control and Flux Vector control (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant setting)

Torque Accuracy Frequency Control Range Frequency Accuracy Frequency setting resolution Output Frequency resolution Frequency setting signal Overload capacity / maximum current Acceleration / Deceleration time Braking Torque

Main Control Functions

± 5% 0.01 to 400.00 Hz*3*4 Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to 45°C) Analog references: ± 0.1% (25°C to 10°C) Digital references: 0.01 Hz Analog references: 0.06 Hz/60Hz (11 bit with sign) 0.01Hz 0 - 10V, -10V - +10V, 4 - 20mA, Pulse train Dual Rating: CT mode – 150% of rated output current for 1 minute.(200%,2 sec) VT mode – 120% of rated output current for 1 minute. 0.1sec to 6000.0sec (4 selectable combinations of acceleration and deceleration times set independently) Approx. 20% (over 100% when using braking resistor) Inverter of 20HP(15kw) and below have an built-in braking transistor, 25HP(18.5kw) and above have an built-in option. Bi-directional Speed searches, restarting for momentary power loss, over-torque detection, under-torque detection, torque limits, 17-speed control (max.), S-curve, accel/decel time changes, 3-wire sequence, dwell function, cooling fan ON/OFF control, auto tuning (rotational and stationary), slip compensation, torque compensation, jump freq., PID control ( with sleep/wake-up function), auto energy saving control, fault reset, copy function, droop control, speed/torque control switching, PG interface built-in, zero servo, OV protection control, RTC function, Help key function…etc. Cont.

4-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 4.1.3 Common Characteristics (Continued) Motor overload protection (OL1) Motor Pre-overheat / overheat Protection (OH3/OH4) Instantaneous overcurrent protection (OC) Short Circuit protection (SC) Inverter overload protection (OL2)

Protective Functions

Over Voltage (OV) Under Voltage (UV) Ground Fault (GF) Input phase loss (IPL) Output phase loss (OPL) Momentary power loss Cooling fin pre-overheat / Overheat (OH/OH1) Semiconductor thermal protection (OH5) Motor stall prevention

Environmental Conditions

Overtorque / Undertorque Protection (OT/UT) Charge indicator Location Ambient operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Altitude Vibration Enclosure Class

EMC

Immunity

Safety

Emissions

─ Communication port

UL recognized electronic thermal overload relay ( i2 t ) Motor PTC thermistor (active: 1330Ω, return: 550Ω) Limits at approx. 260% of rated output current Baseblock at approx. 500% of rated output current CT mode: 1.5 × rated output current (1 min. / 10 min.) VT mode: 1.2 × rated output current (1 min. / 10 min.) 230V class: motor coasts to stop if the DC voltage exceeds 410 VDC. 460V class: motor coasts to stop if the DC voltage exceeds 820 VDC. 230V class: motor coasts to stop if the DC voltage drops to 190 VDC or below 460V class: motor coasts to stop if the DC voltage drops to 380 VDC or below phase–to–ground on drive output (In case of ground fault in motor or motor cable, only the inverter is protected) Trips if any input phase is missing Trips if any output phase is missing Stops for 15ms or more at full load (operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 sec. by selecting the momentary power loss method) Protection by thermistor Baseblock when power components are too hot for safe operation Stall prevention at acceleration / deceleration and constant speed operation Trips if the motor loses its load Charge LED stays on until DC bus voltage drops below approx. 50V Indoor (protected from corrosive gases and dust) -10°C (no frost) to +50°C *2 (+14°F to +122°F) -25°C to +65°C (-13°F to +149°F) 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing or dripping water (Conforming to IEC 600068-2-3) 100% load capacity (no de-rating) up to 1000m (1% de-rating for each 100m above 1000m; max. 3000m) Max. acceleration amplitude 0.5G (5 m/s2) at 9 to 200Hz Displacement amplitude 1.5mm (peak) at 2 to 9Hz water (Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3-3M3) IP20 (NEMA 1) standard in entire KW/HP range (Conforming to EN60529(1991),IEC60664-1(1992)) Meets all EMC immunity requirements .1 to 20HP: EN61800 –3 (1996) + A11(2000) (1st environment, non-restricted use) . 25 to 60HP: EN61800 -3 (1996) + A11(2000) (1st environment, restricted use) . 75 to 400HP: EN61800 –3 (1996) + A11(2000) (2 nd environment) UL508C , (C22.2-/4, B44.1 for 230V 40HP and below, 460V 75HP and below) RS-232C, RS-422/485, USB

4-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual *1. Braking transistor built-in ( JNV31-□□□□□-B3□□□). *2. The max ambient temperature without de-rating is 45°C. At higher temperatures (up to +50°C) the de-rating is 1%/1°C. *3. The maximum output frequency of sensorless vector control mode is 60Hz. Do not use sensorless vector control mode for elevating machines. *4. The maximum output frequency of flux vector control mode is 120Hz. The V31 Inverters are designed for CT, Constant Torque (150% overload capability, 1min/10min) or VT, Variable torque (120% overload capability, 1min/10min).The rated currents in a given ambient operating temperature are achieved only when the carrier frequency is equal to or less than the factory default. Refer to Chapter 11 for the de-rating guidelines if the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting or the ambient operating temperature is higher than 45°C. *1. Constant Torque Rating:

For constant torque rated output RMS current (FLACT), 150% overload is allowed for one minute every ten minutes throughout whole speed range, The inverter output RMS current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage. To achieve the applicable motor shaft power given in the tables, the inverter rated output RMS current must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current. The applicable motor shaft power ratings are based on TECO, IEC, 4-pole motors. For other motors, refer to the motor nameplate current rating. *2. Variable Torque Rating:

For variable torque rated output RMS current (FLAVT), 120% overload is allowed for one minute every ten minutes throughout the whole speed range.

4.2 Dimensions and Weights The following Tables 4.2.1 (A), and (B) show the dimensions and weights for the various enclosures. The weights are estimates and apply to units with basic options. Table 4.2.1 (A) Dimensions and Weights for IP20(NEMA 1) Enclosure Inverter Voltage capacity Frame W (HP) 7.5 FR1 230 10 15 230V FR2 265 20 25 FR3 224 30 7.5 FR1 230 10 15 FR2 265 480V 20 25 FR3 224 30 40

IP20 type (NEMA1), mm H

320

210

305

(a)

396

227

249

380

(a)

527

311

180

505

2.3

320

210

305

(a)

396

227

249

380

(a)

527

311

180

505

2.3

4-5

M10 225

305

Approx. Ref. weight D1 (kg) (lb) Figure

504 307

(b)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (a). FR1 to FR2

(b). FR3

Table 4.2.1 (B) Dimensions and Weights for IP55 (NEMA 12) Enclosure Inverter Voltage capacity Frame W (HP) 7.5 FR1 230 10 15 FR2 265 230V 20 25 FR3 224 30 7.5 FR1 230 10 15 FR2 2659 480V 20 25 FR3 224 30 40

IP55 type (NEMA12), mm H

320

210

305

(a)

369

227

249

380

(a)

536

311

180

505

M10 225

320

210

305

(a)

369

227

249

380

(a)

536

311

180

505

M10 225

(a). FR1 to FR2

(b). FR3

4-6

305

Approx. Ref. weight D1 (kg) (lb) figure

504 307

(b)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Enclosure Materials Item

Material Specifications

•Plastic: PC/ABS, color, Pantone Cool Gray 2C. Drive Enclosure •Metal: Steel-plate-cold rolled-coil SPCC, thickness of powder coating 100 µm. •Heat sink: Extruded aluminum AlSi. •Corrugated board Package •Expanded polystyrene •Wood The inverter contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources. Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks. •The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable. •The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstance, Disposal according to local regulations. •All the metal parts (including aluminum heat sink) can be recycled. * The electrolytic capacitors contain electrolyte which will be classified as hazardous waste within the EU and they must be removed and handled according to local regulations. ■ Mounting Legs for External Cooling System Table 4.2.2 below shows the dimensions and weights of mounting legs for external cooling system. Table 4.2.2 Dimensions and Weights for Mounting Legs Inverter Voltage Capacity (HP) 7.5 10 15 230 V 20 25 30 7.5 10 15 460 V 20 25 30 40

Frame

Dimensions, mm W4

Code No.

Refer Figure

FR 1

(a)

FR 2

(a)

FR 3

180

225

554

530

110

(b)

FR 1

(a)

FR 2

(a)

FR 3

180

225

(a). FR1 to FR2

554

530

110

(b). FR3

4-7

(b)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.

DIGITAL OPERATOR AND MODES

This chapter describes how to use the Digital Operator

5.1.

Appearance of Digital Operator

The Digital Operator (JNEP-40) is equipped with internal memory can be used to upload the parameter settings from the Digital Operator to the inverter or to download parameter settings from the inverter to the Digital Operator. The JNEP-40 LCD Digital Operator component names and functions are as shown below.

*1. An optional back-up battery can be installed inside the LCD Digital Operator. Refer to Chapter12.6 for further details

5-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.2

Digital Operator Key Functions

The names and functions of the JNEP-40 LCD Digital Operator keys are described in Table 5.2.1. Table 5.2.1 KEY

LOC REM

MENU HELP

BACK

NAME

MENU / HELP

Acts as the MENU key to select menu items (Modes). Also acts as the Help key to show the possible causes and potential solutions in plain language whenever a fault or alarm occurs.

BACK

Returns to the step (status) before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.

FWD / REV

JOG

RESET

RUN

STOP

DESCRIPTION

Switches between operation via the LCD Digital Operator (LOCAL mode) and control circuit terminals or RS - 485 communication commands LOCAL / REMOTE (REMOTE mode). This key can be enabled or disabled by the setting of parameter G45-04.

DIGITAL FWDOPERATOR JNEP- 40 REV

DATA ENTER

Key Functions

DATA / ENTER

Sets the rotational direction of the motor from the Digital Operator. (FWD LED indicator ON for forward rotation, REV LED indicator ON for reverse rotation).

Pressed to enter menu items, user parameters, and set values. Also used to switch from one display to another.

JOG / LEFT (Shift)

Enables jog operation when the inverter is being operated from the LCD Digital Operator. Also acts as the left shift key for the setting of parameters.

Increment

Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and increases set values. Used to move to the next item or data.

Decrement

Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and decreases set values. Used to move to the previous item or data.

RESET / RIGHT (Shift)

Acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred. Also acts as the right shift key for the setting of parameters.

*RUN

Starts the inverter operation when the inverter is being controlled by the LCD Digital Operator. The Run LED located at the upper left of the Run key will be on.

*STOP

Stops the inverter operation. The key can be enabled or disabled by the setting of parameter G45-05 when operating from the control circuit terminals. The Stop LED located at the upper left of the Stop key will be on.

* There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status. The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of dynamic braking.

5-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.3

Screen Modes

This section describes the operation modes and switching between operation modes. Operation Modes The parameters of V31 are organized in groups that make it easier to read and set the parameters. The drive is equipped with four operation modes which can be displayed when the MENU/HELP key is pressed at power-up. Pressing the MENU/HELP key repeatedly scrolls through the four operation modes, and by pressing the DATA/ENTER key, the desired operation mode can be selected. (Refer to Fig.5.3.1) Power ON

Display at Start-up MENU HELP

BACK

. The inverter can be operated in this mode. . Status fault message or real time trace can be displayed.

Drive Mode BACK

Quick Programming Mode

. The inverter can be programmed in this mode. . To Set or Read the most commonly used parameters.

BACK

Advanced Programming Mode

. The inverter can be programmed in this mode. . To Set or Read every parameter.

BACK

. The inverter can be programmed in this mode.

Auto-Tuning Mode

. To auto-tune the motor parameters. ＊Always perform auto-tuning with the motor before operating in vector control. (sensorless vector or flux vector) ＊Auto-tuning mode will not be displayed during inverter operation or when a fault has occurred.

Fig. 5.3.1

Operation Mode Structure

Note- To scroll through operation modes, parameter groups or parameter list, press and hold the Increment or Decrement key to auto-increment (or auto-decrement) through the list.

5-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Transition of Modes The mode selection display will appear when the MENU/HELP key is pressed at power-up, and the MENU/HELP key can be pressed repeatedly to scroll through the various operation modes. Press the BACK key to return to the display at power-up from any mode. Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the desired operation mode, and press the BACK key to return to the Mode Display. (Refer to Fig.5.3.2) FAULT

FWD REV SEQ (Mode Display)

(Main Directory)

REF

Power ON

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=000.00Hz

Main-monitor item after start-up *1 Sub-monitor item after start-up *2

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

MENU HELP

(Display at power-up)

BACK DATA ENTER

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming U1-02=00.00Hz U1-03=0.0A

-DRV00:00 U1 Status Monitor U2 Fault Information

（DRIVE Mode）（-DRV- displayed at upper left of LCD display）

U3 Real Time Trace BACK

BACK DATA ENTER

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

-Quick00:00 G01 Start-up G02 Operation Sel.

（Quick Programming Mode）（-Quick- displayed at upper left of LCD display）

G03 Acc./Dec. Time BACK U1-02=00.00Hz U1-02=00.00Hz U1-03=0.0A U1-03=0.0A

BACK DATA ENTER

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

-ADV00:00 G01 Start-up G02 Operation Sel.

（ADVance Programming Mode）（-ADV- displayed at upper left of LCD display）

G03 Acc./Dec. Time BACK U1-02=00.00Hz U1-02=00.00Hz U1-02=00.00Hz U1-03=0.0A U1-03=0.0A

BACK

Quick Programming ADV. Programming Reserved U1-02=00.00Hz U1-02=00.00Hz U1-02=00.00Hz U1-03=0.0A U1-03=0.0A U1-03=0.0A

BACK DATA ENTER

ADV. Programming Reserved Auto Tuning U1-02=00.00Hz U1-03=0.0A

-A.TUNE00:00 -01. Tune Mode Sel -02. Mtr Rated Power -03. Mtr Rated Curr.

（AUTO- Tuning Mode）（-A.TUNE- displayed at upper left of LCD display）

BACK

Fig. 5.3.2 Mode Transitions *1. Set the monitor item to be displayed in the main-monitor item after power-up by parameter G44-01. The real-time clock is displayed at upper middle of LCD Display when parameter G42-03 is set to 1 (Display RTC time). *2. Set the monitor items to be displayed in the sub-monitor item after power-up by parameters G44-02 to G44-03 *3. Press the BACK key one time to return to the display at power-up. *4. Press the BACK key one time to return to Mode Display. Notes- 1. When parameter G02-01 (Frequency ref. selection) = 0, the frequency reference can be changed using the Increment, Decrement, JOG/LEFT shift or RESET/RIGHT shift keys. The set value will be saved and the next screen will be displayed when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed. 2. When changing the display, use the Increment and Decrement keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the first parameter number and vise versa. 3. The monitor items to be displayed at power-up can be set by parameter G44-01 (main- monitor selection after power up) and G44-02 to 03 (Sub-monitor selection after power up). 4. Display at start-up

5-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

**. Use the Increment/Decrement, and/or RIGHT/LEFT shift to change the main-monitor item. (By changing the blinking highlighted number directly.)

5-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.3.1. Drive Mode (DRV Mode) When the inverter is operated in the Drive mode, the status of output frequency, output current and output voltage, as well as fault information can be displayed in this mode. Key operations in Drive mode are as shown in Fig 5.3.3 below.

[Mode Display]

[Main Directories]

[Sub Directories]

Power ON

[Status monitor/Fault Information Screen]

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=000.00Hz

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

-DRV-

-DRV00:00 U1 Status Monitor U2 Fault Information U3 Real Time Trace

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=000.00Hz

-DRV-

00:00 Output Freq U1-02=000.00Hz

00:00 OL1 Monitor U1-88=000%

-DRV-

00:00 Current Fault U2-01=No Fault

-DRV-

00:00 1st Fault U2-02=No Fault

000 %

-DRV-

00:00

U2-01

Current Fault

-DRV-

00:00

U2-02

1st Fault OV Overvoltage

00:00 4th Warning U2-54=Warning

-DRV-

00:00 4th Warning

UV Undervoltage

Fig. 5.3.3 Operations in Drive Mode

5-6

U1-88

Overcurrent

U2-01=No Fault U2-02=No Fault

00:00 OL1 Monitor

U2-03=No Fault U2-04=No Fault

From Page 5-8

-DRV-

(000~000) <000>

U2-02=No Fault U2-03=No Fault

U1-02

(000.00~060.00) <000.00>

To Page 5-8

00:00 Output Freq

000.00 Hz

U1-01=010.00Hz U1-02=010.00Hz

-DRV-

U1-01

000.00 Hz (000.00~060.00) <000.00>

-DRV-

00:00 Freq Ref

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

U1-03=000.0A U1-04=000.0V

-DRV00:00 U1 Status Monitor U2 Fault Information U3 Real Time Trace

-DRV-

U2-54

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual *1. U1 status monitor screen

*2. U2 fault information screen

*3. Press the BACK key once to return to the Main Directories, or press the BACK key twice to return to the Mode Display. If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will automatically return to the Mode Display. *4. Press the BACK key once to return to the Sub Directories, or press the BACK key three times to return to the Mode Display. If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will automatically return to the Mode Display.

5-7

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2013; Real Time Graphic Display The real time graphic display (in Drive mode) shows a continuous waveform measurement at defined sampling intervals (selected by G44-09). The total quantity of waveform data is: 256 points (max.128 points/screen). The key operations of the real time graphic display in the Drive Mode are shown in Fig. 5.3.4 below.

Fig. 5.3.4 Operations in Drive Mode (Real Time Graphic Display) Notes 1- The real time graphic display data totals 256 points. If the sampling interval is set to maximum 100ms (G44-09 = 6), the displayed data will be for an interval of 25.6 sec (256 point Ă&#x2014; 100ms / point =25.6 sec). If the time interval exceeds 25.6 sec, only the data taken for the last 25.6 sec. will be kept.

Fig. 5.3.5

Scrolling the Waveform Screen

5-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 3- Use parameter G44-10 (waveform amplitude selection) to change the amplitude of the selected waveform. (Refer to G44-10). 5.3.2 Quick Programming Mode (Quick Mode) The most commonly used parameters can be set and monitored in Quick programming mode. Key operations in Quick programming are as shown below in Fig. 5.9.

Fig. 5.3.6 Operations in Quick Programming Mode Notes 1. The parameters can be set from the data set/read screen by using the Increment, Decrement, and/or the RESET/RIGHT shift keys. The parameter will be saved when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed, and the screen will return to the previous sub directories when the BACK key is pressed. 2. The parameters in Quick Programming mode are those most frequently used, and are selected from the parameters in the Advanced programming mode. Only the parameters highlighted in the sub directories can be programmed. 3. Refer to Chapter 7 (PARAMETERS) for details on the parameters displayed in the Quick Programming mode. 4. Data set/read screen

5-9

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

-Quick-

00:00

G01-03

Control Method 2 SLV (0~3) <0>

Quick mode RTC (to set the RTC time, use G42-01, and to hide / show the RTC time use G42-03) Parameter No. (highlighted) Parameter Name Set Value Setting Range Factory Setting

** Use the Increment/Decrement, and/or RIGHT/LEFT shift key to change the set value by changing the blinking highlighted number, then press the DATA/ENTER key once to Save the new setting. The message â&#x20AC;&#x153;Param Setting OKâ&#x20AC;? will display, then after a few seconds it will blink again. 5. This mode allows only the most commonly used 27 parameters to be read and changed. The parameters which can be read and changed in this mode depend on the control method that is being used. (Refer to Table 5.3.1 and Chapter 7.3.1). Table 5.3.1

Quick Programming Mode Parameters

Parameter LCD Display No. G01 Start-Up G01-03 Control Method G02-01 Freq Ref Source Operation Mode G02 G02-02 RUN Source Set G02-03 Stopping Method G03-01 Tacc 1 G03 Accel / Decel Time G03-02 Tdec 1 G05-01 Freq Ref 1 G05-02 Freq Ref 2 G05 Preset Ref G05-03 Freq Ref 3 G05-04 Freq Ref 4 G05-17 JOG Freq G06-01 Input Voltage G06-02 V/F Pattem Sel G06-03 Fmax G06 V/F Pattern G06-04 Fbase G06-07 Fmin G06-08 Vmax G06-12 Vbase G07-01 Motor Poles G07 Motor Parameter G07-03 Motor Rated Power G07-04 Motor Rated Current G08 Motor OL/OH G08-01 Motor Overload Sel G09-01 Accel Stall Sel G09 Stall Prevention G09-04 Decel Stall Sel G13-03 AO1 Gain G13 Multi-Function AO G13-07 AO2 Gain G31 PG Feedback G31-09 PG Pulses *1. The parameters depended on G01-03 setting value. Group*1

LCD Display

5-10

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.3.3 Advanced Programming Mode (ADV Mode) All inverter parameters can be read and changed in the Advanced programming mode. Key operations in the Advanced programming mode are as shown in the following Fig.5.3.7 [Mode Display]

[Main Directories]

[Sub Directories]

[Status monitor/Fault Information Screen]

Power ON

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=000.00Hz

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming B

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

-ADV00:00 G01 Start-up G02 Operation Sel. G03 Acc./Dec. Time

-ADV00:00 -01 Language -02 Access Level -03 Control Method

G01

-ADV00:00 -01 Language -02 Access Level -03 Control Method

G01

-ADV00:00 -01 Language -02 Access Level -03 Control Method

G01

-ADV-

00:00

G01-01

Language 0 English (0~0) <0>

-ADV-

00:00

G01-02

Access Level 2 Advanced Level (0~2) <2>

-ADV-

00:00

G01-03

Control Method 3 SV (0~3) <3>

-ADV00:00 G01 Start-up G02 Operation Sel. G03 Acc./Dec. Time

Fig. 5.3.7 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode Notes 1. Parameters can be set from the data set/read screens by using the Increment, Decrement, JOG/LEFT shift or RESET/RIGHT shift keys. The parameter will be saved when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed, and the screen will return to the previous sub directories when the BACK key is pressed. 2. Use the Increment and Decrement keys to scroll through the main and sub directories in the Advanced programming mode. The screen will return to the previous mode display when the BACK key is pressed in the main directories, and return to the previous main directory when the BACK key is pressed in the sub directories. 3. Refer to chapter 7 (PARAMETERS) for details on the parameters display in Advanced Programming mode. 4. Data set/read screen:

5-11

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

**. Use the Increment/Decrement, and/or RIGHT/LEFT shift key to change the set value by changing the blinking highlighted number. Press the DATA/ENTER key once to save the new setting. After a few seconds, the highlighted number will blink again.

NOTES-

5-12

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.3.4 Auto- tuning Mode (A.TUNE Mode) Perform auto-tuning to optimize motor performance when using the SLV (Sensorless Vector) or SV (Sensor Vector) control method, or when the motor cable length is excessively long for V/F (or V/F + PG) control methods. The key operations of auto-tuning are as shown in the following Fig. 5.3.8. [Mode Display] (From Previous Mode)

[Main Directories]

[Sub Directories]

-A.TUNEADV. Programming Reserved Auto Tuning

-A.TUNE- 00:00 -01. Tune Mode Sel -02. Mtr Rated Power -03. Mtr Rated Curr.

-A.TUNE- 00:00 -07. Motor Poles -08. PG Pulse -10. Mtr No-Load Volt

-A.TUNE-

00:00

T-02

Mtr Rated Power 002.20 kW (000.00~600.00) <002.20>

-A.TUNE- 00:00

T-10

Mtr No-Load Volt 190 V (050~240) <190>

00:00

-A.TUNE- 00:00

Autotuning

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 000.00Hz – 000.0A (Rotational)

000.00Hz – 000.0A (Press RUN key)

-A.TUNE-

T-01

0 Rotational (0~1) <0>

Autotuning ?

00:00

Tune Mode Sel

-A.TUNE(To Next Mode)

[Status monitor/Fault Information Screen]

B 00:00

-A.TUNE- 00:00

Autotuning

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 000.00Hz – 000.0A (Rotational)

000.00Hz – 000.0A Aborted

-A.TUNE- 00:00

ATE01

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> Motor Data Error Uncompleted

(To display at power-up)

Fig. 5.3.8 Auto-tuning Key Operations Notes1- Use the increment and decrement keys to scroll though the auto-tuning parameter list. Depending on the control method used set by parameter G01-03 or G34-01certain auto-tuning parameters will not be accessible. (Refer to the Auto-tuning Group T parameters). 2- After the motor nameplate rated output power (T-02), rated current (T-03), rated voltage (T-04), rated frequency (T-05), rated speed (T-06), the number of motor poles (T-07) and motor no-load voltage (T-10) have been entered, press the RUN key to perform the auto-tuning operation. When auto-tuning has been executed correctly, the motor calculated parameters will be saved to parameter group 06 (V/f pattern) through group 07 (motor parameters), If motor 2 (T-09=2) is selected during auto-tuning, the data will be saved in parameter group 34, motor 2 V/f pattern through group 35. 3-(a) “Rotational” will be displayed during rotational auto-tuning (T-01=0),and the motor will rotate during auto-tuning. Ensure that it is safe for the motor to rotate before pressing the RUN key. (b) “Stationary” will be displayed during stationary auto-tuning (T-01=1), and the motor does not rotate. (c) The RUN LED (on the upper left of RUN key) will be lit during auto-tuning. (d) An “>>>” signal corresponding to the auto-tuning processing time will be displayed during auto-tuning. 4- The auto-tuning operation is aborted when the STOP key is pressed during auto-tuning. Press the RESET key to return to the Mode Display screen. Always use the STOP key on the Digital Operator to abort the auto-tuning process.

5-13

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5- When a fault has occurred during auto-tuning, a fault message and an uncompleted message are displayed on the Digital Operator. The RUN LED will be blinking, and the motor will coast to stop. (Refer to Chapter 9.4 for the Auto-tuning Faults.) Fault displays can be cleared by pressing the RESET key, and the Mode Display will appear. — All set parameters (group 06 through group 07 parameters) will revert to their factory settings if a fault occurs. The related parameters must be entered again before re-starting auto-tuning. — The “>>>” signal will remain for the time that the fault exists during auto-tuning. 6- If auto-tuning has been completed successfully, the RUN LED will turn off. Press the BACK key to return to the Mode Display, and proceed to the next operation. The entire auto-tuning operation takes up to approx. 50 seconds.

NOTES-

5-14

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.4

Diagnostic Assistant The Digital Operator with built-in the HELP key function (MENU/HELP key) can be used to find the main reasons for problems and is activated whenever a fault or alarm (warning / self-diagnosis) occurs. Pressing the MENU/HELP key once when a fault or alarm occurs, gives a description of the fault or alarm in plain language. Pressing the MENU/HELP key twice, gives the possible cause of the fault or alarm, and pressing the MENU/ HELP key three times, gives the possible corrective actions. (Refer to the following Fig. 5.4.1.)

DESCR I PT I ONS : T h e i n v e r t e r o u t p n t e x c e e d e d t h e o n t d e t e c t i o n l e v e 2 0 0 % o f r a t ed c u

u v l r

t c u e r c u ( ap p r en t

r r r )

r e r e o x .

C AUS E S: . .

E A o A a A N

. .

x t M u t s t e S V

r C p p r C o

e m w u t e c m o u t

e a . i o r p

l y r a pi d acc / dec . s s w i t c hed at I N V al - p u r pose or gr e t o r w as st ar t ed. GF o c c ur r ed at I ut .

C ORRECTI VE ‧

E x t e n d

‧

C h e c k

‧

R e m o v e I

N V

ACT I ONS:

a c c / d e c t h e

w / o

l o a d

t h e t h e

t i

m e.

w i

r i ng.

m o t o r & r un m ot

t he

o r .

Fig. 5.4.1 Diagnostic Assistant

5-15

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.5

Quick Programming Mode Parameters The parameters displayed in Quick Programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other parameters, are displayed in the Advanced programming mode. The parameters that must be checked and /or set for a newly installed inverter are listed in Table 5.5.1, and those that are set according to the application are listed in Table 5.5.2. Table 5.5.1 Parameters that must be checked and / or set (in Quick mode)

Parameter No.

G01-03

G02-01

Name LCD Display (English) Control Method Selection Control Method Master Reference Selection Freq. Ref Source Run Command Selection

G02-02

G03-01 G03-02

G06-01

Run Source

Acceleration Time 1 Tacc1 Deceleration Time 1 Tdec1 Input voltage setting

Description 0: V/F (V/F control without PG) 1: V/F+PG (V/F control with PG) 2: SLV (Sensorless vector) 3: SV (Sensor vector, class loop flux vector) Selects the master frequency reference input source. 0: Digital Operator (parameter G05-01 preset) 1: Terminals (analog input AI1 or AI2 based on G12-05 setting) 2:RS-485 communications ( S(+), S(-) ports) 3. Option card 4. USB ports 5. Pulse train input (terminal PI) Selects the RUN and STOP command input source. 0: Digital Operator (RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator) 1: Terminals (digital input, ref to group 10 parameters) 2: RS-485 communication (S(+), S(-) ports) 3: Option Card 4: USB ports Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency. (Fmax, G06-03) Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.

Sets the Inverter input voltage.

Input Voltage G07-04

G08-01

Motor Rated Current Rated Current Motor Overload Protection Selection MTR Overload Sel

Setting Range

Factory Setting

0 to 3

0 to 5

0 to 4

0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 230V: 155.0 to 255.0 460V: 310.0 to 510.0V

10.0 sec 10.0 sec 230.0V 460.0V

Sets the motor nameplate full load current.

Varies by KVA

Sets whether the overload function is enabled or disabled at electronic thermal overload curve.

0000B to 1111B

0001B

5-16

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 5.5.2 Parameters that Are Set As Per Application Requirements (in Quick mode) Name Parameter Setting Factory Description LCD Display No. Range Setting (English) Stopping Method 0: Deceleration to stop Selection 1: Coast to stop (free-running) G02-03 0 to 3 0 2: DC injection to stop Stopping Method 3:Coast to stop with timer Frequency Reference 1 G05-01 0.00 Hz Freq. Ref 1 Frequency G05-02 0.00 Hz Reference 2 0.00 Freq. Ref 2 to 400.00 Setting units are affected by G44-06 Frequency Hz G05-03 0.00 Hz Reference 3 Freq. Ref 3 Frequency Reference 4 G05-04 0.00 Hz Freq. Ref 4 JOG Frequency 0.00 Sets the JOG frequency reference when 6.00 G5-17 Reference to 400.00 FJOG or RJOG command is ON. Hz Hz JOG Ref. 0 to E: Select from the 15 preset patterns V/F Pattern F: Customer V/F pattern (with voltage Selection 0 F G06-02 limited) to FF FF: Customer V/F pattern (without V/F pattern sel voltage limited) Maximum Output Sets the V/F pattern when V/F pattern 40.0 G06-03 60.0 Hz Frequency selection is set to customer V/F pattern to 400.0 (G06-02=F or FF). Hz Fmax 0.0 Base Frequency 60.0 Hz G06-04 to 400.0 F base Hz Minimum Output 0.0 G06-07 0.5 Hz Frequency to 400.0 Hz Fmin

G06-08

G06-12

Maximum Output Voltage

230: 0.0 to 255.0V

230.0V

Vmax

460V: 0.0 to 510.0V

460.0V

Base Output Voltage

230: 0.0 to 255.0V 460V: 0.0 to 510.0V

Vbase G07-01

Number of Motor poles Motor poles

Sets the number of motor poles.

2 to 8

Ref. Page

230.0V 460.0V 4

Cont.

5-17

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

G07-03

G09-01

G09-04 Â&#x201E; Â&#x201E;

G13-03 G13-07

Motor Rated Output power Mtr Rated Power Stall Prevention selection During Acceleration Accel Stall Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration Decel Stall Sel A01 Gain A01 Gain A02 Gain A02 Gain PG Pulses/Rev

G31-09

PG Pulses

Sets the motor nameplate rated output power in KW. (e.g. 1HP=0.75KW)

0.00 to 600.00 KW

Varies by KVA

0: Invalid 1: Valid

0,1

0: Invalid 1: Valid

0,1

Sets the Multi-function Analog Output AO1 gain. Sets the Multi-function Analog Output AO2 gain. Set the number of A-phase or B-phase pulses per revolution of the PG.

NOTES-

5-18

0.0% to 1000.0 % 0.0% to 1000.0 % 0 to 60,000 ppr

100% 100% 1024 ppr

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 5.6 Example of Changing Parameters Â&#x201E;

STEP

Run Operation by Digital Operator . Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key so that the remote mode indicators SEQ and REF are off. The Run operation will now be controlled via the Digital Operator. . Run the motor forward at 60 Hz.

KEY

DISPLAY -MON-

Power ON

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=000.00Hz

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

U1-02=060.00Hz U1-03=002.3A

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

NOTES Display at start-up: . When G44-01=1 (Display shows Freq Ref after power-up (U1-01)). . When G44-02=2 and G44-03=3 (sub-monitor display items after power-up is U1-02 and U1-03). . Use the Increment/Decrement and/or RIGHT/LEFT shift keys to set the frequency reference. (U1-01=60.00Hz) . Press DATA/ENTER key to save (60.00Hz) to the Inverter. (The highlighted number stops blinking, and after a few seconds, the highlighted number will blink again). . Confirm that the FWD LED indicator on the Digital Operator is on by toggling the FWD/REV key. . Press the RUN key to accelerate to 60 Hz.

Press the STOP key and the motor will decelerate to stop within 10.0 sec. (factory setting)

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

*1. Reverse Run: . Toggle the FWD/REV key so that the REV indicator of the Digital Operator is on. . Press the RUN key and the motor runs in reverse at 60 Hz. . Press the STOP key and the motor will stop within the set deceleration time. (default)

5-19

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Â&#x201E;

Set the Accel/Decel Time Change the accel/decel time from the factory setting of 10.0 sec to 0.1 sec.

Cont.

5-20

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

*. Forward RUN (or Reverse RUN) the Inverter to confirm the Accel / Decel time.

c Confirm that the FWD indicator on the Digital Operator is on. d Press the RUN key to accelerate the motor up to 60 Hz in a time of 0.1 sec. e Press the STOP key. The motor should decelerate in a time of 0.1 sec. f Confirm whether Forward/Reverse RUN is changed in 0.1 sec by pressing the RUN key, and then toggle the FWD/REV key repeatedly.

5-21

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Â&#x201E; Auto-tuning . Perform auto-tuning to calculate the required motor parameters and confirm the auto-tuning contents. . To execute Rotational auto-tuning for a 220V, 0.75KW without a PG motor. . The SLV (Sensorless Vector) control method is selected. (a). Perform Rotational Auto-tuning.

5-22

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (b). RUN the Inverter at Low Speed after Auto-tuning by the Digital Operator.

* The following parameters are set automatically after auto-tuning. To read and confirm these parameters go to the Advanced Programming mode. . The V/F pattern parameters: G06-04 (Fbase), G06-08 (Vmax) and 06-12 (Vbase). . The motor parameters: G07-01 to G07-17.

NOTES-

5-23

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Â&#x201E;

Run Operation by V/F Control (a). Changing the Control Method to V/F Control. . The factory setting of control method is SLV (G01-03=2). . When auto-tuning can not be executed correctly, switch the control method to V/F control, and set the V/F pattern properly.

STEP

DISPLAY

KEY

NOTES

-MON-

Power ON

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

Press MENU/HELP key, then press Decrement key to highlight the Quick programming mode. (Mode Display).

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

-Quick-

00:00

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Main Directories in the Quick programming mode.

G01 Start-Up G02 Operation Sel. G03 Acc./Dec. Time

-Quick-

00:00

G01

-03. Control Method -36. User P30 -37. User P31

-Quick-

00:00

3 SV (0~3) <0>

-Quick-

00:00

0 SV (0~3) <0>

-MON-

G01-03

Control Method

(Press 4 Times) OR

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Sub Directories of the G01 group parameters. (Only G01-03 can be displayed in the Quick programming mode).

G01-03

Control Method

Freq Ref. is displayed at power-up. (U1-01 has been set as 60.00 Hz)

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

Press a DATA/ENTER to highlight the Data set/read screen. (The highlighted number blinks).

Use the Increment/Decrement key to set G01-03=0 (V/F control), then press the DATA/ENTER key to save G01-03=0 to the Inverter.

. Press the BACK key 4 times, or press MENU/HELP key once to return to the Display at power-up. . A RUN command can be executed in this display.

(Once)

NOTES-

5-24

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (b). RUN the Inverter at Low Speed and Adjust the V/F Pattern The minimum output frequency is 1.5 Hz for V/F control. STEP

KEY

DISPLAY

NOTES

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

Return to the Display at power-up after auto-tuning by pressing the BACK key or MENU/HELP key. (Confirm that the Remote mode indicators SEQ and REF are off for LOCAL mode operation.)

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

-MON-

DATA ENTER

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=001.50Hz

Use the Increment/Decrement, and/or RIGHT/LEFT shift keys to set the frequency reference to U1-01=1.5Hz, then press DATA/ENTER key to save 1.5 Hz to the Inverter.

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

-MON-

RUN

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=001.50Hz

Press the RUN key and the motor rotates at 1.5 Hz (45 rpm) in the forward direction (If the FWD indicator on is on).

U1-02=001.50Hz U1-03=001.3A

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

STOP U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

MENU HELP

DATA ENTER

(Press 4 Times)

DATA ENTER

00:00

Press a DATA/ENTER key to enter the Main Directories in the Quick programming mode.

G01 Start-Up G02 Operation Sel. G03 Acc./Dec. Time

-Quick-

Press MENU/HELP key, then press Decrement key to highlight the Quick programming mode. (Mode Display).

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

-Quick-

If motor stops with minimal load applied, there is insufficient motor torque. Press the STOP key, then adjust the proper parameters to generate enough motor torque or change to SLV control mode if necessary.

00:00

Press the Decrement key 4 times to select the G06 V/F pattern parameter group.

G03 Acc./Dec. Time G05 Ref. & Process G06 V/F Pattern

-Quick-

00:00

-01. Input Voltage -03. Fmax -04. Fbase

G06

. Press DATA/ENTER key to set the V/F pattern parameters. (There are 7 parameters G06-01 to G06-04, G06-07, G06-08 and G06-12 that can be set/read in the Quick programming mode). . All the V/F pattern related parameters can be set/read in the Advanced programming mode.

Â&#x201E; Initializing Parameters . When replacing the control board, check the Inverter capacity (G45-01) first, and then initialize parameters to the factory settings. . The set values are returned to the factory setting by setting G01-04=2 (2-wire initialization, 230V/460V)

5-25

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

STEP

KEY

DISPLAY

NOTES

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

Freq Ref. is displayed at power-up. (U1-01 has been set as 60.00 Hz)

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

MENU HELP

-ADV-

DATA ENTER

Press MENU/HELP key, then press Decrement key to highlight the Quick programming mode. (Mode Display).

DRIVE Quick Programming ADV. Programming

00:00

G01 Start-Up G02 Operation Sel. G03 Acc./Dec. Time

-Quick-

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Main Directories in the Advanced programming mode.

00:00

G01

-01. Language -02. Access Level -03. Control Method

-Quick-

00:00

G01

-02. Access Level -03. Control Method -04. Initialize

Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Sub Directories of the G01 group parameters.

Press Decrement key 3 times to select the G01-04 (Initialize) parameter.

(Press 3 Times)

-ADV-

DATA ENTER

00:00

G01-04

Initialize

Press a DATA/ENTER key to highlight the Data set/read screen. (The highlighted number blinks)

00 No Init (00~15) <00>

-ADV-

00:00

G01-04

Initialize 02 2-Wire, 230V/460V (00~15) <00>

DATA ENTER -ADV-

00:00

G01-04

Initialize 00 No Init (00~15) <00>

BACK

Use the Increment/Decrement key to set G01-04=2 (2-wire Initialization, 230V/460V). (The highlighted number blinks)

(Press 4 Times) OR

MENU HELP

-MON-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=060.00Hz

U1-02=000.00Hz U1-03=000.0A

. Press a DATA/ENTER key to save G01-04=2 to the inverter to initialize parameters. . After initialization, the G01-04 value will be automatically reset to 0, and the highlighted number blinks again. . Press the BACK key 4 times, or press MENU/HELP key once to return to the Display at power-up. . A Run command can be executed in this Display.

(Once)

5-26

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 6. TRIAL OPERATION This Chapter describes how to start up the V31 inverter after received. The description here assumes that the selection of inverter capacity, the peripheral devices and the motor have been completed.

6.1 Trial Operation Flowchart Perform a trial operation according to the following flowchart.

Fig. 6.1.1 Trial Operation Flowchart

6-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 6.2 Trial Operation Procedures The procedures for the trial operation in Fig 6.2.1 are described in order as follows. (a) Install and Wire Main Circuits: Refer to Chapter 1.2 “Installation”, Chapter 1.3 “Location”, Chapter 2.5 “Wiring Parts”, if necessary, install peripherals. . Braking equipment (braking resistor/units) . AC reactor, AC Fuses . Filter (Input filter, Output filter) (b) Connect Wire to Control Terminals: Refer to Chapter 2.8 and 2.9 “Circuit Terminal Function and Layout”, we recommend the Digital Operator (factory setting G02-01=0 and G02-02=0) for trial operation. Limit control wiring to the following. . Protection functions (fault relay output) . PG wiring for closed loop flux vector control mode. To use an external signal input for trial operation, set parameter G02-01 (Master Reference Selection) and G02-02 (RUN Command Selection) to 1. (c) Turn ON Power and Confirm Display Status: Check that the power supply voltage is correct, and set the input voltage of the Inverter (G06-01) according to the power supply voltage. . 230V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz for 7.5 HP to 30 HP. . 460V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz for 7.5 HP to 40 HP. Refer to Chapter 3.1.1 to perform the checks before test operation. Refer to Chapter 3.1.2 to confirm the display status after powering-up the inverter. (d) Check or Set the Basic Settings: Switch to the Quick programming mode (“Quick” will be displayed on the upper left of LCD screen) and then set the related parameters in Quick mode as Table 5.3.1 and Table 5.5.1 (e) Settings According to the Control Method: (From previous steps)

Control method ?

No (G01-03=0)

Vector mode (G01-03=2 or 3)

PG feedback ?

V/F + PG ? Yes (G01-03=1)

V/F

V/F+PG

. Check V/F pattern (G06) Default: 230V/60 Hz for 230V class 460V/60Hz for 460V class

SV Control

. Check V/F pattern (G06) . Check motor poles (G07-01) . Check PG pulses (G31-09)

Is there a long cable length or different motor and inverter capacity ?

(G01-03=2)

SLV control (default)

Yes (G01-03=3)

. Check PG pulses (G31-09) . Check motor parameters (G07-01, G07-03, G07-04)

Can motor rotate during auto-tuning ? (T-01=1) Yes (T-01=0)

Yes

Perform “stationary” auto-tuning

Perform “rotational” auto-tuning

(To next step)

Fig. 6.2.1 Settings According to the Control Method

6-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Notes - *1. If there is a gear reduction between the motor and PG, set the gear ratio in G31-12 and G31-13 in advanced. *2. Use rotational auto-tuning to increase auto-tuning accuracy if the motor load can be safely rotated. (f) Perform Auto-tuning: In order to optimize motor performance, auto-tune the inverter to calculate the required motor parameters. Always perform auto-tuning before starting operation. (Refer to Chapter 6.4 for auto-tuning procedures) (g) Application Setting: Set the required parameters in the Advanced Programming mode. All the parameters that can be set/read in step (d) above in Quick Programming mode can also be read and set in the Advanced Programming mode. “─ADV─“ will be displayed on the upper left of the LCD screen. (Refer to Chapter 5.3.3 for the key operations in Advanced Programming mode.) (h) No Load Operation: We recommend that the Digital Operator be used for no-load operation and that the motor be disconnected from the load. Step 1: Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode. (The SEQ and REF indicators should be OFF). Step 2: Always confirm that the motor and / or machine can be operated safety before starting operation. Also, confirm that no fault messages are displayed on the inverter. Step 3: Press and release the JOG key to start and stop the motor. (The default jog frequency is set by G05-17=6.00 Hz.) (i) Load Operation: Connect the load to the motor and then start the operation as described for the no-load operation in (h). Step 1: Confirm that the motor and load are connected. Step 2: Use the JOG key to run the motor in the LOCAL mode as in the no-load operation and check that the operating direction is correct. Step 3: First, set a low speed frequency reference (set by parameter G05-01) then press the RUN key and check that the machine is operating smoothly at low speed. Step 4: Next increase the frequency reference and check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor and that is running smoothly. (j) Optimum Parameter Adjustments: If oscillation, vibration or other problems occur during operation refer to Chapter 6.5 Optimum Parameter Adjustment for additional information.

6-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 6.3 Control Method Selection 6.3.1 Introduction to Various Control Methods The speed control methods are roughly divided into open loop and closed loop types. The intent is to select the best control mode (algorithm) for the motor characteristics in your application. Each control method generates the voltage / frequency output in a unique way, and once configured, it is the basis for other parameter settings as well. Therefore, choose the suitable control method via parameter G01-03, or G34-01 for motor 2, early in your application design process.

Fig. 6.3 Speed Control System Referring to figure Fig. 6.3 above for the speed control system: . The open loop V/F control system does not need any speed sensor and is primarily used for a general purpose inverter applications. It is suitable for the simple speed control of existing motors and for variable torque loads such as fans and pumps. . The slip compensation control is provided to maintain the set motor speed with torque load changes. By sensing the motor terminal voltage and primary current changes resulting from torque load variations, the inverter output frequency is adjusted to maintain the setting speed. . The closed loop control system compensates for speed variations according to speed feedback information. The speed feedback information (Nfb) is obtained from a speed sensor (transducer) such as an encoder (PG) and is compared with the speed reference (Nref). The difference between (Nref) and (Nfb) results in an error signal that is used to control the inverter output frequency so that the speed sensor value will try to equal the speed reference value. The V/F + PG, SLV (Sensorless Vector) and SV (Sensor or Flux Vector) control modes are used for closed-loop speed control.

6-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 6.3.2 Closed Loop Control System (a) V/f + PG Control: In this type of control, the inverter compensates for speed changes due to load variations, by measuring the difference between the Ref. and the feedback (PG) values and outputting a slip frequency. This type of control is relatively simple and is largely used for the speed control of general purpose inverters. However, since it is based on the V/f control it is not suitable for applications requiring quick response times. (b) Sensorless Vector Control: Flux vector control results in quick response and high accuracy but requires a speed sensor for feedback. On the other hand, Sensorless vector control does not require a speed sensor but it is slightly lower in performance than flux vector with feedback. This method calculates the actual motor speed from the motor terminal voltage and primary output current and adjusts the output frequency (motor speed) using the calculated speed as a feedback signal. (Refer to Fig. 6.4 below) N ref

+ -

N fb

ASR

(Speed regulator)

AC Rd (Magnetizing current regulator)

X +

Flux

(Magnetic flux calculation)

Three phase voltage reference processor

AC Rq (Torque current regulator) Iq

Slip Calculator

V u ref PWM

V v ref V w ref

Iu 3Ø / 2Ø calculation

Iv Iw

+ f1 X + fn

jdt V u ref Ň fb

Speed estimator

V w ref Iu Iw

Fig. 6.4 Sensorless Vector Control Block Note - Sensorless vector operation must be disabled when two or more motors are connected (parallel operation) to the inverter. (c) Flux Vector (Sensor) Control: The Sensor vector control mode results in rapid motor response to torque load changes. This mode controls the primary output current to the AC motor which consists of two components; magnetic flux current (Id) and torque current (Iq). This results in a control performance equivalent to that of DC motor controllers. (Refer Fig. 6.5 below). The motor parameters, (group G07), are used by the vector processor and therefore, the performance greatly depends on the accuracy of the parameters.

Fig. 6.5 Sensor Vector Control Block

6-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 6.3.3 Control Method Characteristics One of four control methods can be selected depending on the application. The following table describes the basic features of each.

Table 6.1 Control Method Characteristics Control Method

V/F

V/F + PG

SLV

Parameter Setting

G01-03=0

G01-03=1

G01-03=2

G01-03=3

Basic Control

Voltage/Frequency Control without PG

Voltage/Frequency Control (with speed compensation)

Current Vector control without PG

Current Vector control with PG

Speed Detector

Not required

Required (PG interface built-in)

Not required

Required (PG interface built-in)

1:20

1:40

1:100

1:1000

± 1% (with slip compensation)

± 0.03%

± 0.2%

± 0.02%

Approx. 1 Hz

10 Hz

30 Hz

150% at 3 Hz

200% at 3 Hz

200% at 0.5 Hz

200% at 0 Hz

Torque Limit

Not possible

Possible (4-quadrant)

Torque Control

Not possible

Possible

Auto-tuning

Stationary

Stationary, Rotational

Speed Search (for momentary power loss detection)

Current detection (unidirectional), Speed estimation (bidirectional)

Not required

Speed Control Range Speed Control Accuracy Speed Control Response Starting Torque

NOTES-

6-6

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 6.4 Auto-tuning When using the SLV (Sensorless Vector) or SV (Sensor Vector) control method, or when the motor cable length is long for the V/F (or V/F + PG) control method, perform auto-tuning to calculate the required motor parameters to optimized system performance. 6.4.1 Setting the Auto-tuning There are two auto-tuning modes that can be set; rotational auto-tuning and stationary auto-tuning: (1) Rotational Auto-tuning (T-01=0) Set T-01=0, input the related motor data listed on the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The motor will rotate for approximately 50 seconds and then store the required motor parameters automatically. (Refer to Chapter 5.3.5 for the auto-tuning operations.) (2) Stationary Auto-tuning (T-01=1) Set T-01=1, input the related motor data listed on the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the motor but the motor will not rotate. After approximately 50 seconds selected motor parameters will be calculated and set automatically. The remaining motor parameters can be set by calculation if necessary (normally, adjustment is not required). (Refer to Chapter 8.1.07 for the motor parameters setting and Chapter 5.3.5 for the auto-tuning operations.) 6.4.2 Precautions for Auto-tuning . Use stationary auto-tuning (T-01=1) whenever performing auto-tuning for a motor that is connected to a load, otherwise, incorrect motor parameters may be recorded, and the motor may not operate properly. . Use rotational auto-tuning (T-01=0) whenever performing auto-tuning for a motor that is not connected to a load to obtain better performance. The motor shaft will rotate when rotational auto-tuning is being performed therefore, confirm safety and ensure the a holding brake if one is used is not applied. . The Multi-function Digital Inputs will not effect during auto-tuning (either stationary or rotational), and the Multi-function Digital Outputs will maintain the same status as normal operation. Always use the STOP key on the Digital Operator to abort auto-tuning. . Power will be supplied to the motor during stationary auto-tuning even though the motor does not rotate. Do not touch the motor until auto-tuning has been completed. . If the maximum output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) and base frequency (G06-04, Fbase) are different, set the maximum output frequency (G06-03) after auto-tuning.

6-7

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 6.5 Optimum Parameter Adjustments If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the most commonly used user parameters. Table 6.2 Optimum Parameter Adjustment (V/F or V/F+PG Mode) Control Method

Name (Parameter Number) Carrier Frequency Setting (G04-01)

V/F Control (VF or VF+PG Mode) (G01-03=0 or 1)

Torque compensation primary delay time (G29-02)

Torque compensation gain (G29-01) Middle output frequency voltage (G06-09 and G06-10) Minimum output frequency voltage (G06-11)

Performance • Reducing Motor magnetic noise. • Controlling Hunting and vibration at low speeds. • Increasing torque and speed response • Controlling Hunting and vibration • Improving torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower) • Controlling Hunting and vibration

• Improving torque at low speeds • Controlling shock at startup

Factory Setting

Recommended Setting

Varies by KVA

2 to default

20ms

200 to 1000ms

1.0

0.5 to 1.5

Varies by KVA and Voltage

Default to default + 3 to 5V*

Adjustment Method • Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high. • Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds. • Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. • Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds. • Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads. • Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds. • Reduce the setting if Shock at startup is large.

* The setting is given for 220V class drives. Double the voltage for 440V class drives.

Cont.

6-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 6.3 Optimum Parameter Adjustment (SLV or SV Mode) Control Method

Sensorless Vector Control (SV or SLV Mode) (G01-03=2)

Name (Parameter Number) ASR proportional (P) gain 1 (G30-01) and ASR proportional (P) gain 2 (G30-03) ASR integral (I) time 1 (G30-02) and ASR integral (I) time 2 (G30-04)

Performance

Factory Setting

• Torque and Speed response • Controlling Hunting and vibration

G30-01: 0.00 G30-03: 0.02

• Torque and Speed response • Controlling Hunting and vibration

1.0sec

Recommended Setting

Adjustment Method

By user

• Increase the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

By user

• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow. • Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.

ASR switching frequency (G30-09)

Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according to the output frequency

0.0Hz

0.0 to max. output frequency

ASR primary delay time (G30-09)

Controlling hunting and vibration

0.005sec

By user

Carrier frequency setting (G04-01)

• Reducing motor magnetic noise • Controlling Hunting and vibration at low speeds (3Hz or less)

Varies by KVA

2.0 kHz to default

Set the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both high speed and low-speed operation. Increase the setting if machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily. • Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high. • Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.

. Use slip compensation to improve speed precision during V/f control (G03-01 = 0).Set the Motor Rated Current (G07-04), Motor Rated Slip (G07-02), and Motor No-load Current (G07-17), and then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (G28-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. . To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (G03-01=1), set the ASR parameters (G30-01 to G30-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting.) ASR for V/f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for SLV mode or SV mode, cannot be set.

6-9

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual The following user parameters will also indirectly affect the control system. Table 6.4 Parameters Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications Name (Parameter Number) Hold function (G25-01 to G25-04) Droop function (G26-01 to G26-02) Acceleration / Deceleration times selection (G03-01 to G03-12) S-curve Acceleration / Deceleration (G15-01 to G15-04) Jump frequencies (G17-01 to G17-04) Stall prevention (G09-01 to G09-07)

Torque Detection and Limitation (G33-01 to G33-03)

Application Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes. Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can be used when the control mode (G01-03) is set to 2 or 3. Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration. Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration. Used to avoid resonance points during operation. Used to prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting G09-04 to 0 Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased, use a motor with higher capacity than the Drive. If a setting is reduced, stalling can occur under heavy loads.

6-10

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 7. PARAMETERS 7.1

Descriptions of Parameter / Function list

The Inverter’s parameters have been organized in different Code modes (U, G and T Code) and there are different groups for each Code mode that make it easier to read and set. User parameter tables are structured as follows. Parameter NO.

Name LCD Display (English)

Setting Factory Description Range Setting

Control Methods Ref V/F V/F SLV SV Page + PG *1

“ ” －Denotes that parameter can be changed during operation. . Parameter NO. . Name . LCD Display (English) . Description . Setting Range . Factory Setting . Control Methods

. Ref. Page

: Number of the parameter. : The name of the parameter. : The LCD display contents (for English). : Details for the function or settings of the parameter. : The setting range for the parameter. : The factory setting (each control mode has its own factory setting. Therefore, the factory setting changes when the control mode is changed. : Indicates the control modes in which the parameter can be read / set. －V/F : V/F control mode. －V/F+PG : VF control with PG (Encoder) feedback mode. －SLV : Sensorless vector control mode with auto tuning function. －SV : Sensor Vector (flux vector) control mode with PG feedback. *1. : Q－Items which can be monitored and set in either Quick Mode programming mode or Advanced programming mode. A－Items which can be monitored and set only in Advanced programming mode. X－Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control mode. : Reference page for more detailed information on the parameter.

7-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 7.2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels. The hierarchy of the LCD Digital Operator display. MENU

Drive Mode

.The inverter can be operated in this menu. . Status or fault message or real time trace can

Group Functions NO. U1 Status Monitor U2 Fault Information U3 Real Time Trace

LCD Display

Ref. page

Status Monitor Fault Information Real Time Trace

be displayed. Quick Programming Mode G01 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; G09, G13 & G31 .The inverter can be programmed in this menu. .To set / read the most commonly used parameters.

Group NO. G01 G02 G03 G04 G05

Advanced Programming Mode All Parameters .The inverter can be programmed or parameters can be copied to/from the Digital Operator in this menu. .To set / read every parameter.

G06 G07 G08 G09 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47

AUTO-TUNING

Function Start-UP Operation Mode Selection Accel / Decel Time Selection Carrier Frequency Selection Preset Reference and Process Operation V/F Pattern Setting Motor Parameter Motor Overload / Overheat Stall Prevention Multi-Function Digital Inputs (DI) Multi-Function Digital Outputs (DO) Analog Inputs (AI) Multi-Function Analog Outputs (AO) Pulse Input / Output (PI/PO) S-Curve Acceleration / Deceleration DC Injection Braking Jump Frequencies OV Prevention (OVP) Frequency Detection Fault Restart Reserved Timer I/O Function PID Control Energy Saving Hold Function Reserved Zero Servo Motor Slip Compensation Torque Compensation Speed Control (ASR) PG Feedback Setup Torque Control Torque Detection and Limitation Reserved Reserved Power Loss Ride Through and Speed Search Hardware Protection Communication Parameter Reserved Reserved KEB Function RTC Function Reserved Digital Operation Selection Multi-Function Selection Copy Function Traverse Function

Group Function NO. T Auto-Tuning

. The inverter can be programmed in this menu. . To Auto-tune the motor parameters in order to optimize motor control.

7-2

LCD Display

Ref. Page

Start-up Operation Sel Acc. / Dec. Time Carrier Frequency Ref. & Process V/F Pattern Motor Parameter Motor OL/OH Stall Prevention Multi-Function DI Multi-Function DO Analog Inputs Multi-Function AO Pulse I/P-O/P S-Curve DC Inj. Braking Jump Frequencies OV Prevention Freq. Detect Fault Restart Reserved Timer I/O Func. PID Control Energy Saving Hold Function Reserved Zero Servo Slip Compen. Torque Compen. Speed Control PG Feedback Torque Control Torque Detect Reserved Reserved Pwl & Spd. Srch. H/W Protection Communication Reserved Reserved KEB Function RTC Function Reserved Keypad Func. Sel. Multi-Func. Sel. Copy Function Traverse Func.

LCD Display Auto-tuning

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 7.3. Parameter Tables 7.3.1. Quick and Advanced Programming Mode Parameters (G Code) Group 01: Start-Up Name Parame ter LCD Display NO. (English) Â&#x201E; Reserved G01-01

Â&#x201E;

Description

Reserved

Setting Factory Range Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

0 to 0

0 to 2

0 to 3

Reserved

Parameter Access Level

G01-02 Access Level

Control Method Selection G01-03 Control Method

Selects which parameters are accessible (set / read) via the Digital Operator. 0: Read only (U1 to U3: read only, G01-01 to G01-38 and G02-01 to G02-08: setting & reading enabled). 1: User level (Only parameters in G01-01 to G01-38 can be read and set). 2: Advanced level (Parameters can be set and read in both Quick programming mode (Q) and Advanced programming mode. (A)). Selects the control mode of the inverter. This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by the initializing operation (G01-04) 0: V/F (V/F control without PG) 1: V/F+PG (V/F control with PG) 2: SLV (sensorless vector control) 3: SV (sensor vector, closed loop flux vector)

7-3

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parame ter LCD Display NO. (English)

G01-04

G01-05 G01-06 G01-07 G01-08 G01-09 G01-10 G01-11 G01-12 G01-13 G01-14 G01-15 G01-16 G01-17 G01-18

Description

Setting Factory Range Setting

Used to return all parameters (except G01-01, G01-03, G02-08, G06-02 and G45-01) Initialize to the factory or user defined initial settings. 0: No initialize 1: User defined initialization. (The user must first pre-record the user defined initial settings using G45-03). 2: 2-wire initialization (230V/460V), 0 to 999 (factory setting) 3: 3-wire initialization (230V/460V) Initialize 4: 2-wire initialization (200V/415V) 5: 3-wire initialization (200V/415V) 6: 2-wire initialization (200V/380V) 7: 3-wire initialization (200V/380V) 8-999:Reserved Password 1 0 to 9999 Password 1 Password 2 0 to 9999 Password 2 User . Selects the parameters to be G02-01 to Parameter 1 available in the User Access G47-08 User P1 level (G01-02=1). User Parameter 2 . These parameters are not User P2 related to the user defined User Parameter 3 initialization function. User P3 User Parameter 4 User P4 User Parameter 5 User P5 User Parameter 6 User P6 User Parameter 7 User P7 User Parameter 8 User P8 User Parameter 9 User P9 User Parameter 10 User P10 User Parameter 11 User P11 User Parameter 12 User P12 7-4

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

─

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parame ter LCD Display NO. (English) User G01-19 Parameter 13 User P13 User G01-20 Parameter 14 User P14 User G01-21 Parameter 15 User P15 User G01-22 Parameter 16 User P16 User G01-23 Parameter 17 User P17 User G01-24 Parameter 18 User P18 User G01-25 Parameter 19 User P19 User G01-26 Parameter 20 User P20 User G01-27 Parameter 21 User P21 User G01-28 Parameter 22 User P22 User G01-29 Parameter 23 User P23 User G01-30 Parameter 24 User P24 User G01-31 Parameter 25 User P25 User G01-32 Parameter 26 User P26 User G01-33 Parameter 27 User P27 User G01-34 Parameter 28 User P28 User G01-35 Parameter 29 User P29 User G01-36 Parameter 30 User P30 User G01-37 Parameter 31 User P31 User G01-38 Parameter 32 User P32

Description

Setting Factory Range Setting

G02-01 to G47-08

7-5

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

─

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 02: Operation Mode Selection Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English) Master Frequency Reference Selection G02-01 Freq Ref Source

RUN Command Selection G02-02 RUN Source

Stopping Method Selection G02-03 Stopping Method

Direction Lock Selection G02-04 Direction Lock

G02-05

Master Frequency Reference Characteristic Selection +/- Char.

Selects the master frequency reference input source. 0: Digital Operator: (parameter G05-01 preset) 1: Terminals: (analog input AI1 or AI2 based on G12-05 setting) 2: Communication (RS-422/485 from R(+), R(-),S(+),S(-) ports or USB from USB port) 3: Reserved 4: Reserved 5: Pulse train input (terminal PI) Selects the RUN and STOP command input source. 0: Digital Operator: (RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator) 1: Terminals: (digital input, ref to group 10 parameter) 2: Communication (RS-422/485 from R(+), R(-),S(+),S(-) ports or USB from USB port) 3: Reserved 4: Reserved Selects the stopping method when a stop command is input. 0: Deceleration to stop 1: Coast to stop: (free-running) 2: DC injection to stop: (stops faster than coast to stop) 3: Coast to stop with timer: (a new run command is disregarded if received before the timer expires during deceleration) Lock/unlock the motor selected direction. 0: Not Locked: (Forward / Reverse RUN command from terminals or Digital Operator is accepted) 1: Reverse Locked 2: Forward Locked Selects the master frequency reference characteristic corresponding to analog input signals. 0: Forward Characteristics (0-10V or 4-20mA/0-100%, -10V-0V/-100%-0) 1: Reverse Characteristics (10V-0 or 20-4mA/0-100%, -10V-0/0-100%)

7-6

Control Methods Ref. V/F V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Setting Range

Factory Setting

0 to 5

0 to 4

0 to 3

Q*1

0 to 2

0,1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

Setting Range

Description

Factory Setting

Control Methods Ref. V/F V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Selects the operation method when the frequency reference input is less than the minimum output frequency (Fmin,G06-07). 0:Run at frequency reference: (Fmin is not effective) 0 to 3 0 X X X A G02-06 1: Stop: (coast when the Zero-SPD frequency reference is below Operate G06-07) 2:Run at Fmin (G06-07) 3: Zero speed operation: (run at zero rpm) Scan Times at Sets the scan rate of control Digital Input circuit terminals (S1 to S8). G02-07 0,1 1 A A A A Terminals 0: One scan every 4ms 1: two scans every 8ms DI Scans CT/VT Mode Select the constant torque load or Selection variable load torque. This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by the initialization G02-08 0,1 0 A A X X operation (G01- 04) CT/VT Mode 0: CT mode (Constant Torque Load) 1: VT mode (Variable Torque Load) *1. The stopping methods of “dc injection to stop”(G02-03=2) and “Cost to stop with timer”(G02-03=3) are not available for SV control mode. Zero-Speed Operation Selection

Group 03: Acceleration / Deceleration Time Selection Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English) G03-01 G03-02 G03-03 G03-04 G03-05

1st Acceleration Time Tacc1 1st Deceleration Time Tdec1 2nd Acceleration Time Tacc2 2nd Deceleration Time Tdec2 3rd Acceleration Time Tacc3

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Control Methods Ref. V/F V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency (Fmax, G06-03).

0.0 10.0 sec to 6000.0 sec

Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.

0.0 to 10.0 sec 6000.0 sec

0.0 10.0 sec to 6000.0 sec

0.0 to 10.0 sec 6000.0 sec

The acceleration time when the multi-function digital input accel/decel time 1 (G10-01 to 08 set value = 12) is set to ON. The deceleration time when the multi-function digital input accel/decel time 1 (G10-01 to 08 setting value = 12) is set to ON. The acceleration time when the multi-function digital input accel/decel time 2 (G10-01 to 08 setting value = 13) is set to ON. 7-7

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G03-06 G03-07 G03-08

G03-09

G03-10

G03-11 G03-12

Setting Range

Description

3rd Deceleration The deceleration time when the multi-function digital input Time accel/decel time 2 (G10-01 to 08 setting value = 13) is set to ON. Tdec3 4th Acceleration The acceleration time when the Time multi-function digital input accel/decel 1 (setting value = 12) and accel/decel 2 (setting value = Tacc4 13) are set to ON. The deceleration time when the 4th Deceleration multi-function digital input accel/decel time 1 setting value = Time 12 and accel/decel time 2 setting Tdec4 value = 13 are set to ON. Sets the frequency for automatic 1st / 4th Acceleration / switching of accel/decel times : Deceleration Fout < G03-09: Accel/Decel time= Frequency (Tacc1,Tdec1) (i.e. G03-01 and G03-02 setting) Fout ≥ G03-09: Accel/Decel time= (Tacc4,Tdec4) Acc/Dec SW (i.e. G03-07 and G03-08 setting) Freq. * Multi-function inputs “Accel/Decel Time Selection 1” (setting value = 12) and “ Accel/Decel Time Selection 2 ” (setting value = 13) have priority over G03-09. Emergency Sets the time to decelerate from Stop maximum frequency to zero for Deceleration the Multi-function Digital Input Time “emergency stop” function. This function also can be used as a E-STOP Time stopped method when a fault has been detected. JOG Acceleration Sets the time for JOG operation to Time accelerate from zero to 60Hz JOG Tacc

Factory Setting

Control Methods Ref. V/F V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0.0 to 10.0 sec 6000.0 sec

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

0.0 to 6000.0 sec

5.0 sec

0.0 to 600.0 sec

10.0 sec

JOG 0.0 Deceleration Sets the time for JOG operation to to Time decelerate from 60HZ to zero 600.0 sec JOG Tdec

10.0 sec

7-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 04: Carrier Frequency Selection Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English)

G04-01

G04-02

G04-03

G04-04

G04-05

G04-06

G04-07

Sets the carrier frequency in KHz in a fixed pattern. (When G04-01 = 2 to 16) Set G04-01=0 to enable detailed Carrier Freq. setting using G04-05 to G04-07. Soft PWM Sets the soft-PWM function. Function 0: soft-PWM control disabled Selection 1: soft-PWM control enabled Soft PWM Sel Carrier Enable/disable the auto carrier Frequency frequency change function. auto Change 0: Disabled (the operation carrier Selection frequency depends on the G04-01 setting) Auto Carrier 1: Enabled Auto De-rating Enable/disable the auto de-rating function. Selection 0: Disable Auto Derating 1: Enable Sets the carrier frequency pattern Variable when G04-01=0. Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq. (KHz) Max. Limit Vari. Carr. Max. Fout Ă&#x2014; (G04-07) Ă&#x2014; K Variable G04-05 Carrier Frequency Min. G04-06 Limit Vari. Carr. Min. Fmax Output Variable (G06-03) Freq. Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Carrier Frequency Setting

Control Methods Ref. V/F V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Setting Range

Factory Setting

0 to 16 *2

Varies by KVA*1

0, 1

0*4

0, 1

2 to 16 KHz*2

Varies by KVA

2 to 16 KHz*2

Varies by KVA

00 To 99*3

Vari. Carr. Gain

*1. The setting range and factory setting depends on the inverter capacity (G45-01) and CT/VT mode (G02-08). The minimum value for SV and SLV mode is 4. *2. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity (G45-01) and CT/VT mode (G02-08). *3. This parameter can be set only when G04-01=17. *4. When the Soft-PWM function is enabled, the maximum carrier frequency will be limited to 8kHz.

7-9

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 05: Preset Reference and Process Operation Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English)

G05-01 G05-02 G05-03 G05-04 G05-05 G05-06 G05-07 G05-08 G05-09 G05-10 G05-11 G05-12 G05-13 G05-14

G05-15 G05-16

G05-17

Frequency Reference 1 Freq. Ref. 1 Frequency Reference 2 Freq. Ref. 2 Frequency Reference 3 Freq. Ref. 3 Frequency Reference 4 Freq. Ref. 4 Frequency Reference 5 Freq. Ref. 5 Frequency Reference 6 Freq. Ref. 6 Frequency Reference 7 Freq. Ref. 7 Frequency Reference 8 Freq. Ref. 8 Frequency Reference 9 Freq. Ref. 9 Frequency Reference 10 Freq. Ref. 10 Frequency Reference 11 Freq. Ref. 11 Frequency Reference 12 Freq. Ref. 12 Frequency Reference 13 Freq. Ref. 13 Frequency Reference 14 Freq. Ref. 14 Frequency Reference 15 Freq. Ref. 15 Frequency Reference 16 Freq. Ref. 16 JOG Frequency Reference JOG Ref.

Setting Factory Range Setting

Setting units are affected by G44-06.The Multi-function Digital Input terminals are used to select one of the multi-step frequency reference. These frequency references may also be used in conjunction with G05-20 to G05-36 to run a process operation (auto-run).

0.00 to 400.00 Hz*1

The frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG or RJOG command is ON. Setting units are affected by G44-06.

7-10

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

0.00Hz*1

6.00Hz*1

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G05-18

G05-19

G05-20 G05-21 G05-22 G05-23 G05-24 G05-25 G05-26 G05-27 G05-28 G05-29 G05-30 G05-31 G05-32 G05-33 G05-34 G05-35

Frequency Reference Upper Bound Ref. Up-Bound Frequency Reference Lower Bound Ref. Low-Bound Step 1 Run Time Run Time 1 Step 2 Run Time Run Time 2 Step 3 Run Time Run Time 3 Step 4 Run Time Run Time 4 Step 5 Run Time Run Time 5 Step 6 Run Time Run Time 6 Step7 Run Time Run Time 7 Step8 Run Time Run Time 8 Step9 Run Time Run Time 9 Step10 Run Time Run Time 10 Step11 Run Time Run Time 11 Step12 Run Time Run Time 12 Step 13 Run Time Run Time 13 Step 14 Run Time Run Time 14 Step 15 Run Time Run Time 15 Step 16 Run Time Run Time 16

Setting Factory Range Setting

Description

Sets the output frequency upper 0.0 bound as a percentage of the 100.0% to maximum output frequency (Fmax, 109.0 % G06-03 are 100%), Sets the output frequency lower bound as a percentage of the 0.0 to maximum output frequency (Fmax, 109.0 % G06-03 are 100%).

Sets the Auto-Run time when the Auto-Run mode G05-36 is ≠ 0.

7-11

0.0 to 6000.0 sec

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG A

0.0%

0.0 sec

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G05-36

G05-37

Setting Factory Range Setting

Description

Auto-Run Sets the Auto-Run Mode Operation Mode Selection 0: Ineffective 1: Auto-Run mode for single cycle. (Continues running from the unfinished step if restarting) 2: Auto-Run mode performed periodically. (Continues running from the unfinished step if restarting) 3: Auto-Run mode for single cycle, then holds the speed of final Auto-Run step. (Continues running from the Mode unfinished step if restarting) 4: Auto-Run mode for single cycle. (Starts a new cycle if restarting) 5: Auto-Run mode performed periodically. (Starts a new cycle if restarting) 6: Auto-Run mode for single cycle, then holds the speed of final step. (Starts a new cycle if restarting) Auto-Run Mode 0: Stop: (Coast to stop based on Selection 1 the G03-02 setting) 1: Auto-Run sel 1 Forward Run 2: Reverse Run

7-12

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

0 to 6

0 to 2

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter NO. G05-38 G05-39 G05-40 G05-41 G05-42 G05-43 G05-44 G05-45 G05-46 G05-47 G05-48 G05-49 G05-50 G05-51 G05-52

LCD Display (English)

Description

Auto-Run Mode Selection 2 Auto-Run sel 2 Auto-Run Mode Selection 3 Auto-Run sel 3 Auto-Run Mode Selection 4 Auto-Run sel 4 Auto-Run Mode Selection 5 Auto-Run sel 5 Auto-Run Mode Selection 6 Auto-Run sel 6 Auto-Run Mode Selection 7 Auto-Run sel 7 Auto-Run Mode Selection 8 Auto-Run sel 8 Auto-Run Mode Selection 9 Auto-Run sel 9 Auto-Run Mode Selection 10 Auto-Run sel 10 Auto-Run Mode Selection 11 Auto-Run sel 11 Auto-Run Mode Selection 12 Auto-Run sel 12 Auto-Run Mode Selection 13 Auto-Run sel 13 Auto-Run Mode Selection14 Auto-Run sel 14 Auto-Run Mode Selection 15 Auto-Run sel 15 Auto-Run Mode Selection 16 Auto-Run sel 16

Setting Factory Range Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

*1 The displayed set range and units can be changed through parameters G44-06 (Display Unit) and G44-07 (Engineering display units). For factory settings, the setting range is 0.00 to 400.00 Hz, the setting unit is 0.01 Hz (G44-06=0, G44-07=0).

7-13

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 06: V/F Pattern Setting Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

Description

Input Voltage Sets the motor input voltage. This setting is used as a reference Setting value for preset V/F patterns (G06-02 = 0 to E) and protective Input Voltage features, (e.g. overvoltage, braking transistor turn-on or stall prevention etc.). Sets pattern to the type of motor V/F Pattern being used and the type of Selection application. This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by the initialization operation (G01- 04) 0 to E: Selects from the 15 preset patterns. V/F Pattern F: Sets customer V/F pattern (with Sel voltage limit). FF: Sets customer V/F pattern (without voltage limit). Maximum These parameters are only Output applicable when a V/F pattern Frequency selection is set to customer V/F pattern (G 06-02 = F or FF). Fmax Base Frequency Fbase Middle Output Frequency 1 Fmid 1 Middle Output Frequency 2 Fmid 2 Minimum Output Frequency Fmin Maximum Please follow the hierarchy for frequency setting : Output Fmax ≥ Fbase ≥ Fmid1≥ Fmid2 Voltage ≥ Fmin (G06-03) to (G06-07) Vmax . There is no hierarchy for the Middle Output voltage setting. Voltage 1 . If the V/F characteristics are linear, set G06-06 and G06-07 Vmid 1 to the same value. In this case, G06-10 will be ignored. Middle Output Voltage 2 The Fbase needs to be set as rated frequency in motor Vmid 2 nameplate of for SLV control Minimum Output . The best setting of Fbase for all Voltage control mode is the rated frequency in motor nameplate Vmin

Setting Range

Factory Setting

230V: 155.0 to 255.0V

230.0V

460V: 310.0 to 510.0V

460.0V

0 to FF

Control Methods Ref. V/F V/F + SLV SV Page PG

40.0 to 400.0 Hz

60.0Hz*1

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

60.0Hz*1*2

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

60.0Hz*1

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

3.0Hz*1

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

1.5Hz*1

A A X 460V: 0.0 to 15.0V*1 510.0V Base Output 230V: 0.0 to 230.0V*1*2 Voltage 255.0V G06-12 Q Q X 460V: 0.0 to *1*2 Vbase 460.0V 510.0V *1. The factory setting will change when the control mode is changed. *2. G06-04 (Fbase), G06-08 (Vmax) and G06-12 (Vbase) are set automatically during auto-tuning, re-adjustment is not required.

G06-01

G06-02

G06-03 G06-04 G06-05 G06-06 G06-07

G06-08

G06-09

G06-10

G06-11

7-14

230V: 0.0 to 230.0V*1*2 255.0V 460V: 0.0 to 460.0V*1*2 510.0V 230V: 0.0 to 230.0V*1 255.0V 460V: 0.0 to 460.0V*1 510.0V 230V: 0.0 to 14.0V*1 255.0V 460V: 0.0 to 28.0V*1 510.0V 230V: 0.0 to 255.0V

7.5V*1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 07: Motor Parameter Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G07-01

G07-02

G07-03

Number of Motor Poles Motor Poles Motor Rated Slip Motor Rated Slip Motor Rated Output Power Mtr Rated Power Motor Rated Current

G07-04 Rated Current

G07-05

Motor No-Load Volt No-Load Volt

G07-06

G07-07

G07-08

G07-09

G07-10

G07-11

Motor Excitation Current Reference Excit. Current Motor Core Saturation Coefficient 1 Core Sat. Comp 1 Motor Core Saturation Coefficient 2 Core Sat. Comp 2 Motor Core Saturation Coefficient 3 Core Sat. Comp 3 Motor core loss

Control Methods V/F Ref. V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Sets the number of motor poles. This value is automatically set during auto-tuning (by T-07).

2,4,6,8 poles

Sets the motor rated slip in Hz. This value is automatically set during auto-tuning.

0.00 to 20.00 Hz

Varies*1by KVA

0.00 Varies*1by to KVA 600.00 KW

Varies*1by 0.1 KVA to 999.9A*2

Sets the motor nameplate rated output power in KW (e.g. 1HP = 0.75KW). This value is automatically set during auto-tuning (by T-02). Sets the motor nameplate full load current in increments of 0.01A. These set values will become the reference values for motor protection, torque limits and torque control. This value is automatically set during auto-tuning (by T-03). Sets the motor no load voltage in 1V increments. When a standard motor is used, the data is set automatically. Adjustment is not normally required. Sets the motor excitation current as a percentage of motor rated current (G07-04). The data is set automatically. Adjustment is not normally required. ‧G07-07:sets the motor core saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux. ‧G07-08:sets the motor core saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux. ‧G07-09:sets the motor core saturation coefficient at 137.5% of magnetic flux. ‧The setting range is : 0%<G07-07<100% 0%<G07-08<100% 100%<G07-09<300%

Sets the motor iron loss as a percentage of motor rated output (W) (G07-03) used for torque Motor core compensation. Usually setting is loss not necessary. Motor Sets the motors terminal Line-to-line resistance (including the motor Resistance external cable resistance) in ohm. R1 This value will be automatically Motor R1 set during auto-tuning.

230V: 50 to 240V

Varies*1by KVA

460V: 100 to Varies*1by 480V KVA 10.0 to 100.0%

Varies*1by KVA

0 to 100%

Varies*1by KVA

0 to 100%

Varies*1by KVA

100 to 300%

Varies*1by KVA

0.0 to 15.0%

Varies*1by KVA

0.001 to 60.000Ω

Varies*1by KVA

Cont.

7-15

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

Setting Range

Description

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F Ref. V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Motor Sets the motor’s Y-equivalent 0.01 Leakage model leakage inductance in mh. to Varies*1by X X A G07-12 Inductance This value will be automatically 200.00 KVA Llkg mh set during auto-tuning. Motor Llkg Motor Mutual Sets the motor’s Y-equivalent 0.1 Inductance model mutual inductance in mh. Varies*1by X X A to G07-13 KVA Lm This value will be automatically 6553.5 mh Motor Lm set during auto-tuning. Motor Rotor Sets the motor’s Y-equivalent Equivalent model rotor resistance in 0.001 Varies*1by X Resistance increments of 0.001 ohm. This X A G07-14 to 60.000Ω KVA R2 value will be automatically set Motor R2 during auto-tuning. Motor No-Load 0.01 Sets to the magnetizing current of Varies*1by A X X to G07-15 Current KVA the motor 600.00A No-Load Current *1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter Capacity (G45-01). *2. The setting range is from 10% to 100% of the corresponding Inverter rated current set by G45-01. Group 08: Motor Overload / Overheat Name Parameter LCD Display Description NO. (English)

G08-01

G08-02

G08-03

G08-04

---0B: Motor protection disabled. ---1B: Motor protection enabled. --0-B: Motor cold start protection. --1-B: Motor hot start protection. -0--B: Standard motor protection. -1--B: Inverter duty motor Mtr. Overload protection. Sel 0---B: Reserved 1---B: Reserved Selects the operation when the Motor Overheat motor temperature sensor (PTC Pre-alarm thermistor) input (terminal MT) Operation exceeds the pre-alarm detection level. Election (RT=550ohm or Tr-5℃) 0: Decelerate to stop Motor Pre-OH 1: Coast to stop 2: Continue operation (OH3 alarm Sel message on the Digital Operator flashes) Motor Selects the operation when the Overheat motor temperature sensor input Alarm exceeds the overheat alarm Operation detection level (RT≧1330ohm or Selection Tr+5℃). 0: Decelerate to stop Motor OH Sel 1: Coast to stop Motor Sets the time delay for motor Overheat overheat alarm protection when Protection the detected temperature of PTC Delay Time thermistor exceeds the overheat Motor OH alarm detection level. Time Motor Overload Protection Selection

7-16

Control Methods V/F Ref. V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Setting Range

Factory Setting

0000B to 1111B

0001B

0 to 2

0 to 1

1 to 300 sec

60sec

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G08-05

Motor PTC Input Filter Time Constant PTC Filter Time

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Sets the primary delay time constant for motor PTC thermistor input in seconds

0.00 to 5.00 sec

0.20sec

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Selects the stall prevention method during acceleration. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

0 to 1

Sets as a percentage of inverter rated current. Usually setting is not necessary.

30% to 200%

CT: 150% VT: 120%

0% to 100%

50%

0 to 1

330V to 425V (230V Class)

395V

Group 09: Stall Prevention Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G09-01

G09-02

G09-03

G09-04

G09-05

G09-06

G09-07

Stall Prevention Selection During Acceleration Accel Stall Sel Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration Acc. Stall Level Stall Prevention Limit During Acceleration

Description

Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of inverter rated current, when operation is in the frequency range above G06-04 Stall CH Level (Fbase, the constant power region). Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration Decel Stall Sel Stall prevention Level During Dec. Stall Level Stall prevention Selection During Running Run Stall Sel Stall prevention Level During Running Run Stall Level

Control Methods V/F Ref. V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Selects the stall prevention method during deceleration. 0: Invalid 1: Valid when using a braking resistor, use setting â&#x20AC;&#x153;0â&#x20AC;? Sets as the DC-bus voltage while stall prevention during deceleration occurred. Select the stall prevention method during running. 0: Invalid 1: Valid, deceleration time 1 (G03-02) 2: Valid, deceleration time 2 (G03-04) This parameter is effective when G09-05 is to 1 or 2. Set as a percentage of the inverter rated current. Decrease the set value if the motor stalls or excessive current occurs.

7-17

660V to 850V (460V Class)

Control Methods V/F Ref. V/F + SLV SV Page PG

790V

0 to 2

30% to 200%

CT: 160% VT: 120%

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

Setting Range

Description

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F Ref. V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Running Stall 2 Detection Sets the running stall detection to G09-08 100ms A A A X Time time 100 Run Stall ms Time *1. When the setting value of G06-01 is less than 400V, the factory setting of G09-05 is 790V. Otherwise, if G06-01 is greater than 400V the factory setting of G09-05 will be 680V. Group 10: Multi-Function Digital Inputs (DI) Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English) G10-01

G10-02

G10-03

G10-04

G10-05

G10-06

G10-07

G10-08

Terminal S1 Function Selection S1 Function Sel Terminal S2 Function Selection S2 Function Sel Terminal S3 Function Selection S3 Function Sel Terminal S4 Function Selection S4 Function Sel Terminal S5 Function Selection S5 Function Sel Terminal S6 Function Selection S6 Function Sel Terminal S7 Function Selection S7 Function Sel Terminal S8 Function Selection S8 Function Sel

Control Methods V/F SL S V/F + V V PG

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Multi-function Digital Input 1 (factory setting = Forward Run)

0 to 50

Multi-function Digital Input 2 (factory setting = Reverse Run)

0 to 50

Multi-function Digital Input 3 (factory setting = External Fault)

0 to 50

Multi-function Digital Input 4 (factory setting = Fault Reset)

0 to 50

Multi-function Digital Input 5 (factory setting= multi-step 1 speed reference)

0 to 50

2-wire: 7 3-wire: 4

Multi-function Digital Input 6 (factory setting= multi-step 2 speed reference)

0 to 50

2-wire: 8 3-wire: 7

Multi-function Digital Input 7 (factory setting = JOG)

0 to 50

2-wire: 11 3-wire: 8

Multi-function Digital Input 8 (factory setting = External Baseblock)

0 to 50

7-18

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) Terminal S1-S4 type G10-09 Selection S1-S4 type Terminal S5-S8 type G10-10 Selection S5-S8 type

Control Methods V/F SL S + V/F V PG V

Description

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Multi-function Digital Input S1-S4 type Selection

0000B to 1111B

0000B

Multi-function Digital Input S5-S8 type Selection

0000B to 1111B

0000B

7-19

Ref. Page

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 11: Multi-Function Digital Outputs (DO) Name Parameter LCD Display Description NO. (English)

G11-01

G11-02

G11-03

G11-04

G11-05

Terminal R1A-R1C Function Selection R1A-R1C Function Terminal R2A-R2C Function Selection R2A-R2C Function Terminal R3A-R3C Function Selection R3A-R3C Function Terminal R4A-R4C Function Selection R4A-R4C Function

R1A-R4C type

Factory Setting

Multi-function Contact output 1 (factory setting = fault)

0 to 28

Multi-function Contact output 2 (factory setting = during running)

0 to 28

Multi-function Contact output 3 (factory setting= zero speed)

0 to 28

Multi-function Contact output 4 (factory setting = inverter ready)

0 to 28

0000B to 1111B

0000B

---0B: (N.O.) ---1B: (N.C.) --0-B: (N.O.) --1-B: (N.C.) -0--B: (N.O.) -1--B: (N.C.) 0---B: (N.O.) 1---B: (N.C.)

Group 12: Analog Inputs (AI) Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

R1A-R1C (N.O.) R1A-R1C (N.C.) R2A-R2C (N.O.) R2A-R2C (N.C.) R3A-R3C (N.O.) R3A-R3C (N.C.) R4A-R4C (N.O.) R4A-R4C (N.C.)

Setting Range

Description

G12-01

Terminal AI1 Sets the signal level of terminal Signal Level AI1. 0 : 0 to 10V (12-bit) Selection 1 : -10V to 10V (12-bit + polarity AI1 Level Sel input)

G12-02

Terminal AI1 Sets the frequency when 10V is Gain Setting input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (G06-03, Fmax). AI1 Gain

G12-03

Terminal AI1 Sets the frequency when 0V is Bias Setting input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (G06-03, Fmax). AI1 Bias

Control Methods V/F S V/F + SL V V PG

Setting Range

7-20

0 to 1

Ref. Page

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG 0

0.0 to 1000.0% 100.0%

-100.0% to 100.0%

0.0%

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G12-04

G12-05 G12-06 G12-07

G12-08

G12-09 G12-10 G12-11

G12-12

Setting Range

Description

Sets the signal level of Terminal AI2 Multi-function Analog Input Signal Level terminal AI2 Selection 0 : 0 to 10V (dip switch SW1B toward “V”) (12bit) 1 : -10V to 10V (dip switch SW1B toward “V”) (12bit+polarity AI2 Level Sel input) 2 : 4 to 20mA (dip switch SW1B toward “I”) (12bit) Terminal AI2 Selects the function of Function Multi-function Analog Input Selection terminal AI2 AI2 Function Terminal AI2 Sets the output level when Gain Setting terminal AI2 is 10V (or 20mA). Sets according to the 100% value AI2 Gain for the function set for G12-05. Terminal AI2 Sets the output level when Bias Setting terminal AI2 is 0V (or 4mA). Sets according to the 100% value for AI2 Bias the function set for G12-05. Sets the signal level of Terminal AI3 Multi-function Analog Input Signal Level terminal AI3 Selection 0 : 0 to 10V (dip switch SW1C toward “V”) (12-bit) 1 : -10V to 10V (dip switch SW1C toward “V”) (12-bit+polarity AI3 Level Sel input) 2 : 4 to 20mA (dip switch SW1C toward “I”) (12-bit) Terminal AI3 Selects the function of Function Multi-function Analog Input Selection terminal AI 3 AI3 Function Terminal AI3 Sets the output level when Gain Setting terminal AI3 is 10V (or 20mA). Sets according to the 100% value AI3 Gain for the function set for G12-09. Terminal AI3 Sets the output level when Bias Setting terminal AI3 is 0V (or 4mA). Sets according to the 100% value for AI3 Bias the function set for G12-09. Analog Input This parameter adjusts the filter Filter Time time constant for all 3 analog inputs (AI1, AI2, AI3). Effective for Constant noise control etc. Increase to add AI Filter Time stability, decrease to improve response.

7-21

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0 to 2

0 to 19

0.0 to 1000.0% 100.0%

-100.0% to 100.0%

0.0%

0 to 2

0 to 19

0.0 to 1000.0% 100.0%

-100.0% to 100.0%

0.0%

0.00 to 2.00 sec

0.03 sec

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 13: Multi-Function Analog Outputs (AO) Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English)

G13-01

G13-02 G13-03 G13-04

G13-05

G13-06 G13-07 G13-08

Setting Range

Terminal AO1 Sets the signal level of Signal Level Multi-function Analog Output Selection terminal AO1. 0: 0 to 10V (jumper JP1 in the “V” position) AO1 Level Sel 1: -10V to 10V (jumper JP1 in the “V” position) Terminal AO1 Function Sets the number of the monitor Selection item to be output (U1-01to U1-45) AO1 Function from terminal A01 and GND. Sel Terminal AO1 Sets the Multi-function Analog Gain Setting Output AO1 voltage level gain when selected monitor is at 100%. The maximum output from the AO1 Gain terminal is 10V or -10V. Terminal AO1 Sets the Multi-function Analog Bias Setting Output AO1 voltage level bias when selected monitor is at 0%. The maximum output from the AO1 Bias terminal is 10V or -10V. Terminal AO2 Sets the signal level of Signal Level Multi-function Analog Output terminal AO2. Selection 0: 0 to 10V (jumper JP2 in the “V” position) AO2 Level Sel 1: -10V to 10V (jumper JP2 in the “V” position) Terminal AO2 Function Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-01 to U1-45) Selection AO2 Function from terminal A02 and GND. Sel Terminal AO2 Sets the Multi-function Analog Gain Setting Output AO2 voltage level gain when selected monitor is at 100%. The maximum output from the AO2 Gain terminal is 10V or –10V. Terminal AO2 Sets the Multi-function Analog Bias Setting Output AO2 voltage level bias when selected monitor is at 0%. The maximum output from the AO2 Bias terminal is 10V or -10V.

7-22

Control Methods Ref. Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0 to 1

1 to 29

0.0% to 1000.0% 100.0%

-100.0% to 100.0%

0.0%

0 to 1

1 to 29

0.0% to 1000.0% 100.0%

-100.0% to 100.0%

0.0%

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 14: Pulse Input / Output (PI / PO) Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English)

G14-01

■ G14-02 ■ G14-03 ■ G14-04 ■ G14-05 ■

G14-06

■ G14-07

■

G14-08

■ G14-09

Setting Range

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Pulse Input (PI) Selects the function of the Pulse Train Input terminal PI. Function 0: Frequency reference Selection 0 to 3 0 1: PID feedback value PI Function 2: PID target value 3: Reserved Pulse Input (PI) Set the number of pulses (in Hz) 1000 to that is equal to the maximum Scaling 32000 HZ 1000HZ PI Scaling output frequency (G06-03). Pulse Input (PI) Set the output level when the 0.0 Gain Pulse Train Input is at 100% as a to 1000.0% 100.0% percentage of maximum output PI Gain frequency (G06-03) Pulse Input (PI) Set the output level when the -100.0% to Bias 0.0% 100.0% Pulse Train Input is 0. PI Bias Pulse Input (PI) 0.00 Filter Time Set the Pulse Train Input primary to 0.1sec delay filter time constant. 2.00 sec PI Filter Selects the function of Multi-function Pulse Output Pulse Output 1 terminal PO1. (PO1) Function 1: Frequency reference Selection (i.e.U1-01). 2: Output frequency (i.e.U1-02). 1 to 7 2 3: Output frequency after Soft-start (i.e.U1-33). 4: Motor speed (i.e.U1-07). PO1 Function 5: PID feedback value (i.e.U1-32). 6: PID input value (i.e.U1-29). 7: PG pulse monitor output. Pulse Output Sets the number of pulses output (PO) Scaling when speed is 100% (in Hz). Set 0 G14-06 = 2 and G14-07 = 0 to to 1000Hz make the pulse train output 1 PO1 Scaling (PO1) synchronize with the output 32000 Hz frequency. Pulse Output 2 Selects the function of (PO2) Function Multi-function Pulse Output Selection terminal PO2. 1:Frequency reference (i.e.UI-01). 2:Output frequency (i.e.UI-02). 1 to 7 7 3:Output frequency after Soft-start (i.e.UI-33). PO2 Function 4:Motor speed (i.e.UI-07). 5:PID feedback value (i.e.UI-32). 6.PID input value (i.e.UI-29). 7:PG pulse monitor output. Pulse Output 2 Sets the number of pulses output (PO2) Scaling when speed is 100% (in Hz). Set G14-08=2 and G14-09=0 to ake 0 to 32000 Hz 1000Hz the pulse train output 2 (PO2) PO2 scaling synchronize with the output frequency.

7-23

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 15: S-Curve Acceleration / Deceleration Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English) G15-01

G15-02

G15-03

G15-04

S-Curve for Acceleration at Start S Tacc @ Start S-Curve for Acceleration at End S Tacc @ End S-Curve for Deceleration at Start S Tdec @ Start S-Curve for Deceleration at End S Tdec @ End

Sets the S curve parameters. A large S curve time will give the smoothest transition between speed changes.

0.00 to 2.50 sec

Group 16: DC Injection Braking Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G16-01

G16-02

G16-03

G16-04

G16-05

G16-06

DC Injection Braking Starting Frequency Brake Start Freq DC Injection Braking Current Brake Current DC Injection Braking Time at Stop Brake Time @ Stop DC Injection Braking Time at Start Brake Time @ Start Maximum Pre-excitation Time Max PreExct Tm Pre-excitation Initial Level Pre-Excite Level

Setting Range

Description

Used to set the frequency at which DC injection braking is started when deceleration to stop is selected.

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG 0.00 sec

0.00 sec

Control Methods Factory V/F Ref. Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0.0 to 10.0 Hz

0.5 Hz

0 to 100%

50%

Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking after a stop.

0.00 to 10.00 sec

0.5 sec

Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start.

0.00 to 10.00 sec

0.0 sec

Used to set the Max time to perform pre-excitation to build the motor magnetic flux before operation.

0.00 to 10.00 sec

2.00 sec

100 to 200%

100%

Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the inverter rated current.

Used to set the pre-excitation initial level when starting the pre-excitation operation.

7-24

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 17: Jump Frequencies Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G17-01 G17-02 G17-03 G17-04

Frequency Jump Point 1 Freq Jump 1 . Sets the center values of the Frequency jump Jump Point 2 frequencies in Hz Freq Jump 2 Frequency Jump Point 3 Freq Jump 3 Frequency Jump Width Sets the jump frequency Freq Jump bandwidth in Hz. Width

Group 18: OV Prevention Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) ■ G18-01 ■ G18-02 ■ G18-03 ■ G18-04

G18-05

G18-06

G18-07

G18-08

Setting Range

Description

0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 25.5 Hz

Setting Range

Description

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG 0.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

1.0Hz

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

DC Filter Rise Sets the DC voltage rise amount 0.1 Amount to 0.1 Vdc per scan (ΔV/Δt, per scan Δt = 10.0 Vdc DC Filter Rise 4ms) of the DC bus filter. DC Filter Fall Sets the DC voltage fall amount 0.1 Amount to 5.0 Vdc per scan (ΔV /Δt, per scan Δt = 10.0 Vdc DC Filter Fall 4ms) of the DC bus filter. DC Filter 0.0 Deadband Level Sets the dead-band level of the 10.0 to Vdc DC Flt DC bus filter. 99.0 Vdc Deadband Overvoltage Sets the frequency reference gain Prevention to convert the DC bus overshoot 0.000 (OVP) to 0.050 into the frequency added to Frequency 1.000 accelerate the inverter to prevent Reference Gain OVP Freq Gain regeneration. Overvoltage Sets the maximum OVP frequency Prevention that may be added to the 0.00 (OVP) to 5.00 Hz frequency reference accelerating Frequency 10.00 Hz Reference Limit the inverter to prevent OVP Freq Limit regeneration. Overvoltage Prevention Sets the DC bus voltage level 230V: 200 300Vdc (OVP) where the deceleration rate starts Deceleration increasing from G03-06 (Tdec3) to to 400 Vdc Start Voltage prevent the DC bus voltage from 460V: 400 OVP Decel Start increasing. to 800 Vdc 700Vdc Overvoltage Sets the DC bus voltage level Prevention where the deceleration rate will be 230V: 200 350Vdc (OVP) to 400 Vdc Deceleration set to G03-08 (Tdec4). This Stop Voltage parameter is used to control the rate of change of the deceleration 460V: 400 OVP Decel Stop time. to 800 Vdc 750Vdc Overvoltage Prevention Sets whether the OVP function is (OVP) activated. 0,1 0 Operation 0: Disabled Selection 1: Enabled OVP Sel

7-25

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 19: Frequency Detection Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G19-01

G19-02

G19-03

G19-04

G19-05

Frequency Agree Detection Level During Acceleration Accel Freq Det Lvl Frequency Agree Detection Level During Deceleration Decel Freq Det Lvl Frequency Agree Detection Width Freq Agree Width Frequency Reference Loss Detection selection

G20-02

G20-03

Sets the frequency agree detection level and detection width and provides an output to the multi-function digital output terminals.

0.0 Hz

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

0.1 to 25.5 Hz

2.0 Hz

80.0%

Setting Range

Description

Number of Auto Restart Attempt Sets the number of auto- restart attempts. No. of Restart Auto Restart Sets the auto restart operation Time Interval time interval when the number of auto restart attempts is more than Time of Restart 2. Auto Restart Sets whether the fault contact output is activated during a fault Operation restart. Selection 0: Disabled (Fault contact will not activate during an auto-restart attempt) Restart Sel 1: Enabled (Fault contact will activate during an auto-restart attempt)

7-26

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

Determines how the inverter operates when the frequency 0 reference is lost. to 0:stop (inverter will stop) 1 1:run at G19-05 * previous Fref Loss Sel reference Sets the frequency reference level Frequency Reference Level when the frequency reference loss function is enabled (G19-04=1) at Loss 0.0 and the frequency reference is Frequency to 100.0% lost. Reference Fref = G19-05 * Fref at the time of Fref at Loss loss.

Group 20: Fault Restart Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G20-01

Setting Range

Description

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0 to 10

0.0 to 7200 sec

0 sec

0,1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 22: Timer Function Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G22-01

G22-02

■ G23-02 ■ G23-03 ■ G23-04 ■ G23-05 ■ G23-06 ■

Setting Range

Sets the amount of time delay when Timer Function the multi-function digital input is ON-Delay Time closed, and the multi-function digital 0.0 to 6000.0 output turns on. This function sec enabled when a timer function is Timer ON-Delay set in G10-口口(=28) and G11-口口 (=19). Timer Function Sets the amount of time the output 0.0 OFF-Delay Time stays energized after the digital to 6000.0 Timer sec input is turned off. OFF-Delay

Group 23: PID Control Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G23-01

Description

Setting Range

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0.0 sec

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

This parameter determines the function of PID control. PID Control ---0B: PID Control Disable Mode Selection ---1B: PID Control Enabled. --0-B: PID output forward 0000B to 0000B characteristics control 1111B --1-B: PID output reversed characteristics control -0--B: Bias D control PID Mode -1--B: PID feedback is D-controlled 0---B: Ref.= PID output 1---B: Ref.= PID output + Target PID Proportional Sets the P-control gain (P) for the 0.00 (P) Gain to 1.0 PID controller. P-control is not 10.00 performed when the setting is 0.00. PID P Gain PID Integral (I) Sets the I-control integral time (I) Time for the PID controller in seconds. to 0.00 100.00 1.00 sec I-control is not performed when the sec PID I Time setting is 0.00 sec. PID Derivate (D) Sets the D-control derivate time (D) 0.00 for the PID controller in seconds. time to 0.00 sec D-control is not performed when the 10.00 sec PID D Time setting is 0.00 sec. PID Feedback 0.01 Gain to 1.00 Sets the feedback signal gain. 10.00 PID Fdbk Gain PID Integral Sets the I-control maximum output limit as a percentage of the 0.00 Limit to 100.0% 100.0% maximum output frequency PID I-Limit (G06-03, Fmax). PID Limit

G23-07 PID Limit

Sets the maximum output limit for the PID controller as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (G06-03, Fmax).

7-27

0.00 to 100.0% 100.0%

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO. â&#x2013; G23-08 â&#x2013; G23-09 G23-10

G23-11

G23-12

G23-13

G23-14

G23-15

G23-16

G23-17

G23-18

G23-19

Name LCD Display (English)

Description

Sets the low pass filter time constant for for the PID controller output in seconds. (Not usually necessary to PID Delay set). Sets the PID-control bias as a PID Output Bias percentage of the maximum output PID Bias frequency (G06-03,Fmax). PID Output Gain Sets the PID output gain. Setting PID Output Gain PID Reverse 0:When the PID output is negative, Output Selection the inverter stops. (0 limit is automatic when reverse prohibit is selected, G02-04=1) PID Reverse Sel 1: Reverse when PID output is negative, inverter reverses. PID Target Accel / Decel Time Applies an accel / decel time to the PID target input. PID Target SFS Sets whether the G23-14 setting is PID Target to be Selection the PID control target input. 0: Disabled PID Target Sel 1: Enabled (The other target settings are disabled) Sets the PID target value as a PID Target Value percentage of maximum output frequency. (Used only when PID Target G23-13=1). PID Feedback 0: Disabled (No detection of loss of PID feed-back) Loss Detection 1: Warning (Operation continues Selection during PID feedback loss detection, FBK message blinking on display and fault contact output does not operate). Fdbk Loss Det 2: Fault (Coasts to stop during PID feedback loss detection, FBK message displayed and fault contact output operates). PID Feedback Sets the PID feedback loss Loss Detection detection level as a percentage of Level maximum output frequency Fdbk Loss Lvl (G06-03, Fmax). PID Feedback Loss Detection Sets the PID feedback loss Time detection delay time in seconds. Fdbk Loss Time PID Primary Delay Time

PID Feedback Display Bias Fdbk DSPL Bias PID Feedback Display Gain Fdbk DSPL Gain

Setting Range

0.00 to 0.00 sec 10.00 sec

-100.0 to 100.0%

0.0%

0.0 to 25.0

1.0

0,1

0.0 to 25.5 sec

0.0 sec

0,1

0.0 to 100.0%

0.0%

0 to 2

0 to 100%

0.0 to 10.0 sec

1.0 sec

0.00

1.00

Sets the display unit of the PID feedback value using Bias (G23-18) -99.99 and Gain (G23-19). The converted to +99.99 PID feedback value can be monitored by the status monitor 0.00 parameter U1-32 or digital operator to after turning on power supply when 99.99 G44-02=32.

7-28

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

G23-20

G23-21

G23-22

G23-23

G23-24

Name LCD Display (English)

Description

Setting Range

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Defines the control for the PID sleep function. 0: Disabled (The PID sleep function is disabled) 0 to 2 1 1: Enabled (Internal control depend on G23-21 to G23-24) PID Sleep Sel 2: One of multi-function digital inputs controls the PID sleep function. PID Sleep Start 0.00 Sets the PID sleep function start Frequency to 180.00 0.00 Hz frequency. Hz Sleep Freq PID Sleep Delay 0.0 Time Set the time delay for the PID sleep to 0.0 sec function. Sleep Delay 255.5 sec Time PID Wake-up 0.00 to Start Frequency Sets the PID wake-up function start 0.00 Hz frequency. 180.00 Wake-up Freq Hz PID Wake-up 0.0 Sets the time delay for the PID to Delay Time 0.0 sec wake-up function. 255.5 Wake-up Delay sec PID Sleep Function Selection

7-29

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 24: Energy Saving Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G24-01

G24-02

G24-03

G24-04

G24-05

G24-06

â&#x2013; G24-07

Auto Energy Saving (AES) Control Selection AES Sel AES Voltage Upper Limit at 60Hz AES Vup (60Hz) AES Voltage Upper Limit at 6Hz AES Vup (6 Hz) AES Voltage Lower Limit at 60Hz AES Vlow (60Hz) AES Voltage Lower Limit at 6Hz AES Vlow (6 Hz) AES Tuning Operation Voltage Limit

Description Auto energy saving (AES) function enable/disable selection. 0:Disabled 1:Enabled

0,1

Sets the upper limit of the output voltage reference calculated in AES at 60Hz. Rated output voltage is 100%.

0 to 120%

120%

Sets the upper limit of the output voltage reference calculated in AES at 6Hz. Rated output voltage is 100%.

0 to 25%

16%

Sets the lower limit of the output voltage reference calculated in AES at 60Hz. Rated output voltage is 100%.

0 to 100%

50%

Sets the lower limit of the output voltage reference calculated in AES at 6Hz. Rated output voltage is 100%.

0 to 25%

12%

0 to 100%

100%

0 to 5000 ms

20 ms

Sets the voltage step range when the starting voltage is 100% at AES tuning. Rated output voltage is 100%.

0.1 to 10.0%

0.5%

Sets the voltage step range when the starting voltage is 5% at AES tuning. Rated output voltage is 100%.

0.1 to 10.0%

0.2%

Coefficient is set to maximize motor 0.00 Varies efficiency. Normally adjustment is not to 655.35 by KVA required.

Sets the limit value of the voltage control range at AES tuning. Rated output voltage is 100%. When 0 is AES Tuning Vlim set, AES tuning is disabled. AES Tuning Operation Control Cycle Time

Sets the average time of the power calculated in AES.

AES Tuning Time

G24-08

G24-09

G24-10

AES Tuning Operation Voltage Step at 100% Tuning V(100%) AES Tuning Operation Voltage Step at 5% Tuning V(5%) Energy Saving Coefficient AES Coefficient

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

7-30

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

G24-11

G24-12

Name LCD Display (English) Manual Energy Saving (MES) Gain MES Gain Manual Energy Saving (MES) Frequency MES Freq

Group 25: Hold Function Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G25-01 G25-02 G25-03 G25-04

Hold Frequency at Start Fhold @ Start Hold Time at Start Thold @ Start Hold Frequency at Stop Fhold @ Stop Hold Time at Stop Thold @ Stop

Description

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Sets the Inverter output voltage as a percentage of the V/f pattern voltage 0 to when the Manual Energy Saving 100 % command is input set by one of the Multi-function Digital Input terminals. Sets the Manual Energy saving effective minimum frequency in Hz. 0.00 to The function is valid only when the 400.00 frequency is greater then the manual Hz energy saving frequency and only when the speed is constant.

Description

Sets the hold frequency and hold time at start and stop to prevent motor stalling when starting or stopping a motor with heavy load.

80 %

0.0 Hz

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG 0.0 0.0 Hz A A A A to 400.0 Hz 0.0 0.0 sec to 10.0 sec

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

0.0 Hz

0.0 .0.0 sec to 10.0 sec

Group 26: Reserved Group 27: Zero Servo Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G27-01

G27-02

G27-03

Description

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Zero-Servo Gain Sets the position control loop gain when the zero-servo command is 0 to 50 Zero-Servo Gain set by one of the multi-function digital inputs. Zero-Servo Sets the number of pulses used for Count 0 to 4096 one of the multi-function digital Zero-Servo outputs of â&#x20AC;&#x153;zero-servo completionâ&#x20AC;?. Count Zero Speed Enable / disable the zero speed Braking braking in the V/F control mode. Operation 0,1 0:Disabled Selection 1:Enabled Zero Spd Braking Sel

7-31

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 28: Motor Slip Compensation Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) â&#x2013; G28-01

G28-02

G28-03

G28-04

G28-05

G28-06

G28-07

Description

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Slip Sets the slip compensation gain to Compensation improve the speed accuracy for V/F Gain mode and SLV mode. In SLV mode, it is used to compensate at low 0.00 0.00 to speed. Usually adjustment is not (V/f) 2.50 1.00 necessary. If the actual speed is (SLV) Slip Comp Gain lower than the frequency reference, increase the setting. If the actual speed is higher than the frequency reference, decrease the setting. Slip Compensation Sets the slip compensation limit as a 0 to 250% 200% percentage of motor rated slip Limit (G7-02). Slip Comp Limit Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time

Sets the slip compensation primary delay time in increments of 0.1sec. Usually adjustment is not necessary. 0.0 to 1.0 sec If the motor speed is not stable 10.0 sec increase the setting. If the slip Slip Comp Filter compensation response is slow, decrease the setting. Slip Compensation Enables / disables the slip compensation during regeneration During 0,1 0 Regeneration operation. Selection 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Regen Slip Comp Sel High Speed Slip Sets the slip compensation gain to Compensation improve the speed accuracy for SLV -1.00 to 0 Gain 1.00 mode at high speed. Adjustment is HS Slip Cmp the same as G28-01. Gain Flux Orient Control delay Sets the delay time for the flux of 1 to 1000 100ms ms time Flux Orient Control. FOC Delay Tm Flux Orient Sets the gain for the flux of Flux 0.00 to 0.10 Control Gain 2.00 Orient Control. FOC Gain

7-32

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 29: Torque Compensation Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) â&#x2013; G29-01

G29-02

Setting Range

Description

Torque Sets the gain for the auto-torque boost Compensatio function to match the inverter output n Gain voltage to the motor load. The amount of voltage boost is based on motor Tq Comp current, motor terminal resistance and Gain output frequency. Torque Compensatio Sets the time constant of the auto n Primary torque boost function. Increase to add delay time stability, decrease to improve response. Tq Comp Time

7-33

0.0 to 2.0

Control Methods Factory Ref. V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0.6

0 to 10000ms 200 ms

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 30: Speed Control (ASR) Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) ■

■

G30-01

G30-02

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

For V/F mode: ASR z G30-01 and G30-03: set the Proportional proportional gain of the speed control (P) Gain 1 loop at 0% and 100% of G06-03 maximum output frequency. z ASR P Gain 1 G30-02 and G30-04: set the integral time of the speed control loop at 0% and 100% of G06-03 maximum output frequency. ASR Integral (I) Time 1

0.00 to 2.55*1

Varies by KVA

200%

5.0%

1.0%

0.01 Varies to 10.00 sec by KVA *2

ASR I Time 1 ■

■

G30-03

G30-04

For SLV Mode: ASR z G30-01 and G30-02: set the Proportional proportional gain and integral time of (P) Gain 2 ASR at output frequency above G30-17. z G30-03 and G30-04: set the ASR P Gain 2 proportional gain and the integral time of ASR at output frequency below G30-16. ASR Integral (I) Time 2

0.00 to 2.55*1

Varies by KVA

0.01 to Varies 10.00 sec by KVA *2

ASR I Time 2

G30-05

G30-06

G30-07

ASR Integral Sets the ASR integral upper limit as a (I) Limit percentage of motor rated torque. Set to a small value to prevent any radical ASR I Limit load change.

0 to 400%

ASR Positive Limit Sets the compensation frequency +/ASR + Limit limit for the speed control loop (ASR) to ASR Negative a percentage of the maximum output Limit frequency (G06-03). ASR – Limit

0.1 to 10.0% 0.1 to 10.0%

7-34

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G30-08

G30-09

G30-10

G30-11

G30-12

G30-13

G30-14

G30-15

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Enables / disables the integral control Integral Control during during accel / decel. Accel / Decel 0: Disabled (The integral function is not used while accel / decel, it is used at Selection constant speed only) PG PI / P Sel 1: Enabled (The integral function is used at all times) ASR Primary Sets the time constant for the speed Delay Time control loop to the torque command ASR Delay output. Time z G30-10and G30-11: set the Speed proportional gain and the integral Observer Propotional(P time of the speed observer at output frequency above G30-17. ) Gain1 SpdObsr P z G30-12 and G30-13: set the proportional gain and the integral Gain 1 time of the speed observer at output Speed frequency below G30-16. Observer z G30-14 and G30-15: set the speed Integral(I) observer low pass filter time constant Time 1 at high speed and low speed, SpdObsr I respectively. Time 1 z G30-16 and G30-17: set the high Speed speed and low speed gain switching Observer Propotional(P frequency for ASR PI gain (G30-01~G30-04) , speed observer ) Gain2 gain (G30-10~G30-13) and speed SpdObsr P observer low pass filter time constant Gain 2 (G30-14~G30-15). Speed z Difference between G30-16 and Observer G30-17 needs to be equal or greater Integral(I) than 4Hz Time 2 SpdObsr I Time 2 Speed FeedBack Low Pass Filter Time Constant 1 SpdFB LPF Tm 1 Speed FeedBack Low Pass Filter Time Constant 2 SpdFB LPF Tm 2

7-35

0,1

0.000 to 0.500 sec

0.001 Sec

0.00 to 2.55

0.61

0.01 to 10.00 sec

0.05

0.00 to 2.55

0.61

0.01 to 10.00 sec

0.06

0.001 to 1.000 s

Varies by KVA

0.001 to 1.000 s

0.030s

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

ASR Gain 0.0 Change G30-16 to Frequency1 400.0 Hz ASR Gain Chng F1 ASR Gain Change 0.0 G30-17 Frequency2 to 400.0 Hz ASR Gain Chng F2 Low Speed Speed Compensatio Sets the speed compensation for SLV 0.00 to G30-18 mode at low speed of 0.5~2Hz. 2.5 n Gain LS Spd Comp Gain High Speed Speed Compensatio Sets the speed compensation for SLV -10%~10 G30-19 n Gain mode at high speed. % HS Spd Cmp Gain *1: The range is 0.00 ~ 5.11 for software with version later than 1.02. *2: The range is 0.001 ~ 10.000sec for software with version later than 1.02.

7-36

4.0 Hz

8.0 Hz

1.00

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 31: PG Feedback Set-up Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G31-01

G31-02

G31-03

G31-04

G31-05

G31-06

G31-07

G31-08

G31-09

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Over-speed Sets the stopping method when an over-speed (OS) fault occurs. (OS) Operation 0: Decel to stop (Deceleration to stop using the active deceleration time) Selection 1: Coast to stop 2: Continue Running (OS blinks on the OS Sel display) Overspeed Sets the over-speed (OS) fault (OS) Detection detection. If the motor speed feedback (frequency) is greater than the G31-02 Level OS Det Lvl set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency G06-03 for a time Overspeed longer than G31-03, an over-speed (OS) (OS) fault will occur. The motor speed Detection feedback frequency = G31-02 * Delay Time G06-03. OS Det Time Deviation Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs. (DEV) Operation 0: Decel to stop (Deceleration to stop using the active deceleration time) Selection 1: Coast to stop 2: Continue Running (DEV blinks on DEV Sel the display) Deviation (DEV) Detection Sets the speed deviation (DEV) fault detection. If the speed deviation is Level greater than G31-05 set as a DEV Det Lvl percentage of the maximum output Deviation frequency, G06-03 for a time longer than G31-06, a deviation (DEV) fault (DEV) will occur. The speed deviation is the Detection difference between actual motor Delay Time speed and the frequency reference. DEV Det Time PG Open Sets the stopping method when a PG open (PGO) fault occurs. (PGO) Operation 0: Decel to stop (Deceleration to stop using the active deceleration time) Selection 1: Coast to stop PGO Sel 2: Continue Running (PGO blinks on the display) PG Open (PGO) Detection Sets the PG disconnection detection time. Time PGO Det Time PG Pulses / Sets the number of A-phase or Rev B-phase pulses per resloution of the PG Pulses PG.

7-37

0 to 2

0 to 120%

115%

0.0 to 2.0 sec 0.5 sec

0 to 2

0 to 50%

10%

0.0 to 10.0 sec 0.5 sec

0 to 2

0.0 to 10.0 sec 2.0 sec

0 to 60,000 ppr

1024 ppr

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G31-10

G31-11

PG Rotation Selection PG Rotation Sel PG Pulse Monitor Output Ratio PG Output Ratio

G31-12

G31-13

Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 PG Gear Teeth 1 Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 PG Gear Teeth 2

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

0: FWD=C.C.W 1: FWD=C.W Sets the PG output ratio of PG pulse output from the multi-function pulse output (terminal PO). G31-11=

□ □□ n k

And output ratio=(1+n)/k

0,1

001 to 132

1 to 1000

Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft (G31-12) and the PG (G31-13).

7-38

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 32: Torque Control Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) Torque Control Selection G32-01 Tq Control Sel Torque Reference G32-02 Delay Time Tref Filter Time Speed Limit Selection G32-03

G32-04

G32-05

Speed Limit Sel Speed Limit Value Speed Limit Value Speed Limit Bias Speed Limit Bias

Setting Factory Range Setting

Description

Selects speed or torque control in the SV control method. 0,1 0: Speed control mode 1: Torque control mode Sets the torque reference 0 to primary delay time to eliminate 1000 noise in the torque reference ms signal and adjust the response. Sets the speed limit command input method for the torque control mode. 0,1 0: Analog input (AI1 or AI2 based on the G12-05 setting) 1: Parameter G32-04 setting Sets the speed limit value during torque control mode as a -120% percentage of the maximum to output frequency (G06-03). 120% This function is effective only when G32-03=1. Sets the speed limit bias during 0 torque control mode as a to percentage of the maximum 120% output frequency (G06-03).

Group 33: Torque Detection and Limitation Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English)

Control Methods Ref. + SLV SV Page V/F V/F PG

0 ms

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

---0B: Torque Detection 1 Disable ---1B: Torque Detection 1 Enabled --0-B: Over Torque Detect --1-B: Under Torque Detect -0--B: Torque detection is only active during frequency agree 0000B -1--B: Torque detection is always to 1111B 0000B active during running 0---B: the operation continues Tq Det1 Sel after detection. (Warning operation) 1---B: inverter baseblocks after detection. (Protected operation) Sets the over-torque / Torque Detection 1 under-torque detection level as a percentage of inverter rated Level current or motor rated torque for 0 to 150% torque detection 1. 300% . SLV and SV mode: motor rated Tq Det1 Level torque = 100%. . V/F and V/F+PG mode : inverter rated current = 100% Torque Detection 1 Selection

G33-01

G33-02

7-39

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO. G33-03

G33-04

G33-05

G33-06

G33-07

G33-08

G33-09

G33-10

Name LCD Display (English) Torque Detection 1 Time Tq Det1 Time Torque detection 2 selection

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description Sets the over-torque / under-torque detection time for torque detection 1

0.0 to 0.1 sec 10.0 sec

---0B: Torque Detection 2 Disable ---1B: Torque Detection 2 Enabled --0-B: Over Torque Detect --1-B: Under Torque Detect -0--B: Torque detection is only active during frequency agree 0000B to 0000B -1--B: Torque detection is always 1111B active during running Tq Det2 Sel 0---B: the operation continues after detection. (Warning operation) 1---B: inverter baseblocks after detection . (Protected operation) Torque Sets the over-torque / Detection 2 under-torque detection level as a Level percentage of the inverter rated current or motor rated torque for 0 to 150% torque detection 2. 300% â&#x20AC;§SLV and SV mode: motor rated Tq Det2 Level torque= 100% â&#x20AC;§V/F and V/F+PG mode: inverter rated current = 100% Sets the over-torque / Torque Detection 2 under-torque detection time for 0.0 to 10.0 sec 0.1 sec torque detection 2. Time Tq Det2 Time Positive Driving Sets the torque limit value as a 0 to Torque Limit percentage of the motor rated 200% Positive Tq torque. Four individual quadrants 300% Limit can be set. Negative Driving Torque 0 to Limit 200% 300% Output Negative Tq Torque Limit : Forward (postive) : Reverse Driving Regenerating Forward G33-07 G33-10 Regenerative 0 to Torque Limit 200% Motor 300% Speed 0 100% FWD Regen -100% Tq Limit G33-09 G33-08 Reverse 0 to : Reverse (negative) : Forward Regenerating Driving Regenerative 300% Torque Limit 200% 0 REV Regen Tq Limit

Group 34: Reserved Group 35: Reserved

7-40

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 36: Power Loss Ride Through and Speed Search Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English)

G36-01

G36-02

G36-03

G36-04

G36-05

G36-06 G36-07

G36-08

G36-09

Enables or disables the momentary power loss function. 0: Disabled (Inverter trips on UV fault when power is lost). 1: Enabled (Inverter will restart if power returns within the ride-thru time set by G36-02). Power Loss Sel 2: Enabled (Inverter will restart if power returns before control power shut down). Momentary the power loss ride-thru time Power Loss Sets when momentary power loss is Ride-Thru Time enabled (G36-01=1). Ride -Thru Time Momentary the inverters minimum base Power Loss Sets block time in seconds, when the Minimum is restarted after a power Baseblock Time inverter loss ride through. Min B.B Time Speed Direction Search Sets the speed direction search operating current as a percentage Operating of motor rated current. Current Dir Srch Current Speed Search Operating Sets the speed search operating current as a percentage of motor Current rated current. Spd Srch Current Speed Search Integral Sets the output frequency Integral time during speed search. Time Spd Srch I Time Speed Search Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contactor on Delay Time Spd Srch Delay the output side of the inverter. Voltage Sets the time required to return Recovery Time the inverter output voltage to normal after completion of the Volt Recovery T speed search. Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection

Enables or disables the detection Bidirection of motor direction during speed Speed Search search. Selection 0: Disabled (Inverter uses the frequency reference direction) Bidir Srch Sel 1: Enabled (inverter uses the detected direction)

7-41

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0 to 2

0.0 to 2.0 sec

Varies by KVA

0.1 to 5.0 sec

Varies by KVA

0 to 100%

50%

0 to 100%

20%

0.1 to 10.0 sec 2.0 sec

0.0 to 20.0 sec 0.2 sec

0.0 to 5.0 sec 2.0 sec

0 to 1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 37: Hardware Protection Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G37-01

Input Phase Loss Protection Selection IPL Sel

G37-02

G37-03

G37-04

G37-05

Output Phase Loss Protection Selection OPL Sel Ground Fault Protection Selection GF Sel Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm Level OH Pre-Alarm Lv1 Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection OH Pre-Alarm Se1 Cooling Fan Operation Selection

G37-06 Fan ON/OFF Se1

G37-07 G37-09 G37-10

Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Fan Delay Time Reserved Undervoltage Detection Level UV Det Lvl

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Selects the detection of input phase loss. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (Detects if input phase loss, power supply voltage imbalance , or main circuit electrolytic capacitor deterioration occurs).

0,1

Selects the detection of output phase loss. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0,1

Enables/disables the inverter ground fault detection. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0,1

70 to 120째C

Varies by KVA

0 to 3

0 to 2

0 to 600 60 sec sec

0 230V: 150 210V 460V: 300 420V

. Sets the detection temperature for the inverter overheat pre-alarm detection in 째C. . When the heat sink temperature exceeds this set value, an pre-overheat alarm (OH) will occur. Selects the inverter operation upon an OH pre-alarm detection. 0: Ramp to stop (by G03-02 decel time) 1: Coast to stop 2: Continue operation (Alarm on display only) 3: Disabled Sets the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan. 0: ON only when the inverter is running and for the time set by G37-07 after run command is removed. 1: ON whenever the inverter is powered up. 2: ON whenever the heat sink temperature is high Sets the delay time for the cooling fan to turn off after the run command is removed when G37-06=0. Reserved Sets the main circuit under-voltage (UV) detection level. (If an external AC reactor is used, decrease the setting).

7-42

0 230V: 190V 460V: 380V

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter NO.

G37-11

G37-12 G37-13 G37-14

LCD Display (English)

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

External Fault Sets the inverter operation when an external fault from Operation Multi-function Digital Input is Selection received. 0: Ramp to stop (by G03-02 decel time) Ext Fault Sel 1: Coast to stop 2: Continue operation External Fault 0: Always detect Detection Selection 1: Detection only during operation Ext Fault Det Reserved Reserved Braking Enable/disable the braking Transistor transistor. ON/OFF 0: Disabled Selection 1: Enabled Brk IGBT Sel

Group 38: Communication Parameter Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English) G38-01

G38-02

G38-03

G38-04

0 to 2

0,1

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Inverter Station Selects Inverter station address (number) for Modbus Address 1 to 31 (RS-422/485) terminals R(+), R(-), INV Addr S(+), S(-). Sets the baud rate for Modbus RS-485 Communication (RS-422/485) terminals R (+), Baud Rate Set R(-), S(+), S(-). 0: 1200 bps (bit/sec) 0 to 5 1: 2400 bps 2: 4800 bps Baud Rate 3: 9600 bps 4: 19200 bps 5: 38400 bps Selects the communication parity RS-485 Communication for Modbus (RS-422/485) terminals R (+), R(-), S(+), S(-). Parameter 0 to 3 0: MODBUS,RTU,8,N,2 1: MODBUS,RTU,8,N,1 Comm, 2: MODBUS,RTU,8,E,1 Parameter 3: MODBUS,RTU,8,O,1 RS-485 Selects the stopping method for Communication communication error. Fault Stop 0: Deceleration to stop Selection (G03-02, Tdec1) 0 to 3 1: Coast to stop 2: Deceleration to stop (G03-10, Fault Stop Sel E-stop time) 3: Continue to run (alarm only)

7-43

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

G38-05

G38-06

G38-07

Name LCD Display (English)

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

RS-485 Sets whether or not a Communication communication timeout is to be Fault Detection detected as a communication error (CE). 0: Disabled (A communication 0 to 1 loss will not cause a communication error). Fault Detect 1: Enabled (If communication is lost for more than 2sec, a CE fault will occur). Inverter Transmit Sets the delay time from when the Inverter receives data to when the 5 to 65 Wait Time ms Inverter sends data. Wait Time Sets whether the communication USB Used goes through RS-422/RS-485 port or USB port. 0 or 1 0: USB Disabled USB Used (Communication goes through RS-422/RS-485 port) 1: USB Enabled

5ms

Group 39 â&#x201D;&#x20AC; Reserved Group 40 â&#x201D;&#x20AC; Reserved Group 41: KEB Function Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) G41-01

G41-02

KEB Deceleration Time KEB Dec. Time KEB Detection Level KEB Det Lvl

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description Set The deceleration time while the kinetic energy braking (KEB) function is active.

0.0 to 0.0sec 25.5 sec

Set The voltage detection level of kinetic energy braking (KEB) function

190V to 210V 380V to 420V

7-44

200V 400V

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 42: RTC Timer Function Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) â&#x2013; RTC Set Time G42-01 RTC Set Time â&#x2013; RTC Set Date G42-02 RTC Set Date

RTC Selection G42-03 RTC Sel

Timers Selection G42-04 Timers Sel Time Period 1 Start Time G42-05 Start Time 1

Time Period 1 Stop Time G42-06 Stop Time 1

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

. Sets the time for the inverter internal real-time clock (RTC). The time format is hh:mm. . Changes the hours and minutes with Increment/Decrement and Left/Right shift keys. Pressing the Data/Enter key to saves the values and starts the real-time clock (RTC) function. . Sets the date for inverter internal real-time clock (RTC). The date format is dd.mm.yy. . Changes the days, months and year with Increment/Decrement and Left/Right shift keys. Pressing the Data/Enter key to saves the values and start the real-time clock (RTC) function. Hides or shows the RTC timer. 0:Hide clock (Hides the RTC hours and minutes) 1:Show clock (The RTC hours and minutes are displayed on the LCD) Selects the source for the timer enable signal. 0: Timed functions are disabled 1: Timed functions are enabled 2: One of the multi-function digital inputs (G10-01 to G10-08 = 43) is used to enable the timer. . Sets the daily start time for time period 1. . The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds. . The time format is hh.mm.ss (i.e. if the set value is 08:00:00, then the time period will be activated at 8 AM). . Sets the daily stop time for time period 1. . The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds. . The time format is hh.mm.ss (i.e. if the set value is 20:00:00, then the time period will be deactivated at 8 PM).

7-45

00:00 to 23:59

00:00

00:00:00 to 00:00:00 31:12:25

0, 1

0 to 2

00:00:00 to 00:00:00 23:59:59

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

G42-07

G42-08

G42-09

G42-10

G42-11

G42-12

G42-13

G42-14

G42-15

G42-16

G42-17

G42-18

Name LCD Display (English)

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

. Sets the weekly start day for time period 1. . The day format is: Time period 1 1: Monday (Mon) Start Day 2: Tuesday (Tue) 3: Wednesday (Wed) 4: Thursday (Thu) 1 to 7 1 5: Friday (Fri) 6: Saturday (Sat) 7: Sunday (Sun) Start Day 1 . If the set value is 1, then the weekly time period 1 is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00). . Sets the weekly stop day for time Time Period 1 period 1. Stop Day . The day format is: 1 to 7 5 1= Monday ------ 7 = Sunday. . If the set value is 5, then weekly Stop Day 1 time period 1 will be deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58). Time Period 2 . Sets the time period 2 daily start 00:00:00 Start Time to 00:00:00 time. 23:59:59 Start Time 2 . Refer to parameter G42-05. Time Period 2 . Sets the time period 2 daily stop 00:00:00 Stop Time to 00:00:00 time. 23:59:59 Stop Time 2 . Refer to parameter G42-06. Time Period 2 Start Day Start Day 2 Time Period 2 Stop Day Stop Day 2 Time Period 3 Start Time Start Time 3 Time Period 3 Stop Time Stop Time 3 Time Period 3 Start Day Start Day 3 Time Period 3 Stop Day Stop Day 3 Time Period 4 Start Time Start Time 4 Time Period 4 Stop Time Stop Time 4

. Sets the time period 2 weekly start day. . Refer to parameter G42-07.

1 to 7

. Sets the time period 2 weekly stop day. . Refer to parameter G42-08.

1 to 7

. Sets the time period 2 weekly stop day. . Refer to parameter G42-08.

1 to 7

. Sets the time period 3 daily stop 00:00:00 to 00:00:00 time. 23:59:59 . Refer to parameter G42-06.

. Sets the time period 3 weekly start day. . Refer to parameter G42-07.

1 to 7

. Sets the time period 3 weekly stop day. . Refer to parameter G42-08.

1 to 7

. Sets the time period 4 daily start 00:00:00 to 00:00:00 time. 23:59:59 . Refer to parameter G42-05.

. Sets the time period 4 daily stop 00:00:00 to 00:00:00 time. 23:59:59 . Refer to parameter G42-06.

7-46

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO. G42-19

G42-20

G42-21

Name LCD Display (English) Time Period 4 Start Day Start Day 4 Time Period 4 Stop Day Stop Day 4 Offset Time Selection Offset Sel Offset Time

G42-22

Offset Time

Timer 1 Source G42-23

Timer 1 Source Timer 2 Source

G42-24

Timer 2 Source Timer 3 Source

G42-25

Timer 3 Source Timer 4 Source

G42-26

Timer 4 Source

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description . Sets the time period 4 weekly start day. . Refer to parameter G42-07. . Sets the time period 4 weekly stop day. . Refer to parameter G42-08. Selects the source for the offset time signal. 0: Offset time is disabled 1: Offset time is enabled 2: Multifunction digital input is the offset time enable signal. (G10-01- G10-08=44) . Sets the predetermined offset time. The offset time starts running after the selected multifunction digital input has been momentarily activated. . The offset time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds. If the offset time setting is 01:15:00, then offset is active for 1 hour and 15 minutes after the multifunction digital input signal has been activated. . Assigns the selected time period to timer 1 function. 0: none (No timers have been selected). 1- 31: Selects a combination of time periods and offset time. . Assign the selected time period to timer 2 function. 0: none (No timers have been selected). 1- 31: Selects a combination of time periods and offset time. . Assign the selected time period to timer 3 function. 0: none (No timers have been selected). 1- 31: Selects a combination of time periods and offset time. . Assign the selected time period to timer 4 function. 0: none (No timers have been selected). 1- 31: Selects a combination of time periods and offset time.

7-47

1 to 7

0 to 2

00:00:00 to 00:00:00 23:59:59

0 to 31

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

G42-27

G42-28

Name LCD Display (English)

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Constant Speed . Selects constant speeds when RTC timer is activate. Selection 0: multi-step speeds are selected by the combination of the multi-step speed reference 1 to 4 (when G10-01 to G10-08 =7,8,9 or 10) 1: Frequency reference 1 (G05-01) when timer 1 is active. 2: Frequency reference 1 0 to 5 0 (G05-01) Speed Sel when timer 2 is active. 3: Frequency reference 1 (G05-01) when timer 3 is active. 4: Frequency reference 1 (G05-01) when timer 4 is active. 5: Multi-step speeds are selected by the combination of activated timers 1 and 2. Run Direction . Selects run direction when RTC Selection timer is activate and G42-27 = 5.(speeds are selected by timers 1 and 2) ---0B:FWD Run for RTC Run 1 (both timers are deactivated ) ---1B:REV Run for RTC Run 1 (both timers are deactivated ) --0-B:FWD Run for RTC Run 2 (only timer 1 is activated) 0000B to 1111B 0000B --1-B:REV Run for RTC Run 2 Run Dir. Sel (only timer 1 is activated) -0--B:FWD Run for RTC Run 3 (only timer 2 is activated) -1--B:REV Run for RTC Run 3 (only timer 2 is activated) 0---B:FWD Run for RTC Run 4 (both timers are activated) 1---B:REV Run for RTC Run 4 (both timers are activated)

7-48

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Group 44: Digital Operator Selection Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English) ■

■

G44-01

G44-02

G44-03

G44-04 G44-05

G44-06

G44-07

Main Monitor Item After start-up Main Monitor 1st Sub-monitor Item After start-up Sub Monitor 1 2nd Sub-monitor Item After start-up Sub Monitor 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Sets the monitor items (U1-□□, with display unit items) to be displayed in the main-monitor display after power-up. Sets the monitor items (U1-□□, with display unit items) to be displayed in the sub-monitor display after power-up.

1 to 65

Sets the units to be displayed for Digital Operator the frequency reference and Display Unit frequency monitor. 0: 0.01 Hz 1: 0.01% (Maximum output frequency is 0 to 100%) 39999 2-39: rpm (G07-01 sets the motor poles) Display Unit 40 - 39999: User desired display 00040- 09999: □□□□ 10000- 19999: □□□.□ 20000- 29999: □□.□□ 30000- 39999: □.□□□ Sets the engineering display units, Engineering G44-07 is effective when Display G44-06 = 0040 - 39999. Units Selection 0: none (no units) 1: FPM (ft/min) 2: CFM (ft3/min) 3: PSI (lb/in2) 4: GPH (gallons / hour) 5: GPM (gallons / min) 6: IN (inches) 7: FT (feet) 8: /s (unit / sec) 0 to 20 9: /m (unit / minute) 10: /h (unit / hour) Engineer Unit 11: oF 12: inW (inches in water column) 13: HP 14: m/s 15: MPM (m / min) 16: CMM (m3 / min) 17: W 18: KW 19: m 20: ℃

7-49

1 to 65

Reserved

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO. ■ G44-08

G44-09

G44-10

G44-11

Name Description

LCD Display (English)

LCD Brightness Sets the contrast of the LCD Digital Operator. A setting of “1” is Adjustment the lowest contrast and a setting of “10” is the highest contrast. The LCD Contrast LCD backlight is OFF with a setting of “0”. Real Time Trace Sets the real time trace (RTT) sampling time. ( RTT ) Sampling Time 1: 1ms 2: 2ms RTT Sampling 3: 4ms 4:10ms 5: 20ms 6: 100ms Tm. Waveform To change the amplitude of the Amplitude selected real time trace waveform Selection in one screen. Waveform Amp 0: -100% to 100% 1: -50% to 50% 2: 0% to 100% Waveform Amp 3: 0% to 50% Auto BACK key Sets the auto BACK key return Return time time in 1 sec units. Auto BACK Time

Group 45: Multi-Function Selection Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) Inverter Capacity Selection G45-01 KVA Sel.

G45-02

Frequency Reference Recorded Freq Ref Record

G45-03

User Defined Initial Settings User Defaults

G45-04

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

LOC/REM Key Enable/Disable LOC/REM Key Priority of STOP Key

G45-05 STOP Key Sel

0 to 7

1 to 6

1 (1ms)

0 to 3

0 to 120 60 sec sec

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

. The inverter capacity has already been set at factory, do not change this setting. Varies . Use this setting only when the 00 to FF by control KVA board has been replaced. This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by the initialization operation (G01- 04) Sets whether or not the frequency reference (U1-01) will be 0, 1 0 recorded. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled To record or clear the current parameter settings. 0 to 2 0 0: No changes 1: Record 2: Clear Determines if the Digital Operator LOC/REM key is functional. 0, 1 1 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Determines if the STOP key on the Digital Operator will stop the inverter when inverter is operating 0, 1 1 from control terminals or serial communication (RS-485). 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 7-50

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

G45-06

G45-07

G45-08

G45-09

G45-10

G45-11

G45-12 G45-13

Name LCD Display (English)

Description

Determines if the DATA/ENTER key must be used to input a frequency reference from the Digital Operator. 0: Disabled (DATA/ENTER key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference). UP/DOWN Sel 1: Enabled (DATA/ENTER key is not required). Digital Operator Determines if the inverter will stop Disconnected when the Digital Operator is removed. Operation 0: Continue (The inverter will not Selection stop when the Digital Operator is removed). 1: Stop (The inverter will coast to Keypad Loss Sel stop and display OPR fault when the Digital Operator is removed). Sets how time is accumulated for Elapsed Time the elapsed run time (U1-13). Selection 0: Power on time (Time elapsed after power-on). Elapsed Time 1: Running time (Time elapsed Sel after running). Elapsed Time Sets the initial value of the Set Elapsed Time elapsed run time(U1-13) in hours. Set Cooling Fan Operating Time Sets the initial value of the cooling Set fan operating time (U1-35) in Fan ON Time hours. Set Motor To clear the motor accumulated output KWHr. Accumulated 0: Disabled (U1-34 content is on Output KWHr hold). Initialization 1: Enabled (Initializes U1-34 Output KWHr contents). Init Reserved Reserved Fault Information To clear fault trace / history (U2) Clear Function 0: Disabled (U2 contents are on hold). Fault Trace Init 1: Enabled (Initializes U2 contents). Output Frequency UP/DOWN Function

7-51

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0, 1

0 to 65535 hr

0 hr

0 to 65535 hr

0 hr

0, 1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

G45-14

G45-15

Name Description

LCD Display (English)

LOC/REM Run Sets the Run signals Effective / ineffective after switching to Selection Remote mode. 0: Ineffective- The run signals that are input during mode switching from Local to LOC/REM Run Remote are ignored. Sel 1: Effective- The run signals become effective after switching from Local to Remote mode. JOG/LEFT Ket Sets the function of JOG/LEFT Selection Key 0: JOG/LEFT key is used as LEFT Key JOG/LEFT Key 1: JOG/LEFT key is used as Sel JOG Key

Group 46: Copy Function Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English)

G46-01

G46-02

Copy Function This parameter controls the Selection copying of parameters to and from the Digital Operator. 0: Normal operation (no function). 1: READ (Inverter to Digital Copy Sel Operator). 2: WRITE (Digital Operator to Inverter). 3: VERIFY (Compare). READ Allowed Enables / disables the READ operation. Selection 0: Disabled (The Digital Operator was write-protected). READ Sel 1: Enabled.

G47-01

Center Frequency Of Traverse Center Frequency

■ G47-02

Amplitude of Traverse Amplitude Amplitude

0, 1

8-144

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Group 47: Traverse Operation Name Parameter LCD Display NO. (English) ■

Control Methods V/F Setting Factory Ref. Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

0 to 3

0, 1

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

. Sets the center frequency for the traverse operation as a 5.00 to percentage of maximum output 100.00 20.00% frequency (G06-03). % . The center frequency represents the average traverse speed. . Sets the disturb amplitude as a percentage of maximum output 0.1 to 10.0% frequency (G06-03). 20.0% . The amplitude is superimposed on the center frequency.

7-52

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name LCD Display (English) ■ G47-03 ■ G47-04 ■ G47-05 ■

G47-06

■ G47-07 ■ G47-08

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Jump Frequency . Sets the disturb width of jump as a percentage of maximum output of Traverse frequency (G06-03). . The jump frequency is used to Jump Frequency compensate for the inertia in the traverse system. Jump Time of . Sets the slope of the jump ramp at the maximum and minimum Traverse wobble frequency. . Sets the jump time longer if the Jump Time inverter reaches the torque limit during the frequency jump. Sets the wobble sequence period. Wobble Time The wobble time is defined as: tup+tdown. Setting the wobble time Wobble Time depends on the yarn thickness and the winding speed. Wobble Ratio The wobble ratio is defined as: Wobble Ratio tup/tdown Upper Deviation Sets the upper or lower deviation Traverse Run of the traverse operation as a Upper Deviation percentage of maximum output frequency (G06-03). The upper or Lower Deviation lower deviation can be controlled Traverse Run by the multi-function digital input Lower Deviation terminals.

7.3.2. Auto-Tuning Mode Parameters (T code) Name Parameter Description LCD Display NO. (English) T-01

T-02

T-03

T-04

T-05

Auto-tuning Selects the auto-tuning mode. Mode Selection 0: Rotational auto-tuning 1: Stationary auto-tuning Tune Mode Sel 2: Stationary auto-tuning (Long Cable) Motor Rated Sets the motor nameplate rated Output Power output power in KW (e.g. Motor Rated 1HP=0.75 KW) Power Motor rated Current Sets the motor nameplate full load Motor Rated current in increments of 0.01A. Current Motor rated Sets the motor rated voltage in 1V Voltage increments. *3 Motor Rated Volt Motor rated Frequency Motor Rated Freq

0.0 to 50.0%

0.0%

0 to 50ms

0 ms

1.0

0.0 %

0.0 to 1000.0 10.0 sec sec 0.1 to 10.0 0.0 to 20.0% 0.0 to 20.0%

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG 0 to 2

0.00 to 600.00 KW

*1 Varies Q by KVA

*2 Varies 0.1 to by KVA 999.9 A

230V: 0.0 to 230.0V 255.0V 460V: 0.0 to 460.0V 510.0 V 0.0 to Sets the base frequency of the 400.0 60.0 Hz motor in increments of 0.1 Hz. Hz *3 *4

7-53

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO. T-06

T-07 T-08 T-09

T-10

T-11

Name LCD Display (English)

Control Methods Setting Factory Ref. V/F Range Setting V/F + SLV SV Page PG

Description

Motor rated Sets the motor nameplate rated Speed Motor Rated speed (rpm) in 1rpm increments. Speed Number of Motor Sets the number of motor poles. Poles Motor Poles PG pulses/Rev Sets the number of A-phase or B-phase pulses per revolution of PG pulses the PG. Reserved Reserved Motor No-Load Sets the motor no load voltage in Voltage 0.1V units. When you use a standard motor, the data is set Motor No-Load automatically. Adjustment is not normally required.*5 Volt Motor No-Load Current Motor No-Load Curr.

Sets the motor no load current in 0.01A units. This parameter is visible only while T-01 is set to 1 (stationary auto-tuning)

0 to 24000 rpm

1750 rpm

2,4,6,8 poles

4 poles

0 to 60,000 ppr 1 230V: 50 to 240V 460V: 100 to 480V

1024 ppr

0.01 to 600.00A

Varies by KVA Varies by KVA 0.01A

*1. The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity set by G45-01. *2. The setting range is from 10 % to 200 % of rated current for the corresponding inverter set by G45-01. *3. For specialized motors designed for vector inverter use, the rated voltage or rated frequency may be lower than for general purpose motors. Always confirm the information on the nameplate or motor test reports. (Input the no-load voltage into T-04/T-10 and the no-load current into T-03 to insure accuracy if the no-load values are known). *4. The upper setting limit will be 120.0 Hz when G02-08=1 (VT mode). *5. Motor no load voltage is for SV or SLV mode. Set this value 10~50V lower than the inverter input voltage to ensure torque performance in rated frequency.

7-54

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 7.3.3. Drive Mode Parameters (U code) ■ Status Monitor (U1 Group) Name Parameter NO. LCD Display

Min. Unit

Control Methods Multi-function V/F Analog Output Level V/F + SLV SV PG

Description

.To monitor or set the frequency reference. .Monitoring in REMOTE *1 mode. Setting in 0.01Hz Local mode or when G02-01=0. Freq Ref . The displayed units are determined by G44-06. Output .Displays the output Frequency frequency. 0.01Hz .The displayed units are (Fout) determined by G44-06. Output Freq Output Current (Iout) 0.1A Displays the inverter output current. Output Current Output Voltage Displays the output voltage (Voref) 0.1V Reference reference of inverter. Frequency Reference (Fref)

U1-01

U1-02

U1-03

U1-04

U1-05 U1-06

Output Voltage DC Bus Voltage (Vdc) 0.1V DC Voltage Output Power (kw) 0.1KW Output KW Motor Speed (Rpm)

U1-07

0.1rpm Motor Speed

U1-08

10V=max. output Freq (G06-03. Fmax) (-10V to 10V, 4 to 20mA is possible)

10V=Inverter rated output current. (4 to 20mA is possible)

10V=220Vac or (440 Vdc) (4 to 20mA is possible) (G06-08, Vmax)

Displays the DC bus voltage 10V=400Vdc(or 800 Vdc) (4 to 20mA is of inverter main circuit. possible) Displays the output power of 10V=Inverter max. applicable motor kw.(4 inverter (calculated to 20mA,-10V to 10V is internally). possible) 10V=max. motor speed Displays the detected motor (N = 120*Fmax/P, speed. (N=120*Fout / motor Fmax = G06-03, poles) P=G07-01) (4 to 20 mA,-10V to 10V is possible.) 10V=1.00. Displays the output power (4 to 20mA, -10V to factor of inverter. 10V is possible)

Output Power Factor (PFo) 0.01 Output PF Input Terminal Shows the digital input ON/OFF Status status U1- 09 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

U1-09

10V= max. output Freq (G06-03 Fmax) (-10V to 10V, 4 to 20mA is possible)

DI Status

─

0：OPEN 1：CLOSE Input Terminal(S1) Input Terminal(S2) Input Terminal(S3) Input Terminal(S4) Input Terminal(S5) Input Terminal(S6) Input Terminal(S7) Input Terminal(S8)

7-55

(cannot be output)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter NO. LCD Display

Min. Unit

Shows the digital output ON/OFF status (The 4 bits at left side are PH1-PH4)

Output Terminal Status

U1- 10 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

U1-10

─ DO Status

U1-11

U1-12

U1-13

Control Method Control Method Software Version S/W Version Elapsed Run Time Elapsed Run Time Terminal AI1 Input

U1-14 AI1 Input Terminal AI2 Input U1-15 AI2 Input Terminal AI3 Input U1-16 AI3 Input

U1-17

Torque Referene (Tref) Torque Ref

U1-18

Motor Secondary Current (Iq) Current Iq

U1-19

Motor Exciting Current (Id) Current Id

Control Methods Multi-function V/F Analog Output Level V/F + SLV SV PG

Description

0：OPEN 1：CLOSE Output Terminal (R1A/R1B-R1C) Output Terminal (R2A-R2C) Output Terminal (R3A-R3C) Output Terminal (R4A-R4C) Reserved ( always 0 )

(cannot be output)

─

Shows which control mode is set.

(cannot be output)

─

Shows the inverter’s software number.

(cannot be output)

.Monitors the inverter elapsed run time or power-on 1hr time. (Refer to G45-08) (cannot be output ) . The display / data is re-settable. (Refer to G45-09) Displays the input voltage on 1. 10V=100% terminal AI1 as a percentage (When G13-01=0) 0.1% %. (An input of 10V 2.10V=100% corresponds to 100%, and –10V= -100% and –10V corresponds (When G13-01=1) to –100%). 1. 10V=100% Displays the input voltage (or (When G13-04=0) current) on terminal AI2 as a 2. 10V=100% % . (An input of 0.1% percentage 10V (or 20mA) corresponds to and –10V= -100% 100%, and –10V corresponds (When G13-04=1) 3. 20mA=100% to –100%). (When G13-08=2) 1. 10V=100% Displays the input voltage (or (When G13-08=0) current)on terminal AI3 as a %. (An input of 10V 2. 10V=100% 0.1% percentage (or 20mA) correspond to 100%, and –10V= -100% (When G13-08=1) and –10V corresponds 3. 20mA=100% to –100%). (When G13-08=2) Monitors the internal torque 0.1% reference value for vector control.

10V=motor rated torque (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible)

.Monitors the calculated current Iq being used by the motor to 0.1% produce torque. .The motor’s rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.

10V=motor rated secondary current. (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible).

.Monitors the calculated current Id being used by the motor to 0.1% produce excitation. .The motor’s rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.

10V=motor rated secondary current (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible)

7-56

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter NO. LCD Display

U1-20

U1-21

U1-23

U1-24

U1-25

U1-26

U1-27

U1-28

U1-29

Description

Speed .Monitors the input error to Control Loop speed control loop (ASR). ASR Input 0.01% .The max. Output frequency (Fmax, G06-03) corresponds ASR Input to 100%. Speed Control Loop ASR Output With Filter ASR Output W/ Filter

U1-22

Min. Unit

.Monitors the Output from the 10V=motor rated speed control loop (ASR). secondary current 0.01% .The motor’s rated secondary 4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is current corresponds to 100%. possible)

Speed .Monitors the output from the Control Loop speed control loop (ASR) ASR Output before the ASR primary delay 0.01% Without Filter time (G30-09). .The motor’s rated secondary ASR Output current corresponds to 100%. W/O Filter Speed Deviation

.Monitors the speed deviation within the speed control loop. 0.01% .The max. output frequency ( G06-03 , Fmax)corresponds to 100%.

Speed Deviation Zero Servo Movement Pulse Count 1 pulse Zero Servo Pulse Output Voltage Reference Vq Voltage Ref. Vq Output Voltage Reference Vd Voltage Ref. Vdq Current Control Loop ACR q Axis Output ACR q Output Current Control Loop ACR d Axis Output ACR d Output PID Control Input PID Input

Control Methods Multi-function V/F Analog Output Level V/F + SLV SV PG 10V=max. output frequency (G06-03 , Fmax) (4 to X Q X Q 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible)

10V=motor rated secondary current (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10 is possible)

10V=max. output frequency (G06-03) (4 to 20mA, -10V to 10V is possible)

Shows the number of PG pulse for the movement range at the (cannot be output) stop point for a zero servo times 4.

Monitors the inverter internal 0.1V voltage reference for motor secondary current control.

10V= 220Vac (or 440Vac) (4 to 20mA, -10V to 10V is possible)

Monitors the inverter internal 0.1V voltage reference for motor excitation current control.

10V=220Vac (or 440Vac) (4 to 20mA, -10V to 10V is possible).

10V=100% (4 to 20mA,-10 to 10V is possible)

10V=max. output frequency (G06-03) (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible)

.Monitors the current control loop (ACR) output value for 0.1% the motor secondary current. .The motor’s rated secondary current corresponds to 100%. .Monitors the current control loop (ACR) output value for 0.1% the motor excitation current. .The motor’s rated secondary current corresponds to 100%. Monitors the input error (PID 0.01% set-point - PID feed-back) to the PID regulator.

7-57

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter NO. LCD Display

U1-30

PID Control Output

Min. Unit

Control Methods Multi-function V/F Analog Output Level V/F + SLV SV PG

Description

10V=max. output frequency (G06-03) (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible)

.Monitors the set-point of the PID regulator (PID reference + 0.01% PID bias). .The max output frequency (G06-03) corresponds to PID Setpoint 100%.

10V=max. output frequency (G06-03) (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible)

.Monitors the feed-back signal level when PID control is 0.01% used. .The max output frequency (G06-03) corresponds to 100%.

10V=max. output frequency (G06-03 ) (4 to 20mA, -10 to 10V is possible)

PID Output

Monitors the output of the PID as a percentage of 0.01% regulator the max output frequency (G06-03, Fmax).

PID Setpoint

U1-31

U1-32

PID Feedback PID Feedback

U1-32

U1-33

U1-34

U1-35

U1-36

U1-37

U1-38

.Monitors the feed-back signal 10V=max. output level when PID control is frequency (G06-03 ) 0.01% used. (4 to 20mA, -10 to .The max output frequency PID (G06-03) corresponds to 100%. 10V is possible) Feedback .Monitors the frequency Output 10V=max. output reference after the accel / Frequency frequency (G06-03) After Softstart 0.01Hz decel ramps or S-curve. .The frequency given does not (4 to 20mA, -10V to Output Freq 10V is possible). include compensation, such (SFS) as slip compensation. Motor .Monitors the accumulated Accumulated motor output energy (kilo Output 0.1KW watt-Hours). Energy Hr .Display data is re-settable by (cannot be output) (KWHr) setting G45-11=1 (max. display 99,999,999.9 KWHr) Output KWHr Cooling Fan .Monitors the total operating Operating time of the cooling fan. Time 1Hr .Display data is re-settable (ref. (cannot be output) Fan Elapsed to G45-10) Hour .Monitors the amount of PG 10V=max. output Amount of PG speed feedback as a frequency Speed (G06-03) Feedback 0.01% percentage %. (4 to 20mA, -10 to .The max. output frequency (G06-03) corresponds to 10V is possible) PG Feedback 100%. .Monitors the amount of PG 10V=max. output Amount of PG speed compensation as a frequency Speed percentage %. (G06-03) Compensatio 0.01% .The max. output frequency (4 to 20mA, -10 to n (G06-03) corresponds to 10V is possible PG 100%. Compensatio n .Monitors the U-phase current U-phase conversion value (IU). Current(IU) Conversion 0.01V .Display range is 0.00V to (cannot be output) 5.00V. Use this parameter to Value check U-phase DCCT Current IU function. PID Feedback

7-58

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter NO. LCD Display

U1-39

V-phase Current(IV) Conversion Value

Min. Unit

Control Methods Multi-function V/F Analog Output Level V/F + SLV SV PG

Description

.Monitors the V-phase current conversion value(IV). .Display range is 0.00V to 0.01V 5.00V. Use this parameter to (cannot be output) check V-phase DCCT function.

(cannot be output)

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

(cannot be output)

Current IV

U1-40

U1-41

U1-42 U1-43 U1-44 U1-45 U1-46 U1-47 U1-48 U1-49 U1-50 U1-51 U1-52 U1-53 U1-54 U1-55 U1-56

.Monitors the W-phase current conversion value(IW). .Display range is 0.00V to 0.01V 5.00V. Use this parameter to check W-phase DCCT Current IW function. .Monitors the 3-phase rectified 3-phase current conversion value Rectify (DIAC). Current 0.01V .Display range is 0.00V to (DIAC) 5.00V. Use this parameter to Conversion check ADC function in the Value control board. Current DIAC Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Reserved ─ Reserved Hest Sink Temperature 1°C Monitors the heat sink (THS) temperature (THS). Heat Sink Temp W-phase Current (IW) Conversion Value

7-59

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter NO. LCD Display

Min. Unit

RS-485 Communicati on Error Code U1-57

RS-485 Error Code

Description Shows RS-485 communication error code. U1- 57 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

─

Inverter Run Status INV Run Status

0：normal 1：abnormal CRC error Data length error Parity error Overrun error Framing error Time out Reserved

(cannot be output)

Monitors the internal run status of inverter. U1- 58 =

U1-58

Control Methods Multi-function V/F Analog Output Level V/F + SLV SV PG

─

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1: Inverter ready 1: During running 1: During zero speed 1: During speed agree 1: During fault detection (minor fault) 1: During fault detection (major fault) Reserved

U1-59 U1-60 U1-61 U1-62 U1-63

Reserved ─ Reserved (cannot be output) X X X X Reserved ─ Reserved (cannot be output) X X X X Reserved ─ Reserved (cannot be output) X X X X Reserved ─ Reserved (cannot be output) X X X X Reserved ─ Reserved (cannot be output) X X X X RTC Time Display the current RTC time, U1-64 ─ (cannot be output) Q Q Q Q display format: hh : mm : ss RTC Time RTC Date Displays the current RTC date, (cannot be output) U1-65 ─ Q Q Q Q display format: dd . mm . yy RTC Date Pulse Train Displays the Pulse Train Input Input (RI) U1-66 1 Hz (PI) frequency in 1 Hz (cannot be output) Q Q Q Q frequency increments. PI Freq Displays the PG A-phase pulse PG A-phase U1-67 X Q X Q input pulses 1 Hz input divided by the ratio set by (cannot be output) G31-11 PG A phase *1. The displayed unit can be changed through parameter G44-06 (Display unit) and G44-07 (Engineering display units). *2. To roughly calculate the motor input power and inverter input power according to the monitored values. — Motor input power = U1-34 monitored value / motor efficiency. — Inverter input power = U1-34 monitored value / motor efficiency ● inverter efficiency. (When the inverter efficiency is approx. 95%) Use G45-11 to clear the monitored values. The accuracy of motor accumulated output energy is approx. 5 to 10 %; use a regular power meter to confirm the value in advance, if more accuracy is required.

7-60

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Fault Information (U2 Group)

Name Parameter Minimum NO. Unit LCD Display U2-01

U2-02

U2-03

U2-04

U2-05

U2-06

U2-07

U2-08

U2-09

U2-10

U2-11

U2-12

Recent Fault Message Recnt Fault 1st Previous Fault Message 1st Fault 2nd Previous Fault Message 2nd Fault 3rd Previous Fault Message 3rd Fault 4th Previous Fault Message 4th Fault Frequency Reference at Current Fault (Fref) Freq Ref Output Frequency At Current Fault (Fout) Output Freq Output Current at Current Fault (Iout) Output Current Motor Speed at Current Fault (RPM) Motor Speed Output Voltage Reference at Current Fault (Voref) Output Voltage DC Bus Voltage at Current Fault (VDC) DC Voltage Output Power at Current Fault(KW) Output KW

Description

Multi-function Analog Control Methods V/F Output V/F + SLV SV Level PG

─

The contents of the recent fault.

(cannot be output)

─

The fault message of the (cannot be output) 1st previous fault.

─

The fault message of the (cannot be output) 2nd previous fault.

─

The fault message of The 3rd previous fault.

(cannot be output)

─

The fault message of the (cannot be output) 4thprevious fault.

The frequency reference (cannot be output) 0.01Hz when the current fault occurred.

The output frequency 0.01Hz when the current fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

0.1A

The output current When the current fault occurred.

The motor speed when 0.1rpm the current fault occurred.

0.1V

The output voltage reference when the current fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

The DC bus voltage when the current fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

The output power when the current fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

0.1KW

7-61

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter Minimum NO. Unit LCD Display

U2-13

U2-14

Toque reference at Current Fault(Tref) Torque Ref Input Terminal Status at Current Fault

0.1%

The torque reference when the current fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

─

. The digital input terminal status when the current fault occurred. .The format is same as U1-09.

(cannot be output)

─

The digital output terminal status when the (cannot be output) current fault occurred.

─

The internal run status of inverter when the current (cannot be output) fault occurred.

X X X X X X X X

DI Status U2-15

U2-16

U2-17 U2-18 U2-19 U2-20 U2-21 U2-22 U2-23 U2-24 U2-25

U2-26

Output Terminal Status at Current Fault DO Status Inverter Run Status at Current Fault Inv Status Elapsed Time at Current Fault Elapsed Time Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Current Fault Time

Fault Time

Description

Multi-function Analog Control Methods V/F Output V/F + SLV SV Level PG

1hr ─ ─ ─ ─ ─ ─ ─ ─

2 sec

The elapsed operating time between the current (cannot be output) fault and the 1st previous fault Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved The time at which the current fault occurred. Either as : 1. Real time, in format hh:mm:ss ─ if RTC is operating. (cannot be output) 2. The time since power on (less one whole day), in format hh:mm:ss ─ if RTC is not used, or was not set.

7-62

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter Minimum NO. Unit LCD Display

U2-27

U2-28

U2-29

U2-30

U2-31

U2-32

U2-33

U2-34

The day on which the current fault occurred. Either as : 1. A date, in Format dd.mm.yy ─ if RTC is (cannot be output) operating. 2. The number of days after power on, in format: dddd ─ if RTC is not used, or was not set.

The frequency reference 0.01Hz when the 1st previous (cannot be output) fault occurred.

The output frequency 0.01Hz when the 1st previous fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

The output current when the 1st previous fault (cannot be output) occurred.

Current Fault Date Fault Date

Frequency Reference at 1st Previous Fault (Fref) Frequency Ref (1) Output Frequency 1st Previous Fault (Fout) Output Current (1) Output Current at 1st Previous Fault (Iout) Output Current (1) Motor Speed at 1st Previous Fault (RPM) Motor Speed (1) Output Voltage Reference at 1st Previous Fault (Voref) Output Voltage (1) DC Bus Voltage at 1st Previous Fault (VDC) DC Voltage (1) Output Power at 1st Previous Fault (KW) Output KW (1)

Description

Multi-function Analog Control Methods V/F Output V/F + SLV SV Level PG

0.1A

The motor speed when 0.1rpm the 1st previous fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

The output voltage reference when the 1st previous fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

The DC bus voltage when the 1st previous fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

The output power when the 1st previous fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

0.1V

0.1KW

7-63

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Name Parameter Minimum NO. Unit LCD Display

U2-35

U2-36

Toque Reference at 1st Previous Fault (Tref) Torque Ref (1) Input Terminal States at 1st Previous Fault

0.1%

Description

The torque reference when the 1st previous fault occurred.

Multi-function Analog Control Methods V/F Output V/F + SLV SV Level PG

(cannot be output)

─

The digital input terminal status when the 1st (cannot be output) previous fault occurred.

─

The digital output terminal status when the (cannot be output) 1st previous fault occurred.

(cannot be output)

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

X X X X X X X

(cannot be output)

DI Status (1)

U2-37

U2-38

U2-39

U2-40 U2-41 U2-43 U2-44 U2-45 U2-46 U2-47

U2-48

Output Terminal Status at 1st Previous Fault DO Status (1) Inverter Run Status at 1st Previous Fault INV Run Status (1) Elapsed Time at 1st Previous Fault Elapsed Time (1) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

─

The inverter run status when the 1st previous fault occurred. The format is the same as U1-58.

1hr

The elapsed operating time between the 1st previous fault and the 2nd previous fault

1st Previous Fault Time

2 sec

─ ─ ─ ─ ─ ─ ─

Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved The time at which the current fault occurred . Either as : 1. Real time, in format hh:mm:ss ─ if RTC is operating. 2. The time since power on (less one whole day), in format hh:mm:ss ─ if RTC is not used, or was not set.

7-64

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Name Parameter Minimum NO. Unit LCD Display

U2-49

Fault Time (1) 1st Previous Fault Date Fault Date (1)

Description

Multi-function Analog Control Methods V/F Output V/F + SLV SV Level PG

The day on which the 1st previous fault occurred. Either as : 1. A date, in format dd.mm.yy ─ if RTC (cannot be output) is operating. 2. The number of days after power on, in format : dddd ─ if RTC is not used, or was not set.

Recent Warning The contents of the Message U2-50 ─ (cannot be output) recent warning. Recent Warning 1st Previous The contents of the 1st (cannot be output) Warning U2-51 ─ Message previous warning. 1st Warning 2nd Previous Warning The contents of the 2nd (cannot be output) U2-52 ─ Message previous warning. 2nd Warning 3rd Previous Warning The contents of the 3rd (cannot be output) U2-53 ─ Message previous warning. 3rd Warning 4th Previous The contents of the 4th (cannot be output) U2-54 ─ Warning revious warning. Message * The fault information contents (U2 group) can be cleared using G45-13.

7-65

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Real Time Trace (U3 Group) Parameter NO.

Function

U3-01

Frequency Reference (Fref)

To trace the frequency Reference.

U3-02

Output Frequency (Fout)

To trace the output frequency.

Real-Time Trace Waveform

Description

U3-03

Output To trace the inverter output Current (Iout) Current.

U3-04

Output Voltage To trace the output voltage (VO ref) reference of the inverter.

U3-05

DC Bus To trace the DC bus voltage Voltage (Vdc) of the inverter’s main circuit.

U3-06

trace the output power of Output Power, To the inverter (internally KW (Pout) calculated value).

U3-07

Motor Speed To trace the motor speed (N=120 * Fout / motor (RPM) poles).

U3-08

Terminal AI1 To trace the input voltage Input (AI1) signal on terminal AI1.

U3-09

Terminal AI2 To trace the input voltage (or Input (AI2) current) signal on terminal AI2.

U3-10

trace the input voltage (or Terminal AI3 To current) signal on terminal Input (AI3) AI3.

U3-11 U3-12

Torque Reference (Tref) Motor Secondary Current (Iq)

. ±100%= ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) . Negative = reverse direction . ±100%= ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) . Negative = reverse direction . 100%= 10V= inverter rated output current. . Absolute value output . 100%= max. output voltage (G06-08, Vmax) . Absolute value output . 100%= 400Vdc= (or 800 Vdc) . Absolute value output . 100%= inverter max. applicable motor (KW). . Negative= Regenerating Operation . ±100%= max. motor speed (N= 120 * Fmax / P) . Negative= reverse direction . 100%= 10V (when G13-01=0) . 100%= 10V, and –100%= -10V (when G13-01=1) . 100%= 10V (when G13-08=0) . 100%= 10V, and –100%= -10V (when G13-08=1) . 100%= 20mA (when G13-08 =2) . 100%= 10V (when G13-08=0) and 100%= 10V, –100%= -10V (when G13-08=1) . 100%= 20mA (when G13-08 =2)

To trace the internal torque . 100%= 10V= motor reference value for vector rated torque control. To trace the calculated . 100%= motor rated current Iq being used by the secondary current. motor to produce torque.

7-66

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG Q

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO. U3-13

U3-14

U3-15

U3-16

U3-17

U3-18 U3-19

U3-20

U3-21

U3-22

U3-23 U3-24 U3-25

Function

Real-Time Trace Waveform

Description

trace the calculated motor rated Motor Exciting To current Id being used by the . 100%= secondary current. Current (Id) motor for excitation. . 100%= max. output frequency (G06-03, Speed Control To trace the input error to Loop ASR Speed control loop (ASR). Fmax) Input . Negative= reverse direction Speed Control Loop ASR To trace the output from the 100%= motor rated Output With speed control loop (ASR). secondary current Filter Speed Control To trace the output from the Loop ASR speed control loop (ASR) 100%= motor rated Output Without before the ASR primary secondary current Filter delay time (G30-09). . 100% = max. output To trace the speed deviation frequency (G06-03, Speed within the speed control Fmax). Deviation . Negative = reverse loop. direction To trace the inverter internal Output Voltage voltage reference for motor 100% = 220Vac (or Reference (Vq) secondary current control. 440Vac) To trace the inverter internal Output Voltage voltage reference for motor 100% = 220Vac (or 440Vac) Reference (Vd) excitation current control. Current trace the current control Control Loop To = motor rated loop (ACR) output value for 100% ACR q Axis the motor secondary current secondary current. Output Current trace the current control Control Loop To loop (ACR) output value for 100% = motor rated ACR d Axis the motor excitation current. secondary current Output To trace the input error (PID set-point - PID feedback) to the PID regulator. To trace the output of PID PID Control regulator as a percentage of Output the max. output frequency. To trace the set-point of the PID Setpoint PID regulator (PID reference +PID bias). To trace the feedback signal PID Feedback level when PID control is used. PID Control Input

U3-26

Output To trace the frequency Frequency reference after the accel / After Softstart decel ramps or S-curve.

U3-27

Amount of PG To trace the amount of PG Speed Feedback Speed feedback.

±100% = ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) ±100% = ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) ±100% = ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) ±100% = ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) . ±100% = ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) . Negative = reverse direction . ±100% = ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) . Negative= reverse direction

7-67

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG X

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Parameter NO.

U3-28

Function

Real-Time Trace Waveform

Description

. ±100% = ±10V= max. output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) . Negative= reverse direction ±100% = ±10V= To trace the U-phase inverter rated current current. (sinusoidal waveform) ±100%= ±10V= inverter To trace the V-phase current. rated current (sinusoidal waveform) ±100%= ±10V= inverter rated current To trace the W-phase current. (sinusoidal waveform)

Amount of PG To trace the amount of PG Speed Compensation Speed compensation.

U3-29

U-phase Current (Iu)

U3-30

V-phase Current (Iv)

U3-31

W-phase Current (Iw)

7-68

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG X

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.

CONTROL AND OPERATION This section describes the parameter settings and functions.

8.1

Description of G Code Parameters

8.1.1 Group 01 ─ Start-Up ■ Language Selection for LCD Operator (G01-01) Parameter No. G01-01

LCD Display

Description Setting Range

Reserved Reserved

LCD Display Reserved

Control Methods Factory Setting

V/F

V/F + PG

SLV

■ Parameter Access Level (G01-02) Parameter No.

LCD Display

G01-02

Access Level

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

0:Read only Read only 1:User level User level 2:Advanced level Advanced level

Control Methods Factory Setting

V/F

V/F + PG

SLV

. Use G01-02 to select the parameter access level. The access level determines which parameters can be read and set. . The parameters can be read and set also depend upon the control method being used. . When one of the parameters G10-01 to G10-12 (Multi-function Digital Input selection) is set to 48 (parameter write enable), all parameters can be written-in from the Digital Operator when the terminal that has been set is ON, and when the set terminal is OFF, all parameters other than frequency reference (G02-01) are write protected. . Parameter access level setting: G01-02 Setting 0

Function . Parameters G01-01 to G01-38 can be read and set. . Parameters G02-01 to G02-08 can be read and set. Read only . Parameters group U1 to U3 can be read only. . Use this setting to prevent user-set parameters (G01-07 to G01-38) from being changed. . This setting allows only the start-up user-set parameters (G01-01 to G01-38) to be read and set. . Select the desired user-set parameters in G01-07 and G01-38. User level . The user level (G01-02=1) can be set only after one or more parameters are set as user parameters in G01-07 to G01-38. If no parameters are set, the user level (setting value=1) can not be set for G01-02. Advanced . This setting allows all parameters in both quick programming mode (Q) and level advanced programming mode (A) to be read and set.

8-1

■ Control Method Selection (G01-03) Parameter Description LCD No. Display Setting Range G01-03

Control Method

0:V/f (V/f control without PG) 1:V/f+PG (V/f control with PG) 2:SLV (Sensorless Vector Control) 3:SV (Flux Vector Control)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Control Methods Factory Setting V/F V/F+ SLV SV PG LCD Display V/F V/F + PG SLV SV

Used to select the control method for the inverter. Any of the following six control methods can be set. Setting Value G01-03

Control Method

Basic Control

V/F

V/F+PG

．V/f control with speed compensation using a PG. ．PG interface is built-in as standard.

SLV

．Current Vector Control without a PG (Sensorless Vector).

．Current Vector control with a PG (Closed loop, sensor Vector or flux vector). ．PG interface is built-in as standard.

．V/f control without PG(open loop).

Example Applications ．Driving multiple motors. ．Replacing existing inverter. ．When auto tuning is not possible. ．VT(Variable Torque) application. Simple speed feedback control with a higher speed control accuracy than the V/F control mode. Applications requiring higher speed and torque accuracy using vector control without a PG.. ．High-performance control with a PG. ． High-precision speed and torque control function.

(1). G01-03=0 . Select the V/F pattern (G06-02) for the type of motor being used and the application requirements. . Perform stationary auto-tuning (T-01=1) for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable length is 50m or longer. Refer to Chapter 8.3, Auto-tuning, for details on stationary auto-tuning. (2). G01-03=1 . Select the V/f pattern (G06-02) or the type of motor being used and the application requirements. . Set the number of motor poles (G07-01) and the number of PG (pulse generator or encoder) pulses (G31-09). Refer to Chapter 8.1.31 for details on PG feedback setup. . Perform stationary auto-tuning (T-01=1)for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable length is 50 m or longer. Refer to (Chapter 8.3) Auto-tuning for details on stationary auto-tuning. (3). G01-03=2 . Ensure that the inverter capacity and the motor rating is suitably is matched. Use the auto-tuning function to identify and store the motor parameters to initialize the SLV mode of operation after installation. Refer to (Chapter 8.3) Auto-tuning for details. . In order to the precise speed control, the rotational auto-tuning is preferred before the SLV operation. . If the motor is coasting to stop in last operation, the speed search will be enabled in next RUN command automatically. (4). G01-03=3 . Ensure that the inverter capacity and the motor rating is suitably is matched. Use the auto-tuning function to identify and store the motor parameters to initialize the SV mode of operation after installation. Refer to (Chapter 8.3) Auto-tuning for details. This parameter is not initialized by the initialization operation (G01-04).

8-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

■ Initialize (G01-04) Parameter No.

G01-04

LCD Display

Initialize

Description Setting Range 0:No Initialize 1:User Initialize 2:2-Wire (230V/460V) 3:3-Wire (230V/460V) 4:2-Wire (200V/415V) 5:3-Wire (200V/415V) 6:2-Wire (200V/380V) 7:3-Wire (200V/380V) 8-999:Reserved

LCD Display No Init User Initialize 2-Wire, 230V/460V 3-Wire, 230V/460V 2-Wire, 200V/415V 3-Wire, 200V/415V 2-Wire, 200V/380V 3-Wire, 200V/380V Reserved

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

. Use parameter G01-04 to initialize the inverter parameters. When initialized, the inverter parameters will return to their factory-preset values. The user should record the setting of any parameters that are changed from the factory presets. After initializing, the G01-04 value will automatically return to 0. G01-04=1: Initializes the inverter parameters to the user defined initial settings. The user parameters must first be set and then stored by setting parameter G45-03 to 1. Once the inverter parameters have been recorded, the G45-03 value will be automatically reset to 0 and the G01-04=1 function will be disabled. Refer to chapter 8.1.45 (G45-03), to record the user defined initial settings. G01-04=2: 2-wire initialization (230V/460V) ─ Multi-function Digital Input terminal S1 controls the Forward RUN/STOP command, and S2 controls the Reverse RUN/STOP command. Refer to Chapter 8.1.2, for 2-wire mode operation. ─ The inverter input voltage (G06-01) will be automatically set as 230V for 230V class or 460V for 460V class. G01-04=3: 3-wire initialization (230V/460V) ─ Multi-function Digital Input terminal S5 controls the Forward/Reverse command input terminal, and terminals S1 and S2 will become the 3-wire sequence to control the RUN command and STOP command individually. Refer to chapter 8.1.2, for 3-wire mode operation. ─ The inverter input voltage (G06-01) will be automatically set as 230V (for 230V class) or 460V (for 460V class). G01-04=4: 2-wire initialization (200V/415V) ─ Same as the 2-wire mode operation, G01-04=2, but the inverter input voltage (G06-01) will be set as 200V for (230V class) or 415V for (460V class) automatically. G01-04=5: 3-wire initialization (200V/415V) ─ Same as the 3-wire mode operation, G01-04=3, but the inverter input voltage (G06-01) will be set as 200V for (230V class) or 415V for (460V class) automatically. G01-04=6: 2-wire initialization (200V/380V) ─ Same as the 2-wire mode operation, G01-04=2, but the inverter input voltage (G06-01) will be set as 200V for (230V class) or 380V for (460V class) automatically. G01-04=7: 3-wire initialization (200V/380V) ─ Same as the 3-wire mode operation, G01-04=3, but the inverter input voltage (G06-01) will be set as 200V for (230V class) or 380V for (460V class) automatically.

8-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

■ Password (G01-05, G01-06) Parameter No.

LCD Display

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

0 to 9999 0 to 9999

Password 1 Password 2

0 0

G01-05 Password 1 G01-06 Password 2

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG A A A A A A A A

. Use parameter G01-05 (Password 1) and G01-06 (Password 2) to prevent unauthorized parameters changing. . All parameters group G01 to G47, except G01-01, G01-05 and G01-06, can be read but not set if the contents of G01-05 and G01-06 are not the same. . Parameter G01-06 (Password 2) cannot be accessed with the usual key sequences. To access G01-06 (Password 2), display G01-05 and then press the MENU/HELP key while holding the RESET key. . When one of the parameters G10-01 to G10-12 (Multi-function Digital Input Selection) is set to 48 (parameter write enable), all parameters other than frequency reference (G02-01) are write protected even if the contents of G01-05 (password 1) and G01-06 (password 2) are the same. Refer to Chapter 8.1.10 for further details. Example: Setting the Password to 1688. Step

LCD Display (English)

Explanation

─ADV─ 00:00 G01 Start-Up G02 Operation Mode Sel G03 Accel/Decel Time

Select the start-up parameter group (G01) in the Advanced programming mode.

─ADV─ 00:00 ─05 Password 1 ─07 User P1 ─08 User P2

To display G01-06 (password 2), select G01-05 (password 1) and then press the MENU/HELP key while pressing the RESET key. (G01-06 can’t be displayed with the usual Increment/Decrement key sequences).

─ADV─ 00:00 ─05 Password 1 ─06 Password 2 ─07 User P1 ─ADV─ 00:00

G01

Select the parameter G01-06 using Increment/Decrement key. G01-06

Password 2

Press the DATA/ENTER key to display the Data set/read screen. (The highlighted number blinks)

0 (0 – 9999) <0> ─ADV─ 00:00

G01-06

Password 2

Change the password set value to 1688 using the Increment/Decrement and/or LEFT/RIGHT shift keys.

1688 (0 – 9999) <0> ─ADV─ 00:00

G01-06

Password 2 6

1688 (0 – 9999) <0> DRIVE

Quick PROGRAMMING ADV PROGRAMMING

Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER key. The highlighted number will stop blinking and the password has now been set to 1688. (After a few seconds, the highlighted number will blink again.) Press BACK key once to return the Operator display to the sub-directories, or press the BACK key 3 times to return to the Mode display as shown on the left. (If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the display will automatically return to the Mode display as shown on the left.)

8-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual !

CAUTION

Use caution when changing the password. If you set the password by mistake, you cannot set the G code parameters. The password must managed carefully.

■ User Parameters Setting (G01-07 to G01-38) Parameter

Description

No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

G01-07 to G01-38

User P1 / User P32

G02-01 to G47-08

User P1 / User P32

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG ─

. The user parameters (G01-07 to G01-38) allow you to configure (select) any 32 of parameters (group G02-01 to G47-08) and place them together in a convenient list. This feature provides quick access for the most-used functions needed for a particular application. . The user parameters G01-07 to G01-38 specify the parameters that can be displayed and changed when the access level (G01-02) is set to 1 (User Level). . The user parameters G01-07 to G01-38 can be changed only in the Advanced programming mode and cannot be changed during operation. . Set the desired parameter number in G01-07 to G01-38 and then set G01-02=1. . Only the parameter specified in G01-01 to G01-38 can be set or read in the Advanced programming mode while G01-02=1 (user level). Example 1: Setting G03-01 (1st Acceleration Time) in G01-07 (User Parameter 1) to be defined as a user parameter. Step

LCD Display (English) ─ADV─ 00:00 G01 Start-Up G02 Operation Mode Sel G03 Accel/Decel Time ─ADV─ 00:00 ─04 Initialize ─05 Password 1 ─07 User P1 ─ADV─ 00:00

Ref Source (G02-01 ─── G47-08) < >

Tacc1 (G02-01 ─── G47-08) < >

. Press the DATA / ENTER key to display the Data set/read screen. (the highlight number blinking)

Select parameter number G03-01 (1st Accel Time) using the LEFT shift/RIGHT shift and Increment/Decrement keys.

G01-07 Set the selected parameter (G03-01) using DATA/ENTER key, then

User P1= G03-01 G03-01 Tacc1

(G02-01 ─── G47-08) <G03-01 > DRIVE

. Press the DATA / ENTER key and Increment / Decrement key to select the User Parameter 1 (G01-07) display. . (G01-06) cannot be displayed with the usual key sequences. Refer to G01-06 password 2 setting.

G01-07

User P1= G03-01

─ADV─ 00:00

Selects the start-up parameter group (G01) in the Advanced programming mode.

G01-07

User P1= G02-01

─ADV─ 00:00

G01

Explanation

Quick PROGRAMMING ADV PROGRAMMING

the highlighted number stops blinking and User P1 = G03-01 is displayed; the G03-01 (1st Acceleration Time) is now defined as user parameter G01-07. After a few seconds, the highlighted number will blink again. Press BACK key once to return the Operator display to the sub-directories, or press BACK key 3 times to return to the Mode display as shown on the left. (If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will automatically return to the Mode display as shown on the left).

8-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Example 2: To read and set user-set parameters after one or more parameters have been set in G01-07 to G01-38. As an example G03-01 has already been set as user parameter G01-07. Step

LCD Display (English) ─ADV─ 00:00 G01 Start-Up G02 Operation Mode Sel G03 Accel/Decel Time ─ADV─ 00:00 ─02 Access Level ─03 Control Method ─04 Initialize ─ADV─ 00:00

Press the DATA / ENTER key and Increment / Decrement keys to select the Access Level Parameter (G01-02) display.

G01-02

(0-2) <2>

Access Level 1 User Level (0-2) <2>

G01

─ADV─ 00:00 ─04 Initialize ─05 Password 1 ─07 User P1

Press BACK key once to return the Operator display to the sub-directories.

Press the DATA / ENTER key to display the Data set/read screen (the highlighted number blinks). In this case, the G03-01 (1st Acceleration time) is already defined as user parameter G01-07.

(0.0-6000.0 sec) < 10.0 sec >

G01-07

G03-01 : Tacc1 05.0 sec (0.0-6000.0 sec) < 10.0 sec > DRIVE

Press the DATA / ENTER key and Increment / Decrement key to select the User Parameter 1 (G01-07) display. (G01-06 can’t be displayed with the usual key sequences, refer to G01-06 password 2 setting for more details).

G01-07

G03-01 : Tacc1 10.0 sec ─ADV─ 00:00

Press the DATA / ENTER key to display the Data set/read screen. (The highlighted number blinks)

‧ Change the set value to 1 (G01-02=1, user level) using the Increment/Decrement keys, and then enter the changed data using G01-02 the DATA/ENTER key, the new set value is stored and the highlighted number stop blinking. (after a few seconds, the highlighted number will blink again). ‧ The user level (G01-02=1) can be set only after one or more parameters are set as user parameters in G01-07 to G01-38, if no parameters are set, the user level (setting level=1) can not be set for G01-02.

─ADV─ 00:00 ─02 Access Level ─03 Control Method ─04 Initialize

─ADV─ 00:00

Selects the start-up parameter group (G01) in the Advanced programming mode.

G01

Access Level 2 Advenced Level

─ADV─ 00:00

Explanation

Quick PROGRAMMING ADV PROGRAMMING

Change the set value to 5.0 sec using the Increment/Decrement keys, and enter the changed data using the DATA/ENTER key, the new set value is stored in G01-07 and G03-01 simultaneously when the highlighted number stop blinking. Press BACK key once to return the Operator display to the sub-directories, or press the BACK key 3 times to return to the Mode display as shown on the left. (If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will automatically return to the Mode display as shown on the left).

8-6

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual The operation mode structure for user parameters A. To define any other parameter (from G02-01 to G47-08) as a user parameter

B. To read and set the user parameters after one or more parameters are set as user parameter in G01-07 to G01-38 and when G01-02=1 (User Access Level).

8-7

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.2 Group 02 â&#x201D;&#x20AC; Operation Mode Selections â&#x2013; Master Frequency Reference Selection (G02-01) Parameter Description No.

G02-01

LCD Display

Freq Ref Source

Setting Range

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV LCD Display PG Digital Op

0: Digital Operator 1: Terminal (Analog input AI1 or Terminal AI2) 2: Communication Communication 3: Reserved Reserved 4: Reserved Reserved 5: Pulse Train Input (PI) Pulse Train

(1) G02-01= 0: Inputs the frequency reference directly from the Digital Operator (Display as in Fig. 8.1.1) or by changing the setting of parameter G05-01(Frequency Ref 1). Refer to section 5.3, Screen Modes for details on setting the frequency reference. -DRV-

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01 = 000.00 Hz

U1-02=000.00 Hz U1-03=0.0 A

Fig. 8.1.1 Frequency Reference Setting Display (2) G02-01=1: . Inputs the frequency reference from control circuit terminals AI1 (voltage input) or AI2 (current input, based on G12-04 and G12-05 settings). . When inputting a voltage for the master frequency reference, use terminal AI1. . When inputting a current signal (4-20mA) for the master frequency reference, use terminal AI2, and 1 Input 0V to terminal AI1 2 Set G12-04=2: (Multi-function Analog Input terminal AI2 signal level selection 4 to 20mA.) 3 Set Dip switch SW1-2 to I position. 4 Set 12-05=12 (AI2 signal is added to AI1). . Refer Fig. 8.1.2 for the setting analog terminals for master speed frequency reference.

Fig. 8.1.2

Analog Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference

8-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Notes 1. Set the voltage/current dip switch SW1-2 to I and set G12-04=2 (AI2=4 to 20mA) when inputting a current signal to terminal AI2. 2. Set the voltage/current dip switch SW1-2 toward V position (factory setting) and set G12-04 = 0 (AI2=0 to 10V) or to 1(AI2=-10V to 10V) when inputting a voltage to terminal AI2. 3. Set G12-01 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used for terminal AI1. 4. Set G12-04 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used for terminal AI2. (3) G02-01=2: Inputs the frequency reference from the RS-422/485 communication port R(+),R(-),and S(+), S(-) with MEMOCON-Series PLCS or similar devices using the MODBUS RTU protocol. Refer to Chapter 8.1.38 for more details about RS-422/485 communication. If G37-08 = 1 (USB port is enabled), set G02-01 = 2 to input the frequency reference from USB port. (4) G02-01=3: Reserved (5) G02-01=4 Reserved (6) G02-01=5: Inputs the frequency reference from control circuit terminal PI Set G14-01 (Pulse Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and set the 100% reference pulse frequency to G14-02 (pulse Input Scaling). Refer to Chapter 8.1.14 for more details on adjustments using pulse input. Frequency reference using pulse input is as shown in Fig. 8.1.3.

Fig. 8.1.3

Frequency Reference Using Pulse Input

â&#x2013; RUN Command Selection (G02-02) Parameter No.

LCD Display

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

0:Digital Operator 1:Terminal G02-02 RUN Source 2:Communication 3:Reserved 4:USB port

Digital Op Terminal Communication

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 0

Reserved USB

(1) G02-02=0: Inverter operations are performed using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, JOG/Left shift and FWD/REV keys) by setting G02-02=0. Refer to Chapter5 for details using the Digital Operator. (2) G02-02=1: Inverter operations are performed using the control circuit terminals by setting G02-02=1.

8-9

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

■ 2-Wire Mode Operation . Inverter operations using a 2-wire control is implemented by setting G10-01 (Terminal S1 function Selection) to 0 (Forward RUN/STOP, factory setting) and G10-02 (Terminal S2 Function Selection) to 1 (Reverse RUN/STOP, factory setting). . When control circuit terminal S1is ON and S2 is OFF, the inverter will operate in the forward mode, and when S1 is OFF, the inverter will stop. . When control circuit terminal S1 is OFF and S2 is ON, the inverter will operate in reverse mode, and when S2 is OFF and S2 is ON, the inverter will stop. . 2-wire control is as shown in Fig.8.1.4 below. S1 and S2 cannot be ON at the same time for more than 500ms or the warning message “EF9 (blinking) FWD-REV Error” will be displayed and the inverter will stop. After the condition is cleared the inverter will return normal.

Fig. 8.1.4 2- wire Mode Connection Example . When the inverter is initialized for 2-wire control by setting G01-04 (Initialize) to 2,4 or 6 (2-wire Sequence initialization), Multi-function Input Terminal S1 becomes the Forward RUN/STOP command, and S2 becomes the Reverse RUN/STOP command. ■ 3-Wire Mode Operation . When any parameter from G10-03 to G10-08 (Multi-function Digital Input Terminal S3 to S8) is set to 4, terminals S1 and S2 will be set for 3-wire control using a RUN command and a STOP command individually. and their original function is disabled, and the multi-function digital input terminal that has been set function as a Forward/Reverse command terminal. . When the inverter is initialized for 3-wire control by setting G01-04 (Initialize) to 3, 5 or 7 (3-wire Sequence initialization), Multi-function Digital Input Terminal S5 becomes the Forward/Reverse command input terminal. . Fig. 8.1.5 below is an example of 3-wire control. Multi-function input terminal S5 is used as the forward / reverse command input terminal.

Fig. 8.1.5 3-Wire Mode connection example . Terminal S1 must be ON for 50ms or longer to self-hold the RUN command. Refer to the following Fig.8.1.6 for the operation sequence in 3-wire mode. 8-10

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2030;§

Fig. 8.1.6 3-wire Mode Operation Sequence (3). G02-02=2 . Inverter operations can be controlled using the RS-422/485 communication port(R(+),R(-), s(+), s(-). . Refer to Chapter 8.1.38 for RS-422/485 communication details. If G37-08 = 1 (USB port is enabled), set G02-01 = 2 to input the inverter operations from USB port. (4). G02-02=3 Reserved (5). G02-02=4 Reserved

8-11

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

â&#x2013; Stopping Method Selection (G02-03) Parameter No.

G02-03

Description

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Stopping Method

0:Deceleration to stop 1:Coast to stop 2:DC Injection Braking Stop 3:Coast to stop with Timer

Decel to stop Coast to stop DC Braking to stop

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 0 Q Q Q X

Coast to stop (Tmr.)

Selects the stopping method used when a stop command is executed. There are four stopping methods. DC Injection braking to stop and Coast to stop with a timer cannot be set for SV control. (1) G02-03=0: . Decelerates to stop at a rate set by set by G03-02 (1st deceleration time). . When the run command is removed, the motor will decelerate to minimum output frequency set by G06-07 (Fmin) and then stop. .The rate of deceleration is determined by the selected deceleration time (factory default: G03-02). .When the output frequency has fallen below the DC injection braking starting frequency (G16-01) or the minimum output frequency (G06-07), whichever is greater, DC injection braking is applied and the motor will stop. Output frequency at time of stop command . The actual deceleration time = X active deceleration time Max. Output frequency Fmax (G06-03) . If S curve characteristics are set , they will add to the total stopping time. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.7.

Fig. 8.1.7

Deceleration to Stop

(2) G02-03=1: . If the RUN command is removed, the inverter output is turned off and the motor coasts to stop at the deceleration rate by the friction of the driven system. . After the RUN command is removed, subsequent run commands will be ignored until the minimum b.b time (G36-03) has expired. . Refer to Fig.8.1.8 below.

8-12

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.8 Coast to Stop (3) G02-03=2: . If the RUN command is removed, the inverter will baseblock for the minimum b.b. time (G36-03), and then the DC injection brake current set by G16-02 is applied to the motor. Refer to chapter 8.1.16 for details on DC injection braking. . The DC injection brake time (tDCDB) in Fig.8.1.9 is determined by the set value of G16-03 (DC Injection braking time at start), and the output frequency at the time the RUN command is removed. t DCDB =

(G16-03) Ă&#x2014; 10 Ă&#x2014; Output Frequency Fmax (G06-03)

. If an over-current (OC) fault occurs during DC injection braking, increase the minimum b.b time (G36-03) until the fault no longer occurs. . Refer to the following Fig 8.1.9, for the DC injection braking stop operation.

Fig. 8.1.9

DC Injection Braking Stop

(4) G02-03=3 . If the RUN command is removed, the inverter will baseblock and the motor will coast to stop. If a RUN command is input before the operation wait time T1 expires, the inverter will not run and the RUN command will be ignored. . The operation wait time (T1) is determined by the active deceleration time (G03-02,04, 06 or 8) and the output frequency when the run command is removed. . Refer to Fig. 8.1.10 below.

8-13

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.10 Coast to Stop with Timer â&#x2013; Prohibiting Reverse Operation (G02-04) Parameter NO.

LCD Display

G02-04

Direction Lock

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

0: Not Locked 1: Reverse Locked 2: Forward Locked

Not Lock Reverse Lock Forward Lock

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 0

. If the motor reverse or forward rotation is locked the motor can only operate in the non-locked direction and a RUN command will not be accepted for the locked direction. . The reverse or forward RUN command can be from the control terminals, LCD Digital Operator or option cards. . This parameter is used for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems such as pumps, blowers etc. â&#x2013; Master Frequency Reference Characteristics Selection (G02-05) Parameter No.

LCD Display

G02-05

+/- Char.

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

0: Forward Characteristics 1: Reverse Characteristics

+ Char. - Char.

Factory Setting 0

Control Method V/F V/ SLV SV + F PG A

.To select the master frequency reference characteristics corresponding to the analog input signals When input from control terminals AI1 or AI2. .G02-05 = 0: Forward characteristics of the master frequency reference. (0-10V or 4-20mA /0-100%, -10-0V/-100%-0) = 1: Reverse Characteristics of the master frequency reference. .Refer to Fig.8.1.11 below for the forward/reverse characteristics of the master frequency reference.

8-14

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.11 Forward/Reverse Characteristics of Master Frequency Reference â&#x2013; Zero Speed Operation (G02-06) Parameter NO.

G02-06

LCD Display

Zero-SPD Operate

Description Setting Range 0: Run at Frequency Reference 1: STOP 2: Run at Fmin 3: Zero Speed Operation

Control Methods Factory LCD Display Setting V/F V/F+ SLV SV PG Run @ Fref Stop Run @ Fmin Run @ Zero-Spd

. The operation method when the frequency reference input is less than the minimum output frequency in Sensor vector control mode (SV) (G01- 03=3 ) is shown in Fig. 8.1.12.

8-15

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.12 Zero Speed Operation for Sensor Vector (SV) Control . When the RUN command ( Forward or Reverse ) is turned off , and when the output frequency drops to the DC injection braking start frequency (G16-01), the DC injection braking starts for the DC injection braking time at stop (G16-03). Refer to Fig.8.1.70 for DC Injection Braking operation details. â&#x2013; Scan Times at Digital Input Terminals (G02-07) Parameter No. G02-07

LCD Display DI Scans

Description Setting Range 0: 4ms 1: 8ms(4ms x 2)

LCD Display 4ms 8ms

Factory Setting

V/F

. Use G02-07 to set the scan rate of the control circuit terminals (S1 to S8). G02-07 = 0: 4ms - One scan every 4ms (used for fast response.) = 1: 8ms -Two scans every 8ms (used for noise suppression)

8-16

Control Method V/F SLV + PG A

SV A

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

â&#x2013; CT/VT Mode Selection (G02-08) Parameter No. G02-08

Description

LCD Display CT/VT Mode

Setting Range

LCD Display

0: CT Mode 1: VT Mode

Factory Setting

V/F

CT VT

Control Method V/F SLV + PG A

SV X

. Selects either Constant Torque load (CT mode, G02-08=0), or Variable Torque load (VT mode, G02-08=1). The Inverter will automatically change the overload protection curve, carrier frequency, max output frequency, stall prevention level, and rated input/output current limit. Refer to Table 8.1.1 Table 8.1.1 CT/VT Mode Rating G02-08 Setting 0 (CT mode) 1 (VT mode)

Overload Capacity

Carrier Frequency

150%, 1min 120%, 1min

2-14KHz (Varies by KVA) 2-10KHz (Varies by KVA)

Max. Output Frequency 400.00Hz 120.00Hz

Stall Prevention Level

Rated Input/Output Current

150% (G09-02, G09-06) 120% (G09-02, G09-06)

Refer to Table4.1, 4.2

. Choose a suitable V/f pattern corresponding with the application load using group 6, V/F pattern, or group 34, Motor V/F pattern related parameters when CT mode VT mode is selected. This parameter is not initialized by the initialization operation (G01-04). This parameter is available for VF and VF+PG mode only. For SLV and SV mode, this parameter is fixed to CT mode only. 8.1.3 Group 03 - Acceleration/Deceleration Time â&#x2013; Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting (G03-01 to G03-09) Parameter Description Factory LCD Setting No. LCD Display Setting Range Display G03-01 G03-02 G03-03 G03-04 G03-05 G03-06 G03-07 G03-08 G03-09

Tacc1 Tdec1 Tacc2 Tdec2 Tacc3 Tdec3 Tacc4 Tdec4 Acc/Dec SW Freq.

0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

Tacc1 Tdec1 Tacc2 Tdec2 Tacc3 Tdec3 Tacc4 Tdec4 Acc/Dec SW Freq

10.0 sec 10.0 sec 10.0 sec 10.0 sec 10.0 sec 10.0 sec 10.0 sec 10.0 sec 0.0 Hz

Control Methods V/F V/F SLV SV + PG Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Sets individual acceleration / deceleration times. The factory setting for the acceleration time is G03-01, and the factory setting for the deceleration time in G03-02. . Acceleration time: The time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency (G06-03). . Deceleration Time: The time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum output frequency (G06-03).

8-17

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual A. Accel/ Decel Time Switching via Multi-function Digital Input Terminals Using the Multi-function Digital Input terminals (S1 to S8) to select acceleration / deceleration times during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals. The following Table 8.1.2 shows the acceleration/deceleration time (binary) switching combinations. Table 8.1.2 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching Combinations Accel /Decel Time Selection 2 (Set G10-01 to 08 = 13) 0 0 1 1 0 : OFF 1 : ON

Fig. 8.1.13

Accel / Decel Time Selection 1 (Set G10-01 to 08 = 12) 0 1 0 1

Acceleration Time

Deceleration Time

Taccc1(G03-01) Taccc2(G03-03) Taccc3(G03-05) Taccc4(G03-07)

Tdec1(G03-02) Tdec2(G03-04) Tdec3(G03-06) Tdec4(G03-08)

Accel / Decel Time Switching by Multi-function Digital Input (Example)

B. Switching Acceleration / Deceleration Time Automatically Using set frequency of G03-09 to switch the 1st and 4th acceleration / deceleration time automatically when the output frequency reaches the set value of G03-09.Refer to Fig. 8.1.14 below.

Fig. 8.1.14 Accel / Decel Time Switching Automatically . When the output frequency Fout < G03-09 : Accel / Decel Time = Tacc1/Tdec1 (.G03-01 and G03-02). . When the output frequency Fout > G03-09 : Accel / Decel Time = Tacc4/Tdec4 (G03-07 and G03-08) . Multi-function Digital Input terminals Accel / Decel Time Selection 1 (G10-01 to G10-12 set to 12) and Accel / Decel Time Selection2 (set to 13) have priority over G03-09.

8-18

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2013; Emergency Stop Deceleration Time (G03-10) Parameter Description

Control Methods Factory V/F SL No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F SV + V PG 0.0 to 6000.0 E-STOP Time 5.0 Sec A G03-10 E-STOP A A A Time Sec . Using the Multi-function Digital Input terminals (S1 to S8) to decelerate to stop at the time set by G03-10. . Setting the Multi-function Digital Input terminals (G10-01 to12) to 14: Decelerates to stop in the time set by G03-10 when the Emergency stop contact is ON (normally open). . Setting the Multi-function Digital Input terminals (G10-01 to12) to 15: Decelerates to stop in the time set by G03-10 when the Emergency stop contact is OFF (normally closed). . After the Emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn off the RUN command and emergency stop command. Refer to Fig. 8.1.15 below. . This function can be used as a stopping method when a fault has been detected.

Fig 8.1.15 Emergency Stop Operation Example â&#x2013; JOG Acceleration / Deceleration Time Setting (G03-11, G03-12) Parameter

Description

NO.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

G03-11 G03-12

JOG Tacc JOG Tdec

0.0 to 600.0 Sec 0.0 to 600.0 Sec

JOG Tacc JOG Tdec

10.0 sec 10.0 sec

Control Methods V/F V/F SLV SV + PG A A A A A A A A

G03-11 (Jog acceleration time) sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum output frequency (G06-03), and G03-12 (Jog deceleration time) set the time to decelerate from maximum output frequency (G06-03) to zero when the jog command is activated. Set the jog frequency reference in G05-17 (factory setting is 6.0Hz).

8-19

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.4 Group 04 – Carrier Frequency Selection ■ Carrier Frequency (G04-01) Parameter NO.

LCD Display

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F SLV SV + PG

by A Carrier Freq. Varies A A A KVA 1 When G04-01= 2 to 16, the carrier frequency in KHz units is a fixed pattern for the PWM output. 2 When G04-01= 0, it enables detailed settings using G04-05 to G04-07. e When SLV and SV mode, the min. value of G04-01 is 4. f The setting range depends on the inverter capacity (G45-01) and CT/VT mode (G02-08). G04-01 Carrier Freq.

0 to 16

When the PWM carrier is low, the motor acoustic noise increases, but the RFI and EMI interference noise generated and the leakage current decrease. Refer Table 8.1.3 below showing the effects of carrier frequency. Table 8.1.3 Effects of Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency (G04-01=2 to 16)) 2KHz--6K--10K--16KHz Motor Acoustic Noise High -------------- Low Output Current Waveform Bad ---Good---- Bad Interference Noise Low --------------- High Leakage Current Low --------------- High . The setting range and factory setting depends on the inverter capacity. Refer to Section 4.1 Basic Specification for the factory setting and maximum limit selectable for this parameter. . Increasing the carrier frequency reduces the capacity of the inverter unit. Refer to chapter 11, for the de-rating curve. . Reducing the setting increases the motor loss and raises the motor temperature. Increasing the setting increases inverter loss and raises the inverter temperature. . Low carrier frequency produces less noise but greater current ripple, while high carrier frequency produces greater noise but less current ripple. Output current waveform performance is good at 6~10KHz. If higher carrier frequency is needed, avoid No-load operation at inverter output frequency above 20Hz. The high carrier frequency current waveform is good when load is applied. . If the cable between the inverter and the motor is excessively long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase causing the inverter output current to increase as well and may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency as shown in Table 8.1.4. Cable Length Carrier Frequency (G04-01 Setting)

Table 8.1.4 Cable length and Carrier Frequency < 30m 30m - 50m 50m -100m

> 100m

14KHz max 10KHz max 5KHz max 2KHz max (G04-01=14KHz) (G04-01=10KHz) (G04-01=5KHz) (G04-01=2KHz)

. Reduce the carrier frequency if the speed and torque are inconsistent. . When using V/F and V/F+PG control mode, you can vary the carrier frequency according to the output Frequency by setting G04-05(Carrier Frequency Max. Limit), G04-06(Carrier Frequency Min. Limit) and G04-07(Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain). ■ Soft-PWM Function Selection (G04-02) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G04-02 Soft PWM Sel

Setting Range 0:Soft-PWM Control disabled 1:Soft-PWM Control enabled

LCD Display Disabled

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 0

Enabled

Setting G04-02 to 1 enables Soft-PWM control, which changes the motor acoustic noise quality. Soft-PWM control can alter the motor generated metallic acoustical sound, which may be more pleasant to the human ear. It also limits RFI noise to minimum levels. The factory setting is Soft-PWM control OFF (Disabled). When the Soft PWM function is enabled, the maximum carrier frequency will be limited to 8kHz. 8-20

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Carrier Frequency Auto Change Selection (G04-03) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G04-03

Auto Carrier

Control Methods Factory V/F LCD Display Setting V/F SLV SV + PG

Setting Range 0 : Disabled

Disabled

1 : Enabled

Enabled

The carrier frequency will automatically be reduced if the inverter internal protection detects an excessive heat sink temperature. Once this temperature returns to normal, the carrier frequency will automatically be returned to the setting (G04-01). (1). G04-03=0 Auto carrier frequency change function is disabled, the operation carrier frequency depends on the G04-01 setting. (2). G04-03=1 Auto carrier frequency change function is enabled, the inverter will reduce the carrier frequency automatically when the heat sink temperature is too hot. (Refer to Chapter 11 for the de-rating guidelines) ■ Auto De-rating Selection (G04-04) Parameter Description NO.

LCD Display

G04-04

Auto Derating

Setting Range

Control Methods Factory V/F LCD Display Setting V/F SLV SV + PG

0 : Disabled

Disabled

1 : Enabled

Enabled

The Inverter output frequency will automatically be reduced by 30% of inverter rated speed if the inverter internal protection detects an excessive heat sink temperature, and when the auto carrier change function is disabled (G04-03=0), or the auto carrier change function is enabled (G04-03=1) but the Inverter carrier frequency was reduced to the low-bound carrier frequency. (1) G04-04=0: Auto de-rating function is disabled, and the carrier frequency depends on the setting of G04-01 or G04-03. (2) G04-04=1: Auto de-rating function is enabled, and the output frequency will be reduced by 30% of the inverter rated output frequency automatically when the heat sink temperature is excessive. Variable Carrier Frequency Max/Min Limit (G04-05 to G04-07) Parameter Description Control Methods Factory NO. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F V/F+ SLV SV PG Varies G04-05 Vari. Carr. Max 2 to 16 KHZ Vari. Carr. Max by KVA A A A A G04-06 Vari. Carr. Min 2 to 16 KHZ Vari. Carr. Min Varies A A X X by KVA Vari. Carri. G04-07 Vari. Carri. Gain 00 to 99 00 A A X X Gain ■

. The carrier frequency characteristics differ according to the control method. 1 V/F and V/F+PG control mode: Fixed carrier frequency pattern when (G04-01=2 to 16) and variable carrier frequency with output frequency when (G04-01=0) are possible. 2 SLV and SV control mode: Fixed carrier frequency pattern only (G04-01=2 to16). . In the V/F and V/F+PG control mode, the carrier frequency can be change in response to the output frequency by setting G04-05 to G04-07 as per the following figure.

8-21

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Carrier Frequency (KHZ) G04- 05

Fout x (G04-07) x K

G04- 06

Fmax (G06-03)

OutputFrequency (Fout, Hz)

Where, K is a coefficient the value of which depends on the setting of G04-05( Fc max) as follows: 1 K=1: when G04-05 < 5 KHz 2 K=2: when 10 KHz > G04-05 ≥ 5 KHz 3 K=3: when G04-05 ≥ 10KHz . Use the carrier frequency variable with output frequency setting as above to reduce the carrier frequency if speed and torque are inconsistent in the V/F and V/F+PG control mode. . To fix the carrier frequency, either set the same value in G04-05 and G04-06 or set G04-07 to 0. . If the carrier frequency proportional gain (G04-07) > 6 and G04-05 < G04-06, a “SE01 Set Range Error” warning message will occur. . If the minimum limit (G04-06) is set higher than the maximum limit (G04-05), the minimum limit will be disregarded and carrier frequency will be fixed at the maximum limit (G04-05). . In the SLV and SV control mode, the maximum limit of the carrier frequency is fixed in G04-05.

NOTES-

8-22

8.1.5 Group 05 – Preset Reference and Process Operation ■ Frequency Reference 1 to 16 (G05-01 to G05-16) ■ JOG Frequency Reference (G05-17) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display Setting Range

LCD Display

G05-01 G05-02 G05-03 G05-04 G05-05 G05-06 G05-07 G05-08 G05-09 G05-10 G05-11 G05-12 G05-13 G05-14 G05-15 G05-16 G05-17

Freq. Ref. 1 Freq. Ref. 2 Freq. Ref. 3 Freq. Ref. 4 Freq. Ref. 5 Freq. Ref. 6 Freq. Ref. 7 Freq. Ref. 8 0.00 - 400.00 Hz Freq. Ref. 9 Freq. Ref. 10 Freq. Ref. 11 Freq. Ref. 12 Freq. Ref. 13 Freq. Ref. 14 Freq. Ref. 15 Freq. Ref. 16 JOG Ref. 0.00 - 400.00 Hz

Freq. Ref. 1 Freq. Ref. 2 Freq. Ref. 3 Freq. Ref. 4 Freq. Ref. 5 Freq. Ref. 6 Freq. Ref. 7 Freq. Ref. 8 Freq. Ref. 9 Freq. Ref. 10 Freq. Ref. 11 Freq. Ref. 12 Freq. Ref. 13 Freq. Ref. 14 Freq. Ref. 15 Freq. Ref. 16 JOG Ref.

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Factory Setting

0.00Hz

Control Methods V/F V/F SLV SV + PG Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Q Q Q Q

. There is a maximum of 17 multi-step reference selections from the combination of the multi-step speed ref 1 to 4 and JOG frequency reference terminals ( Multi-function Digital Input terminal selection ). There are 16 frequency references G05-01 to G05-16 , and one jog frequency reference G05-17. . Refer to Table 8.1.9 for the combination of multi-step speed operation. ■ Frequency Reference Upper Bound (G05-18) ■ Frequency Reference Lower Bound (G05-19) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G05-18 Ref. Up Bound G05-19 Ref. Low Bound

Setting Range 0.0 to 109.0% 0.0 to 109.0%

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG

Ref. Up Bound

100.0%

Ref. Low Bound

0.0%

. The upper and lower bounds of the frequency reference are set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency G06-03 (Fmax) as 100%, in increments of 0.1%. . G05-18 must be greater than G05-19, otherwise a warning message “SE01 Set Range Error” will occur. . When the frequency reference is zero and a RUN command is input, the motor operates at the Frequency Reference Lower Bound G05-19. The motor will not operate, however, if the Frequency Reference Lower Bound G05-19 is set lower than the minimum output frequency G06-07 (Fmin). . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.16

8-23

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.16

Upper and Lower Bound of the Frequency Reference

â&#x2013; AUTO-Run Mode Selection (G05-20 to G05-52) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

G05-20 G05-21 G05-22 G05-23 G05-24 G05-25 G05-26 G05-27 G05-28 G05-29 G05-30 G05-31 G05-32 G05-33 G05-34 G05-35

Run Time 1 Run Time 2 Run Time 3 Run Time 4 Run Time 5 Run Time 6 Run Time 7 Run Time 8 Run Time 9 Run Time 10 Run Time 11 Run Time 12 Run Time 13 Run Time 14 Run Time 15 Run Time 16

0.0 to 6000.0sec

G05-36

G05-37 G05-38 G05-39 G05-40 G05-41

0: Disabled 1: Single Cycle 1 (Stop) 2: Periodic 1 (Stop) Auto-Run Mode 3: Single Cycle 1 (Run) 4: Single Cycle 2 (Stop) 5: Periodic 2 (Stop) 6: Single Cycle 2 (Run) Auto-Run Sel 1 0: Stop (Decel by G03-02) Auto-Run Sel 2 Auto-Run Sel 3 1: Forward Run Auto-Run Sel 4 2: Reverse Run Auto-Run Sel 5

Control Methods Factory V/F LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG Run Time 1 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 2 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 3 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 4 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 5 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 6 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 7 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 8 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 9 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 10 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 11 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 12 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 13 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 14 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 15 0.0 Sec A A A X Run Time 16 0.0 Sec A A A X Disabled Single1(stop) Periodic1(stop) 0 A A A X Single1(Run) Single2(stop) Periodic2(stop) Single2(Run) Stop FWD REV

0 0 0 0

A A A A

X X X X Cont.

8-24

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Parameter No.

LCD Display

G05-42

Auto-Run Sel 6

G05-43 G05-44 G05-45 G05-46 G05-47 G05-48 G05-49 G05-50 G05-51 G05-52

Description Setting Range

Control Methods Factory V/F LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG

Auto-Run Sel 7 Auto-Run Sel 8 Auto-Run Sel 9 0: Stop (Decel by Auto-Run Sel 10 G03-02) Auto-Run Sel 11 1: Forward Run Auto-Run Sel 12 2: Reverse Run Auto-Run Sel 13 Auto-Run Sel 14 Auto-Run Sel 15 Auto-Run Sel 16

Stop FWD REV

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A A A A A A A A A A

X X X X X X X X X X

. Auto-run mode is implemented by using the multi-step frequency reference settings (G05-01 to G05-16), in conjunction with the Auto-Run mode time settings (G05-20 to G05-35) and is selected by the setting of Auto-Run Mode (G05-36). The Auto-Run direction can be set with the setting of G05-37 to G05-52.. In the Auto-Run mode, the RUN source (set by G02-02) only provides the RUN/STOP command. The direction of Run command is according to the setting of G05-37 to G05-52. . If frequency reference and Run direction is controlled by RTC timer (G42-27 = 1~5), the Auto-run mode is ineffective . If the Auto-run mode is set, the functions below are ineffective 1. Traverse Function 2. PID Function . In the Auto-Run mode, the Multi-Step speed Ref 1- 4 (G10-01 to G10-12 =7 to 10) derived from the Multi-Function Digital Input terminals (S1 to S12) are ineffective. . Example of Auto-Run Mode: (1) Single Cycle Running (G05- 36 = 1) The Inverter will run for a single full cycle based upon the specified settings, then, it will stop. Freq.

Single Cycle Parameter Settings G05-36 = 1 (Auto-Run mode for single cycle) G05-37- 39 =1 (step1- 3 are Forward run) G05-40 = 2 (step 4 is Reverse run) G05-41 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 52 = 0 (step 5- 16 are stop) G05-01 = 15Hz (step 1: 15Hz) G05-02 = 30Hz (step 2: 30Hz) G05-03 = 50Hz (step 3: 50Hz) G05-04 = 20Hz (step 4: 20Hz) G05-20 = 20sec (step 1: 20sec) G05-21 = 25sec (step 2: 25sec) G05-22 = 30sec (step 3: 30sec) G05-23= 40sec (step 4: 40sec)

G05-03

50 Hz G05-02

30 Hz 15 Hz

20 Hz

G05-01

G05-04 20s G05-20

25s G05-21

30s

40s

G05-22

G05-23

Fig. 8.1.17 Single Cycle Auto-Run (stop)

8-25

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (2) Periodic Running (G05-36 = 2, 5) The Inverter will repeat the same cycle periodically. G05-36 = 2 G05- 01 to 52: same setting as the example 1.

Fig. 8.18

Periodic Auto-Run

(3) Auto-Run Mode for Single Cycle (G05-36=3) The drive will continue to run at the set speed of final the step. G05-36 = 3 G05-37 to 40 = 1 (Forward run) G05-41 to 52 = 0 Other related parameters are the same as the settings in example 1.

Fig. 8.1.19 Single Cycle Auto-Run (Continues)

Output Frequency

G05-36 = 1 to 3: If the inverter stops and restarts again, it will continue running from the unfinished step, according to the setting of G05-36. = 4 to 6: If the inverter stops and restarts again it will begin a new cycle and continue running according to the setting of G05-36.

路 ACC/DEC time follows the settings of G03-01, G03-02 in Auto-Run Mode. 路 If the setting values of G05-20 to G05-35 are all set to 0, the Auto-Run Mode is disabled. 8-26

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.6 Group 06 – V/F Pattern Setting ■ Input Voltage Setting (G06-01) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G06-01 Input Voltage

Setting Range

LCD Display

230V class : 155.0 to 255.0V 460V class : 310.0 to 510.0V

Input Voltage

Factory Setting 230.0V 460.0V

Control Methods V/F V/F SLV SV + PG Q

. Sets the inverter voltage in the units of 0.1V to match the input power supply. (e.g. 200V / 208V / 230V / 240V or 380V / 415V / 440V / 460V or 480V). . This set value is used as a reference value for pre-defined V/F patterns (G06-02 = 0 to E) and protective features such as overvoltage, braking transistor turn-on, stall prevention etc. ■ V/F Pattern Selection (G06-02) Parameter Description No.

G06-02

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG

0:50Hz CT Standard 50Hz CT 1:60Hz CT Standard 60Hz CT 2:60Hz CT (50Hz Saturation) 60Hz CT(50Hz B.) 3:72Hz CT (60Hz Saturation) 72Hz CT(60Hz B.) 4:50Hz VT (Cubic) 50Hz VT (Cubic) 5:50Hz VT (Square) 50Hz VT (Square) 6:60Hz VT (Cubic) 60Hz VT (Cubic) 7:60Hz VT (Square) 60Hz VT (Square) V/F Pattern 8:50Hz High Starting Torque (L) 50Hz HST (L) F Q Q X Sel 9:50Hz High Starting Torque (H) 50Hz HST (H) A:60Hz High Starting Torque (L) 60Hz HST (L) B:60Hz High Starting Torque (H) 60Hz HST (H) C:90Hz CT (60Hz saturation) 90Hz CT(60Hz B.) D:120Hz CT (60Hz saturation) 120Hz CT(60Hz B.) E:180Hz CT (60Hz saturation) 180Hz CT(60Hz B.) F: Customer V/F pattern (with volt Custom,V Limit limited) FF: Customer V/F pattern (without volt Custom(No V Lim.) limited) . Sets the inverter output V/F characteristics in G06-02 when using V/F or V/F+PG Control. . When the V/F pattern is selected, the input voltage to the inverter must be set in G06-01. . There are three methods of setting of the V/F pattern : (1) G06-02 = 0 to E: Selects one of the 15 pattern types (0 to E) that have been preset. (2) G06-02 = F: Sets a user-defined V/F pattern using G06-03 to G06-11, with voltage limit. (3) G06-02 = FF: Sets a user-defined V/F pattern using G06-03 to G06-11, without voltage limited. . The factory setting for G06-02 is F and the contents of G06-03 to G06-11 are the same as when G06-02 is set to 1. . When selecting one of the pre-defined 15 pattern types, the set values of G06-03 to G06-11 are changed automatically. The values for G06-03 to G06-11 depending on the inverter capacity. . Refer to the following Tables 8.1.5 for V/F characteristics. This parameter is not initialized by the initialization operation (G01-04).

8-27

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual V/F Patterns *1

V/F pattern

50Hz

(0)

0 14 7.5 0 1.3 2.5

1 60Hz SaturatF ion ( Initial )

(V) 230

(2)

60Hz 50Hz Saturation

14 7.5 0

230

Variable Torque Characteristics

72Hz

50 (Hz)

(1),(F) 50 60 (Hz)

1.5 3

(3)

50Hz

60Hz

60 72 (Hz)

(5)

Variable Torque 2

Variable Torque 3

55 38.5

(4)

7.5 6.8 0 1.3

230

50 (Hz)

(V)

(7)

Variable Torque 4

55 38.5

60Hz

High Starting Torque 4

90Hz

(V)

230

50Hz

High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque 2 High Starting Torque 3

G06-02 Setting 8

7.5 6.8 0 1.5

V/F Pattern*1

(9)

15.2 14.6 7.7 7.6 0 1.3 2.5

230

60 (Hz)

(C)

60 90 (Hz)

(V)

(D)

D 14 7.5 0 1.5 3

230

60 120 (Hz)

(V)

(E)

*1. These values are for the 230V class ; double the values for 460V class inverters.

8-28

(A)

(V)

60 (Hz)

NOTES-

50 (Hz)

(B) 15.2 14.6 7.7 7.6 0 1.5 3

230

120Hz

(8)

(V)

14 7.5 0 1.5 3

180Hz

(6)

(V)

230

14 7.5 0 1.5 3

Variable Torque 1

Specification

(V)

Fixed Output Operation Characteristics

Constant Torque Characteristics

(V) 230

Type

High Starting Torque Characteristics

Table 8.1.5 G06-02 Type Specification Setting

14 7.5 0 1.5 3

60 180 (Hz)

■ Custom V/F Pattern Setting ( G06-03 to G06-13 ) Parameter Description

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Factory Setting *2

Control Methods

60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz

V/F + PG Q

A A Q

X X A

Vmax

60.0 Hz 3.0 Hz 1.5 Hz 230.0V

0.0 to 255.0V *1

Vmid1

230.0V *1

Vmid2

0.0 to 255.0V *1

Vmid2

14.0V *1

G06-11

Vmin

0.0 to 255.0V *1

Vmin

7.5V *1

G06-12

Vbase

0.0 to 255.0V *1

Vbase

230.0V

No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

G06-03

Fmax

40.0 to 400.0 Hz

Fmax

G06-04

Fbase

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

Fbase

G06-05 G06-06 G06-07

Fmid1 Fmid2 Fmin

0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

Fmid1 Fmid2 Fmin

G06-08

Vmax

0.0 to 255.0V *1

G06-09

Vmid1

G06-10

*1,3

V/F

SLV

*1.These values are for the 230V class; double the values for 460V class inverters. *2.The factory setting will change when either the control method or the V/f pattern is changed. The factory setting above is for V/f mode, V/f pattern F for 7.5 to 40HP. *3.G06-12 (Vbase) is set to the same value as G06-08 (Vmax) after auto-tuning. Parameter G06-04, G06-08 and G06-12 are set automatically during auto-tuning. V/f Pattern Setting (G06-03 to G06-12) . G03-03 to G06-11 can only be set by the user when G06-02 has been set to “F” or “FF”. If G06-02 is set to anything other than F or FF, the parameters cannot be changed. . Please follow the hierarchy for frequency setting, otherwise an warning message “SE03, V/f Curve Error” will display. Fmax ≥ Fbase ≥ Fmid1 ≥ Fmid2 ≥ Fmin G06-03) (G06-04) (G06-05) (G06-06) (G06-07) . There is no hierarchy for the voltage setting ( G06-08 to G06-11 ). . If the V/f characteristics are linear, set G06-06 (Fmid2) and G06-07 (Fmin) to the same value. In this case, G06-10 will be ignored. . When changing control method via G01-03, parameters G06-07 (Fmin) and G06-11 (Vmin) will change the factory settings for that control method. . Refer to following figure for user-defined V/f pattern.

Fig. 8.1.20 User Defined V/f Pattern 8-29

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . Set the V/F curve based on the motor allowable load characteristics. In high torque-low speed application, it is likely that the motor will overheat. If the motor runs a prolonged time under these conditions, special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. . If the auto-torque boost function is activated via G29-01, the voltage to the motor changes automatically to provide sufficient motor torque to start and run at low frequencies. V/f Pattern Setting for SLV/SV Control . Normally it is not necessary to adjust the V/f pattern for SLV control mode. Adjust the V/f pattern when you want to change the maximum output frequency setting (G06-03, Fmax), base frequency (G06-04, Fbase), minimum output frequency (G06-07, Fmin). . Since SV/SLV mode use a current controller, G06 group can only control the frequency pattern of SV/SLV mode. Voltage output is controled automatically. If motor need to be operated at constant horse power region or high speed area above motor rated frequency, Preweaken the flux by decreasing motor no-load voltage G07-05 or T-05 10~40V lower than inverter input voltage and re-autotuning again. When no-load voltage is decreased, inverter wonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t saturate and gain more voltage for torque control, hence hunting can be prevented. The only drawback is that preweakening flux increases current. . The base frequency (G06-04, Fbase) needs to be set as rated frequency in motor nameplate of for SLV control. . The best setting of base frequency (G06-04, Fbase) for all control mode is the rated frequency in motor nameplate Manual Torque Boost When the motor is connected to a high inertial load or the starting friction (break-away) is high, the starting torque may need to be increased by boosting the voltage above the normal V/f ratio as shown below in Fig. 8.1.21. However, running the motor at a low speed for a long periods of time can cause the motor to overheat. A motor with a built-in fan for cooling may be necessary.

Fig. 8.1.21 Manual Torque Boost

8-30

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.7 Group 07 – Motor Parameter ■ Motor Parameter Setting (G07-01 to G07-17) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G07-01 Motor Poles

Setting Range 2,4,6,8 Poles

LCD Display Motor Poles

G07-02 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00Hz

Motor Rated Slip

Rated G07-03 Motor Power

0.00 to 600.00KW

Mtr Rated Power

G07-04 Rated Current

0.0 to 999.9A

Rated Current

G07-05 No-Load Volt

50 to 240V(230V class), 100 to 480V(460V class)

No-Load Volt

G07-06 Excitation Current 10.0 to 100.0%

Excit. Current

G07-07 Core Sat. Comp1 0 to 100%

Core Sat. Comp 1

G07-08 Core Sat. Comp2 0 to 100%

Core Sat. Comp 2

G07-09 Core Sat. Comp3 100 to 300%

Core Sat. Comp 3

G07-10 Motor Core Loss

0.0 to 15.0%

Motor Core Loss

G07-11 Motor R1

0.001 to 60.000Ω

Motor R1

G07-12 Motor Llkg

0.01 to 200.00mH

Motor Llkg

G07-13 Motor Lm

0.1 to 6553.5mH

Motor Lm

G07-14 Motor R2

0.001 to 60.000Ω

Motor R2

G07-15 No-Load Current 0.01 to 600.00A

No-Load Current

Factory Setting 4 Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG Q Q Q Q A

Varies by KVA

Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA 2.0% Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA

. The motor parameter settings are as follows. Since these motor parameters are set automatically when motor 1 is selected (T-09=1) during auto-tuning, readjustment is not normally required except for some special applications such as the constant horsepower control for machine tool spindle motor etc. Cont. (1) Number of Motor poles Setting (G07-01). . Sets the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate. (2) Motor Rated Slip Setting (G07-02). . At V/F mode, set G07-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the rated speed on the motor nameplate. The amount of rated slip frequency =

Motor rated frequency(T - 06) -

Motor rated speed(T - 07) * Motor poles(G07 - 01) 120

. Normally it doesn’t need to set G07-02 at SLV/SV mode. G07-02 can be acquired from autotuned rotor resistance, mutual inductance, leakage inductance and excitation current at SLV/SV mode. (3) Motor Rated Output Power (G07-03). Sets the value on the motor nameplate. (4) Motor Rated Current (G07-04). Sets the motor nameplate full load current. The parameter is the same as T-03. If this parameter is modified at SLV or SV mode, a rotational autotuning is suggested. (5) Motor NO-Load Voltage (G07-05). . This parameter is the same as T-10. When T-10 or G07-05 is set, G07-05 or T-10 is also set as well. It defines the motor rated flux at rated speed. Set this value 10~50V lower than the inverter input voltage to ensure torque performance at rated frequency or higher frequency. . Smaller No-Load voltage will reduce No-Load current, weaken the flux and increase loading current. . Larger No-Load voltage will increase No-Load current, enhence the flux and reduce current when load is 8-31

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual applied. The enhenced flux also cause larger back electromotive force which saturates inverter output and makes torque control failed. If this parameter is modified at SLV or SV mode, a rotational autotuning is suggested. (6) Motor Excitation Current Reference (G07-06). . This parameter is set automatically at autotuning, adjustment in not normally required. . If it is required to set G07-06, set G07-06 as percentage of motor rated current(G07-04). . The slip compensation is activated when the output current is greater than motor no-load current in V/f control mode. (7) Motor Core Saturation Coefficient 1,2 and 3 Settings (G07-07, G07-08, G07-09). . These parameters are set automatically at autotuning, adjustment normally is not required. . These parameters set the motor core saturation coefficient at 50% (G07-07), 75% (G07-08) and 137.5%(G07-09) of rated flux separately to compensate core saturation effect. . Core saturation coefficient is defined as the percentage of motor excitation current(G07-06). When flux is at 137.5% level, the core saturation coefficient should be larger than 137.5%. When flux is at 50% or 75%, the core saturation coefficient should be less than 50% or 75%, respectively. (8) Motor Core Loss Setting (G07-10). . Sets the motor core loss as a percentage of motor rated output for torque compensation. 3 × Motor Core Loss (watt)× 100% % W core (G07-10) = Motor Rated Output Power (watt , G07-03) . Use the motor core loss setting (G07-10) to increase the torque compensation accuracy when in V/f control mode. (9) Motor Line-to-Line Resistance R1 (G07-11). (10) Motor Leakage Inductance Llkg (G07-12). (11) Motor Mutual Inductance Lm (G07-13). (12) Motor Rotor Equivalent Resistance R2 (G07-14). These parameters are automatically set during auto-tuning. (13) Motor No-Load Current (G07-15) . Set this parameter according the motor output current while at motor rated frequency (T-06) and motor rated voltage (T-04). . The slip compensation is activated when the output current is greater than motor no-load current in the V/f control mode. . G07-04 must be greater than G07-15, otherwise a warning message “SE01 Set Range Error” may occur. . Refer to the following Fig.8.1.22 for the inductor motor Y-Equivalent model for the motor parameters.

Fig. 8.1.22

IM Y-Equivalent Model

8-32

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.8 Group 08 – Motor Overload / Overheat ■ Motor Overload/ Overheat Protection (G08-01 to G08-05) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G08-01 Mtr. Overload Sel

G08-02 Motor Pre-OH Sel G08-03

Motor OH Sel

G08-04 G08-05

Motor OH Time PTC Filter Time

Setting Range

LCD Display

---0B:Protection disabled

Disabled

---1B:Protection enabled --0-B:Motor cold start protection --1-B:Motor hot start protection -0--B:Standard motor protection -1--B:Inverter duty motor protection 0---B: Reserved 1---B: Reserved 0:Decelerate to stop 1:Coast to stop 2:Continue Operation 0:Decelerate to stop 1:Coast to stop 1 to 300 Sec 0.00 to 5.00 Sec

Enabled

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG

Cold Start Hot Start

0001B

A A

Standard Motor Inv. Duty Motor Reserved Reserved Decel to stop 2 Coast to stop Continue Running Decel to stop 1 Coast to stop Motor OH Time 60 Sec PTC Filter Time 0.20 Sec

( 1 ) Motor Overload protection Selection (G08-01). . Sets the motor overload protection function in G08-01 according to the applicable motor. ‧ Disables the motor overload protection function (set G08-01=---0B) when two or more motors are connected to a single inverter. Use an alternative method to provide separate overload protection for each motor such as connecting a thermal overload relay to the power line of each motor. ‧ The motor overload protection function G08-01 should be set to --1-B (hot start protection characteristic curve) when the power supply is turned on and off frequently, because the thermal values are reset each time when the power is turned off. ‧ For motors without a forced cooling fan (general purpose standard motor), the heat dissipation capability is lower when in low speed operation. Set G08-01= -0--B. ‧ For motors with a forced cooling fan (inverter duty or V/F motor), the heat dissipation capability is not dependent upon the rotating speed. Set G08-01 = -1--B. . To protect the motor from overload by using electronic overload protection, be sure to set parameter G07-04 according to the rated current value shown on the motor nameplate. . Refer to the following Fig 8.1.23 for the standard motor overload protection curve example (G08-01= -0--B)

Fig. 8.1.23 Motor Overload Protection Curve (Standard motor example) 8-33

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ( 2 ) Motor Overheat Protection Selection (G08-02 to G08-05) . Perform motor overheat protection by using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) sensor built into the windings of the motor. . The PTC thermistor is connected to terminals MT and GND. If the motor overheats, the OH3 (motor pre-overheat) and OH4 (motor overheat) error codes will be displayed. (1).When G08-02=0 or 1 (stop operation when pre-overheat occurred), and the PTC thermistor input exceeds the pre-overheat alarm detection level, the Digital Operator will display “OH3 Motor Pre-Overheat” fault message, and the fault contact output will operate. (2).When G08-02=2 (continue operation when pre-overheat occurs), and PTC thermistor input exceeds the pre-overheat alarm detection level, the Digital Operator will display “OH3 Motor pre-overheat (blinking)” alarm message and the fault contact output does not operate. (3).The motor overheat protection is active when the PTC thermistor resistance RT=1330Ω and the delay time set by (G08-04) has expired. The Digital Operator will display “OH4 Motor overheat” fault message, and the fault contact output operates. The motor will stop in accordance with the stopping method set in G08-03. . Fig. 8.1.24 below shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor value vs. temperature and the terminal connections.

Fig. 8.1.24 Motor Overheat Protection

8-34

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.9 Group 09 – Stall Prevention

■ Stall Prevention During Acceleration (G09-01 to G09-03) Parameter Description Factory Setting Setting No. LCD Display LCD Display Range 0 : Invalid 1 : valid

G09-01 Accel Stall Sel

Invalid Valid

Control Methods V/F Q

V/F + SLV PG Q

SV X

CT:150% A A A X VT:120% G09-03 Stall CH Level 0% to 100% Stall CH Level 50% A A A X . The stall prevention during the acceleration function is used to prevent excessive current due to high motor loads or a rapid acceleration requirements. . When the stall prevention function during acceleration is set (G09-01=1), and the inverter output current exceeds the (G09-02) -15% level, the acceleration rate will begin to decrease. When the value of G09-02 is exceeded, the motor stops accelerating. . If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity, decrease the set value of G09-02 if the motor stalls. . The inverter rated output current should be set to the 100% level. . Refer to Fig. 8.1.25 below showing stall prevention during acceleration. G09-02 Acc. Stall Level

30% to 200%

Acc. Stall Level

Fig. 8.1.25 Stall Prevention During Acceleration . If using the motor in the constant horse power (CH) region, the stall prevention level (G09-02) will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling. The stall prevention level during acceleration in the constant horsepower region is reduced as follows. Accel stall prevention level (in CH region) =【Accel stall prevention level (G09-02)】×【Fbase (G06-04)】 Output frequency . G09-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in CH region from being reduced more than necessary. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.26.

Fig. 8.1.26 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration 8-35

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2013; Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration (G09-04) Parameter Description Control Methods Factory V/F No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG Invalid Stall 0 : Invalid G09-04 Decel 1 Q Q Q X Sel 1 : Valid Valid 230V: 395V 330V to 425V Dec. Stall G09-05 A A A X Level 460V: 790V 660V to 850V . The stall prevention during deceleration function automatically extends deceleration time according to the magnitude of the DC bus voltage, thus preventing overvoltage during deceleration. . When the DC bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level (G09-05) during deceleration, deceleration stops, and when the DC bus voltage falls below the level, deceleration is restarted. Dec. Stall Level

. The stall prevention level can be set by G09-05. Refer to Table 8.1.8 for the default value Table 8.1.8

Stall Prevention Level During Deceleration Default Value of G09-05 Inverter Class (Stall prevention level during deceleration, DC bus voltage ) 230V Class 395VDC

460V Class

G06-01ďź&#x153;400V

680VDC

G06-01 >400V

790VDC

. Refer to Fig. 8.1.27 for stall prevention During Deceleration . Always set G09-04 to 0 (invalid) when a braking option (braking resistor or braking unit) is used.

Fig. 8.1.27 Stall Prevention During Deceleration

8-36

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

â&#x2013; Stall Prevention During Running (G09-06~G09-08) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range 0:Invalid 1:Valid, deceleration time1 2:Valid, deceleration time2

G09-06 Run Stall Sel

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory Setting

V/F

V/F + SLV PG

Invalid Valid (Tdec1)

Valid (Tdec2)

Run Stall Level CT:160% A A A X VT:120% G09-08 Run Stall Time 2 to 100ms Run Stall Time 100ms A A A X . Stall prevention during running is effective only for the V/F, V/F + PG and SLV control mode. . This function is used to prevent the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the inverter output Frequency when a sudden overload occurs while the motor is operating at constant speed. . If the inverter output current exceeds the setting in G09-07 for more than the time set in G09-08, the inverter output frequency will decelerate at deceleration time 1 (G03-02) or deceleration time 2 (G03-04). When the inverter output current drops below the (G09-07) - 2% level, the output frequency will accelerate again at the acceleration rate. Refer to the following Fig.8.1.28. G09-07 Run Stall Level 30% to 200%

Load

t 2% (Hysteresis)

G09- 07 Inverter Output Current

t Output Frequency

Tdec1 (G03- 02) Tdec2 (G03- 04) t G09-07 (detection time)

Fig. 8.1.28 Stall Prevention During Running Note -The stall prevention level during running can be adjusted by the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 (G12-04 to 07) or AI3 (G12-08 to 11). Refer to chapter 8.1.12 for details.

8-37

8.1.10 Group 10 – Multi-Function Digital Input (DI)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

■ Multi-function Digital Input Selection (G10-01 to G10-15) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

G10-01 G10-02 G10-03 G10-04

S1 Function Sel S2 Function Sel S3 Function Sel S4 Function Sel

0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50 0 to 50

Refer to table 8.1.9 Refer to table 8.1.9 Refer to table 8.1.9 Refer to table 8.1.9

G10-05 S5 Function Sel

0 to 50

Refer to table 8.1.9

G10-06 S6 Function Sel

0 to 50

Refer to table 8.1.9

G10-07 S7 Function Sel

0 to 50

Refer to table 8.1.9

G10-08 S8 Function Sel

0 to 50 ---0B: (N.O.) ---1B: (N.C.) --0-B: (N.O.) G10-09 S1-S4 input type --1-B: (N.C.) -0--B: (N.O.) -1--B: (N.C.) 0---B: (N.O.) 1---B: (N.C.) ---0B: (N.O.) ---1B: (N.C.) --0-B: (N.O.) --1-B: (N.C.) G10-10 S5-S8 input type -0--B: (N.O.) -1--B: (N.C.) 0---B: (N.O.) 1---B: (N.C.)

Refer to table 8.1.9 S1 input (N.O.) S1 input (N.C.) S2 input (N.O.) S2 input (N.C.) S3 input (N.O.) S3 input (N.C.) S4 input (N.O.) S4 input (N.C.) S5 input (N.O.) S5 input (N.C.) S6 input (N.O.) S6 input (N.C.) S7 input (N.O.) S7 input (N.C.) S8 input (N.O.) S8 input (N.C.)

Control Methods Factory Setting 0 1 2 3 7(2-wire) 4(3-wire) 8(2-wire) 7(3-wire) 11(2-wire) 8(3-wire) 16

V/F A A A A

V/F + SLV SV PG A A A A A A A A A A A A

0000B

· Parameters for Multi-function Digital Inputs are shown in Table 8.1.9. · Refer to the following Fig.8.1.29 for inputs S1 – S8 related parameters.

Fig. 8.1.29 Multi-function Digital Inputs and Related Parameters

8-38

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Table 8.1.9 Multi-Function Digital Input Settings (G10-01 to G10-12) (“O”: effective, “X”: ineffective) Function Control Methods V/F Setting Description Name LCD Display V/F + SLV SV PG 2-Wire (Forward 2-Wire 2-Wire sequence (ON : Forward 0 O O O O Run) (FWD-RUN) run command). 2-Wire (Reverse 2-Wire 2-Wire sequence (ON : Reverse 1 O O O O Run) (REV-RUN) run command). 2 External Fault Ext.Fault ON : External fault input O O O O 3 Fault Reset Fault Reset ON : Fault reset input. O O O O 3-Wire sequence (Forward/Reverse command). Only parameter G10-03 and after 3-Wire Control can be set as 4, when set 3-Wire 4 O O O (Forward/ parameters to 4, terminals S1 and O (FWD/REV) Reverse command) S2 will now become Run command and Stop command respectively, and their original function is disabled. ON : Local mode (through LCD Digital Operator). Local/Remote control OFF: Frequency reference and Local/Remote O O O 5 selection Run command is determined O according to parameter (G02-01 and G02-02) setting. Remote mode Remote Mode ON : RS-422/485 communication. O 6 O O O operation selection Sel OFF: control circuit terminal. Multi-step speed Multi-Speed 7 O O O O Ref 1 Ref 1 Multi-step speed reference Multi-step speed Multi-Speed 8 selection. O O O O Ref 2 Ref 2 (If G12-09=0, the Multi-Speed Ref Multi-step speed Multi-Speed 1 can be used as Master speed/ 9 O O O O Ref 3 Ref3 Auxiliary Speed Switch) Multi-step speed Multi-Speed 10 O O O O Ref 4 Ref4 JOG Frequency 11 JOG Freq Ref ON : Select jog frequency O O O O Reference reference. Accel / Decel Time 12 Acc/Dec Sel1 Acceleration/Deceleration time O O O O Selection1 selection. Accel / Decel Time 13 Acc/Dec Sel2 O O O O Selection2 14 Emergency Stop E-Stop ON : Emergency stop input. O O O O 15 Reserved Reserved Reserved O O O O External Baseblock 16 Ext.BB ON : Inverter baseblock O O O O Command 17 Reserved Reserved Reserved O O O O Inhibit ACC/DEC ACC/DEC ON : Acceleration/Deceleration 18 O O O O Command Inhibit ramp hold. ON : Inverter overheat (OH2) Inverter overheat Overheat 19 O O O O alarm input (OH2 will be warning (OH2) Alarm displayed). 20

FJOG Command

RJOG Command

UP Command

DOWN Command

Synchronization Command

ON : Forward run at jog frequency (G05-17). ON : Reverse run at jog frequency RJOG (G05-17). ON : Output frequency increment UP command (always set with the DOWN command). ON : Output frequency decrement DOWN (always set with the UP Command command). ON : Synchronized speed enabled. Sync OFF: Synchronized speed disabled Command (other frequency reference enabled). FJOG

8-39

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Function Setting 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41

Name

Description

LCD Display

DC Injection braking DC Brake Command Command External speed search Speed Command 1 Search1 External speed search Speed Command 2 Search2

ON : Performs DC Injection Braking. ON : Speed search from maximum output frequency. ON : speed search from set frequency. Timer functions are set in G22-01, Timer Function Input Timer Input G22-02, and timer function output are set in G11-01 to G11-04. PID Control Disabled PID Disabled ON : PID Control disabled. ON : PID control integral value is PID Integral Reset PID I-Reset reset. PID SFS PID SFS Disabled ON : PID target SFS disabled. Disable Traverse Run Traverse Run ON : Traverse run. Command Upper Deviation Upper Dev ON : Upper Deviation Traverse Traverse Run Run Run. Lower Deviation Lower Dev ON : Lower Deviation Traverse Traverse Run Run Run. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Speed Control PG Invalid ON : Speed Control Without PG. Without PG Speed Control Integral I-Time Reset ON : Reset integration of speed Reset Control with PG. Speed / torque Speed/Torque ON : Torque Control mode. Control change change Polarity reversing external torque command for external Reverse Tref ON : Reversing reference. Torque Reference

Fire Mode Operation

Fire Mode

RTC Timer Enabled

RTC Timer

RTC Offset Time Enabled KEB Acceleration Reserved Reserved

ON : Zero-Servo Operation. ON: Disabled the H/W and S/W fault or Alarm protection (A special application for HVAC). ON : RTC timed functions are enabled.

Offset Time

ON: RTC offset time enabled.

45 46 47 48 49

Zero-Servo Command Zero-Servo

KEB Accel. Reserved Reserved

ON: KEB acceleration enabled Reserved Reserved ON: All parameters can be written-in. Parameter Write Write Enabled OFF : A ll parameters other than Enabled frequency reference (G02-01) are write protected. Manual Energy-saving Energy saving ON: Manual energy-saving control command set for G24-11, G24-12. ON: At power up, the inverter will not resume a RUN Command. Unattended Start USP OFF:A t power up, the inverter will Protection (USP) resume a RUN command that was active before power loss.

8-40

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG O

O O

O O O

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (1). 2 Wire Forward Run (Setting=0). (2). 2 Wire Reverse Run (Setting=1). . Refer to chapter 8.1.2 for 2-Wire mode operation. (3). External Fault (Setting=2). . When the external fault input terminal is turned on when an external fault occurs, the inverter will be turned off and the motor will coast to stop. . As an example if external input terminal S3 is set for External Fault (G10-03=2), a message â&#x20AC;&#x153;EF3 Ext Fault (S3)â&#x20AC;? will be displayed. Any of the eight input terminals (S1 to S8)may be assigned as an External Fault input. (4). Fault Reset. (Setting=3). . When the inverter detects a fault, the output fault contact operates, and inverter output is baseblocked. A fault message is displayed on the Digital Operator. . When a fault has occurred, one of the following methods can be used to reset the fault: a. Set one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (G10-01 to G10-12) to 3 (Fault reset), and turn on the fault reset signal. b. Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator. c. Turn off the power supply and then turn it on. (5). 3 Wire (Forward/Reverse Command) (Setting=4). . Refer to chapter 8.1.2 for 3-wire mode operation. (6). Local / Remote Control Selection (Setting=5). . The user can switch the inverter frequency reference and run command inputs between Local mode (Control through the LCD Digital Operator) or Remote mode (Control through control circuit terminals or RS485 communication). The input source selection is made by G02-01 (Frequency reference) and G02-02 (Run method). . The Local and Remote mode can be controlled by one of Multi-function Digital Input terminals S1 to S12, by setting one of the parameters G10-01 to G10-12 to 5 (Local / Remote control selection). Refer to the following table. Terminal ON

OFF

Mode

Content . Frequency reference and Run command is performed through Local Mode LCD Digital Operator. . The SEQ and REF LED is OFF . Frequency reference and Run command is performed through control circuit terminals or RS-485 communication. It will be controlled by the Remote Mode settings of G02-01 (Frequency reference selection) and G02-02 (Run command selection). . The SEQ and REF LED is ON.

. The inverter must be in the STOP mode in order to change the Local / Remote function. . The LOC/REM key on the LCD Digital Operator can also be used to perform Local/Remote switching. If one of the G10-01 to G10-12 parameters is set to 5 (Multi-function Digital Inputs S1 to S8), the LOC/REM key function on the LCD Digital operator will be disabled. (7). Remote Mode Operation Selection (Setting=6) . In Remote Mode, the SEQ and REF LEDs are on and the frequency reference and run commands can be controlled through either terminals AI1 or AI2 (Frequency Reference) and S1 or S2 (Run command) or by RS-485 communication terminals S(+), S(-). . By setting one of the parameters G10-01 to G10-08 to 6 (Remote Mode Operation Selection) the frequency reference and run command inputs can be selected to be from one of the control terminals (S1- S8) OFF or RS485 communication (S1-S8) ON when the inverter is stopped. Refer to Fig. 8.1.30 below.

8-41

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.30 Remote Mode Operation Selection . To switch frequency reference and run command inputs between the RS-485 communication and the control circuit terminals, set the following parameters: a. G02-01=1 (The frequency reference is through control circuit terminal, AI1 or AI2) b. G02-02=1 (The Run command is through control circuit terminal S1 or S2) c. Set one of G10-01 to G10-08 (Multi-function Digital Input terminal S1 to S8 function selection) to 6 (Remote mode operation selection). (8). Multi-step Speed Reference 1 (Setting=7) (9). Multi-step Speed Reference 2 (Setting=8) (10). Multi-step Speed Reference 3 (Setting=9) (11). Multi-step Speed Reference 4 (Setting=10) (12). JOG Frequency Reference (Setting=11) . There is a maximum of 17 multi-step speed reference selections from a combination of the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 4 and JOG frequency reference. . To switch frequency reference, set the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 4 and the JOG frequency reference selection in the Multi-function Digital Inputs. The following Table 8.1.10, shows the possible combinations. Table 8.1.10 The Combination of Multi-step Speed Operation Multi-function Digital Input (S1 to S12) *4 JOG Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Speed Selected Frequency frequency Speed Speed Speed Speed Ref. Ref 4 Ref 3 Ref 2 Ref 1 Frequency Ref 1 (G05-01) or master speed 1 ─ 0 0 0 0 frequency*2 ─ Auxiliary Speed *3Frequency or Frequency 2 0 0 0 1 Ref 2 (G05-02) 3 ─ 0 0 1 0 Frequency Ref 3 (G05-03) 4 ─ 0 0 1 1 Frequency Ref 4 (G05-04) 5 ─ 0 1 0 0 Frequency Ref 5 (G05-05) 6 ─ 0 1 0 1 Frequency Ref 6 (G05-06) 7 ─ 0 1 1 0 Frequency Ref 7 (G05-07) 8 ─ 0 1 1 1 Frequency Ref 8 (G05-08) 9 ─ 1 0 0 0 Frequency Ref 9 (G05-09) 10 ─ 1 0 0 1 Frequency Ref 10 (G05-10) 11 ─ 1 0 1 0 Frequency Ref 11 (G05-11) 12 ─ 1 0 1 1 Frequency Ref 12 (G05-12) 13 ─ 1 1 0 0 Frequency Ref 13 (G05-13) 14 ─ 1 1 0 1 Frequency Ref 14 (G05-14) 15 ─ 1 1 1 0 Frequency Ref 15 (G05-15) 16 ─ 1 1 1 1 Frequency Ref 16 (G05-16) 17 1*1 ─ ─ ─ ─ JOG Frequency Ref. (G05-17) 0 : OFF, 1 : ON, ─ : don’t care 8-42

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual *1. The JOG frequency terminal has higher priority than multi-step speed reference 1 to 4. *2. When parameter G02-01=0 (Frequency reference input=LCD Digital Operator), the multi-step1 frequency reference is input by the setting of G05-01 (Frequency reference1). When parameter G02-01=1 (Frequency reference input = control circuit terminal, analog input AI1 or AI2), the multi-step1 frequency reference is input from the analog command through terminals AI1 or AI2). *3. When parameter G12-09=0, terminal AI3 is selected as the auxiliary frequency reference, the multi-step 2 frequency reference is input from the auxiliary analog input through terminal AI3.When parameter G12-09â&#x2030; 0, the multi-step 2 frequency reference is input by the setting of G05-02 (frequency reference 2). *4. The multi-step speed operation is ignored if the PID target value is followed. . Connection Example Figs. 8.1.31 and 8.1.32 below shows a 9-step multi-step speed operation.

Fig. 8.31 Control Circuit Terminals for 9- Step Operation

8-43

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.32 Time Chart for 9-Step Operation

*1. When G02-01=1, the multi-step1 frequency reference is input from AI1 or AI2. *2. When G12-09=0, the multi-step2 frequency reference is input from AI3. (13). Accel/Decel Time Selection1 (Setting=12).

(14). Accel/Decel Time Selection2 (Setting=13). Refer to chapter 8.1.3 “Accel/Decel Time Switching by Multi-function Digital Input Terminals”. (15). Emergency stop (Setting=14). Refer to Section 8.1.3 “Emergency stop Deceleration Time”. (16). External Baseblock command (Setting=16). . Refer to Section 8.1.3 “Emergency stop Deceleration Time”. . Either of these settings will perform a baseblock command using the Multi-function Digital Input terminal ON / OFF operation, and prohibit inverter output. . During running : When an external baseblock signal is detected, the Digital Operator will display ″EFn Ext Fault (Sn)″, where n=1- 8. and the inverter output is blocked. After the baseblock signal is cleared, the motor will resume running according to the reference signal. To restart the operation, use speed search from frequency reference prior to the previous baseblock command input. . During deceleration : When an external base block signal is input, the digital operator will display ″EFn Ext. Fault (Sn)″, where n=1- 8 and the inverter output is blocked. The motor will then coast to stop. After this external baseblock signal is cleared, the inverter will stay in the stop mode. . During acceleration : Operation same as during running. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.33 for the time chart when using the baseblock command. 8-44

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.33 External Baseblock Operation (17). Inhibit ACC / DEC Command (Setting=18). . The Inhibit ACC / DEC command ( Input from the Multi-function Digital Input terminals ) will pause the acceleration/deceleration of motor and maintain the output frequency. The output frequency will be recorded at that time if G45-02=1 (The output frequency in the hold state will be recorded ). Acceleration/Deceleration will restart when the Inhibit ACC / DEC command is removed. . If G45-02 (Frequency reference recording function) is set to 1 (frequency reference on hold is recorded), and the Inhibit ACC / DEC command is input, the output frequency is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. . Refer Fig. 8.1.34 below for the Acceleration / Deceleration inhibit operation.

Fig. 8.1.34 Acceleration / Deceleration Inhibit Operation *1. When G45-02=1, and the Inhibit ACC / DEC command is input, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned off. When a RUN command (e.g. Forward Run) is input, and the Inhibit ACC / DEC command is turned ON, the output frequency will accelerate to the previous stored on hold output frequency. *2. When G45-02=0, and a run command is input with the Inhibit ACC / DEC command is turned ON, the output frequency will be set to zero. 8-45

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (18). Inverter Overheat Warning (Setting=19). When the inverter detects an overheat signal, the LCD Digital Operator will change its display to “ INV OH Warning ”, and the inverter will still maintain its operation. When the inverter overheat warning signal is off, the Digital Operator will restore its previous display automatically and the RESET key does not need to be pressed. (19). FJOG Command (Setting=20). (20). RJOG Command (Setting=21). . Jogging can be performed in forward or reverse direction. Setting = 20 : FJOG command ( ON : Run forward at the jog frequency set by G05-17 ) = 21 : RJOG command ( ON : Run reverse at the jog frequency set by G05-17 ) . The FJOG and RJOG commands have priority over other frequency commands. . The inverter will stop running via the stopping method set by G02-03 ( Stopping Method Selection ) when the FJOG and RJOG commands are both ON for more than 500ms. (21). UP Command (Setting=22). (22). DOWN Command (Setting=23). . The inverter can use either the Digital Operator (Refer to G45-06) or an external Multi-function Digital Input (terminal S1 to S8) to change the output frequency upward or downward while the motor is running. . When using the external Multi-function Digital Input terminals to perform the UP/DOWN operation, set G02-02 (Run Command Selection) to 1 (Control terminal) , then set one of the parameters G10-01 to G10-08 (Multi-function Digital Input terminals S1 to S8) to 22 (UP command) and 23 (DOWN command). Two terminals need to be used so that the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair. . The Output frequency will follow the set acceleration and deceleration times. . An operation error “SE02 DI terminal Error” will be displayed when: (1). Only the UP or Down command has been set. (2). The UP/DOWN command and Inhibit ACC/DEC command are both on at the same time. (3). The UP/DOWN commands were selected while PID is enabled (G23-01). . Refer to Fig. 8.1.35 below for an example of the connections and time chart for the UP/DOWN operation.

Fig. 8.1.35

UP/DOWN

8-46

Connection Example

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.36 Up / Down Commands Time Chart . When the UP / Down command is being used, the output frequency will accelerate to the Frequency Reference Lower Bound (G05-19) if a RUN command is input. . The output frequency is limited by the Frequency Reference Upper Bound (G05-18) and Lower Bound (G05-19) when the UP / DOWN command is being used. . When G45-02 (Frequency reference recording function) is set to 1 ( Frequency reference on hold is recorded ), the frequency reference on hold using the UP / DOWN command is stored even after the power supply is turned off. When the power supply is turned on again, and the run command is input, the output frequency will accelerate to the previous stored frequency reference. . The acceleration / deceleration time used with this function is the same as for normal operation, Tacc1 /Tdec2 (G03-01,02) or Tacc2 / Tdec 2 (G03-03, -04). *1. When G45-02=1, and the run command is input, the output frequency will accelerate to the previous stored frequency reference. *2. When G45-02=0, and the run command is input, the output frequency will accelerate to frequency reference lower bound (G05-19). (23). Synchronization Command (Setting=24). . This function switches between the frequency reference converted from a pulse train input and other frequency reference (according to G02-01 setting). . This function is ineffective if any digital input is as the Local/Remote control selection (setting =5) or remote mode operation selection (setting = 6) and the corresponding digital input is on. . This function is ineffective if local mode is set by keypad local/remote key. . The inverter must be in the STOP mode in order to set/clear Synchronization command. . Refer to Fig. 8.1.67 and Fig. 8.1.68 for synchronization operation. (24). DC Injection Braking Command (Setting=25). . With this setting, you can apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning on the terminal for which the DC injection brake command has been set when the inverter is being stopped. . If a Run command or Jog command is input, the DC injection braking operation will be cleared and the motor will begin to run. Refer the following Fig. 8.1.37 for the DC injection braking time chart.

8-47

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.37 DC Injection Braking Time Chart (25). External Speed Search Command1 (Setting=26). (26). External Speed Search Command2 (Setting=27). Refer to the “Speed Search” function in Chapter 8.1.36. (27). Timer Function Input (Setting=28). Refer to the “Timer Function” in Chapter 8.1.22. (28). PID Control Disabled (Setting=29). (29). PID Integral Reset (Setting=30). (30). PID SFS Disabled (Setting=31). Refer to the “PID Control” function in Chapter 8.1.23. (31). Traverse Run Command (Setting=32). (32). Upper Deviation Traverse Run (Setting=33). (33). Lower Deviation Traverse Run (Setting=34). Refer to the “Traverse Operation” function on Chapter 8.1.47. (34). Speed Control Without PG (Setting = 37). . To disable / enable the speed control. The speed control is disabled ( normal V/f control ) when the Multi-function Digital Input is on. (35). Speed Control Integral Reset (Setting = 38). . To switch the speed control between P control and PI control. . P control (Integral is reset) is used when the multi-function digital input is on. (36). Speed / Torque Control Change (Setting = 39). . To switch between speed control and torque control in the SV(Sensor Vector) control method. . On for torque control , off for speed control. Refer to Chapter 8.1.32 for more details. (37). Polarity Reversing Command For External Torque Reference (Setting = 40). . ON: Reverses the external torque reference. . Refer to Chapter 8.1.32 for more details.

8-48

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (38). Zero-Servo Command (Setting = 41). . ON: Zero-servo operation. . Refer to Chapter 8.1.27. (39). Fire Mode Operation (Setting = 42). . ON : Disables the H/W and S/W fault or alarm protection. . It is mainly used for special applications such as to control a smoke fan etc. (40). RTC Timer Enabled (Setting = 43). . To enable the RTC timer function (when G42-04=2) . Refer to parameter group 42. “RTC Timer Function”. (41). RTC Offset Time Enabled (Setting = 44). . To enable the RTC offset time (when G42-21=2) . Refer to parameter group 42. “RTC Timer Function”. (42). KEB Acceleration (Setting = 45). . To enable the KEB acceleration (when G41-01 is not 0) . Refer to parameter group 41. “KEB Function”. (43). Parameter Write Enabled (Setting=48). Refer to G01-02. If you set one of the G10-01 to G10-08 to 48 (Parameter write enable), you can store parameters from the Digital Operator when the control terminal is on. When the control terminal is off, all parameters except the frequency reference (G02-01) are write protected. (44). Manual Energy-saving command (Setting=49). . ON: Manual energy saving control set for G24-11, G24-12. Refer to Fig. 8.1.91 for the Manual Energy Saving Operation. (45). Unattended Start Protection (Setting=50). . If the RUN command is already preset (Controlled by terminals) and when power is turned on, the inverter starts running immediately after power-up. The unattended start protection (USP) function (When one of G10-01 to G10-08 is set to 50) prevents an automatic startup, so that the Inverter will not run without outside intervention. Refer the following Fig. 8.1.40 for USP operation.

Fig. 8.1.40 USP Operation . The Fault (Alarm) signal indicates that a USP Trip warning and a corresponding fault or alarm signal. When the fault or alarm is active, there are two ways to reset the fault signal and resume running : Turn the RUN command OFF, or perform a reset operation by terminal input or the RESET key on the Digital Operator.

8-49

8.1.11 Group11 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Multi-Function Digital Outputs (DO)

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

â&#x2013; Multi-Function Digital Output Selection (G11-01 to G11-05) Parameter Description Control Methods Factory V/F Setting Setting V/F No. LCD Display LCD Display SLV SV + Range PG G11-01 G11-02 G11-03 G11-04

R1A-R1C Func. R2A-R2C Func. R3A-R3C Func. R4A-R4C Func.

0 to 28 Refer to table 17 A A A A 0 to 28 Refer to table 0 A A A A 0 to 28 Refer to table 1 A A A A 0 to 28 Refer to table 6 A A A A ---0B: (N.O.) R1A-R1C (N.O.) ---1B: (N.C.) R1A-R1C (N.C.) --0-B: (N.O.) R2A-R2C (N.O.) G11-05 R1A~R4C type --1-B: (N.C.) R2A-R2C (N.C.) 0000B A A A A -0--B: (N.O.) R3A-R3C (N.O.) -1--B: (N.C.) R3A-R3C (N.C.) 0---B: (N.O.) R4A-R4C (N.O.) 1---B: (N.C.) R4A-R4C (N.C.) . The settings and functions for the Multi-function Digital Outputs are listed in Table 8.1.11. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.41 for Multi-function Digital Output and related parameters.

Fig. 8.1.41 Multi-Function Digital Outputs and Related Parameters

8-50

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 8.1.11 Multi-Function Digital Output Function List Function Setting

Name

LCD Display

During Running

Zero Speed

Frequency Agree

Freq. Agree

Setting Frequency Agree

Setting Freq Agree

Output Frequency Freq. Detect Detection1 1

Output Frequency Detection2

Inverter Ready

Undervoltage Detected During Baseblock Run command Selection Status Frequency Reference Selection Status Overtorque / Undertorque Detection 1 Reserved Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection 2 Reserved Frequency Reference is missing Braking Transistor Fault Fault contact output During auto Restart Operation

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Timer Function Output

Traverse operation UP Status During Traverse operation status Reserved

Reserved

20 21

Description

Running

Freq. Detect 2 Ready Low Volt Detected Baseblock Run Cmd Status

ON: During running (Run Command is ON) ON: Zero Speed ON: Frequency Agree (Freq Agree Detection Width G19-03 is used) ON: Output frequency=Frequency Agree Detection Level (G19-01)Âą Frequency Agree Detection Width (G19-03) ON: When accel : G19-01 => output freq => G19-01 When decel : G19-02 => Output freq => G19-02 and Frequency Detection Width = G19-03 ON: When accel : Output frequency => G19-01 (or = < -G19-01) When decel : Output frequency => G19-02 (or = < -G19-02) and Frequency Detection Width = G19-03 ON: Inverter operation ready (after initialization, no faults) ON: DC bus voltage = < low voltage alarm detection Level (G37-10) ON: During baseblock ON: Run command from LCD Digital Operator (Local mode)

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG O

OT/UT Detect ON : Overtorque/ Undertorque detection O 2 when ON

Freq Ref Status

ON: Frequency Reference from LCD Digital Operator (Local mode)

OT/UT Detect ON : Overtorque / Undertorque 1 detection when ON Reserved

Reserved

Ref. Loss.

ON: Frequency reference is missing.

Auto Restart ON: During Auto Restart Operation.

Timer functions are set in G22-01, Timer Output G22-02, and time function inputs are set in G10-01 to G10-12.

During the acceleration period Traverse UP ON: when traverse operation is active.

Brake T Fault ON: braking transistor fault. Fault

ON: Faults other than CF00, CF01 have occurred.

During Traverse Reserved

ON: During traverse operation when traverse operation is active. Reserved

Reserved

8-51

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Function Setting 24 25 26 27 28

Name Zero Servo Completed RTC Timer 1 Energize Relay Output RTC Timer 2 Energize Relay Output RTC Timer 3 Energize Relay Output RTC Timer 4 Energize Relay Output

Description

LCD Display

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

Zero Servo ON: Zero servo function completed.

RTC Timer 1 ON: When RTC timer 1 is activated.

RTC Timer 2 ON: When RTC timer 2 is activated.

RTC Timer 3 ON: When RTC timer 3 is activated.

RTC Timer 4 ON: When RTC timer 4 is activated.

(1). During Running (Setting = 0) OFF Run command is OFF, and inverter is OFF. ON Run command is ON or Run command is OFF but residual output exists. (2). Zero Speed (Setting = 1) OFF Output frequency = > minimum output frequency (G06-07 , Fmin). ON Output frequency ďź&#x153; minimum output frequency

Fig. 8.1.42 Zero Speed Operation (3). Frequency Agree (Setting = 2). (4). Setting Frequency Agree (Setting = 3). (5). Output Frequency Detection 1 (Setting = 4). (6). Output Frequency Detection2 (Setting = 5). Refer to the Frequency Detection Function for Group 19 parameters. (7). Inverter Ready (Setting = 6). Inverter operation ready after initialization and no faults have occurred. (8). Undervoltage Detected (Setting = 7). ON = When the DC bus voltage of main circuit is lower than the Undervoltage Detection Level (G37-10). (9). During Baseblock (Setting = 8). Inverter output is baseblocked. (10). Run Command Selection Status (Setting = 9). Remote Mode : OFF G02-02=1or 2, or one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (S1 to S8) is set as LOCAL/REMOTE control (setting value=5). The contact is OFF, the SEQ LED is ON on the LCD Digital Operator. Local Mode: ON G02-02=0 or one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (S1 to S8) is set as LOCAL/REMOTE control (setting value=5). The contact is ON, the . SEQ LED is OFF, and the Run command is from LCD Digital Operator.

8-52

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (11). Frequency Reference Selection Status (Setting=10) Remote Mode : or 2, or one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (S1 to S8) is set as OFF G02-01=1 LOCAL/REMOTE control (setting value=5). The contact is OFF, the REF LED is ON on the LCD Digital Operator. Local Mode : G02-01=0 (Frequency reference is from LCD Digital Operator), or Multi-function ON One of the Digital Inputs (S1 to S8) is set as LOCAL/REMOTE control (setting value=5). The contact is ON, the REF LED is OFF and the Frequency Reference is from LCD Digital Operator. (12). Overtorque / Undertorque Detection 1 (NO contact) (Setting = 11). (13). Overtorque / Undertorque Detection 2 (NO contact) (Setting = 13). . The overtorque / undertorque detection signal can be output to Multi-function Digital Output terminals (R1A-R1C, R2A-R2C, R3A-R3C, R4A-R4C) by setting one of the parameters G11-01 to G11-04 to 11, or 13 . Refer to Chapter 8.1.33 for the overtorque / undertorque detection operation. (14). Frequency Reference is missing (Setting = 15). ON when the RUN command is on and frequency reference is 0 and when G19-04 is set to 1 (Run at G19-05 x previous frequency reference). (15). Braking Transistor Fault (Setting = 16). . ON when the braking transistor fault (BTF) is on. (16). Fault Contact Output (Setting = 17). ON when a fault occurs, however, except if a Digital Operator communication error occurs (CF00 or CF01). (17). During Auto Restart Operation (Setting = 18). ON during auto restart operation. (18). Timer Function Output (Setting = 19). Refer to Chapter 8.1.22 for the timer function operation. (19). Traverse Operation UP Status (Setting = 20). Refer to Chapter 8.1.47 for the traverse operation. (20). During Traverse Operation Status (Setting = 21). The traverse operation during acceleration or during traverse operation period can be output to one of the Multi-function Digital Output terminals by setting a value of 20 or 21. Refer to Chapter 8.1.47 for the traverse ON / OFF control. (22) Zero Servo Completed (Setting=24). ON during zero-servo status. Refer to Chapter 8.1.27. for more details. (23). RTC Timer 1 Energize Relay Output (Setting = 25). (24). RTC Timer 2 Energize Relay Output (Setting = 26). (25). RTC Timer 3 Energize Relay Output (Setting = 27). (26). RTC Timer 4 Energize Relay Output (Setting = 28). . Relay output connected to a RTC timer. . Relay energizes when selected RTC timer is activated. . Refer to parameter Group 42, RTC timer function.

NOTES-

8-53

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.12 Group 12 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Analog Inputs (AI) Setting â&#x2013; Analog Input Selection (G12-01 to G12-12) Parameter No.

LCD Display

Description Setting Range

0: 0 to 10V (11-bit) G12-01 AI1 Level Sel 1: -10V to 10V (11-bit+sign) G12-02 AI1 Gain 0.0 to 1000.0% G12-03 AI1 Bias -100.0% to 100.0% 0: 0 to 10V (11-bit) 1: -10V to 10V G12-04 AI2 Level Sel (11-bit+sign) 2: 4 to 20mA (10-bit) G12-05 AI2 Function

0 to 19

G12-06 AI2 Gain G12-07 AI2 Bias

0.0 to 1000.0% -100.0% to 100.0% 0 : 0 to 10V(11-bit) 1: -10V to G12-08 AI3 Level Sel 10V(11-bit+sign) 2: 4 to 20mA (10-bit) G12-09 AI3 Function

0 to 19

G12-10 AI3 Gain G12-11 AI3 Bias

0.0 to 1000.0% -100% to 100.0%

G12-12 AI Filter Time 0.00 to 2.00 Sec

LCD Display 0 to 10V -10V to 10V AI1 Gain AI1 Bias 0 to 10 -10V to 10V

Factory Setting

V/F V/F+ PG SLV

100.0% 0.0%

A A

4 to 20mA (Refer to Table 12 8.1.12) AI2 Gain 100.0% AI2 Bias 0.0% 0 to 10V -10 to 10V

Control Methods

4 to 20mA (Refer to Table 0 8.1.12) AI3 Gain 100.0% AI3 Bias 0.0%

A A

AI Filter Time

0.03 Sec

(1) Analog Level Adjustment for Analog Inputs AI1,AI2 and AI3 (G12-02, 03, G12-06, 07, G12-10,11) For each different analog input, AI1 , AI2 and AI3, the corresponding gain and bias should be specified respectively. Use G12-02 and G12-03 to perform adjustments for AI1, G12-06 and G12-07 to perform adjustments for AI2, G12-10 and G12-11 to perform adjustments for AI3. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.43, for analog inputs and related parameters.

Fig. 8.1.43 Analog Inputs and Related Parameters 8-54

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . Refer Fig. 8.1.44 below for the gain and bias settings. Gain : Sets the frequency reference corresponding to 10V, -10V or 20mA inputs, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. (The maximum output frequency, G06-03, is set at 100%.) Bias : Sets the frequency reference corresponding to a 0V or 4mA input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. (The maximum output frequency, G06-03, is set as 100%.) Frequency Reference

Frequency Reference

Bias = positive +100% Bias = 0%

200% Gain: 200% Gain: 100%

100% -10V

0V 10V (4mA) (20mA) -100%

Bias = Negative

Terminal AI1,AI2 or AI3 analog input

10V

0V (4mA)

Terminal 10V AI1,AI2 or AI3 (20mA) analog input

100%

-200% (a) Gain

(b) Bias

Fig. 8.1.44 Gain and Bias Operation (Frequency reference signal) (2) Analog Input Filter Time Constant (G12-12) . A first order lag digital filter can be set for all the three analog inputs (AI1,AI2, and AI3). This setting is used to filter sudden changes or noise in the analog input signal. System responsive decreases and noise immunity increases as the setting increases. . The filter time constant (setting range: 0.00 to 2.00 sec.) is defined as the time period that it takes to reach 63% of the final value of a step change in the input signal.

% Unfiltered signal 100 Filtered signal

t Filter time constant (G12-12) Fig. 8.1.45 Filter Time Constant (3) Multi-function Analog Input Function Selection (G12-05,G12-09). The AI2 and AI3 are Multi-function Analog Input terminals. Refer to Table 8.1.12 for the function settings.

8-55

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Table 8.1.12 Multi-function Analog Input Function List (G12-05, G12-09 setting) Function Control Methods V/F Setting Description Name LCD Display V/F + SLV SV PG Auxiliary Frequency Only G12-09 (AI3 function) 0 AUX.Freq Ref can be set as 0 O O O O Reference Frequency Reference gain for terminal 1 Freq Ref Gain Total O O O O Gain (FGAIN) AI1 = G12-02 * FGAIN Frequency Reference 2 Freq Ref Bias Total bias for terminal O O O O Bias (FBIAS) AI1 = G12-03 * FBIAS Total output Voltage = Output Voltage Bias 3 Output Volt Bias V/F pattern voltage +VBIAS O O X X (VBIAS) 4

9 10 11 12

Real accel/decel time = Accel/decel time (G03-01 thru G03-08) K Inverter rated current = DC Injection Braking the setting of the DC DC Inj Current 100%, Current injection braking current in G16-02 is disabled. The level of the analog Overtorque / Undertorgue OT/UT Det Level input, changes the overtorque/undertorque detection level detection level. (setting of G33-02 is disabled) The level of the analog Stall prevention Level changes the level of Run Stall Level input, the stall prevention during during running running (30% - 200%). The level of the analog input, changes the level of frequency reference low bound (0 - 100%). The Frequency Reference Ref. Low Limit actual low bound is Lower Bound determined by the maximum of G05-19 and the value corresponding to the analog input AI2 or AI3. Jump frequency setting 4. Jump Frequency Jump Freq 4 100% = maximum output Setting 4 frequency. PID feedback value input. PID Feedback Value PID Feedback 100% = maximum output frequency. PID target value input. PID Target Value PID Target 100% = maximum output frequency. Add to terminal AI1. Add To Terminal AI1 Add to AI1 100% = maximum output frequency. Accel/Decel Time Scaling (K)

Tacc/Tdec Scaling

Positive Torque Limit

Positive Tq Limit 100% = motor rated torque

Negative Torque Limit

Negative Tq Limit 100% = motor rated torque

Regenerative Torque Regen. Tq Limit Limit Positive/Negative side +/- Tq Limit Torque Limit Torque Reference/Torque Tref/Tq Limit Limit at speed control Tq Torque Compensation Compensation

100% = motor rated torque

No Function

None

16 17 18 19

No Function 8-56

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (1). Auxiliary Frequency Reference (Setting = 0). . When parameter G12-09=0. AI3 is selected as an auxiliary frequency reference, and the multi-step 2 frequency reference is input from the auxiliary analog input through terminal AI3. . Only G12-09 (terminal AI3) can be set to 0 (auxiliary frequency reference). . Maximum output frequency (G06-03 , Fmax) =100% . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.46, for the multi-step speed operation.

Fig. 8.1.46 Auxiliary Frequency Reference (Analog input AI3) (2) Frequency Reference Gain (FGAIN) (Setting = 1). . Used to adjust the frequency reference gain for terminal AI1 using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 1 (Frequency Reference Gain). .The total frequency reference gain for terminal AI1 is the internal gain (G12-02) Ă&#x2014; FGAIN. . The frequency reference value of AI1=100%. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.47, for the FGAIN adjustments.

Fig. 8.1.47 FGAIN Adjustment . Example : When the internal gain for AI1 (G12-02) is set to 100%, and terminal AI2 is set to 5V (i.e. FGAIN=50%), then the terminal AI1 frequency reference will be 50%, as shown in Fig. 8.1.48 below. Frequency Reference G12- 02 = 100%

100%

50%

G12- 02 Ă&#x2014; FGAIN = 50%

10V

Terminal AI1 input voltage

Fig. 8.1.48 Frequency Reference Gain Adjustment (Example) 8-57

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (3) Frequency Reference Bias (FBIAS) (Setting = 2). . Used to adjust the frequency reference bias for terminal AI1 using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 2 (Frequency Reference Bias, FBIAS). . The total frequency reference bias for AI1 is the sum of the internal bias (G12-03) for terminal AI1 and FBIAS. (i.e. total bias=G12-03+FBIAS) . The frequency reference value of AI1=100%. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.49, for the FBIAS adjustments.

Fig. 8.1.49 BIAS Adjustment Example : When G12-02=100% (AI1 Gain), G12-03=0% (AI1 Bias), and terminal AI2 is set to 3V, then the frequency reference from AI1 will be 30% when 0V is input to AI1, as shown in Fig. 8.1.50 below.

Fig. 8.1.50 Frequency Reference BIAS Adjustment (Example) (4) Output Voltage Bias (VBIAS)(Setting = 3). . Used to adjust the output voltage using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 3 (Output Voltage Bias). . The inverter total output voltage is the sum of V/F pattern voltage with voltage boost and VBIAS. . The maximum output voltage (G06-08, Vmax) = 100% . Refer the following Fig. 8.1.51, for the VBIAS adjustments.

Fig. 8.1.51 VBIAS Adjustments 8-58

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (5) Accel / Decel Time Scaling (K) (Setting = 4). . Used to adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 4 (Accel / Decel Time Scaling). . The real acceleration / deceleration time is as follows: Real acceleration/deceleration time = acceleration/deceleration (G03-01 thru G03-08) K . Active acceleration/deceleration time (G03-01 thru G03-08) = 100% . The Accel / Decel time scaling is shown as follows in Fig. 8.1.52.

Fig. 8.1.52 Accel. / Decel. Time Scaling Operation (6) DC Injection Braking Current (Setting = 5). . Used to adjust the DC injection braking current using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 5 (DC injection braking current ). . The inverter rated current = 100% . The setting of DC injection braking current G16-02 is disabled. . The DC Injection Braking Current adjustment is shown in the following Fig. 8.1.53.

Fig. 8.1.53 DC Injection Braking Current Adjustment 8-59

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (7) Overtorque / Undertorque Detection Level (Setting = 6). . Used to adjust the overtorque / undertorque detection level using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 6 (overtorque / undertorque detection level). . 100% = Inverter rated current (For V/F or V/F+PG control mode) . 100% = Motor rated torque (For SLV or SV control mode). . If the overtorque / undertorque detection level is adjusted using the Multi-function Analog Input, only overtorque / undertorque detection2 level (G33-05) will be enabled. The setting of the internal overtorque / undertorque detection1 level (G33-02) is disabled. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.54.

Detection Level

100%

Terminal AI2 or AI3 analog input

10V 0V (20mA) (4mA) Fig. 8.1.54 Overtorque / Undertorque Detection Level Adjustment -10V

(8) Stall Prevention Level During Running (Setting = 7). . Used to adjust the stall prevention level during running using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 7 (stall prevention level during running). . The inverter rated current = 100% . If parameter G09-06 (Stall Prevention Level During Running) and the stall prevention level during running using AI2 or AI3 have been set at the same time, the smaller value will become the stall prevention level during running. . Application Example: If the motor capacity is smaller then the inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 during operation. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.55.

Stall Prevention Level 200%

30% -10V

1.5V 0V (6.4mA) (4mA)

Terminal AI2 or AI3 analog input 10V (20mA)

Fig. 8.1.55 Stall Prevention Level During Running Adjustment

8-60

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (9) Frequency Reference Lower Bound (Setting = 8). . Used to adjust the frequency reference lower bound using the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 8 (Frequency Reference Lower Bound). . The maximum output frequency (Fmax, G06-03) = 100% . The actual lower bound is determined by the maximum setting of G05-19 (Frequency Reference Low Bound) and the value corresponding to the Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.56. Frequency Reference Lower Bound 100 %

-10V

10V (20mA)

0V (4mA)

Terminal AI2 or AI3 analog input

Fig. 8.1.56 Frequency Reference Lower Bound (10) Jump Frequency Setting 4 (Setting = 9). . Used to adjust the 4th jump frequency point using Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 when G12-05 or G12-09 is set to 9 (Jump Frequency Setting 4). . The maximum output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) = 100% . When G17-01 to G17-03 are set to 0.0Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.57.

Fig. 8.1.57 Jump Frequency Setting 4

8-61

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (11) PID Feedback Value (Setting=10). (12) PID Target Value (Setting=11). . Set the Multi-function Analog Input as the PID feedback or PID target input terminal. . Refer to Chapter 8.1.23 for the PID input method. (13) Add to Terminal AI1 (Setting = 12). . When G12-05 (AI2 function selection) or G12-09 (AI3 function selection) is set to 12 (Add to terminal AI1), the frequency reference equivalent input to the AI2 or AI3 analog input signal is added to AI1 as a bias. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.58.

Fig. 8.1.58 Add to Terminal AI1 as a Bias Operation . Example: If G12-02 (AI1 gain) = 100%, G12-03 (AI1 bias) = 0%, and terminal AI2 is set to 2V, then the frequency reference from terminal AI1 when the input to AI1 is 0V will be 20%. (14) Positive Torque Limit (Setting=13). (15) Negative Torque Limit (Setting=14). (16) Regenerative Torque Limit (Setting=15). (17) Positive/Negative Torque Limit (Setting=16). . Refer to Chapter 8.1.32 and 8.1.33 for details on the torque limit. (18) Torque Reference/Torque Limit at Speed Control (Setting=17). (19) Torque Compensation (Setting=18). . Refer to Chapter 8.1.32 for details for the torque control function.

NOTES-

8-62

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.13 Group 13 – Multi-Function Analog Outputs (AO) Setting

■ Multi-Function Analog Output Selection (G13-01 to G13-08) Parameter Description Control Methods Factory V/F No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 0: 0 to 10V 0 to 10V Level G13-01 AO1 0 A A A A Sel 1: -10V to 10V -10V to 10V AO1 Function 1 to 29 G13-02 Sel G13-03 AO1 Gain 0.0% to 1000.0%

(Ref. to Table 2 8.1.13) AO1 Gain 100.0%

G13-04 AO1 Bias

-100.0% to 100.0%

Level G13-05 AO2 Sel

1: -10V to 10V

0: 0 to 10V

0.0%

0 to 10V 0 -10V to 10V (Ref. to Table 3 8.1.13) AO2 Gain 100.0%

AO2 Function 1 to 29 G13-06 Sel G13-07 AO2 Gain 0.0% to 1000.0% G13-08 AO2 Bias

AO1 Bias

-100.0% to 100.0%

AO2 Bias

0.0%

. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.59, for the analog outputs and related parameters.

Fig. 8.1.59 Analog Output and Related Parameters (1). Analog Level Adjustment for Analog Output AO1 and AO2 (G13-03,04 and G13-07,08) . Adjust the output voltage or current for the Multi-function Analog Output terminals AO1 and AO2 by using the gain control adjustment G13-03 for AO1, and G13-07 for AO2 and the bias adjustment G13-04 for AO1, and G13-08 for AO2. . Set the gain adjustment so that the output (10V or -10V) will correspond to a 100% output of the monitored item. . For the bias, set the amount that the output characteristic will be offset as a percentage with 10V or –10V corresponding to 100%. . Refer to the following Fig.8.1.60 for the analog output level adjustments.

8-63

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.60 Analog Output Level Adjustments (2). Analog Output Signal Level Selection (G13-01 and G13-05). . Selects the output signal level from terminal AO1 using G13-01. . Selects the output signal level from terminal AO2 using G13-05. . When the 0 to ±10V signal level is used to output speed values (i.e. frequency reference, output frequency or motor speed), the positive voltage (0 to 10V) indicates inverter output in the forward direction, and the negative voltage (-10V to 0) indicates inverter output in the reverse direction. . There are some monitor items that are limited to 0 to 10V even when the –10V to 10V signal level has been selected. Refer to monitoring parameter U1 group for details. (3). Analog Output Terminal Function Selection (G13-02 and G13-06) . Refer to the following Table 8.1.13 for function selection.

G13-02, G13-06 Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Table 8.1.13 Multi-function Analog output Function Selection (G13-02, G13-06) G13-01/G13-05 Status Monitor Function Selectable Parameter Note (LCD Display) Output level *1 U1-□□ 0-10V -10V - 10V Correspondence Freq Ref O O U1-01 Negative : reverse direction Output Freq O O U1-02 Negative : reverse direction Output Current O X U1-03 Absolute value output Output Voltage O X U1-04 Absolute value output DC Voltage O X U1-05 Absolute value output Negative : regenerating Output KW O O U1-06 operation Motor Speed O O U1-07 Negative : reverse direction Negative : regenerating Output PF O O U1-08 operation AI1 Input O O U1-14 AI2 Input O O U1-15 AI3 Input O O U1-16 Torque Ref O O U1-17 Current Iq O O U1-18 Current Id O O U1-19 ASR Input O O U1-20 ASR Output W/ O O U1-21 Filter ASR Output W/O O O U1-22 Filter Speed Deviation O O U1-23 Negative : reverse direction Voltage Ref Vq O O U1-25 Voltage Ref Vd O O U1-26 8-64

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

G13-01/G13-05 Status Monitor G13-02, Function Selectable Parameter G13-06 Note (LCD Display) Output level *1 U1-□□ Setting 0-10V -10V - 10V Correspondence 21 ACR q Output O O U1-27 22 ACR d Output O O U1-28 23 PID Input O O U1-29 24 PID Output O O U1-30 25 PID Setpoint O O U1-31 26 PID Feedback O O U1-32 27 Output Freq (SFS) O O U1-33 Negative : reverse direction 28 PG Feedback O O U1-36 29 PG Compensation O O U1-37 *1：O : selectable X : un-selectable 8.1.14 Group 14 – Pulse Input/Output (PI/PO) Setting ■ Pulse Input (PI) Selection (G14-01 to G14-05) Parameter Description No.

G14-01

G14-02 G14-03 G14-04 G14-05

LCD Display

PI Function

PI Scaling PI Gain PI Bias PI Filter

Setting Range

LCD Display

0: Frequency Reference 1: PID Feedback Value 2: PID Target Value 3: Reserved 1000 to 32000 Hz 0.0% to 1000.0% -100.00% to 100.0% 0.00 to 2.00 Sec

Frequency Ref

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F+P SLV SV G

PID Feedback

PID Target Reserved PI Scaling PI Gain PI Bias PI Filter

1000 Hz 100.0% 0.0% 0.1Sec

A A A A

. Refer to Fig.8.1.3 for the pulse input specifications. . The following Fig. 8.1.61, shows the method for using the pulse input function.

Fig. 8.1.61 Pulse Input Adjustments (1). Adjust the Frequency Reference using Pulse Input (G14-01 = 0). . When G02-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse train input), the pulse train input terminal PI is used as the frequency reference. Refer to Fig.8.1.3 for frequency reference using pulse input. . Select the pulse train input terminal PI as frequency reference function by setting G14-01 (Pulse Input Function) to 0 (Frequency Reference), and then set the number of pulses by parameter G14-02 (Pulse Input Scaling) that is equal to the maximum output frequency (G06-03). Adjust the gain and bias accordingly using G14-03 and G14-04. Increase the time of the G14-05 (Pulse Input Filter Time ) if there is objectionable noise affecting performance. (2). PID Input Method Using Pulse Input (G14-01 = 1 or 2) . Enable PID control using parameter G23-01 (PID Control Mode Selection), and set the PID feedback and PID target value. . When G14-01 is set to 1 (PID feedback value) the pulse train input to control circuit terminal PI is used as the PID feedback value. When G14-01 is set to 2 (PID Target Value), the pulse train input to control circuit terminal PI is used as the PID target value. Refer to the following Fig.8.1.62, for PID Control. 8-65

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.62 PID Control

■ Pulse Output (PO) Selection (G14-06 to G14-09) Parameter No.

Description

LCD Display

G14-06 PO1 Function G14-07 PO1 Scaling G14-08 PO2 Function G14-09 PO2 Scaling

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

(Refer to Table 2 8.1.14 ) 0 to 32000 Hz 1000Hz 1000Hz (Refer to Table 1 to 7 7 8.1.14 ) 0 to 32000 Hz 1000Hz 1000Hz 1 to 7

Control Methods V/F V/F+P SLV SV G A

(1). Pulse Output 1 and 2 Function Selection (G14-06 and G14-08) . Refer to the following Table 8.1.14, for pulse output function selection. G14-06 & G14-08 Setting

Table 8.1.14 Pulse Output Function Selection U1-□□ Function LCD Display Corresponde nce

Frequency Reference (Fref) Freq Ref

U1-01

Output Frequency (Fout)

U1-02

Output Frequency Softstart

Motor Speed (rpm)

Motor Speed

U1-07

PID Feedback

U1-32

PID Control Input

PID Input

U1-29

Output Freq After Output (SFS)

Freq

U1-33

Note 100% = max.output frequency (G06-03) 100% = max.output frequency (G06-03) 100% = max.output frequency (G06-03) 100% = max.output frequency (G06-03) 100% = max.output frequency (G06-03) 100% = max.output frequency (G06-03)

PG Pulse U1-67 Output . 1 to 4 are speed related items, 5 and 6 are PID-related items, 7 is PG-related items. PG Monitor Output

(2). Adjusting (scaling) the pulse output settings (G14-07 and G14-09). . Using G14-07 (Pulse output 1 scaling) for PO1 and G14-09 (Pulse output 2 scaling) for PO2, set the number of output pulses to represent 100% of the selected item . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.63.

Pulse output

(Hz)

G14 - 07 G14 - 09

0% 100% Fig. 8.1.63 Pulse Output Scaling 8-66

Pulse output items

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . When G14-06 is set to 2 (Output Frequency) and G14-07 is set to 0 (0 Hz), the pulse train output from terminal PO1 is synchronous with the inverters U-phase output frequency. Also, when G14-08 is set to 2 (Output Frequency) and G14-09 is set to 0, the Pulse Train Output from terminal PO2 is synchronous with the inverters U-phase Output Frequency. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.64, for the pulse output signal level.

Fig. 8.1.64 Pulse Output Signal Level . When G14-06 = 7 (PG Pulse Monitor Output), the PG pulse output ratio is set as 1:1, and the pulse output

scaling set by G14-07 is ignored. . When G14-08 = 7 (PG Pulse Monitor Output), the PG pulse output ratio is set as 1:1, and the pulse output scaling set by G14-09 is ignored. (3). Application Examples Example A. Linking Operation to Master PG. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.65, for the follow operation (or synchronous operation) by inputting a pulse train signal directly as the frequency reference.

Fig. 8.1.65 Linking Operation to Master PG . Related parameters setting:

1. Frequency reference selection : G02-01=4 (Pulse Train Input). 2. Pulse input function selection : G14-01=0 (Frequency reference). 3. Pulse input scaling: G14-02 (Set the number of pulses in Hz that is equal to the maximum output frequency, G06-03). 4. Pulse input gain : G14-03 (Set the gain for pulse frequency input that has been set by G14-02). 5. Pulse input bias : G14-04 (Set the bias for pulse frequency input that has been set by G14-02). 6. Pulse input filter time : G14-05 (Increase the set value if pulse input is unstable caused by noise). â&#x20AC;§ Use the forward run command and the reverse run command of the Multi-function Digital Inputs to alternate the run direction. â&#x20AC;§ When higher speed accuracy is required, select the SV or V/f + PG control method. 8-67

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Example B. Linking Operation With Two Inverters. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.66 for the â&#x20AC;&#x153;followingâ&#x20AC;? or synchronous operation using two inverters.

Fig. 8.1.66 Linking Operation With Two Inverters . Related parameter settings for INV 1: 1. Frequency reference input : Case 1: To operate INV 1 with pulse train input (e.g. master PG etc.), set the parameters related to pulse input as described in the previous example 1. Case 2: To operate INV 1 with an analog frequency reference, select the master frequency reference by G02-01. 2. Frequency reference pulse output: a. Pulse output function selection: G14-06=1 (Output frequency reference from pulse output terminal PO1). b. Pulse output scaling: G14-07 (Set the number of output pulses when speed is 100%. . Related parameters setting for INV 2: 1. Frequency reference selection: G02-01=4 (Pulse Train Input). 2. Pulse input function selection: G14-01=0 (Frequency reference). 3. Pulse input scaling: G14-02 (Set the number of pulses in Hz that is equal to the maximum output frequency, G06-03. Basically set the same value as the INV 1 G14-07 set value). 4. Pulse input gain: G14-03 (Set the gain for the pulse frequency input that has been set by G14-02. Adjust G14-03 when the proportional setting is made for the INV 2). 5. Pulse input bias: G14-04 (Set the bias for pulse frequency input that has been set to G14-02. Adjust G14-04 when the bias setting is made for the INV2). 6. Pulse input filter time: G14-05 (Increase the set value if pulse input is unstable caused by noise).

8-68

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Example C. Synchronized Operation Using Pulse Input.

Fig. 8.1.67 Synchronized Operation using Pulse Input . Apply a pulse train signal from an external pulse generator to the pulse inputs terminal PI of multiple inverters to be synchronized. . Set G02-01 to 4 (Frequency reference from pulse train input), and set G14-01 to 0 (Pulse input terminal function as frequency reference). Adjust the scaling, gain and bias accordingly using G14-02 to G14-04. . Assign one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (S1 to S8) as a synchronization command by setting the corresponding parameter (G10-01 to G10-08) to 24. Refer to Chapter 8.1.10. . The pulse train received by the pulse input (terminal PI) is converted into a synchronized frequency reference, and the synchronization command (SYNC) enables the frequency reference. Refer to Fig.8.1.67 for synchronized operation using a pulse input. Example D. Synchronized Operation Using Pulse Output.

Pulse Input

(Master)

Frequency Reference

PO1

(Slave) Frequency Reference

PI SYNC

A/B

(Synchronized Operation)

Fig. 8.1.68 Synchronized Operation Using Pulse Output

8-69

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . Set G14-06 to 1 (Pulse output functions as frequency reference). The pulse output signal (terminal PO1) is converted from the internal frequency reference of the master inverter. . Set G02-01 to 4 (Frequency reference is input from a pulse train), and set G14-01 to 0 (Pulse input functions as frequency reference). Adjust the scaling, gain and bias accordingly using G14-02 to G14-04 on the slave inverter. . The synchronization command (SYNC) enables the resulting reference. The converted pulse output signal of the master inverter can be applied to the pulse input of the slave inverter to synchronize the master inverter with slave inverters. . Refer to the following Fig.8.1.68, for Synchronized Operation Using Pulse Output. 8.1.15 Group 15 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; S-Curve Acceleration / Deceleration â&#x2013; S-Curve Accel / Decel Selection (G15-01 to G15-04) Parameter Description Factory No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

G15-01 S Tacc @ Start 0.00 to 2.50 Sec

0.00 Sec

G15-02 S Tacc @ End 0.00 to 2.50 Sec

0.00 Sec

G15-03 S Tdec @ Start 0.00 to 2.50 Sec

0.00 Sec

G15-04 S Tdec @ End 0.00 to 2.50 Sec

0.00 Sec

. Using the S-Curve characteristics for acceleration and deceleration can reduce mechanical shock to the load when stopping and starting. For the V31, the S-Curve time can be set independently for the beginning of acceleration (G15-01), ending of acceleration (G15-02), beginning of deceleration (G15-03) and ending of deceleration (G15-04) . The relationship between these parameters is shown in the following Fig.8.1.69. Run Command

OFF

Output Frequency S2

G15- 02

S3 G15- 03 S4

G15- 01

G15- 04

Fig. 8.1.69 S Curve Characteristics

. After the S-Curve time is set, the final acceleration and deceleration will be as follows: . Acc. Time=Selected Acc. Time 1 (or 2) + (G15-01) + (G15-02) 2 . Dec. Time=Selected Dec. Time 1 (or 2) + (G15-03) + (G15-04) 2 8-70

8.1.16 Group 16 – DC Injection Braking ■ DC Injection Braking Setting (G16-01 to G16-04) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Factory Setting

Brake Start 0.5Hz Freq G16-02 Brake Current 0 to 100% Brake Current 50% Brake Time @ G16-03 Brake Time @ Stop 0.00 to 10.00 Sec 0.50 Sec Stop Time @ 0.00 Sec G16-04 Brake Time @ Start 0.00 to 10.00Sec Brake Start G16-01 Brake Start Freq

0.0 to 10.0Hz

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG A

. If a dc voltage is applied to an operating motor, the motor generates a braking torque. This is referred as dc injection braking and parameters G16-01 to G16-04 specify the settings. . The DC Injection braking should be disabled if the speed search function is enabled. . The DC injection braking function is initiated by applying a DC current to the motor. This happens in the DC Injection braking time at start (G16-04) and DC Injection Braking Time at stop (G16-03). . For the DC injection braking time at start (G16-04), set the DC injection braking operating time when the motor is to start. This will prevent the load from back driving the motor (“Windmill effect”), and allow a normal acceleration from a stop. . If G16-04 is set to 0 (Disable the DC injection brake at start), the inverter starts from the minimum output frequency set by (G06-07). . For the DC injection braking time at stop (G16-03), set the DC injection braking operating time for when the motor is to be stopped. If G16-03 is set to 0 (Disable the DC injection brake at stop) the inverter output will be blocked when the output frequency is less than the DC injection braking starting frequency (G16-01). If the set level of DC injection braking starting frequency (G16-01) is lower than the minimum output frequency (G06-07), the DC injection braking will begin from the minimum output frequency. . The DC injection braking current level is set by parameter (G16-02) for start or stop. The DC injection braking current (G16-02) is set as a percentage of the inverter rated output current (The inverter rated output current is set as 100%). The DC injection braking current parameter (G16-02) is not used with Sensor Vector (SV) control and can not be set. . Lengthening the DC injection braking time (G16-03,G16-04) or increasing the DC injection braking current (G16-02) can shorten the stopping time. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.70, for the DC Injection Braking Operation.

Fig. 8.1.70 DC Injection Braking Operation

8-71

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual .The DC injection braking operation can be controlled by the Multi-function Digital Inputs by setting G10-01 to 08 to 23 (The DC injection braking command). Refer to Fig. 8.1.37 for the DC Injection Brake Time Chart. . If G12-05 (Multi-function Analog Input AI2 function selection) or G12-08 (Multi-function Analog Input AI3 function selection) is set to 5(DC injection braking current), the DC injection braking current can be adjusted using the analog input. Refer to Fig.8.1.53 the DC Injection Braking Current Adjustment.

■ Pre-excitation Operation (G16-05,G16-06) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G16-05 Max PreExct Tm G16-06 Pre-Excite Level

Setting Range

LCD Display

0.00 to 10.00 Sec 2.00 Sec 100% to 200% 100%

Factory Setting 2.00 Sec 100%

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG X X A X X X A X

. The pre-excitation operation is used to generate the motor magnetic flux before operating machinery requiring high starting torque, particularly with a large-capacity motor. (1) Maximum Pre-excitation Time (G16-05). . When the RUN command (Forward or Reverse) is input, the inverter conducts pre-exciting automatically for the maximum time specified by G16-05. . Set the pre-excitation time to start the motor after the magnetic-flux is established at 100% as shown in Fig. 8.1.71 that follows. The build-up time of the magnetic flux may is a function of the electrical time constants of the motor. . The electrical time constant (i.e. the secondary circuit time constant) can be calculated using the motor parameter (Group G07) settings. Electrical time constant T2= Motor Leakage Inductance(G7 - 12) + Motor Mutual Inductance(G7 - 13) (sec) Motor Rotor Equivalent Resistance(G7 - 14)

. Set the maximum pre-excitation time (G16-05) around 4-5 times of electrical time constant T2. (2) Pre-excitation Initial Level (G16-06) . Use the pre-excitation initial level (G16-06) to supply a higher magnetic-flux current within the Maximum pre-excitation time (G16-05). This will increase the speed and stability of the motor’s internal magnetic-flux startup. . To reduce the pre-excitation time (G16-05) in order to establish the magnetic-flux quickly, set the pre-excitation initial level (G16-06) > Motor Excitation Current(G7-06) * Motor Core Saturation Coefficient 3(G07-09). . If G16-06 is set higher than (G7-06)*(G7-09), a higher exciting current will be supplied during the maximum pre-excitation time (G16-05), and the motor’s internal magnetic flux build-up time can be shortened. If the pre-excitation initial level (G16-06) is set to high value, there may be greater acoustic noise generated from the motor during the pre-excitation time. Referring to Fig. 8.1.71 below, the pre-excitation initial level ends when 100% of the magnetic-flux is established.

8-72

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.71 Pre-Excitation 8.1.17 Group 17 – Jump Frequencies ■ Jump Frequencies Setting (G17-01 to G17-04) Parameter No.

Description

LCD Display Setting Range

G17-01 Freq Jump1 G17-02 Freq Jump2 G17-03 Freq Jump3 Jump G17-04 Freq Width

0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 400.0 Hz 0.0 to 25.5 Hz

LCD Display Freq Jump1 Freq Jump2 Freq Jump3 Freq Jump Width

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F SLV SV + PG 0.0 Hz A A A A 0.0 Hz A A A A 0.0 Hz A A A A 1.0 Hz

. These settings allow the “jumping” of certain frequencies within the inverters’ output frequency range so that the motor can operate without resonance caused by some mechanical systems. . Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency range, but ramp up / ramp down changes during acceleration and deceleration are continuous with no jump. . To disable this function, set the frequency jump point 1 - 3(G17-01 to G17-03) to 0.0Hz. . For the frequency jump point 1 - 3 (G17-01 to G17-03), set the center frequency to be jumped. . For G17-04, set the frequency jump width. The jump frequency ± the frequency jump width becomes the frequency jump range. If G17-04 is set as 0.0Hz, the frequency jump function is disabled. . The relationship between the output frequency and the frequency jump reference is shown as in the following Fig. 8.1.72.

Fig. 8.1.72 Frequency Jump Setting 8-73

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . When G12-05 (Multi-function Analog Input AI2 function selection) or G12-09 (Multi-function Analog Input AI3 function selection) is set to 9 (Jump frequency setting 4), a 4th jump frequency point can be set. Refer to Fig. 8.1.57, the Jump Frequency Setting 4 Operation. . When the specified ranges of jump speed overlap one another, the sum of them is considered as a jump range. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.73.

Fig. 8.1.73 Overlap Frequency Jump 8.1.18 Group 18 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; OV Prevention â&#x2013; OVP Function Setting (G18-01 to G18-08) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G18-01 DC Filter Rise G18-02 DC Filter Fall G18-03 DC filter deadband G18-04 OVP Freq Gain

Setting Range LCD Display 0.1 to 10.0Vdc 0.1 to 10.0Vdc

DC Filter Rise DC Filter Fall

0.00 to 99.0Vdc DC Flt deadband 0.000 to 1.000

OVP Freq Gain

G18-05 OVP Freq Limit 0.00 to 10.00Hz OVP Freq Limit G18-06 OVP Decel Start G18-07 OVP Decel Stop G18-08 OVP Sel

230V:200 to 400Vdc 460V:400 to 800Vdc 230V:200 to 400Vdc 460V:400 to 800Vdc

OVP Decel Start

0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled

Disabled Enabled

OVP Decel Stop

Factory Setting 0.1Vdc 5.0Vdc

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG A A X X A A X X

10.0Vdc

0.050

5.00Hz

230V:300Vdc 460V:700Vdc 230V:350Vdc 460V:750Vdc

. The Overvoltage Prevention (OVP) function is used to control motor loads when the motor is being Overhauled by the stored energy during part of the machine cycle. Example: In press application, there are two ways that the motor may be forced overhauled: (1). When the cam clutch is not engaged, the motor can accelerate and drive the flywheel. The inertia from the flywheel will overhaul the motor forcing regeneration into the inverter when the speed of the motor is reduced. (2). When the cam clutch is engaged, the motor will drive the flywheel to compress the springs, and after the highest point of the cam moves past the center of the cam the springs will begin to release their energy into the flywheel, and overhaul the motor forcing regeneration into the inverter. 8-74

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.74 Press Operation . The Overvoltage Prevention (OVP) function monitors and regulates the DC bus voltage by adjusting the deceleration and acceleration rates of the motor to control regeneration. When the speed reference is reduced, the motor starts to decelerate, and when the frequency is constant and regeneration is detected the inverter accelerates the motor to remove the regeneration voltage. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.75, for the OVP operation.

Fig. 8.1.75 OVP Operation 1). The DC bus filter is used to provide a stable bus reference needed to determine sudden changes in the DC bus do to regeneration. . The DC bus filter buildup rate is adjusted by G18-01 (DC bus filter rise amount). When the DC bus voltage is above the G18-01+G18-03 (DC bus filter deadband), the filter output will increase. . The DC bus filter decrement rate is adjusted by G18-02 (DC bus filter fall amount). When the DC bus voltage is below the G18-02-G18-03 (DC bus filter deadband), the filter output will decrease. . The DC bus filter output can be monitored by U1-60 (DC bus filter value). . Sets the decrement rate of the DC bus filter much faster than the buildup rate (i.e. sets the value of G18-02 higher than G18-01). 8-75

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 2). When the inverter is running and the frequency reference is constant, the OVP function monitors for the DC bus overshoot (Can be monitored by U1-61). . The DC bus overshoot is multiplied by G18-04 (OVP frequency reference gain) and is converted into a frequency to accelerate the inverter to prevent regeneration. . The converted frequency may be monitored by U1-62 (OVP frequency), and will be added to the existing frequency reference. The OVP total output frequency can be monitored by U1-63. . Acceleration will occur when there is a DC bus overshoot (monitored by U1-61), and the rate is adjusted by G03-01 (Tacc1). . The inverter output will return to the input frequency reference as the overshoot decreases, and the deceleration rate is determined based on the DC bus voltage as shown in the following Fig. 8.1.76.

Fig. 8.1.76 Deceleration Time of OVP 3). When the inverter is stopped, the deceleration rate is set by G03-02 (Tdec1), and when the inverter decelerates after a DC bus overshoot occurs, it will use the OVP deceleration time as shown in the previous Fig. 8.1.76. . At the DC bus voltage set in G18-06 (OVP Deceleration start voltage), the OVP deceleration rate will be set in G03-06 (Tdec3). . When the DC bus voltage rises above this level, the deceleration will increase as necessary to prevent the DC bus voltage from increasing further. . When the DC bus voltage reaches the setting in G18-07 (OVP Deceleration stop voltage), the deceleration time will be the set value in G03-08 (Tdec4). . The deceleration rate will change linearly along the slope defined by the starting point (G18-06) and the stopping point (G18-07). 4). The OVP function can be disabled or enabled by G18-08. When the OVP function is activated (G18-08=1), the following parameters will be changed to the new defaults: G02-03=1 (Stopping method : coast to stop). G03-01 (Tacc1) = 5.0 Sec (The frequency reference acceleration rate when there is a DC bus overshoot.) G03-06 (Tdec3) = 20.0 Sec (Lower set point of the OVP deceleration rate). G03-08 (Tdec4) = 100.0 Sec (Upper set point of the OVP deceleration rate). G15-01 = 0.0 Sec G15-02 = 0.0 Sec G15-03 = 0.0 Sec

(S-curve should be off in the OVP function)

8-76

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.19 Group 19 – Frequency Detection ■

Frequency Agree Detection Function (G19-01 to G19-03) Parameter Description

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display PG G19-01 Accel Freq Det Lvl 0.0 to 400.0Hz Accel Freq Det Lvl 0.0Hz A A A A G19-02 Decel Freq Det Lvl 0.0 to 400.0Hz Decel Freq Det Lvl 0.0Hz A A A A G19-03 Freq Agree Width 0.1 to 25.5Hz Freq Agree Width 2.0Hz A A A A . Frequency Agree Detection Function : Set the Multi-function Output terminals R1A-R1C, R2A-R2C, R3A-R3C or R4A-R4C (G11-01 to G11-04) to output the desired Frequency Agree signal, Setting Frequency Agree and Output Frequency Detection 1 and 2. . The time charts for the Frequency Agree Detection operation is described in the following Table 8.1.15. Function

Table 8.1.15 Frequency Agree Detection Operation Frequency Agree Detection Operation

Description

Frequency Agree

．When output frequency is within frequency reference ±Frequency Agree Detection Width (G19-03), the Frequency Agree output signal is ON. ．Set one of the parameters G11-01 to G11-04 to 2 (Frequency Agree).

Setting Frequency Agree

．During acceleration, When the output frequency reaches the Acceleration Frequency Agree Detection Level (G19-01) and is within the Frequency Agree Detection Width (G19-03), the Setting Frequency Agree signal is ON. ．Set one of the parameters G11-01 to G11-04 to 3 (Setting Frequency Agree). ．During acceleration, when the output frequency is less than the Acceleration Frequency Agree Detection Level (G19-01) and within the Frequency Agree Detection Width (G19-03), Output Frequency Detection 1 signal is ON. ．During deceleration, when the output frequency is less than the Deceleration Frequency Agree Detection Level (G19-02) and within Frequency Agree Detection Width (G19-03), Output Frequency Detection 1 signal is ON. ．Set one of the parameters G11-01 to G11-04 to 4 (Output Frequency Detection 1) ．During acceleration, when the output frequency is greater than the Acceleration Frequency Agree Detection Level (G19-01) and is within the Frequency Agree Detection Width (G19-03), the Output Frequency Detection 2 signal is ON. ．During deceleration, when the output frequency is greater than the Deceleration Frequency Agree Detection Level (G19-02) and is within the Frequency Agree Detection Width (G19-03), the Output Frequency Detection 2 signal is ON. ．Set one of the parameters G11-01 to G11-04 to 5 (Output Frequency Detection 2).

Output Frequency Detection 1

Output Frequency Detection 2

8-77

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Frequency Reference Loss Operation(G19-04,G19-05) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Factory LCD Display Setting

Setting Range

0:Stop (inverter will stop) Stop G19-04 Fref Loss Sel 1:Run at G19-05×previous 0 Run @ G19-05 Reference G19-05 Fref @ Loss 0.0 to 100.0 % Fref @ Loss 80.0 %

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG A

. The frequency reference is considered lost when the master speed frequency reference drops 90% or more from its current value in less then 400ms. . When G19-04 is set to 1, the current master speed frequency reference value is compared continuously with the value that occurred 400ms before. When the frequency reference is determined to be lost, the inverter will operate at a reduced frequency reference determined by the following formula: Fref = G19-05 × Fref at time of loss . In the following cases, this operation is released and the inverter returns to normal operation: (1). The Master speed frequency reference exceeding 80% frequency is input. (2). The Stop command is input. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.77, for the Frequency Reference Loss Operation.

Fig. 8.1.77

Frequency Reference Loss Operation

8-78

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.20 Group 20-Fault Restart â&#x2013;

Auto Restart Setting (G20-01 to G20-03) Parameter No.

Description

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory Setting

V/F

V/F + SLV PG A A A A

G20-01 NO.of Restart 0 to10 00 000 A A G20-02 Time of Restart 0 to 7200 sec 0000 sec 0000 A A 0: Disabled Disabled G20-03 Restart Sel 0 A A A A 1:Enabled Enabled . The auto restart function will restart the inverter whenever an internal fault occurs during inverter operation.This function should only be used when it is not a safety hazard or when there is no possibility of equipment damage. This function is disabled by Setting G20-03 (Restart Select) to 0. . The auto restart function is effective with the following faults. If a particular fault is not listed below occurs, the protection function will operate but the auto restart function will not. OC(Overcurrent) GF(Ground Fault) FU(DC Fuse Open) OV(Overvoltage) UV(Undervoltage) IPL(Input Phase Loss) OPL(Output Phase Loss) OH3(Motor Overheat Pre-Alarm)

OL1(Motor Overload) OL2(Inverter Overload) OT1(Overtorque Detection1) OT2(Overtorque Detection 2) BTF(Internal Barking Transistor Fault) G36-01 = 1 or 2 (Continue operation during momentary power loss) OH(Heat Sink overheat pre-alarm) OH4(Motor Overheat)

(1) Auto Restart Operation . The auto restart count will automatically increase when the restart is activated and will be cleared in the following cases: a. No fault occurs after auto restart for 10 minutes or more. b. When the fault reset input is received after the protection operation has been activated and the fault is confirmed. (e.g. by pressing the RESET/Right Shift key or enabling the fault reset terminal ). c. Turning the power off and on. . To output an auto restart operation signal to one of the Multi-function Digital Outputs R1A-R1C, R2A-R2C, R3A-R3C, R4A-R4C set one of the parameters G11-01 to G11-04 to 18. . Auto Restart Operation: a. When a fault is detected, the inverter output is turned off for the minimum baseblock time set by (G36-03) and the occurring fault is displayed in the Digital Operator. b. When the minimum baseblock time (G36-03) has elapsed, the fault is automatically reset, and speed search operation is performed for the output frequency at the time the fault occurred. c. When the total number of faults exceeds the number of auto restart attempts set by (G20-01), the auto restart function is not performed and the inverter output is turned off. At this time, fault contact output is output. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.77, for Auto Restart Operation.

Fig. 8.1.77

Auto Restart Operation

8- 79

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (2) Auto Restart Time Interval (G20-02) . The auto restart time interval is the minimum baseblock time (G36-03) when the set value of G20-02 is 0 . The auto restart time interval is set by G36-03 when G20-02<G36-03. . The auto restart time interval is set by G20-02 when G20-02>G36-03. . If the Inverter Overload Fault occurred and the fault is retried, the auto restart time interval is set to 10 minutes when G20-02 < 600 (10 minutes). . Refer to Fig. 8.1.78 below for the Auto Restart Time Interval Setting.

Fig. 8.1.78 Auto Restart Time Interval Important - The inverter may be damaged when using the auto restart function too frequently. 8.1.21 Group 21-Reserved 8.1.22 Group 22 â&#x20AC;&#x201C;Timer Function â&#x2013;

Timer Function (G22-01 to G22-02) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0000.0 sec 0000.0 G22-01 Timer A A A A ON-Delay sec 0.0 to 6000.0 sec 0000.0 sec 0000.0 G22-02 Timer A A A A OFF-Delay sec . The timer function is enabled when one of the Multi-function Input parameters G10-01 to G10-12 (S1 to S12) is set to 28 (Timer Function Input) and one of the Multi-function Output parameters G11-01 to G11-04 (R1A-R1C to R4A-R4C and PH1 to PH4) is set to 19 (Timer Function Output) respectively. . These inputs and outputs serve as a general purpose I/O. Setting the ON/OFF Delay Time parameters (G22-01/G22-02) for the timer can prevent chattering of sensors, switches etc. . When the Timer Function Input ON time is longer than the value set for G22-01, the Timer Function Output turns ON. . When the Timer Function Input OFF time is longer than the value set for G22-02, the Timer Function Output turns OFF. . An example is shown in the following Fig. 8.1.79.

Fig. 8.1.79

Timer Function

8- 80

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.23 Group 23- PID Control â&#x2013;

PID Control Setting (G23-01 to G23-14)

Parameter No.

LCD Display

PID G23-01 MODE Sel

G23-02 G23-03 G23-04 G23-05 G23-06 G23-07 G23-08 G23-09 G23-10

Description

PID P Gain PID I Time PID D Time PID Fdbk Gain PID I-Limit PID Limit PID Output Delay PID Output Bias PID Output Gain

Setting Range

LCD Display

---0B: PID Control Disable

Disable

---1B: PID Control Enabled

Enabled

--0-B: PID output forward characteristics control --1-B: PID output reversed characteristics control -0--B: Basic D control -1--B: PID feedback is D-controlled 0---B: Ref.= PID output 1---B: Ref.= PID output + Target 00.00 to 10.00 000.00 to 100.00 sec 00.00 to 10.00 sec 00.01 to 10.00 000.0 to 100.0% 000.0 to 100.0% 00.00 to 10.00 sec

Control Methods Factory V/F setting V/F + SLV SV PG

Positive Char. Negative Char.

0000B

A A

Dev. D-control Fdbk. D-control PID Output Only Output + Target 00.10

00.10

001.00 sec

00.00 sec

01.00

01.00 sec

100.0%

00.00 sec

-100.0 to 100.0% 000.0%

000.0%

00.0 to 25.0

0: 0 Limit when PID output is PID negative G23-11 Reverse 1: Reverse when PID output is Sel negative PID 0.0 to 25.5 sec G23-12 Target SFS PID 0: G23-14 Disabled G23-13 Target 1: G23-14 Enabled Sel PID 0.0 to 100.0% G23-14 Target

01.0

Output Rev. Limit 0 Output Rev. Enable 00.0 sec G23-14 Disabled G23-14 Enabled 000.0%

0.0 sec 0 0.0%

If any functions below is set, the traverse function is ineffective 1. frequency reference and Run direction is controlled by RTC timer (G42-27 = 1 to 5) 2. Auto-Run Function (G05-36 = 1 to 6) 3. traverse Function Using PID Control The PID control function, (P) proportional, (I) integral, and (D) derivative, is a control technique that serves to minimize the error between the set point command and the actual controlled value. Cont. 8- 81

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual PID Control Operations The characteristics of PID control are outlined below: . P control: This is a proportional input to the control system that is based on the difference (Error) between the input command level (Set-Point) and the actual controlled value (Feed-back). The difference or error is amplified by the (P) section using a settable (Gain) to minimize the error. However as the gain is increased, the system tends toward instability . I control: This allows the proportional gain (P) to be integrated over time so that higher gains may be used thus resulting in smaller errors. However as the integral time (I) is increased, the system response decreases. . D control: This is the opposite effect of integral control and provides the derivative control input of the input error in order to increase the system response. Caution must be used when implementing this parameter as it can cause system instability and is rarely used. . PID control : Optimum control is achieved by combining the best features of P, I ,and D control . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.80 for PID control operations.

Deviation

t PID Control I Control D

Control

P Control t Fig. 8.1.80 PID Control Operation

Types of PID Control Two types of PID control are possible with the inverterďź&#x161; (a) Feedback-Value Derivative PID controlďź&#x161;(when G23-01 =-1--B) With feedback-value derivative PID control, the feedback value is differentiated. Response is possible with respect to changes both in target value and the controlled process. To adjust the PID parameters more carefully to keep system stable. Refer to Fig. 8.1.81 for the Feedback-Value Derivative PID Control.

Fig. 8.1.81

Feedback â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Value Derivative PID Control

8- 82

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (b)Basic PID control：(when G23-01 = -0--B) When the D control response is adjusted to follow changes in the control in the control object , overshooting and undershooting can occur with changes in the target value . This is the basic form of PID control. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.82 Basic PID Control.

FIG. 8.1.82 Basic PID Control

. PID Input Method: Enable PID control using parameter G23-01, and the PID target value and PID feedback value. (1) PID Target Value Input Method： . Select the PID control target value input method according to the following settings: a. G02-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) Selects the master frequency reference input source. =0: Digital Operator: (parameter G05-01 preset) =1: Terminals: (analog input AI1 or AI2 based on G12-05 setting) =2: Communication (RS-422/485 from R(+), R(-),S(+),S(-) ports or USB from USB port) =3: Reserved =4: Reserved =5: Pulse train input (terminal PI) b. G23-14 (PID target value , available only when G23–13=1) . Refer to Fig. 8.87 for the PID target value input. (2) PID Feedback Value Input Method: . Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods: a. Multi-function Analog Input AI2 (when G12-05= 10 , PID feedback value) or Multi-function Analog Input AI3 (when G12-09 = 10 , PID feedback value). b. Pulse Train Input (when G14-01 = 1 , PID feedback value). . Refer to Fig. 8.1.83 for the PID feedback value input Digital Operator (G05 - 01)

G02- 01=0

AI 1 G02- 01=1 AI 2

G12- 05=11

AI 3 G12- 09=11 RS - 485 (s(+) , s(-)) G02- 01=2 Reserved

G02- 01=3 or 4 G23- 13=0

Pulse Train Input G14- 01=2

G02- 01=5

G23 - 14 setting G02- 01=0

G23- 13=1

PID Target SFS

PID Setpoint (U1- 31)

G23 - 12

Target Value

OFF

PID Target SFS OFF (using Multi- function Digital Input, setting=31)

AI 2

AI 3

G12- 05=10

G12- 09=10

PID Feedback (U1- 32)

G23 - 18 / G23 - 19

PID feedback display unit conversion Feedback Value

Pusle Train Input G14- 01=1

Fig. 8.1.83 PID Input Method 8- 83

Cont.

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual PID Control Settings . PID Control Block Diagram The following diagram shows the PID control block diagram. (Bias) G23 -09 G23- 01=1,2,3,4 ×1

PID=OFF

G23- 01=3,4,7,8

(PID output gam)

±200% Limit +

G23- 11=0

G23 -10

-1

PID=0N

G23- 01=1,2,5,6

Frequency Reference (Fref)

+109% PID Output (U1- 30)

G23- 11=1 -109% PID=OFF 1. G23- 01=---0B (PID Disabled) 2. during JOG mode 3. multi - function digital input (G10 - 01 - G10 – 08 setting = 29)

(P) Target Value

G23-02

(I) G23-03

(D)

Feedback Value

+ +

G23- 01=5,6,7,8

(Feedback Gain) G23- 05

+109%

PID Input (Deviation) U1- 29

G23- 01=1,3,5,7 (D) G23- 04

G23-04

G23- 06 100%

G23- 07 +

100%

(I-Limit) G23- 01=1,3,5,7 G23- 01=2,4,6,8

100%

-100%

G23- 08 (Primary delay)

(PID Limit) Integral Reset (using Multi-function Digital Input)

+ +

G23 - 01=2,4,6,8

Fig. 8.1.84 PID Control Block Diagram PID Adjustment Methods . Use the following procedure to activate PID control and then make adjustments while monitoring the response. (1) Enable PID Control (set G23-01 to other than “---0B” ) (2) Increase the proportional gain (G23-02) as high as possible without creating instability. (3) Decrease the integral time (G23-03) as low as possible without creating instability. (4) Increase the derivative time (G23-04) as high as possible without creating instability. . The Proportional (P), Integral (I) and Derivative (D) functions provide closed loop control, or regulation, of a system process variable (pressure, temperature, etc.). This regulation is accomplished by comparing a feedback signal with a set point signal which results in a deviation or error signal (U1-29).The PID control function (algorithm) then performs calculations using the parameter settings of G23-01 to G23-14 and readjusts the reference frequency (Fref). In this way the PID control loop is constantly trying to minimize the error between the set point and the actual value of the process variable. . The PID output polarity can be selected according to G23-01 (setting = --0-B：PID output is forward, setting =--1-B：PID output is reverse ).When the PID output is selected for reverse, if the PID target value increased, the inverter output frequency is lowered . . The PID feedback value can be adjusted by parameter G23-05 (PID feedback gain) and also by adjusting the gain and bias of the analog input used for feedback, terminal (AI2 or AI3), or the pulse train scaling, gain and bias. In PID control, the G23-06 (PID integral limit ) is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, the machine may be damaged or the motor may stall due to the inverter response delay. In this case, reduce the set value of G23-06 to speed up inverter response. . The G23-07 (PID limit) is used to prevent the resulting value following the PID control calculation from exceeding a specified amount .The maximum output frequency corresponds to 100%. . The G23-08 (The low pass filter time constant of the PID control output ) is used to prevent load resonance from occurring when the load friction is high, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the time constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to reduce inverter responsiveness. . The G23-09 (PID bias) is need to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%. 8- 84

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . The G23-10(PID output gain) is used to adjust the amount of compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation . . When the PID control output is negative, parameter G23-11 (PID reverse output selection) can be used to invert the inverter. However, when reverse prohibit is selected (G02-04=1), the PID control output limit is 0. . The G23-12 (PID target SFS) sets the PID output ramp up and down time to increase or decrease the PID target value. The inverter acceleration / deceleration time is set by G03-01 to G03-08 and is used in conjunction with parameter G23-12. Depending on the settings G03-01 to G03-08, load resonance or instability may occur with PID control. If this occurs, reduce the acceleration / deceleration time (G03-01 to G03-08) until the system is stable, and maintain the required accel / decel time by using G23-12. Parameter G23-12 can be disabled using a Multi-function Digital Input set to 31 (PID target SFS disabled). PID Fine Adjustment . All of the PID control setting parameters are interactive, and will need to be adjusted until the control loop is properly tuned, so that stability with minimal steady-state error can be achieved. A general procedure for tuning these parameter is as follows: (1) Increase or decrease the Proportional (P) gain until instability in the controlled variable is minimized. (2) The addition of Integral (I) time will decrease system instability as the proportional gain is increased. The time should be adjusted so that the highest proportional gain can be used without causing system instability. However, increasing the time will also decrease the response time of the system. (3) If necessary, adjust derivative time to reduce overshoot during start-up. The inverterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s acceleration / deceleration time can also be used for this purpose. . First set the individual PID control parameters, and then make fine adjustments as follows: (1) Reducing Overshooting

If overshoot occurs, shorten the derivative time (D) and lengthen the integral time (I).

(2) Rapidly Stabilizing Control Status

To rapidly stabilize the control conditions even when overshoot occurs, shorten the integral time (I) and lengthen the derivative time (D).

(3) Reducing Long-cycle Oscillation If oscillation occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) setting, the integral time is too long. The oscillation will be reduced as the integral time (I) is lengthened. (4) Reducing Short-cycle Oscillation If the oscillation cycle is short and approximately the same as the derivative time (D) setting, the derivative time is too long. The oscillation will be reduced as the derivative time (D) is shortened. If setting the derivative time (D) to 0.00 does reduce oscillation, then either decrease the proportional gain (P) or raise the PID primary delay time constant. 8- 85

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ PID Feedback Loss Detection (G23-15 to G23-17) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG

0 : Disabled Disabled 1 : Warning (FBK) G23-15 Fdbk Loss Det 0 A A A A Warning blinks 2 : Fault (FBK) on Fault G23-16 Fdbk Loss Lvl 0 to 100% Fdbk Loss Lvl 0% A A A A G23-17 Fdbk Loss Time 0.0 to 10.0 sec Fdbk Loss Time 1.0 sec A A A A . The PID control function provides closed loop control of a system process variable. If PID feedback is lost, the inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency. Hence when performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. . When G23-15 (PID feedback loss detection selection ) = 1, and the status of the PID feedback value is less than the setting of G23-16 (PID feedback loss detection level) for more than the time set in G23-17 (PID feedback loss detection time ), a FBK (PID Feedback Loss) warning message will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the inverter operation continues. . When G23-15 = 2, a FBK fault message will be displayed, the fault contact output operates, and inverter is stopped. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.85 for the operation time chart.

Fig. 8.1.85 PID Feedback Loss Detection

■ PID Feedback Value Display Unit Setting (G23-18 , G23-19) Parameter No.

LCD Display

G23-18 Fdbk DSPL Bias DSPL G23-19 Fdbk Gain

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG

-99.99 to +99.99 Fdbk DSPL Bias

0.00

0.00 to 99.99 Fdbk DSPL Gain

1.00

. The PID feedback value can be monitored by the status monitor U1-32, and the display units can be set by G23-18(PID feedback display bias) and G23-19 (PID feedback display gain). . For example, A 0- 10V or 4 - 20mA feedback value can be displayed as pressure, using G23-18 to set the equivalent 0 pressure (PSI unit) for a 0V or 4mA feedback signal and parameter G23-19 to set the equivalent pressure for 10V or 20mA. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.86 for the Display Unit Conversion.

8- 86

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.86 Display Unit Conversion Example:

â&#x2013;

Feedback signal: 0V = 0% = 1.0 PSI 10V = 100% = 20.0 PSI Parameter settings: G23-18 = 1.0 (0% feedback value) G23-19 = 20.0 (100% feedback value) G44-04 = 3 (PSI unit)

PID Sleep/ Wake-up Setting (G23-20 to G23-24) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G23-20 PID Sleep Sel

Setting Range

LCD Display

0: Disabled 1: Enabled (internal control) 2: Enabled by DI 0.00 to 180.00 Hz

Control Methods Factory V/ Setting V/F F+ SLV SV PG

Disabled Enabled

Enabled by DI Sleep Freq 0.00 Hz A A A Sleep Delay G23-22 Sleep Delay Time 0.0 to 255.5 Sec 0.0 Sec A A A Time G23-23 Wake-Up Freq 0.00 to 180.00 Hz Wake-Up Freq 0.00 Hz A A A G23-24 Wake-Up Delay 0.0 to 255.5 Sec Wake-Up Delay 0.0 Sec A A A . The PID Sleep/Wake-up operation makes it possible to automatically stop and start the motor depending on the process requirements as a means of saving energy. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.87 for the PID Sleep / Wake-up operation. G23-21 Sleep Freq

(a) PID Control Block

(b) Sleep / Wake- up Time Chart Fig. 8.1.87 PID Sleep / Wake- up Operation

8- 87

A A A A A

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . When the output frequency (Fout) drops below the PID sleep start frequency set by G23-21, the PID sleep mode timer is started, and the present output frequency will follow the frequency reference (Fref) until the minimum output frequency set by G06-07 (Fmin) is reached. When the time set by G23-22 (PID sleep delay time) has expired, the inverter will ramp down the motor to stop and the inverter stay at the sleep mode. . While the inverter has stopped the motor in the sleep mode, the PID control function is still operating. When the frequency reference rises above the wake-up start frequency set by G23-23, and after the time delay expires set by G23-24, the inverter will restart the motor, and the output frequency will ramp up to the frequency reference. . The PID sleep/wake-up function is activated when PID is OFF (G23-01=0) or during JOG the mode or when one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs activated (G10-01 to G10-08 =29). A “ SE05 PID Select Error ” message will be displayed if the PID (G23-01= 1- 8) and PID sleep function is enabled (G23-20=1 or 2) at the same time and (G23-21≠0). . Use parameter G23-20 to enable / disable the PID sleep function. G23-20 = 0: The PID sleep function (sleep mode) is disabled. = 1: The PID sleep operation depends on the setting of parameters G23-21and G23-22 as described above. = 2: The PID sleep mode operation is activated by one of the selected Multi-function Digital Inputs. 8.1.24 Group 24 ─ Energy Saving ■

Auto Energy Saving Setting (G24-01 to G24-10) Parameter Description

No.

LCD Display

G24-01

AES SEL

G24-02 G24-03 G24-04 G24-05 G24-06 G24-07 G24-08 G24-09

AES Vup (60Hz) AES Vup ( 6 Hz) AES Vlow (60Hz) AES Vlow (6 HZ) AES Tuning Vlim AES Tuning Time Tuning V(100%) Tuning V( 5% )

G24-10 AES Gain

Setting Range

LCD Display

0:Disabled 1:Enabled 0 to 120% 0 to 25% 0 to 100% 0 to 25% 0 to 100% 0 to 5000ms 0.1 to 10.0% 0.1 to 10.0%

Disabled Enabled AES Vup (60Hz) AES Vup ( 6 Hz) AES Vlow (60Hz) AES Vlow (6 HZ) AES Tuning Vlim AES Tuning Time Tuning V(100%) Tuning V( 5% )

0.00 to 655.35

AES Gain

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

120% 16% 50% 12% 100% 20ms 0.5% 0.2% Varies by KVA

A A A A A A A A

X X X X X X X X

. In the V/F control mode, the Auto Energy Saving (AES) function automatically adjusts an optimum output voltage value to minimize the inverter output current according to the load. The output power savings varies according to the load ratio. When the load ratio exceeds 70% the energy savings is minimum, but as the load becomes lighter, the savings increases. . Since the parameters used in the AES have been preset at the factory to the optimum values prior to shipment, no adjustment is usually necessary under normal operation. If the motor characteristics being used differ greatly from those of TECO standard motors, refer to the following description to adjust the parameters. (1) Auto Energy Saving Control Mode (G24-01) . To enable AES control, set G24-01 to 1. (2) Energy Saving Voltage Limit (G24-02 to G24-05) . Set the upper and lower limits of output voltage using G24-02 to G24-05 as shown in the following Fig. 8.1.88. . If the voltage reference value calculated in the energy savings mode exceeds the upper or lower limit value, this upper or lower limit value is output as voltage reference value. . The upper limit value G24-02 and G24-03 is set in order to prevent over excitation at low frequency, and the lower limit value G24-04 and G24-05 is set in order to prevent stalling at light load. . The Limit voltage values obtained at 6Hz and 60Hz are preset, for any other limit the value can be calculated by linear interpolation. . The setting is made as a percentage of rated output voltage.

8- 88

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.88 Energy Saving Voltage Limit (3) Energy Saving Tuning Parameters (G24-06 to G24-09). . In the AES control mode, the optimum voltage is calculated according to the load power requirements, and this voltage is then supplied to the motor. However, this calculated value may vary due to temperature fluctuations or differences in motor characteristics, therefore the optimum voltage may not be supplied in some cases. To optimize efficiency the optimum voltage can be tuned by the setting the following AES tuning parameters. a. AES Tuning Operation Voltage Limit (G24-06). . Limits the range where the voltage is controlled by the tuning operation. . Set the range to 100% / 230V for 230V class and 100% / 460V for 460V class. . Set to 0 to disable the tuning operation. . Refer to Fig. 8.1.89.

Fig. 8.1.89 Tuning Operation Voltage Limit b. AES Tuning Operation Control Cycle Time (G24-07). . Sets the time constant for output power detection. . To improve response when the load fluctuates, decrease the G24-07 setting. . If G24-07 is set too small, however, the motor may become unstable when the load is light . c. AES Tuning Operation Voltage Step (G24-08 , G24-09). . Sets variation width of the voltage for one tuning operation cycle. . Setting is made in % of rated output voltage. . By increasing this value, speed variation becomes larger. . This voltage variation width is set at a tuning starting voltage 100% and 5%. With other voltage values, the voltage variation width can be calculated by linear interpolation is set. Refer the following Fig. 8.1.90.

Fig. 8.1.90

Tuning Operation Voltage Cont. 8- 89

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (4) Energy Saving Coefficient (G24-10). . Voltage at which the motor efficiency will be maximum is calculated by using this coefficient, and the calculated value is the voltage reference. . The value of G24-10 is set at the factory for the motor capacity corresponding to the inverter. If the motor capacity differs, set the motor capacity by using parameter G07-03 (Motor rated output power), and adjust G24-10 until the output voltage reaches the minimum value. . The larger the energy saving coefficient G24-10, the greater the output voltage. Manual Energy Saving (MES) Setting (G24-11, G24-12)

Parameter

Description

Control Methods V/F No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display V/F + SLV SV PG G24-11 MES Gain 080 % 080 % 80 % A A X X G24-12 MES Freq 000.00 Hz 000.00 Hz 0.0 Hz A A X X . The manual energy saving (MES) control function is enabled when the manual energy saving command has been set by one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (G10-01 to G10-08 = 49). The manual energy saving command, when used with a light load, causes the inverter output voltage to be reduced resulting in an energy saving. Turn off the manual energy saving command when there is a normal load. (1) Manual Energy Saving Gain (G24-11). . G24-11 determines the Inverter output voltage when the manual energy saving command is input. Set this value as a percentage of the V/f pattern’s voltage. . The voltage recovery Time (G36-08) determines the rate at which the output voltage is changed when the manual energy saving control is turned on or off. Factory Setting

(2) Manual Energy Saving Frequency (G24-12). . The manual energy saving command is enabled only when the frequency reference is greater than G24-12 and the motor speed is within the speed agreed range. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.91 for the manual energy saving operation.

Fig. 8.1.91 Manual Energy Saving Operation 8.1.25 Group 25 ─ Hold Function ■ Hold Control Setting (G25-01 to G25-04) Parameter Description

Control Methods Factory V/F No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG G25-01 F_hold @ start 000.0 to 400.0Hz 000.0 Hz 000.0 Hz A A A A G25-02 T_hold @ start 00.0 to 10.0 sec 00.0 sec 00.0 sec A A A A G25-03 F_hold @ stop 000.0 to 400.0 Hz 000.0 Hz 0.0 Hz A A A A G25-04 T_hold @ stop 00.0 to 10.0 sec 00.0 sec 0.0 sec A A A A . The hold functions are used to temporarily hold the frequency reference when starting or stopping a motor with a heavy load to prevent stalling. . After operating the motor at a starting speed set by G25-01 for a certain period set by G25-02 (in order to establish the magnetic flux) the motor can accelerate. . The acceleration an deceleration time does not include the hold time at start and stop. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.92.

8- 90

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.92 Hold Function . The hold function during acceleration can be used to minimize the occurrence of an OC trip when accelerating high inertia loads by introducing a dwell or pause in the acceleration ramp. This function can also be used to prevent wind-milling, when the load may have a tendency to drive the motor in a reverse direction while the inverter is in the stop mode. In addition this function can be used to keep the inverter output frequency and voltage at low levels long enough to bring the load to a stop, and reverse direction before the acceleration ramp resumes. Also refer to the DC injection braking at start, parameter G16-04. . The Hold function is ineffective if the hold frequency at start (G25-01) or hold frequency at stop (G25-03) is set below Fmin (G06-07) 8.1.26 Group 26 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Reserved 8.1.27 Group 27 â&#x201D;&#x20AC; Zero Servo Parameter No.

Description

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F SLV SV + PG X X X A X X X A

G27-01 Zero-Servo Gain 00 to 50 05 05 G27-02 Zero-Servo Count 0 to 4096 0012 0012 G27-03 Zero Spd Braking 0:Disabled Disabled 0 A X X X Sel 1:Enabled Enabled . The zero-servo function can be used to hold the position of the motor shaft when the motor is stopped and there are external forces that want to cause rotation. . Refer the following Fig. 8.1.95 for the zero-servo operation.

Fig. 8.1.95 Zero-Servo Operation

8- 91

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . Assign the zero-servo command to one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (G10-01 to G10-08 = 41). The zero-servo function is enabled when the Multi-function Digital Input is on. . When the frequency reference falls below the zero speed level (The larger of G06-07 or G16-01 (DC braking start frequency)), the zero-servo status is implemented (zero-servo start position), and the motor shaft position will be held even though the analog reference input may not be zero. . If the run command is OFF during zero-servo status, the zero-servo function will become ineffective. . To output the zero-servo status, assign the zero-servo completion signal to one of the Multi-function Digital Outputs (G11-01 to G11-04 = 24). ─ The zero-servo count G27-02 is enabled when one of the Multi-function Digital Outputs has been set to 24 (zero-servo completion signal). Cont. ─ The zero-servo completion signal is ON when the current motor rotor position is within zero-servo start position ± zero-servo count G27-02. ─ The zero-servo completion signal will go OFF when the zero-servo or run command) is turned off. (1) Zero-Servo Gain Setting (G27-01). . Use the zero-servo gain G27-01 parameter to adjust the holding torque of the zero-servo operation. . The holding torque will increase if the set value is increased, but instability can occur if set too high. . Do not use the zero-servo function to hold the motor for extended periods of time at 100% of inverter rated current, otherwise, an OH5 (IGBT overheat) fault may result. Extended periods of zero-servo holding torque can be achieved by keeping the output current during zero-servo less than 50 to 60% of inverter rated current or by increasing the inverter capacity. (2) Zero-Servo Counts (G27-02). . The zero-servo count is set as the allowable position offset from the zero-servo start position. . Set the zero-servo count G27-02 to the number of pulses from the PG after multiplied by four. (Four times resolution of the PG by counting the rising and falling edges of phase A and B). (3) Zero Speed Braking Operation Selection (G27-03). . In the V/f control mode, the DC injection braking operation (without PG feedback) can be used to generate the holding torque. . Set G27-03 to select the zero speed braking operation. G27-03 = 0: disabled. = 1: enabled. . The run command and frequency reference is input from control terminals by setting G02-02 (run command selection) to 1 and G02-01 (frequency reference selection) to 1. If the zero speed braking operation function is enabled (G27-03=1), the holding torque will be generated in the DC injection braking mode when the frequency reference is 0V (or less than 4mA) and run command is on. . Refer to Fig. 8.1.96 for more zero speed braking operation details. The DC injection braking current G16-02 is limited to within 20% of the inverter rated current.

Fig. 8.1.96

Zero Speed Braking Operation

8- 92

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.28 Group 28 ─ Motor Slip Compensation ■ Motor Slip Compensation Setting (G28-01 to G28-05) Parameter Description Factory Setting Setting No. LCD Display LCD Display Range Slip Comp Gain G28-02 Slip Comp Limit 0 to 250% 200% to 10.0 Slip Comp G28-03 Slip Comp Filter 00.0 sec Filter 0: Disabled Disabled G28-04 Regen Slip Comp 1: Enabled Enabled HS Slip Cmp Gain G28-05 HS Slip Cmp Gain -1.00 to 1.00 1 to 1000 ms FOC Delay Tm G28-06 FOC Delay Tm 0.00 to 2.00 FOC Gain G28-07 FOC Gain G28-01 Slip Comp Gain

0.00 to 2.50

Control Methods V/F V/F SLV SV + PG

0.00 (V/f) 1.00 (SLV) 200%

1.0 sec

0.00 100ms 0.10

X X X

A A A

X X X

. The slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current and controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of load changes . . This function is used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a varying load and it is effective mainly in the V/f control mode.

V/F mode adjustment (1)Slip Compensation Gain (G28-01) . Factory setting of G28-01 =0.0 (when G28-01 = 0.0, the slip compensation operation is disabled). . The V/F mode Adjustment procedure of Motor Slip Compensation Gain (G28-01): 1 Correctly set the rated slip (G07-02) and motor no-load current (G07-15 ). 2 Set the slip compensation gain (G28-01) to 1.0 (factory setting is 0.0 for V/f control mode.) 3 Operate with a load, measure the speed and adjust the slip compensation gain (G28-01) in increments of 0.1. ─ If the speed is lower than the frequency reference, increase the G28-01 setting. ─ If the speed is higher than the frequency reference, decrease the G28-01 setting. . Slip compensation is enabled when the output current is greater than motor no-load current (G07-15). The output frequency will shift from f1 to f2 for the positive change of load torque. Refer to Fig. 8.1.97. The slip compensation value is as below formula: [Output Current (U1-03) – Motor No-Load Current(G07-15)] Slip Compensation Value = Motor Rated Slip x (G07-02) [Motor Rated current (G07-04) – Motor No-Load Current (G07-15)]

Fig. 8.1.97 Output Frequency With Slip Compensation

8- 93

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (2) Slip Compensation Limit(G28-02). . The slip compensation limit G28-02 setting is shown in Fig. 8.1.98 below in the constant torque (below Fbase) and constant horsepower (Fbase to Fmax) ranges. . If the setting of G28-02 is 0% , no slip compensation is used. Slip Compensation Limit G06-03 G06-04

× G28-04

G28-04

Fbase

Fmax

(G06-04)

(G06-03)

Fig. 8.1.98 Slip Compensation Limit . If the actual motor speed is lower than the frequency reference speed and does not change when the slip compensation gain G28-01 is adjusted, the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Make sure the value of slip compensation limit G28-02 and frequency reference do not exceed the tolerance of the machine. (3) Slip compensation Primary Delay Time (G28-03). . Sets the filter time of slip compensation for V/f mode. (4) Slip Compensation During Regeneration Selection (G28-04). . Sets whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration. . When speed accuracy during motor regeneration (deceleration) is required in SLV control, set G28-04 to 1 (enabled). . The amount of regeneration is momentarily increased when the slip compensation function is used (G28-04 =1), therefore some form braking option (braking unit, braking resistor) may be required.

SLV mode adjustment (1)Slip Compensation Gain (G28-01) . Set this gain to control the whole range speed accuracy when load is applied. . If motor speed drops when load is applied at low speed below 2Hz, increase G28-01. . If motor speed increases when load is applied at low speed below 2Hz, decrease G28-01. . G28-01 is a fixed slip gain for the whole speed range. it’s common that this gain adjusted at low speed still has a slightly speed drop at high speed. If this speed drop can’t be accepted at high speed, adjust G28-02 to add an additional compensation or just readjust G28-01 for high speed and sacrifice the low speed accuracy. Th effect of G28-01 on Torque-Speed curve is shown as below:

Fig. 8.1.99 G28-01 effect on Torque-Speed curve (2)High Speed Slip Compensation Gain(G28-05) . Set this gain to control the speed accuracy from medium to high speed range when load is applied. Normally it doesn’t need to be adjusted. . After adjustment of G28-01, increase frequency reference and see whether speed still declines or not. If the loading speed declines as the frequency reference increases, increase G28-05 to compensate the loading speed drop. . Accelerate to motor rated frequency(G06-04 Base frequency), increase G28-05 until the loading speed drop is zero. . When motor temperature is hot, loading speed will drop more. It’s better to over adjust G28-05 and G28-01 at cold trial operation to compensate speed drop due to temperature rise. . In contrast to G28-01, G28-05 is a variable gain to compensate slip for the whole speed range. 8- 94

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual G28-05 defines the slip compensation gain at motor rated frequency. The whole slip compensation gain then computed as Slip compensation Gain=LSSlipCmpG+HSSlipCmpG*F/Fr Where LSSlipCmpG is G28-01, HSSlipCmpG is G28-05, F is frequency reference, Fr is motor rated frequency defined by G06-04(base frequency). The combination slip compensation gain of G28-01 and G28-05 versus frequency reference is

Fig. 8.1.100 G28-01/G28-05 Slip Compensation Gain vs. Frequency Reference The effect of G28-05 on Torque-Speed curve is shown as below:

Fig. 8.1.101 G28-05 effect on Torque-Speed curve (3)FOC(Flux Orient Control) delay time(G28-06) . In SLV mode, a flux slip compensation was conducted to keep torque current and excitation current decoupled. . When the motor suffers over 100% load at rated frequency, the voltage drop of inductance and resistance might lead to saturation of inverter output and the coupling of torque current and excitation current and causes hunting. A flux slip compensation will decouple torque current and excitation current so that hunting disappears. . G28-06 sets the delay time of flux slip compensation. . Increase G28-06 for slow and stable operation. Decrease G28-06 for fast operation. FOC(Flux Orient Control) Gain(G28-07) (4)G28-07 sets the gain of flux slip compensation. . If motor hunts at motor rated frequency and full load, set G28-07 to zero and gradually increase until the hunting is reliefed.

8- 95

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.29 Group 29 – Torque Compensation Torque Compensation Setting (G29-01, G29-02) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

Comp 0.0 to 2.0 G29-01 Torque 0.6 0.6 A A X X Gain G29-02 Torque Comp 0 to 10000ms 00200ms 00200ms A A X X Time . The Inverter can increase the output torque to compensate for load increases automatically through the Torque Compensation function. (1) Torque Compensation Gain(G29-01) . V/f or V/f + PG mode：The inverter calculates the compensation voltage by “motor primary voltage loss x (G29-01)”. . The torque compensation gain G29-01 can be changed during operation, but normally no adjustment is necessary except in the following cases： ─ If the wiring distance between the inverter and the motor is long, increase the set value. ─ If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity, increase the set value. ─ If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value. . Increase the set value of G29-01 gradually and check that the current increase is not excessive. Ensure that the output current at low-speed does not exceed the inverter rated output current. Refer to Fig. 8.1.102 for the torque compensation gain adjustment. (2) Torque Compensation Time (G29-02) . Sets the torque compensation primary delay time in ms units. . Normally, it is not necessary to make adjustments except in the following cases: ─ If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value. ─ If the motor response is slow, decrease the set value.

Fig. 8.1.102

Adjust the Torque Compensation Gain to Increase the Output Torque

8- 96

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.30 Group 30 ─ Speed Control (ASR) Setting ■ ASR Settings (G30-01 to G30-09) Parameter No.

LCD Display

Description

Setting Range

LCD Display

G30-01 ASR P Gain 1

0.00 to 2.55*1

ASR P Gain 1

G30-02 ASR I Time 1

0.01 to 10.00 sec*2

ASR I Time 1

G30-03 ASR P Gain 2 G30-04 G30-05 G30-06 G30-07

0.00 to 2.55

ASR P Gain 2 *2

ASR I Time 2 ASR I Limit ASR + Limit ASR – Limit

G30-08 PG PI/P Sel G30-09 G30-10 G30-11 G30-12 G30-13

ASR Delay Time SpdObsr P Gain 1 SpdObsr I Time 1 SpdObsr P Gain 2 SpdObsr I Time 2

G30-14 SpdFB LPF Tm 1

0.01 to 10.00 sec 0 to 400% 00.1 to 10.0% 00.1 to 10.0% 0: Disabled (P control during Accel / Decel) 1: Enabled (PI control) 0.000 to 0.500 sec 0.00 to 2.55 0.01 to 10.00 sec 0.00 to 2.55 0.01 to 10.00 sec

ASR I Time 2 ASR I Limit ASR + Limit ASR – Limit

0.001 to 1.000 s

SpdFB LPF Tm 1

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SL SV PG V Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA Varies by KVA

5.0% 1.0%

X X X X

A X A A

A A X X

X A X X

0.001s

0.61

X X X X

A A A A

X X X X

X X X X X

A A A A A

X X X X X

200%

Disabled Enabled 0.001 sec SpdObsr P Gain 1 SpdObsr I Time 1 SpdObsr P Gain 2 SpdObsr I Time 2

0.05

0.61 0.06 Varies by KVA

G30-15 SpdFB LPF Tm 2 0.001 to 1.000 s SpdFB LPF Tm 2 0.030s G30-16 ASR Gain Chng F1 0.0 to 400.0 Hz ASR Gain Chng F1 4.0 Hz G30-17 ASR Gain Chng F2 0.0 to 400.0 Hz ASR Gain Chng F2 8.0 Hz G30-18 LS Spd Cmp Gain 0.00 to 2.50 LS Spd Cmp Gain 1.00 G30-19 HS Spd Comp Gain -10%~10% HS Spd Comp Gain 0% *1: The range is 0.00 ~ 5.11 for software with version later than 1.02. *2: The range is 0.001 ~ 10.000sec for software with version later than 1.02. . The following figures show the structure of the speed control loop(ASR).

(a) V/f + PG Control Mode: . The speed control (ASR) adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between the frequency reference and the speed feedback approaches 0. . ASR integrator output can be limited or cleared. The whole ASR output also can be limited.

Fig. 8.1.103 Speed Control Structure (V/F + PG) . When one of the Multi-function Inputs (G10-01 to G10-08) is set to 37 (PG invalid), the input can be used to enable or disable the speed control loop(ASR).

8- 97

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (b) SLV Control Mode: . The speed control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the frequency reference and the speed observer feedback(PG feedback) is 0. . SLV mode ASR controller has a speed observer that estimates motor speed from motor voltage and current. In order to reduce noise on speed feedback and improve the speed accuracy, a low pass filter and a speed feedback compensator are used. . ASR integrator output can be limited or cleared. The whole output has a low pass filter for primary delay. Torque reference is also limited.

Fig. 8.1.104 Speed Control Structure (SLV Mode) (c) SV Control Mode: . The speed control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the frequency reference and the speed feedback(PG feedback) is 0. . ASR integrator output can be limited or cleared. The whole output has a low pass filter for primary delay. Torque reference is also limited.

Fig. 8.1.105 Speed Control Structure (SV Mode) A. ASR Setting in V/f + PG Control Mode. (1). In the V/f + PG mode, set the proportional (P) gain and integral (I) time at the minimum output frequency(G30-03 and G30-04) and maximum output frequency(G30-01and G30-02) of the speed control separately. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.106. Cont.

8- 98

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.106 ASR Gain Settings in V/F+PG Mode (2). Adjust Speed Control (ASR) Gain: Use the following procedure to adjust the gain with the actual load connected a. Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency G30-03 and G30-04. . Run the motor at the minimum output frequency. . Increase the ASR proportional gain 2 G30-03 as high as possible without creating instability. . Decrease the ASR integral time G30-04 as low as possible without creating instability. . Monitor the inverter output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the inverter rated current. If the output current exceeds 50% of the inverter rated current, decrease G30-03 and increase G30-04. b. Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency. G30-01 and G30-02. . Run the motor at the maximum output frequency G06-03 (Fmax). . Increase the ASR proportional gain 1G30-01 as high as possible without creating instability. . Decrease the ASR integral time 1G30-02 as low as possible without creating instability. c. Gain Adjustments for Integral Control during Acceleration / Deceleration G30-08. . Enable the integral control during acceleration / deceleration by setting G30-08=1 (enabled) when it is desired to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. . The integral control causes the motor speed to reach the target speed as fast as possible, but may result in overshoot or undershoot per the following Fig. 8.1.107.

Fig. 8.1.107 Motor Speed and ASR Gain Adjustments . When one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs(G10-01 to G10-08) is set to 38 (Speed control integral reset), the input can be used to switch the speed control loop (ASR) between P control and PI control. Refer to Fig.8.105. P control (integral reset) is used when the Multi-function Digital Input is on. ─ If overshooting occurs(Ⓐ), decrease G30-01(ASR proportional gain 1) and increase G30-02 (ASR integral time 1). ─ If undershooting occurs(Ⓑ), decrease G30-03(ASR proportional gain 2) and increase G30-04 (ASR integral time 2). ─ If the overshooting or undershooting can not be eliminated by the gain adjustments as above, decrease the ASR +/- limit (G30-06 / G30-07) to lower the frequency reference compensation (Δf) limit. Since G30-06 / G30-07 can not be changed during operation, stop the inverter first 8- 99

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual and then decrease the ASR +/- limit. . Make the related parameter settings as shown in the following Fig. 8.1.108 and observe the motor speed waveform while making the gain adjustments.

Fig. 8.1.108 Analog Output Setting for Motor Speed Observation d. ASR +/- Limit (G30-06 , G30-07) . The ASR +/- limit is the frequency limit for compensation by speed control. Set this frequency limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency G06-03. . If the frequency limit is lowed too much, the actual motor speed may not reach the target speed. Verity that the target speed is reached during normal operation. B. ASR Setting in SV/SLV Control Mode (1). SLV Gain setting: . The SLV mode speed control controller has high speed gain G30-01/G30-02 and low speed gain G30-03/G30-04 PI parameters for High speed and Low speed region, respectively. ASR uses frequency reference as the reference of gain switching. The switching point between high speed and low speed is set by G30-16 and G30-17. . Similar to ASR gain, speed observer has high speed gain G30-10/G30-11 and low speed gain G30-12/G30-13 PI parameters. Gain switching also depends on frequency reference. The switching point are also set by G30-16 and G30-17. . Speed observer has a low pass filter to reduce noise on speed feedback. G30-14 and G30-15 defines the high speed and low speed low pass filter time constant, respectively. Gain switching also depends on frequency reference. The switching point are also set by G30-16 and G30-17. . G30-18 set the low speed compensation gain for speed feedback. . G30-19 set the High speed compensation gain for speed feedback. . When the frequency reference greater than G30-17, high speed ASR/Observer gains and the low pass filter time constant will be fully applied. When the frequency reference less than G30-16, low speed ASR/Observer gains and the low pass filter time constant will be fully applied. When the speed command falls between G30-17 and G30-16, gains and time constant will be linearly and smoothly switched. To avoid unwanted gain calculation error, G30-17 should be 4Hz greater than G30-16.

Fig. 8.1.109 ASR Gain Settings in SLV mode (2) SV Gain setting: . In the SV mode, Only G30-01 and G30-02 set the proportional(P) gain and integral(I) time for full range speed operation. (3) Adjust Speed Control(ASR) Gainďź&#x161; . Using the Multi-function Analog Output(terminals AO1 and AO2) to monitor both the output frequency and motor speed(as above Fig. 8.109 ) When you make finer gain adjustment. 8- 100

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ①. SV mode for full range speed Gain Adjustments (G30-01 , G30-02) . Adjust these parameters at normal operating speed. . Increase the ASR proportional gain 1 (G30-01) as far as possible without creating oscillation. ─The G30-01 setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control loop. ─The responsiveness is increased when increasing the G30-01 setting, but oscillation will occur if the setting is increased too much. Increase the setting for larger loads. Refer to the following figure.

Fig. 8.1.110 Responsiveness for ASR Proportional Gain 1 . Decrease the ASR integral time 1(G30-02) as far as possible without creating oscillation ─ Lengthening the integral time 1 lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences. ─ Oscillation will occur if the G30-02 setting is too short. Refer to the following figure. . If there’s excessive overshoot during tuning of ASR PI gain, an alarm of over voltage may occur. Put a regeneration resistor to absorb the overshoot. Motor Speed

1 ：G30- 02 setting is too short(oscillation occurs) 1

2 ：G30- 02 setting is too long(slow response)

2 t 2

Fig. 8.1.111 Response for ASR Integral Time 1 ②. SLV mode Gain Adjustments(G30-01~G30-04 , G30-10~G30-19) . Adjust Low speed ASR PI gain G30-03~G30-04 at a frequency reference below G30-16. The P gain and integral time adjustment are similar to G30-01 and G30-02 at SV mode. . Adjust High speed ASR PI gain G30-01~G30-02 at a frequency reference above G30-17. The P gain and integral time adjustment are similar to G30-01 and G30-02 at SV mode. . Normally low speed ASR gain can be the same as high speed ASR gain. Adjust low-speed and high-speed gain only when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low-speed or high-speed. . If a faster response can’t be obtained by adjusting the ASR PI gain G30-01~G30-04, decrease low pass filter time constant G30-14~G30-15 to increase speed feedback bandwidth and readjust ASR gain. . Adjust Low speed low pass filter time constant G30-15 at a frequency reference below G30-16. . Adjust High speed low pass filter time constant G30-14 at a frequency reference above G30-17. . Increasing low pass filter time constant could limit the speed feedback bandwidth and slows whole system’s fastest response. This can reduce the speed feedback noise but weaken the capability of withstanding impact load. If the system load is slow varied and need a stable operation, this adjustment can be applied. A lower bandwidth of the speed feedback must be accompanied with a lower gain of ASR to guarantee a stable operation. . Decreasing low pass filter time constant could lift the limitstion of the speed feedback 8- 101

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual bandwidth and increase whole system’s fastest response. This can increase the speed feedback noise but strengthen the capability of withstanding impact load. If the system load is fast varied and need a fast operation, this adjustment can be applied. A high bandwidth of the speed feedback allows a higher gain of ASR. . If a faster response still can’t be obtained by adjusting the ASR PI gain G30-01~G30-04 and low pass filter time constant G30-14~G30-15, The adjusment of speed observer PI gain G30-10~G30-13 is needed. . A high gain of speed observer(larger P gain and smaller integral time) could increase bandwidth of speed feedback but also increase noise and cause instability. . A low gain of speed observer(smaller P gain and larger integral time) could decrease bandwidth of speed feedback but also decrease noise and increase stability. . Normally, the adjustment of ASR is enough for most of application. The adjustment of low pass filter time constant and speed observer is complex ,riskful and not recommanded. It’s very hard to cover both fast response and stable operation. If both fast response and stable operation are demanded and can’t be done with all SLV mode adjustment, use SV mode. . G30-16 defines low speed of the gain switching frequency and G30-17 defines high speed of the gain switching frequency. . At speed below G30-16, inverter outputs more excitation current for precise low speed operation. When the frequency reference is higher than G30-17, inverter output rated excitation current under No-load voltage(T-10). . Normally G30-16 should be set to 5~50% motor base frequency. If this value is too large, inverter output might saturated. G30-17 should be 4Hz higher than G30-09. . If heavy load(over 100%) operation is stable at medium speed but hunting at high speed, decrease No-load voltage(T-10) or adjust FOC parameters G28-07~G28-08). . G30-18 and G30-19 compensate speed feedback at low speed and high speed, respectively. . Set G30-18 to adjust No-load speed at speed below 2Hz. The adjustment of G30-18 is similar to adding an offset to the Torque-Speed curve. When the No-load speed is lower than frequency reference, increase G30-18. When the No-load speed is higher than frequency reference, decrease G30-18. The effect of G30-18 on Torque-Speed curve is shown as below:

Fig. 8.1.112 G30-18 effect on Torque-Speed Curve . Set G30-19 to adjust No-load speed from medium to high speed range. Normally it doesn’t need to be adjusted. G30-19 is similar to G30-19, its effect on Torque-Speed curve is

Fig. 8.1.113 G30-19 effect onTorque-Speed curve ③. ASR Primary Delay Time (G30-09). . Adjustment is not normally required. . A high G30-09 setting lowers the speed responsiveness, but make it difficult for oscillation to occur. 8- 102

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ④. ASR Integral Limit (G30-05) . Set to a smell value to prevent any radical load change. 8.1.31 Group 31 ─ PG Feedback Set-Up ■ PG Feedback Setting (G31-01 to G31-13) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

0:Decelerate to stop G31-01 Over Speed Sel 1:Coast to stop 2:Continue Running G31-02 OS Det Lvl 0 to 120% G31-03 OS Det Time 0.0 to 2.0 sec 0: Decelerate to stop G31-04 Deviation Sel 1:Coast to stop 2:Continue Running G31-05 Dev Det Lvl 0 to 50% G31-06 Dev Det Time 00.0 to 10.0 sec 0:Decelerate to stop G31-07 PG Open Sel 1:Coast to stop 2:Continue Running G31-08 PGO Det Time 0.0 to 10.0 sec G31-09 PG Pulses G31-10 G31-11 G31-12 G31-13

0 to 60,000 ppr

PG Rotation Sel 0: FWD=C.C.W 1: FWD=C.W PG Output Ratio 001 to 132 PG Gear Teeth1 0001 to 1,000 PG Gear Teeth2 0001 to 1,000

Decel to stop Coast to stop Continue Running 115% 0.5 sec Decel to stop Coast to stop Continue Running 10% 00.5 sec Decel to stop Coast to stop Continue Running 02.0 sec 01024 ppr FWD C.C.W FWD C.W 0001 0001 0001

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 1

115% 0.5 sec

X X

A A

X X

A A

10% 00.5 sec

X X

A A

X X

A A

02.0 sec 01024 ppr

0001 0001 0001

X X X

A A A

X X X

A X X

■ Using PG Interface . The standard terminal card (TER-001) has a built-in PG interface that can be used in the V/f + PG and SV control modes. The PG interface is A/B phase pulse input, compatible with open-collector or complementary encoder feedback. The maximum response frequency is 100KHz. The PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio can be set by G31-11. The divided PG pulse output is not synchronize with the motor. If the synchronous PG pulse dividing signal is necessary for some specific applications likes elevator. Please select the PG-O(open-collector type) or PG-L(line-driver type) option card according to the application. Refer to Chapter 10 for further details. ■ PG Feedback Set-Up (1). Overspeed Operation Setting (G31-01 to G31-03). . An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. . An overspeed (OS) fault is detected if the motor speed feedback exceeds the set value in G31-02 (Overspeed detection level) for more than the time set in G31-03 (Overspeed detection Delay time). . After detecting an overspeed (OS), the inverter stops according to the setting in G31-01. . Refer to Fig. 8.1.114 , PG Feedback Fault Detection Block Diagram. (2). PG Speed Deviation Setting (G31-04 to G31-06). . An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e. the difference between the set speed and the actual motor speed) exceeds the regulated limit. . A speed deviation (DEV) fault is detected after a frequency agree is detected (i.e. the output frequency is within the frequency reference ± frequency agree detection width, G19-03) if the speed deviation is greater than the set value in G31-05(deviation detection level) for more than the time set in G31-06(deviation detection delay time). . After detecting a speed deviation, the inverter stops according to the G31-0 setting. . Refer to Fig. 8.1.114 , PG Feedback Fault Detection Block Diagram. (3). PG Open Detection Setting (G31-07 to G31-08). . A PG open (PGO) fault is detected if the PG disconnection (open) exceeds the time set value in 8- 103

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual G31-08 (PG open detection time). . After a PG open is detected, the inverter stops according to the G31-07 setting . . Refer to Fig. 8.1.114, the PG Feedback Fault Detection Block Diagram.

Fig. 8.1.114 PG Feedback Fault Detection Block Diagram (4). Setting Number of PG Pulse (G31-09). . Sets the PG(pulse generator or encoder) pulses /revolution. . Set the number of phase-A or phase-B pulses per motor revolution by parameter G31-09. . If there is a gear reducer between the motor and the PG, set the gear ratio using parameters G31-12 and G31-13. (5). PG Rotation Direction (G31-10). . This parameter is used to set the PG rotation direction with the motor rotation direction. . Sets whether phase-A or phase-B leads when the motor operates in the forward direction. G31-10=0: Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command. ) G31-10=1: Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command. )

Fig. 8.1.115 The PG and Motor Rotation Direction Signals . The direction of motor is determined as follows: â&#x201D;&#x20AC; Forward: The motor shaft rotates in the C.C.W(counter-clockwise) direction with a inverter forward run command. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.115.

8- 104

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.115 Motor Rotation Direction ─ Reverse: The motor shaft rotates in the C.W (clockwise) direction with a inverter reverse Run command. . The phase leading for a typical PG is determined as follows ─ phase A leads when the PG rotates C.W(clockwise). As shown in the following Fig 8.1.116.

Fig. 8.1.116 PG Rotation Direction (6). PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio (G31-11). . Set the output ratio using G31-11 when the pulse output signal is connected to a pulse input device. . The set value in G31-11 is expressed as n for the first digit (0 or 1) and k for the second three digits (001 to 320). The output ratio is calculated from n and k with the following equation： ─ G31-11 = □ □□ , setting ranges n : 0 to 1 n k k : 01 to 32 ─ Output Ratio = (1+n)/k ─ The possible output ratio settings are as follows : 1/32 - 1 e.g. G31-11=001 → n=0, k=1, ratio = (1+0)/1=1 G31-11=032 → n=0, k=32, ratio = (1+0)/32=1/32 ①. G31-11=132 → n=1, k=32, ratio = (1+1)/32=1/16 ②. . Set the PG output ratio (G31-11) to insure the PG pulse output from terminal PO1 or PO2 is less than 300KHz. (i.e. PG input pulse × PG pulse output ratio ≤ 300KHz). PG-O/PG-L card can output ratio using G31-11 when the pulse output signal, need both A/B phase signal input. Cont. (7). Setting the Number of Gear Teeth PG and Motor (G31-12 , G31-13). . In V/f + PG control mode, the motor can be operated even if there is gearing between the motor and PG. (The speed response of V/f + PG mode is less than SV mode). . Set the number of teeth if there are gears between the motor and PG as follows: ─ Set the no. of gear teeth on load side(PG side) using G31-13 (number of PG gear teeth 2). ─ Set the no. of gear teeth on motor side using G31-12 (number of PG gear teeth 1). ─ The motor speed will be calculated within the inverter using the following equation:

8- 105

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.32 Group 32 ─ Torque Control Function ■

Torque Control Setting (G32-01 to G32-05) Parameter Description No.

G32-01 G32-02 G32-03 G32-04 G32-05

LCD Display

Setting Range

0: Speed Control mode Tq Control Sel 1: Torque Control mode Tref Fitter Time 0000 to 1000 ms 0 : Analog input Speed Limit Sel 1 : G32-04 Speed Limit -120% to 120% Value Speed Limit 000 to 120% Bias

LCD Display Speed Control

Control Method Factory V/F Setting V/F SLV SV + PG 0

0000 ms

000%

Torque Control 0000 ms Analog Input G32-04

(1). Torque Control Selection (G32-01). . In the SV control mode, it is possible to switch between speed and torque control using either of The following: ①. Using the Multi-function Digital Input terminals by setting one of the G10-01 to G10-08 parameters to 39, (speed / torque control change). The speed control is performed when the terminal input is off, and torque control is performed when the terminal input is on. ②. Set G32-01 to select speed or torque control. G32-01=0: Speed control (Controlled by G30-01 to G30-10), ASR settings. =1: Torque control (Controlled by G32-02 to G32-05), torque control settings. . Refer to chapter G8.1.30 for more details regarding speed control structure. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.117 for the torque control structure.

Fig. 8.1.117 Torque Control Block Diagram (2). Torque Reference Setting(G32-02). (a) Torque Reference Command (Tref) Input (AI2：G12-04, G12-05, AI3：G12-08, G12-09). . The torque reference (Tref) cannot be set with Digital Operator. . The torque reference (Tref) can be adjusted according to the Multi-function Analog Inputs (AI2 or AI3) by setting G12-05 (AI2 function selection) or G12-09 (AI3 function selection) to 17 (torque reference) or 18 (torque compensation). . Refer to the following Table 8.1.16 for the torque reference input methods.

8- 106

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 8.1.16 Torque Reference Input Methods Using Analog Input AI2 or AI3 Input Input Terminal Related Parameter Contents Method Setting AI2 G12-04=0 Terminal AI2 signal level: 0 - 10V Voltage (SW1-2=” V ”) G12-05=17 AI2 used as torque reference input Input G12-08=0 Terminal AI3 signal level: 0 - 10V AI3 (0 -10V) (SW1-3=” V ”) G12-09=17 AI3 used as torque reference input AI2 G12-04=2 Terminal AI2 signal level: 4 - 20mA Current (SW1-2=” I ”) G12-05=17 AI2 used as torque reference input Input G12-08=2 Terminal AI3 signal level: 4 - 20mA AI3 (4 - 20mA) (SW1-3=” I ”) G12-09=17 AI3 used as torque reference input . The direction of the motor torque output is determined by the sign(or polarity) of the analog input signal (AI2 or AI3). It is not determined by the direction of the run command .i.e. : ①. Torque reference (Tref) = Positive voltage (or current). Forward torque reference (counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis). ②. Torque reference (Tref) = Negative voltage. Reverse torque reference (clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis). ─ Since the polarity of analog input determines the direction, only a forward torque reference can be input when the signal level of terminal AI2 or AI3 is selected as 0 - 10V(setting value=0) or 4 - 20mA(setting value=2). ─ To apply a reverse torque reference, use a signal level of –10V to 10V or switch the polarity using a Multi-function Digital Input by setting one of the G10-01 – G10-08 parameters to 40 (Polarity reversing command for external torque reference). (b) Torque Reference Filter Primary Delay Time (G32-02). . This time constant is used to eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the response. . Increase the setting if instability occurs during control. (3). Speed Limit Input Setting (G32-03 and G32-04). . If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control, the motor will accelerate in either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used to keep the motor speed from exceeding the specified limit. . There are two ways to set the speed limit; a parameter setting or an analog input value. Refer to The following Table 8.1.17 for the speed limit input methods.

Input Method

Voltage Input (-10V - 10V) 1

Table 8.1.17 Speed Limit Input Methods Related Input Terminal Parameter Contents Setting G32-03=0 The speed limit is set from analog input (AI1 or AI2) frequency reference input from terminal G02-01=1 The AI1 (AI1 or AI2 based or G12-05 setting) G12-01=1 Terminal AI1 signal level : -10V - 10V (Set G12-01=0 if the speed limit is always to be positive) G32-03=0 The speed limit is set from analog input (AI1 or AI2) G02-01=1 The frequency reference input from terminal (AI1 or AI2 based on G12-05 setting) AI2 (SW1-2=” V ”) G12-04=1 Terminal AI2 signal level : -10V - 10V (Set G12-04=0 if the speed limit is always to be positive)

G12-05=12 The value of AI2 will be added to terminal AI1 to determine the speed limit. G32-03=0 The speed limit is set from analog input (AI1 or AI2) G02-01=1 The frequency reference input from terminal Current Input AI2 (AI1 or AI2 based on G12-05 setting) (4 - 20mA) (SW1-2=” I ”) G12-04=2 Terminal AI2 signal level : 4 - 20mA value of AI2 will be added to terminal AI1 to G12-05=12 The determine the speed limit G32-03=1 The speed limit is set by parameter G32-04 2 Parameter G32-04 ─ Setting G32-04 + Cont.

8- 107

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ─ The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal: 1. Positive voltage applied: Forward rotation; speed is limited in the forward direction (G32-04 + G32-05). Reverse rotation; speed is limited in zero or reverse direction (-G32-05). 2. Negative voltage applied: Reverse rotation; speed is limited in the reverse direction (-G32-04 - G32-05). Forward rotation; speed is limited in zero or forward direction (G32-05). ─ The speed limit value is zero for a motor rotation opposite to the speed limit direction. e.g. When a + voltage is input and the forward run command is on, the effective range of the torque control is from zero to the speed limit value in the forward direction (If the speed limit bias is set to 0). (4). Speed Limit Bias Setting (G32-05). . The speed limit bias (G32-05) is used to adjust the margin for the speed limit. . The speed limit bias (G32-05) can be set to limit both the forward and reverse motor speed to the same value. . Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency(G06-03). Example 1- Set 30% forward and reverse speed limits.

Fig. 8.1.118 Speed Limit Setting (Example 1)

Example 2- Set : 1 speed limit value (G32-04)=100% (forward speed limit) 2 speed limit bias (G32-05)=20% . The speed range of the torque control is from –20% (set by G32-05) to 120% (the setting value of G32-04 + 32-05). Output torque Torque Limit

G32- 05 Torque reference (Tref)

-100%

-20%

100% 120% effective range of torque control Speed limit (G32- 04) setting

Motor speed Torque Limit ‧When the speed exceeds the forward speed limit(120%), the torque is increased in the negative direction and is limited by the regenerative torque limit in the 4th guadrant.

‧When the speed exceeds the reverse speed limit(- 20%), the torque is increased in the positive direction and is limited by the regenerative torque limit in the 2nd guadrant.

Fig. 8.1.119 Speed Limit Setting (Example 2) 8- 108

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

(5). Torque Limit and Speed Limit Operation Examples. . Examples of torque limit and speed limit using winding and unwinding operations. (a) Winding Operation . The line speed(N) and motor torque(T) are generated by the motor are in the same direction. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.120.

N Line direction

Output torque (T) Torque Limit Tref G32- 05

G32- 05 Motor speed (N)

Speed Limit Setting

Torque Limit k

Fig. 8.1.120 Winding Operation 1 : G32-05 (speed limit bias) < motor speed (N) < (speed limit setting + G32-05) → The torque will be controlled according to Tref. 2 : Motor speed (N) > speed limit setting + G32-05 → The speed limiter will output a negative torque reference to prevent the motor speed from increasing. 3 : Motor speed (N) < -G32-05 → The speed limiter will output a positive Tref to prevent the speed from increasing in reverse. (b) Unwinding Operation . The line speed (N) and motor torque (T) are in opposite directions.

Fig. 8.1.121 Unwinding Operation

Cont.

8- 109

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . The relationships between the Tref(torque reference), NLmt(Speed Limit) and N(motor speed) for winding / unwinding operation is shown below. Operations

Winding Operation

Unwinding Operation

T-N curve

Rotation Direction Tref (Torque Reference) NLmt (Speed Limit)

Forward

Reverse

Forward

Reverse

−

Configuration

Fig. 8.1.122 Winding and Unwinding Operation

(6). Setting the Torque Compensation (AI2: G12-04 and G12-05; AI3: G12-08 and G12-09) . The torque compensation (Tcomp in Fig 8.116 ) is added to the torque reference to compensate for the amount of torque loss from the mechanical loss or other load factors. . Set Multi-function Analog Input AI2 or AI3 as a torque compensation input terminal by setting G12-05=18 or G12-09=18. . Set the proper signal level for the required torque compensation. The direction of the torque compensation is determined by the sign (or polarity) of the input and is not determined by the direction of the run command. i.e. 1 Tcomp = + Voltage (or current): Forward torque compensation (Counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis). 2 Tcomp =－Voltage (or current): Reverse torque compensation (Clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis) ─ Since the polarity of analog input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be input when the signal level of terminal AI2 or AI3 is selected as 0 - 10V (G12-04 or G12-08=0) or 4 - 20mA (G12-04 or G12-08=2). To input reverse torque compensation (Tcomp), be sure to select the –10V - 10V signal level (G12-04 or G12-08=1).

NOTES-:

8- 110

8.1.33 Group 33 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Torque Detection and Limitation â&#x2013; Torque Detection (G33-01 to G33-06) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SL SV V PG

---0B: Tq Det1 Disable Disable ---1B: Tq Det1 Enabled Enabled --0-B: Over Tq. Detect Over Tq. Detect 0000B A A A A Under Tq. Detect G33-01 Tq Det1 Sel --1-B: Under Tq. Detect -0--B: During Agree During Agree -1--B: During Running During Running 0---B: Warn. @ Detect Warn. @ Detect 1---B: Fault @ Detect Fault @ Detect G33-02 Tq Det1 Level 000 to 300% 150% 150% A A A A G33-03 Tq Det1 Time 00.0 to 10.0 sec 00.1 sec 00.1 sec A A A A ---0B: Tq Det2 Disable Disable ---1B: Tq Det2 Enabled Enabled --0-B: Over Tq. Detect Over Tq. Detect --1-B: Under Tq. Detect Under Tq. Detect G33-04 Tq Det2 Sel 0000B A A A A -0--B: During Agree During Agree -1--B: During Running During Running 0---B: Warn. @ Detect Warn. @ Detect 1---B: Fault @ Detect Fault @ Detect G33-05 Tq Det2 Level 000 to 300% 150% 150% A A A A G33-06 Tq Det2 Time 00.0 to 10.0 sec 00.1 sec 00.1 sec A A A A . The over-torque detection function detects excessive mechanical load from an increase in the inverter output current or motor output torque. The under-torque detection function detects a sudden decrease of the mechanical load (e.g. broken belt) from a decrease in the inverter output current or motor output torque. . The settings in the torque detection parameters (G33-01 and G33-04) determine whether over-torque / under-torque conditions will be detected and the kind of processing that will be performed. . The over-torque / under-torque detection level settings depend on the control method. (1) Inverter output current for V/f control or V/f+PG control mode, 100% of inverter rated output current. (2) Motor output torque for vector control SLV or SV control mode, 100% rated torque. . The over-torque / under-torque detection signal can be output to Multi-function Digital Output terminals (R1A-R1C, R2A-R2C, R3A-R3C and R4A-R4C) by setting one of the parameters G11-01 to G11-04 (Multi-function Digital Output terminals function selection) to 11, 12, 13 or 14. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.123 for the related parameters.

Fig. 8.1.123 Over-torque / Under-torque Detection Signal Using Multi-function Digital Output 8- 111

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Cont. . The relationship between LCD indications and the set values in G33-01 and G33-04 is shown in the following Table 8.1.18. Table 8.1.18 Over-torque / Under-torque Detection G33-01 or G33-04 Setting ---0B

LCD Display Over-torque / Over-torque / under-torque under-torque Detection 1 Detection 2 (G33-02 , 03) (G33-05 , 06) ─ ─

0001B OT1 (blinking) Overtorque Det1

OT2 (blinking) Overtorque Det2

1001B OT1 (lit) Overtorque Det1

OT2 (lit) Overtorque Det2

(blinking) 0101B OT1 Overtorque Det1

OT2 (blinking) Overtorque Det2

1101B OT1 (lit) Overtorque Det1

OT2 (lit) Overtorque Det2

0011B UT1 (blinking) Overtorque Det1

UT2 (blinking) Undertorque Det2

(lit) 1011B UT1 Overtorque Det1

UT2 (lit) Undertorque Det2

0111B UT1 (blinking) Overtorque Det1

UT2 (blinking) Undertorque Det2

1111B UT1 (lit) Overtorque Det1

UT2 (lit) Undertorque Det2

Function disabled ─ Over-torque detection Operation only during frequency continues after agree over-torque Over-torque detection Inverter only during frequency baseblock after agree over-torque Over-torque detection is Operation always active (accel/decel continues after included) over-torque Over-torque detection is Inverter always active (accel/decel baseblock after included) over-torque Under-torque detection Operation only during frequency continues after agree over-torque Under-torque detection Inverter only during frequency baseblock after agree over-torque Under-torque detection is Operation always active (accel/decel continues after included) over-torque Over-torque detection is Inverter always active (accel / baseblock after decel included) over-torque

Status ─ Warning (minor fault) Protected Fault Warning (minor fault) Protected Fault Warning (minor fault) Protected Fault Warning (minor fault) Protected Fault

. Over-torque detection setting example:

Fig. 8.1.124 Over-torque Detection Operation

Cont.

8- 112

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . Under-torque detection setting example: Inverter output current ( or motor output torque ) 10% hystersis width

detect level 1(G33- 02) or detect level 2(G33- 05)

t Undertorque detection signal t G33 - 03 or G33 - 06

G33 - 03 or G33 - 06

Fig. 8.1.125 Under-torque Detection Operation â&#x2013; Torque Limit Setting (G33-07 to G33-10) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG X X A A X X A A

G33-07 Positive Tq Limit 000 to 300% 200% 200% G33-08 Negative Tq Limit 000 to 300% 200% 200% G33-09 FWD Regen Tq 000 to 300% 200% 200% X X A A Limit G33-10 REV Regen Tq 000 to 300% 200% 200% X X A A Limit . Setting the torque limit function limits the torque applied to the load, or limits regeneration value. . When the torque limit function is used, the torque control has priority and the motor speed control command and compensation will be disregarded hence, the accel / decel times may be lengthened and motor speed reduced. . There are two ways to apply torque limit: 1 Setting torque limits using parameters (G33-07 to G33-10). 2 Setting torque limits value using an Multi-function Analog Input (AI2 or AI3). (1). Setting the Torque Limit Using Parameters (G33-07 to G33-10) . There are four torque limits that can be set separately: positive drive, negative drive, forward regeneration and reverse regeneration. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.126 below. Output Torque (T)

G33-10 G33-07 I: Positive torque II: Reverse generating III: Negative drive IV: Forward generating

Positive torque

I Motor Speed

III

Negative torque G33-08 G33-09 Reverse Forward direction direction

Fig. 8.1.126 Torque Limit Settings Cont. 8- 113

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

(2). Setting the Torque Limit Using Multi-function Analog Inputs (G12-05 or G12-09) . The Multi-function Analog Inputs (AI2 and AI3) can be used to limit torque. Use either or both of these inputs a needed by setting parameter G12-05 (AI2 function selection) and G12-09 (AI3 function selection). Refer to the following Table 8.1.19 for the settings related to the torque limit function. Table 8.1.19 Torque Limit Using Analog Input G12-05 (AI2) or Function G12-09 (AI3) setting 13 Positive Torque Limit 14 Negative Torque Limit 15 Regeneration Torque Limit (both the forward and reverse). Positive / Negative Side Torque Limit (Limit torque in both 16 the forward and reverse direction).

. Set the analog input terminal’s (AI2 or AI3) signal level (G12-04 or G12-08) , Gain (G12-06 or G12-10) and bias (G12-07 or G12-11) to match the actual input signal. The analog input terminal signal level is factory set as follows: 1AI2 = 0 to 10V (A 10V input limits the torque to 100% of the motor rated torque). 2AI3 = 4 to 20mA (A 20mA input limits the torque to 100% of the motor rated torque). . The following Fig 8.1.127 shows the relationship between the output torque and each torque limit.

Fig. 8.1.127 Torque Limit by Analog Input (AI2 or AI3) ─ When the positive torque limit has been set (setting value = 13), the analog input signal acts as the limit value for positive torque. The positive torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the positive direction even if the motor is operated in the reverse direction (i.e. regenerative torque in 2nd quadrant). ─ When the negative torque limit has been set (setting value = 14), the analog input signal acts as the limit value for negative torque. The negative torque limit input is effective when torque is generated in the negative direction even if the motor is operated in the forward direction (i.e. regenerative torque in 4th quadrant). ─ When the regenerative torque limit has been set (setting value = 15), the analog input signal acts as the limit value for the forward (4th quadrant) or reverse (2nd quadrant) regeneration region. ─ When the positive / negative side torque limit has been set (setting value = 16), the analog input signal acts as the limit value for positive or negative. ─ The torque limit is 100% of the motor rated torque when the analog input is at its maximum value (10V or 20mA). To increase the torque limit above 100%, set the input terminal’s gain (G12-06 for AI2, and G12-10 for AI3) above 100%. e.g. a gain of 200.0% would result in a torque limit of 200% of the motor rated torque with a 10V or (20mA) analog input. 8- 114

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.34 Group 34 ─ Reserved 8.1.35 Group 35 ─ Reserved 8.1.36 Group 36 – Power Loss Ride Through and Speed Search ■

Power Loss Ride Through (G36-01 to G36-03) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display

0：Disabled G36-01 Power Loss Sel 1：Enabled 1 2：Enabled 2

Disabled Enabled 1 Enabled 2

G36-02 Ride-Thru Time 0.0 to 2.0 sec

01.0sec

G36-03 Min B.B. Time 0.1 to 5.0 sec

0.1 sec

Factory Setting 0 Varies by KVA Varies by KVA

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG A

. Even if a temporary power loss occurs, the inverter can be restarted automatically after power is restored to continue motor operation by setting G36-01 to 1 or 2. 1 G36-01 = 0: When the momentary power loss exceeds 15ms during operation , a “UV” fault (main-circuit Under-voltage) will be detected. 2 G36-01 = 1: When power is restored within the time set in G36-02 (Momentary power loss ride-thru time), the inverter will restart. If the time set in G36-02 has expired ,a “UV” fault (main-circuit under-voltage) will be detected. 3 G36-01 = 2: When the main power supply is restored before the control power (i.e. the power supply to the control board), the inverter will restart, and “UV” fault (main - circuit under-voltage) will not be detected. . To continue inverter operation after power has been restored (G36-01 = 1 or 2 ), the run command must be Maintained throughout the ride-thru period. . Fault contact output signals are not output during momentary power loss. . Upon detecting momentary power loss, the inverter shuts off output and maintains the baseblock state for a given period of time. Set a time in G36-03 when the residual voltage is expected to be almost zero. . When momentary power loss time is longer than the minimum baseblock time(G36-03), speed search operation is Started immediately after power recovery. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.129.

Fig. 8.1.129 Minimum B.B Time and Momentary Power Loss Time . The minimum baseblock time (G36-03) is also used with the speed search and DC injection braking functions. 1 Set the required minimum baseblock time (G36-03) in order for the residual voltage to dissipate. 2 Increase the setting if an over-current “OC” trip occurs when the speed search or DC injection braking function starts. 3 This setting is activated for speed search performed after a momentary power loss and normal speed search.

8- 115

■ Speed Search Setting (G36-04 to G36-09) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SL SV PG V

G36-04 Dir Srch

0 to 100%

Dir Srch Current

50%

G36-05 Spd Srch

0 to 100%

Spd Srch Current

20%

0.1 to 10.0 sec

Spd Srch I Time

2.0 sec

G36-07 Spd Search 0.0 to 20.0 sec Delay

00.2 sec

G36-08 Volt 0.0 to 5.0 sec Recovery T

Volt Recovery T

2.0 sec

G36-09 Bidir Srch Sel 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Bidir Srch Sel

Current

Current Srch I G36-06 Spd Time

. The speed search function is used to find the actual speed of a coasting motor, and smoothly start up from the detected speed. It is effective in situations such as switching from a commercial power supply, power loss ride-through and fault restart. . If speed search during startup is selected in the V/f +PG or SV control mode (control methods with PG ), the inverter will start from the frequency detected by the PG. The speed is estimated every time from start when a run command is input. Therefore, starting is enabled even if the motor idles or runs in the reverse direction when the power supply is turned on. . Set either of the external speed search commands 1 or 2 by one of the Multi-function Digital Input terminals. The external speed search command 1 (set value = 26) and 2 (set value = 27) cannot be set at the same time otherwise , a “SE02”, (DI Terminal Error) warning may occur. . If performing speed search using external speed search commands, add an external sequence to make sure that the Run command must be performed after or at the same time with the speed search command. A typical operation sequence is shown in the following Fig. 8.1.130.

Fig. 8.1.130 Speed Search and Run Command . Speed search cannot be used for multi-motor drives, motors with two or more frames smaller than the inverter capacity or high-speed motor. . When using V/f mode, always perform stationary autotuning. . When using SLV control mode, always perform rotational autotuning, If the cable length between the motor and inverter is changed after autotuning, perform stationary autotuning for motor line- to-line resistance R1 again. . Speed search uses current detection method. G36-09 defines whether to detect direction. When 1 G36-09=1, bidirection search is enabled: . At first, the current controller sends a step current set by G36-04 to detect direction. When the direction is determined, the current controller sends a speed search current set by G36-05 and search motor speed from the frequency when the temporary power loss was detected (external speed search command 1, by setting one of G10-01 to G10-08 = 26 ), or from the highest frequency (external speed search command 2, by setting one of G10-01 to G10-08 = 27). Refer to Fig. 8-130 for Bidirection Speed Search. 2 G36-09=0, bidirection search is disabled: . The current controller bypasses direction search and sends speed search current in the speed command direction to search motor speed. Make sure the speed of a coasting motor is the same with the speed command. 8- 116

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . When Speed Search doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t complete normally(For example, motor speed is too slow to be deteced), a Speed Search Time Out alarm will appear. If this situation apears frequently, please set G16-04 to use DC brake function to stop motor and then restart. (1). Direction Search Operating Current (G36-04) . Only used for bidetection speed search(when G36-09 = 1) . Set the direction detect current level. . Increase this value if direction search failed in low speed(above 5Hz) coasting. Note that larger value could cause slightly DC brake effect. (2). Speed Search Operating Current (G36-05) . Used for both bidirection(G36-09=1) or single(G36-09=0) direction speed search method. . Set the speed search current level. . Set this value below Exicitation Current(G07-06) which is equal to No-Load current. If No-Load current is unknown, 20% would be a good start. Too big speed search current will cause inverter output saturation and over magnetizing when speed is matched. . If an overcurrent (OC) trip is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen the minimum baseblock time (G36-03). . (3). Speed Search Integral Time (G36-06) . Used for both bidirection(G36-09=1) or single(G36-09=0) direction speed search method. . Set the output frequency integral time during the speed search. . Increase this value for slower search if OV occures. Decrease this value for quicker search if quick start is needed. (4). Speed Search Delay Time (G36-07) . If the inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operating delay time inG36-07 (speed search delay time). . The factory setting is 0.2 sec, after waiting for speed search delay time, the inverter starts thespeed search operations. Set G36-07 = 0.0 sec when the contact is not need. (5). Voltage Recovery Time (G36-08). . Set the time allowed for the normal voltage to be restored after completion of the speed search. . This is the time for voltage to be restored from 0 to 230Vac for 230V class inverter(0 to 460Vac for 460V class inverter) (6). Bidirection Speed Search Selection (G36-09) . =1 enable bidirection speed search. =0 disable bidirection speed search. . When bidirection speed search is disabled, speed search direction depends on speed command.

8- 117

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2013; Current Detection Method Speed Search (a) Speed Search at startup

Fig. 8.1.131 Speed Search at Startup (Bidirection Search) (b) Speed Search During Momentary Power Loss Recovery.

Fig. 8.1.132 Speed Search during Momentary Power Loss . When minimum baseblock time (G36-03) is longer than momentary power loss, the speed search operation is started after minimum baseblock time (G36-03). . When minimum baseblock time (G36-03) is shorter than momentary power loss, the speed search operation is started immediately after power recovery. 8- 118

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.1.37 Group 37 - Hardware Protection ■ Hardware Protection Setting (G37-01 to G37-14) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

Factory Setting

LCD Display

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

0: Disabled 1: Enabled G37-02 OPL Selection 0: Disabled 1: Enabled G37-03 GF Selection 0: Disabled 1: Enabled OH Pre-Alarm G37-04 Sel 70 to 120°C 0: Decel to stop Pre-Alarm 1: Coast to stop G37-05 OH Sel 2: Continue Running

70℃

G37-06 Fan ON/OFF Sel

Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled OH Pre-Alarm Lvl Decel to stop Coast to stop Continue Running 3: Disabled Disabled Fan ON @ 0: ON for inverter is running Running 1: ON for inverter power ON Fan always ON 2: ON for high temperature Fan ON @ High Temp

000 to 600 sec

060sec

─ ─ 230V: 150-210V ; 460V: 300-420V 0: Decel to stop 1: Coast to stop

Reserved Reserved

0 0 190V(230V) 380V(460V)

X X

G37-01 IPL Selection

Delay G37-07 Fan Time G37-08 Reserved G37-09 Reserved

G37-10 UV Det Level G37-11 Ext Fault Sel G37-12 Ext Fault Det G37-13 Reserved G37-14 Brk IGBT Sel

2: Continue Running 0: Always Detect 1: Detection only during operation ─ 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

UV Det Lvl Decel to stop Coast to stop Continue Running Always Det Operation Det Reserved Disabled Enabled

(1). Input Phase Loss Protection Selection (G37-01). . Adjust G37-01 to enable or disable the output phase loss function. G37-01 =0: disable input phase loss function. = 1: enable input phase loss function. . If the input phase loss function is enabled and the input phase loss is detected, the Digital operator will display “IPL input Phase Loss” fault message, the fault contact output will operate and the inverter will coast to stop. . The input phase loss is ineffective if the output current is below 30% of inverter rated current. (2). Output Phase Loss Protection Selection (G37-02). . Adjust G37-02 to enable or disable the output phase loss function. G37-02 =0: disable output phase loss function. = 1: enable output phase loss function. . If the output phase loss function is enabled and the output phase loss is detected, the Digital operator will display “OPL Output Phase Loss” fault message, the fault contact output will operate and the inverter will coast to stop. . The output phase loss is ineffective if the output current is below 10% of inverter rated current.

8- 119

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (3). Ground Fault Protection Selection (G37-03). . Adjust G37-03 to enable or disable the ground fault function. G37-03 =0: disable ground fault function. = 1: enable ground fault function. . If the inverter output leakage current has exceeded approx. 50% of the inverter rated current and the ground fault function is enabled (G37-03), the Digital operator will display “GF Ground Fault” fault message, the fault contact output will operate and the inverter will coast to stop. (4). Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm Level (G37-04). (5). Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection (G37-05). . Perform inverter overheat pre-alarm protection. (1).When G37-05=0 or 1 (stop operation when pre-overheat occurred), and the heat sink temperature exceeds the OH pre-alarm level (G37-04), the Digital Operator will display “OH HS Pre-Overheat” fault message, and the fault contact output will operate. (2).When G37-05=2 (continue operation when pre-overheat occurred), and the heat sink temperature exceeds the OH pre-alarm level (G37-04), the Digital Operator will display “OH HS Pre-Overheat (blinking)” alarm message, and the fault contact output will not operate. (3).The pre-overheat function is disabled When G08-02=3 (pre-overheat disabled). (6). Cooling Fan Operation Selection (G37-06). (7). Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time (G37-07) . Control the operation of cooling fan, which is located beside the heat sink. (1).When G37-06=0 (Fan ON for running) and the inverter is running, the cooling fan will turn ON. If the inverter is not running and stop time exceeds cooling fan operation delay time (G37-07), the cooling fan will turn OFF. (2). When G37-06=1 (Fan ON always), the cooling fan will turn ON after powering up. (3). When G37-06=2 (Fan ON for high temperature), the inverter is running and the heat sink temperature exceeds the internal detection level, the cooling fan will turn ON. If the heat sink cools down and thr time exceeds cooling fan operation delay time (G37-07), the cooling fan will turn OFF. (8) . Reserved (G37-08) (9). Reserved (G37-09). (10). Under-voltage Detection Level (G37-10). . Adjust G37-10 in the range between 150 to 210 Vdc (for 230 V class) or 300 to 420 Vdc (for 460V class). The under-voltage error “UV” is not detected until the voltage is lower than the set value of G37-10 by AC conversion (G37-10 set value / 1.414 becomes the under-voltage detected value for AC conversion), and the operation is continued. . Setting precautions : ①. Since inverter output voltage is limited by input voltage, the motor may stall if the load is excessive or at voltage reduction. ②. The motor trips when input voltage less than the set value G37-10 at momentary power loss; automatic operation is not continued at recovery. (11). External Fault Operation Selection (G37-11). (12). External Fault Detection Selection (G37-12). (13).Reserved (G37-13). (14).Braking Transistor ON/ OFF Selection (G37-14).

8- 120

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.38 Group 38 ─ Communication Parameter ■ Communication Parameters Setting (G38-01 to G38-07) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G38-01 INV Addr

Setting Range 1 to 31

LCD Display

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG

INV Addr

0: 1200 bps 1200 bps 1: 2400 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps G38-02 Baud Rate 2: 4800 bps 3 A A A A 3: 9600 bps 9600 bps 4: 19200 bps 19200 bps 5: 38400 bps 38400 bps 0: MODBUS-RTU,8,N,2 MODBUS-RTU,8,N,2 1: MODBUS-RTU,8,N,1 MODBUS-RTU,8,N,1 Comm. 0 A A A A G38-03 MODBUS-RTU,8,E,1 Parameter 2: MODBUS-RTU,8,E,1 3: MODBUS-RTU,8,O,1 MODBUS-RTU,8,O,1 0: Deceleration to stop(G03-02) Decel to Stop Coast to Stop G38-04 Fault Stop 1: Coast to stop 3 A A A A Sel 2: Emergency to stop(G03-10) Emergency Stop 3: Continue to running Continue Running 0: Disabled Disabled Fault G38-05 1 A A A A Detect 1: Enabled Enabled G38-06 Wait Time 05 to 65 ms 05 ms 05 ms A A A A Disabled G38-07 USB Used 0: USB Disabled 0 A A A A 1: USB Enabled Enabled . The Inverter has built-in Modbus (RS-422/485) Communication Ports R(+),R(-), and S(+),S(-) for monitoring inverter status, reading and setting parameters. . Modbus communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in G02-01 (Frequency reference selection) and G02-02 (Run command selection). ─ Monitoring operational status from the master controller (PLC). ─ Setting and reading parameters. ─ Resetting errors. ─ Inputting Multi-function commands. . The Modbus (RS-422/485) Communication specifications are as follows. Item Interface Communication cycle Communication parameters Communication protocol Number of inverters

Specifications RS-422/485 Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) Baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bps selectable. Data length: 8 bits fixed. Parity: none, even or odd selectable. Stop bit: 1 bit fixed. Modbus (RTU mode only). 31 units max.

. Procedure for communicating with the master controller (1) Turn off the power supply, and connect the communication cable between the master controller and the Inverter. (2) Turn on the power supply. (3) Set the required communication parameters (G38-01 to G38-07) using the Digital Operator. (4) Turn off the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared. (5) Turn ON the power supply once again. (6) Perform communications with the master controller. . Modbus (RS-422/485) Communication Configuration. (1) Modbus communications are configured using 1 master controller (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communication between the master and slave are normally initiated by the master, 8- 121

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual and the slave responds. (2) Refer to Fig. 8.1.133 below for Modbus wiring. A Master controller with an RS-485 interface can communicate with the Inverter through an RS-485 interface connection directly. If the Master controller does not provide an RS-485 port but an RS-232 port is available, an RS-485 / RS-232 conversion card should be used to connect between the Master controller and the Inverter unit. M1 220Ω

S(+) S(-)

+ _

Tx Rx Data (+) Data (-) Rx Tx

S(+) S(-)

RS485 Controller

RS485 Controller or PC Programming Software

RS485 / RS232 Converter

M31 S(+) S(-) 220Ω

Fig. 8.1.133 Wiring for MODBUS Protocol Communication (3) A Modbus Master can control up to 31 inverters, using Modbus communication standards. The last Inverter on the network, as seen from the Master controller, needs to have the a terminating resistor in place by turning on the dip switch SW1-1 (ON) on the control board. SW1 on all other inverters on the network should be (OFF). . Parameter definition is as follows: (1) Inverter Station Address (G38-01). . Inverter station address, setting range 1-31. (2) RS-485 Communication baud rate set (G38-02). . G38-02 = 0: 1200 bps (bit/second) = 1: 2400 bps = 2: 4800 bps = 3: 9600 bps = 4: 19200 bps = 5: 38400 bps (3) RS-485 communication parity selection (G38-03). . G38-03 = 0: MODBUS,RTU,8,N,2 (8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits) = 1: MODBUS,RTU,8,N,1 (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bits) = 2: MODBUS,RTU,8,E,1 (8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bits) = 3: MODBUS,RTU,8,O,1 (8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bits) (4) RS-485 communication Fault stop selection (G38-04). . G38-04 = 0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in G03-02 (Tdec1) = 1: Coast to stop = 2: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in G03-10 (Emergency stop time) = 3: Continue to run (alarm only and will stop if the stop key is pressed) (5) RS-485 communication Fault Detection (G38-05). . G38-05 = 0: Disabled (A communication loss will not cause a communication error) = 1: Enabled (If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds, a “CE comm Err” fault message will occur) 8- 122

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual (6) Inverter Transmit Wait Time (G38-06). . Sets the delay time from when the Inverter receives a command message to when the Inverter starts to sends the response message. (Refer to Fig. 8.135). Converting from RS-232C to RS-485 additional time is needed to change into the receiving state after sending a command message by setting a time in G38-05. If the response message is sent before the master is changed, the master cannot receive the message. Inverter to Master

Master to Inverter Command Message

Response Message t

G38-06 setting 24 bits long

Fig. 8.1.134 Message Spacing (7) USB Selection (G38-07). . G38-07 = 0: USB Disabled (Communication goes through RS-422/RS-485 port) = 1: USB Enabled (Communication goes through USB port) 8.1.39 Group 39 ─Reserved 8.1.40 Group 40 ─Reserved 8.1.41 Group 41 ─ KEB Function ■ KEB Function Setting (G41-01 to G41-02) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

G41-01 KEB Dec. Time

Setting Range

LCD Display

0.0 to 25.5 sec

Factory Setting

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG Q Q Q Q

KEB Dec. Time 00:00 220V： 220V：190 - 210V KEB Det Lvl 200V G41-02 KEB Det Lvl A A A A 440V：380 - 420V 440V： 400V . In order to prevent the drive from tripping at low voltage because of a momentary power loss or power failure during operation or the motor from coasting for a long time period, the drive detects a momentary power loss or power failure immediately when it occurs, and continues control using the regenerative energy from the motor or decelerates to a stop. (1). KEB Deceleration Time (G41-01). . KEB Function is disabled if G41-01 is set to 0.0. . Set G41-01 from 0.0 to 25.5 for KEB deceleration time. (2). KEB Detect Level (G41-02). . If G41-01 is not sets to 0.0, the KEB function will be active when the DC bus voltage is lower than the value of G41-02. When main circuit DC bus voltage becomes less than the KEB detection voltage in the value of G41-02. KEB function will start to decelerate according G41-01. Until the DC bus voltage is higher than G41-02 + 10V (200V series +10V，400V series +20V) and the DI of KEB re-acceleration command active(Sets G10-01 to G10-12). The drive will re-accelerate to the original frequency. Refer to the example in the following Fig. 8.1.137.

8- 123

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual DC Bus 10V for 200V series 20V for 400V series

KEB Detection Level

Re-acceleration

Output Frequency KEB operation Run Command KEB Re-acceleration Command

Fig. 8.1.137 KEB Operation 8.1.42 Group 42 ─ RTC Timer Function ■ Real-Time Clock (RTC) Setting (G42-01 to G42-03) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

G42-01 RTC Set Time G42-02 RTC Set Date

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG A A A A

00:00 to 23:59 RTC Set Time 00:00 00:00:00 to RTC Set Date 00:00:00 A A A A 31:12:25 0 : Hide Clock Hide G42-03 RTC Sel 0 A A A A 1 : Show Clock Show . In order to use the real-time clock (RTC) features of the inverter, the internal clock must be set first. . The hour and minute are set in G42-01, and the day, month and year are set in G42-02. The date Information (G42-02) is used to determine the day of the week and is visible in fault information logs (U2-26, 27 and U2-48, 49). . In order for the RTC to function, the LCD digital operator must be connected to the inverter. When removing the LCD digital operator for parameter copy purposes does not affect the RTC. To hide / show the clock on the LCD digital operator use G42-03. . The real-time clock is displayed at upper middle of LCD Display when G42-03 is set to 1. Refer to the example in following Fig. 8.1.138.

Fig. 8.1.138 RTC Display (Example) . To monitor the current RTC time use U1-64, and the current RTC date use U1-65. . The RTC has the following features: ─ four daily times. ─ four weekly times. ─ timer offset function (pre-programmed time). ─ timer can be enabled with the Multi-function Digital Inputs. ─ timed constant speed selection. ─ timer energize Multi-function Digital Outputs. 8- 124

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2013; RTC Timer Functions (G42-04 to G42-27) Parameter No.

LCD Display

G42-04

Timers Sel

G42-05 G42-06

Start Time 1 Stop Time 1

G42-07

Start Day 1

G42-08

Stop Day 1

G42-09 G42-10 G42-11 G42-12 G42-13 G42-14 G42-15 G42-16 G42-17 G42-18 G42-19 G42-20

Start Time 2 Stop Time 2 Start Day 2 Stop Day 2 Start Time 3 Stop Time 3 Start Day 3 Stop Day 3 Start Time 4 Stop Time 4 Start Day4 Stop Day 4

G42-21

Offset Sel

G42-22

Offset Time Timer Source Timer Source Timer Source Timer Source

G42-23 G42-24 G42-25 G42-26

Description

G42-27

Speed Sel

G42-28

Run Dir. Sel

Setting Range

LCD Display

0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2: Enabled by DI 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday 7: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday 7: Sunday 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 1 to 7 1 to 7 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 1 to 7 1 to 7 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 1 to 7 1 to 7 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2: Enabled by DI 00:00:00 to 23:59:59

1 0 to 31 2 0 to 31 3 0 to 31 4 0 to 31

0: Not Selected by Timer 1: Selected by Timer 1 2: Selected by Timer 2 3: Selected by Timer 3 4: Selected by Timer 4 5: Selected by Timer 1 + 2 ---0B:FWD for RTC Run 1: ---1B:REV for RTC Run 1: --0-B:FWD for RTC Run 2: --1-B:REV for RTC Run 2 -0--B:FWD for RTC Run 3: -1--B:REV for RTC Run 3 0---B:FWD for RTC Run 4 1---B:REV for RTC Run 4

Disabled Enabled Enabled by DI Start Time 1 Stop Time 1 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Start Time 2 Stop Time 2 (Mon------Sun) (Mon------Sun) Start Time 3 Stop Time 3 (Mon------Sun) (Mon------Sun) Start Time 4 Stop Time 4 (Mon------Sun) (Mon------Sun) Disabled Enabled Enabled by DI Offset Time (Ref. to Table 8.20 ) (Ref. to Table 8.20 ) (Ref. to Table 8.20 ) (Ref. to Table 8.20 ) None Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 Timer 3 + 4 RTC Run 1:FWD RTC Run 1:REV RTC Run 2:FWD RTC Run 2:REV RTC Run 3:FWD RTC Run 3:REV RTC Run 4:FWD RTC Run 4:REV

- Using The RTC Timer Functions 8- 125

Control Methods Factory V/F Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 0

00:00:00 00:00:00

A A

00:00:00 00:00:00 1 5 00:00:00 00:00:00 1 5 00:00:00 00:00:00 1 5

A A A A A A A A A A A A

00:00:00

0000B

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be set in multiple timers. . The timer is configured in four steps: Step1: Enable the timer ─ Configure how the timer is enabled (by G42-04). Step2: Setting the time period ─ Set the time, day and/or offset time when the timer operates by G42-05 to G42-22. If any start time is the same as the corresponding stop time, the timer period is disabled. Ex, G42-05 (start time 1) = G42-06 (stop time 1) means time period is disabled. Step3: Creating the timer ─ Assign the selected time period to a specific timer by G42-23 to G42-26. Step4: Connecting the parameters ─ Connect selected parameters to the timer. A parameter can be connected to only one timer. (e.g. G11-01 to 04, and G42-27) . Refer to Fig. 8.1.139, RTC Configuration.

Fig. 8.1.139

RTC Configuration

. Offset Time (G42-21 and G42-22). The offset time function operates for a certain predetermined time and is typically used for air ventilation applications. The offset time is defined by G42-22, and is activated by one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (G10-01 to 08) by enabling G42-21. The offset time starts running after the digital input has been momentarily activated . The offset time must be connected to the timers and selected when a timer is created using G42-23 to G42-26. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.140.

Fig. 8.1.140

Offset Time Operation

8- 126

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual - Creating The Timer (G42-23 to G42-26). Collects all wanted time periods to a selected timer according to Table 8.1.20.Time period (P1- P4) and Offset Time (O) Table 8.1.20 Assign the Selected Time period to Timer Function G42-23 to G42-26 Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

O P4 P3 P2 P1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Timer Function No timers have been selected Time period 1 selected in the timer Time period 2 selected in the timer Time periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer Time period 3 selected in the timer Time periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer Time periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer Time periods 1 , 2 and 3 selected in the timer Time period 4 selected in the timer Time periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer Time periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer Time periods 1 , 2 and 4 selected in the timer Time periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer Time periods 1 , 3 and 4 selected in the timer Time periods 2 , 3 and 4 selected in the timer Time periods 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 selected in the timer Offset selected in the timer Offset and time period 1 selected in the timer Offset and time period 2 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer Offset and time period 3 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 1 , 2 and 3 selected in the timer Offset and time period 4 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 1 , 2 and 4 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 1 , 3 and 4 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 2 , 3 and 4 selected in the timer Offset and time periods 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 selected in the timer

Display None P1 P2 P1+P2 P3 P1+P3 P2+P3 P1+P2+P3 P4 P1+P4 P2+P4 P1+P2+P4 P3+P4 P1+P3+P4 P2+P3+P4 P1+P2+P3+P4 Offset(O) O+P1 O+P2 O+P1+P2 O+P3 O+P1+P3 O+P2+P3 O+P1+P2+P3 O+P4 O+P1+P4 O+P2+P4 O+P1+P2+P4 O+P3+P4 O+P1+P3+P4 O+P2+P3+P4 O+P1+P2+P3+P4

- Constant Speed and Run Direction Selection (G42-27 to G42-28) . The frequency reference and Run direction can be controlled by RTC timer automatically. There is 2 ways to do this. 1.The frequency reference and run direction is controlled by single RTC timer. They are active when specified timer is active, otherwise the inverter will not run. 2. 4 frequency references and run directions are controlled by combination of the RTC timer 1 and 2. . If frequency reference and Run direction is controlled by RTC timer, the functions below are ineffective 1. Auto Run Function (G05-36 = 1~6) 2. Traverse Function 3. PID Function . If the frequency reference is selected by the RTC timer, the RUN source (set by G02-02) only provides the RUN/STOP command. The direction of Run command is determined by Run Direction Selection (G42-28). . Constant Speed Selection (G42-27) can be used to set relationship between the frequency reference and the RTC timer. G42-27 = 0: No constant speed selected by RTC timer. = 1: Frequency reference = frequency reference 1 (G05-01) when timer 1 is active. = 2: Frequency reference = frequency reference 1 (G05-01) when timer 2 is active. = 3: Frequency reference = frequency reference 1 (G05-01) when timer 3 is active. = 4: Frequency reference = frequency reference 1 (G05-01) when timer 4 is active. = 5: Frequency reference is selected by the combination of the activated timer 1 and 2. 8- 127

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . The Run Direction Selection (G42-28) provides 4 RTC RUN directions. Bit 0 of G42-28 (---X) is RTC Run 1. 0 is FWD and 1 is REV. Bit 1 of G42-28 (--X-) is RTC Run 2. 0 is FWD and 1 is REV. Bit 2 of G42-28 (-X--) is RTC Run 3. 0 is FWD and 1 is REV. Bit 3 of G42-28 (X---) is RTC Run 4. 0 is FWD and 1 is REV. . If G42-27 is set to 1 to 4 and the RUN command is on, the RUN direction is set by RTC Run 1 and the specified timer will determine the inverter status Table 8.1.21 Inverter Status for G42-28 = 1 to 4 Run RTC Timer x Inverter Status Command Status 0 0 The inverter will not Run (no Run command). 0 1 The inverter will not Run (no Run command). 1 0 The inverter will not Run (RTC timer deactivated). The inverter will Run. The Run direction is set by RTC Run 1 (0 for FWD, 1 1 1 for REV) 0: Deactivated; 1: Activated RTC Timer x is the RTC timer specified by G42 . If G42-27 is set to 5 and the RUN command is on, the frequency reference and RUN direction is selected by the combination of the activated timer 1 and 2, refer to the following Table 8.1.21. Table 8.1.21 Frequency Reference and Run direction Selected by Timer 1 and 2 Timer 2

Timer 1

Run Direction

RTC Run 1: (0 is RWD, 1 is REV) RTC Run 2: 0 1 (0 is RWD, 1 is REV) RTC Run 3: 1 0 (0 is RWD, 1 is REV) RTC Run 4: 1 1 (0 is RWD, 1 is REV) 0: Deactivated; 1: Activated 0

Frequency reference Frequency Ref 1 (G05-01) or master speed frequency*1 Auxiliary speed frequency or frequency Ref 2 (G05-02)*2 Frequency Ref 3 (G05-03) Frequency Ref 4 (G05-04)

*1. When G02-01 = 0 (freq ref input = LCD Digital Operator), the frequency reference is input by the setting of G05-01 (frequency reference 1). When G02-01 = 1 (freq. ref input = AI1 or AI2), the frequency reference is input from the analog command through terminals AI1 or AI2. *2. When G12-09 = 0 (AI3 function selected as auxiliary speed frequency), the frequency ref. is input from the auxiliary analog input AI3. When G12-09 â&#x2030; 0, the frequency ref. is input by the setting of G05-02 (freq. reference 2). . Application Example: The following example shows how an RTC timer is used and connected to different parameters. In this example, the timer will be set to function from 6AM to 10PM on Monday, 8AM to 8PM between Tuesday and Friday, 8AM to 12AM on Sunday, and the motor is operated at speed 1 on weekdays (from Mon to Fri) and speed 2 on weekends (Sat and Sun).

8- 128

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.141 RTC Timer Application Example 1. Go to parameter group 42, timer functions and enable the timer. (In order to use the RTC timer function, the internal clock must be set first). 2. Set time period 1 (P1) Start time 1 : G42-05 = 06:00:00 (6AM) Stop time 1 : G42-06 = 22:00:00 (10PM) Start day 1 : G42-07 = 1 (Monday) Start day 1 : G42-08 = 1 (Monday) 3. Sets time period 2 (P2) Start time 2 : G42-09 = 08:00:00 (8AM) Stop time 2 : G42-10 = 20:00:00 (8PM) Start day 2 : G42-11 = 2 (Tuesday) Stop day 2 : G42-12 = 5 (Friday) 4. Sets time period 3 (P3) Start time 3 : G42-13 = 08:00:00 (8AM) Stop time 3 :G42-14 = 18:00:00 (6PM) Start day 3 : G42-15 = 6 (Saturday) Stop day 3 : G42-16 = 6 (Saturday) 5. Sets time period 4 (P4) Start time 4 : G42-17 = 08:00:00 (8AM) Stop time 4 : G42-18 = 12:00:00 (12AM) Start day 4 : G42-19 = 7 (Sunday) Stop day 4 : G42-20 = 7 (Sunday) 6. Creates the timer using G42-23 (timer 1), G42-24 (timer 2) and collecting all the wanted time periods (P1, P2, P3, P4) G42-23 = 3 (timer 1 source = P1 + P2) G42-24 = 12 (timer 2 source = P3 + P4) 7. Selects two constant speeds (speed 1 and speed 2) G42-27 = 5 : selects Fref Ref. 2 (G05-02) when timer 1 is active, and selects Fref Ref 3 (G05-03) when timer 2 is active. j Set frequency reference Set G02-01 (Freq. Ref. Source) = 0 (from keypad). Set G05-01 (Freq. Ref. 1) and G05-04 (Fref. Ref. 4) to be 0. Set G05-02 (Freq. Ref. 2) to be the speed 1 and set G05-03 (Freq. Ref. 3) to be the speed 2. Set G12-09 (AI3 Function) = 19 (No Function) k Apply Run Command

8- 129

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

8.1.43 Group 43 ─ Reserved 8.1.44 Group 44 ─ Digital Operation Selection ■

Monitor Items After Power-Up (G44-01 to G44-05) Parameter No. G44-01 G44-02 G44-03 G44-04 G44-05

Description

LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Main Monitor Sub Monitor 1 Sub Monitor 2 Reserved Reserved

1 to 65 1 to 65 1 to 65 ─ ─

Main Monitor Sub Monitor 1 Sub Monitor 2 Reserved Reserved

Factory Setting 1 2 3 ─ ─

Control Methods V/F V/F + SLV SV PG A A A A A A A A A A A A X X X X X X X X

. There are two monitor item display sections on the Digital Operator’s display at the time power is turned on: Main – monitor and Sub – monitor. . Sets the monitor item to be displayed in the Main – monitor after power-up by parameter G44-01, and sets the monitor item to be displayed in the Sub - monitor after power-up by parameters G44-02 and G44-03. Refer to Fig 5.4 for the monitor display. . Only the status monitor (U1 group parameters) with the minimum display unit items can be selected on Main Monitor and Sub Monitor 1and 2. (U1-09, 10, 11, 12, 57, 58, 59, 64, 65 can not be selected). ■ Digital Operator Display Unit Selection (G44-06 , G44-07, G44-08) Parameter Description Control Methods Factory V/F LCD No. Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV Display PG G44-06 Display Unit 0 to 39999 Display Unit 0 A A A A 0: none (no unit) ─ 1: FPM (ft / min) FPM 2: CFM (ft3 / min) CFM 3: PSI (lb / in2 ) PSI 4: GPH (gallons / hour) GPH 5: GPM (gallons / min) GPM 6: IN (inches) IN 7: FT (feet) FT 8: / s (unit / sec) /s 9: / m (unit / minute) /m 10: / h (unit / hour) /h G44-07 Engineer 0 A A A A 11:℉ ℉ 12: inW (inches in water inW calumn) 13: HP HP 14: m / s m/s 15: MPM (m / min) MPM 16: CMM (m3 / min) CMM 17: W W 18: KW KW 19: m m 20: ℃ ℃ LCD LCD G44-08 5 A A A A Contrast 0 to 7 Contrast (1). Digital Operator Display Unit (G44-06). . Sets the units to be displayed for the frequency reference (G05-01 to G05-17) and frequency monitor U1-01 (frequency reference), U1-02 (output frequency), U1-07 (motor speed), U1-33 (output frequency after soft-start), U1-62 (OVP frequency reference) and U1-63 (OVP total output frequency) as described below. (2). Engineering Display Unit Selection (G44-07). . The engineering display units is effective while G44-06=00040 - 39999. The displayed setting range and units of the frequency reference (G05-01 to G05-17) and frequency monitor (U1-01, U1-02, U1-07, U1-33, U1-62 and U1-63) can be changed through parameters G44-07 and G44-06. 8- 130

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual G44-06 Setting 0 1 2 - 39

Setting / Displayed Contents 0.01 Hz units 0.01 % units (max. output frequency G06-03=100%) RPM units (RPM=120 x frequency reference / motor poles, motor poles set by G44-06) Set the decimal point position using the value of the fifth digit. i.e. □ □□□□ set 4-digit number excluding the decimal point set the number of digits below the decimal point

00040 39999

00040 - 09999 : □□□□ (0 digit below the decimal point) 10000 - 19999 : □□□. □ (1 digit below the decimal point) 20000 - 29999 : □□. □□ (2 digits below the decimal point) 30000 - 39999 : □. □□□ (3 digits below the decimal point) <example> G44-06 Display Display Display examples setting unit To display 100 % speed as 0200 → Set G44-06=00200 (then the setting range of 00040 □□□□ 09999 G05-01 to G05-17 is 0040 to 9999) → Set G44-07=0 (no unit) To display 100 % speed as 200.0 CFM → Set G44-06=12000 (then the setting range of 10000 G05-01 to G05-17 is 0000 to 9999) □□□. □ 19999 → Set G44-07=2 (CFM unit) → In this case, 60 % speed will be displayed as 120.0 Depends CFM on To display 100 % speed as 65.00℃ G44-07 → Set G44-06=26500 (the setting range of G05-01 to setting 20000 G05-17 is 0000 to 9999) □□. □□ 29999 → Set G44-07=20 (℃ unit) → In this case, 60 % speed will be displayed as 39.00℃ To display 100 % speed as 2.555 m/s → Set G44-06=32555 30000 □. □□□ → Set G44-07=14 (m/s unit) 39999 → In this case, 60 % speed will be displayed as 1.533 m/s

LCD Brightness Adjustment (G44-08)

Parameter

Description

Control Method V/f No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display V/f + SLV SV PG G44-08 LCD contrast 0 to 7 LCD contrast 5 A A A A To adjust the contrast of the LCD Digital Operator. The LCD backlight is off when set to 0. Factory Setting

■ Real Time Trace Waveform Selection (G44-09 , G44-10) Parameter No.

LCD Display

Description Setting Range

LCD Display

1: 1 ms 2: 2 ms RTT Sampling 3: 4 ms G44-09 Tm. 4: 10 ms 5: 20 ms 6:100 ms 0: -100% to 100% G44-10 Waveform Amp. 1: -50% to 50% 2: 0% to 100% 3: 0% to 50%

1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 10 ms 20 ms 100 ms -100% to 100% -50% to 50% 0% to 100% 0% to 50% 8- 131

Control Method Factory V/f Setting V/f + SLV SV PG

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual . The real trace shows the current condition of the inverter by a graph sampling time interval setting by G44-09. Sets a shorter sampling time to show the detailed transition of the inverter, and sets a longer sampling time to show a longer trace time. The maximum time of the trace is 25.6sec (256 point × 100ms/point= 25.6sec), and minimum trace time is 256ms (256 point × 1ms/point=256ms). . All the required information (Group U3-xx) can be indicated by a graph with 128 dots × 64 dots resolution per screen, and the total quantity of waveform data is 256 points. . Using G44-10 (waveform amplitude) to change the Y-scale of the graph. A center line is indicated in the Y-scale when -100% to 100% (G44-10=0), or -50% to 50% (G44-10=1) is selected. Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.141.

Fig. 8.1.141 Real Time Trace Screen Scale Auto BACK Key Return Time (G44-11)

Parameter

No.

LCD Display

Description

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG

AUTO BACK 000 to 120 sec 060 sec 060 sec A A A A Time . If the BACK key on the Digital Operator is not pressed within the time set by G44-11 (Auto BACK key return time), the Operator’s Display will automatically return to the Mode Display. Refer to Chapter 5 for the key operations. . When set to 0, the auto BACK key function is disabled. Press the BACK key once to return to the previous directories.

G44-11

8.1.45 Group 45 ─ Multi-Function Selection ■

Inverter Capacity Selection (G45-01) Parameter Description

Control Method Factory V/f No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/f + SLV SV PG Varies A A A A G45-01 KVA Sel 00 to FF 230V 3HP by KVA · The Inverter capacity has been preset at the factory. However, if a spare control board is used reset the inverter capacity in accordance with Table 8.1.22. The factory settings of the following parameters will change when the inverter capacity (G45-01) is changed. · Set the correct inverter capacity in G45-01 to match the voltage rating (e.g. Set 1 to 13 in G45-01 for 230V class, and 21 to 42 for 460V class voltage ratings), a “SE06 KVA Setting Error” warning message will occur if the inverter capacity settings do not match the voltage ratings. · When using the parameter copy function A “KVAE INV KVA Error” warning message will occur if the inverter capacity and voltage of the motor to be copied and the capacity in the stored in the Digital Operation are different. This parameter is not initialized by the initialization operation (G01-04). 8- 132

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 8.1.22 Inverter Capacity Setting (230V, CT Mode, G02-08=0) G45-01 Setting Name Inverter Rated Capacity, KVA Max. Applicable motor capacity, HP Inverter Rated Current, A Continuous max. output Current (SF=1.125), A Carrier Frequency, G04-01 KHz*1 G04-05 G04-06 G07-02 G07-03 Factory Setting

G07-04 G07-10 G07-11 G07-12 G07-13 G07-14 G36-02 G36-03 G37-04

Variable Carrier Frequency, Max. Limit, KHz Variable Carrier Frequency Min. Limit, KHz Motor Rated Slip, Hz Motor Rated Output Power, KW Motor Rated Current, A Motor Core Loss for Torque Compensation, % Motor Line-to-Line Resistance R1, â&#x201E;Ś Motor Leakage Inductance Llkg, mH Motor Mutual Inductance, hm, mH Motor Rotor Resistance R2, â&#x201E;Ś Momentary power Loss Ride-Thru time, sec Minimum B.B Time, sec Inverter Overheat o pre-alarm Level, C

9.1

7.5

108

1.67

1.33

5.5

7.5

18.5

20.0

25.1

36.7

50.3

62.9

72.9

13.7

11.4

10.1

9.4

6.9

7.9

0.508

0.408

0.216

0.202

0.162

0.13 6

1.27

0.99

1.10

0.55

0.68

0.52

42.3

38.2

29.8

20.8

22.3

15.4

0.150

0.120

0.072

0.060

0.044

0.02 6

2.0

0.7

1.0

*1. The factory settings are for Constant Torque mode (CT mode, G02-08=0). If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting, the inverter rated current must be reduced.

NOTES-

8- 133

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 8.1.23 Inverter Capacity Setting (460V, CT Mode, G02-08=0) G45-01 Setting Name Inverter Rated Capacity, KVA Max. Applicable motor capacity, HP Inverter Rated Current, A Continuous max. output Current (SF=1.125), A

10.7

7.5

G04-01 Carrier Frequency, KHZ

Variable Carrier Frequency, Max. Limit, KHZ Variable Carrier Frequency G04-06 Min. Limit, KHZ G04-05

G07-02 Motor Rated Slip, HZ G07-03

1.67 1.67 1.33 1.33 1.33 1.33 1.33

Motor Rated Output Power, KW

Factory Setting

G07-04 Motor Rated Current, A G07-10 G07-11 G07-12 G07-13 G07-14 G36-02 G36-03

5.5

7.5

18.5

10.0 12.6 18.6 24.8 31.1 36.3 48.7

Motor Core Loss for Torque Compensation, % Motor Line-to-Line Resistance R1, â&#x201E;Ś Motor Leakage Inductance Llkg, mH Motor Mutual Inductance, hm, mH Motor Rotor Resistance R2, â&#x201E;Ś Momentary power Loss Ride-Thru time, sec Minimum B.B Time, sec

13.7 11.4 10.1

9.4

6.9

7.9

5.4

1.730 1.242 0.788 0.620 0.496 0.418 0.300

4.33 3.56 3.84 1.63 2.45 2.01 1.50 144.3 132.1 113.1

76.1

77.8

64.2

51.6

0.513 0.422 0.134 0.213 0.156 0.088 0.068

2.0

0.7

1.0

Inverter Overheat pre-alarm 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 o Level, C *1. The factory settings are for Constant Torque mode (CT mode, G02-08=0). If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting, the inverter rated current must be reduced. G37-04

NOTES-

8- 134

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 8.1.24 Inverter Capacity Setting (230V, VT Mode, G02-08=1) G45-01 Setting Name Inverter Rated Capacity, KVA

11.4

16.4

111

Motor Rated Slip, Hz

1.67

1.33

Motor Rated Output Power, KW

5.5

7.5

18.5

Motor Rated Current, A

20.0

25.1

36.7

50.3

62.9

72.9

13.7

11.4

10.1

9.4

6.9

7.9

0.50 8

0.40 8

0.21 6

0.20 2

0.16 2

0.13 6

2.0

0.7

1.0

Max. Applicable motor capacity, HP Inverter Rated Current, A G04-01 G04-05 G04-06 G07-02 Factory Setting

G07-03 *2

G07-04 *2

G07-10 *2

G07-11 *2

G36-02 G36-03

Carrier Frequency, KHz Variable Carrier Frequency, Max. Limit, KHz Variable Carrier Frequency Min. Limit, KHz

Motor Core Loss for Torque Compensation, % Motor Line-to-Line Resistance R1, â&#x201E;Ś Momentary power Loss Ride-Thru time, sec Minimum B.B Time, sec

Inverter Overheat 70 70 70 70 70 70 o pre-alarm Level, C *1. The factory settings are for Variable Torque mode (VT mode, G02-08=1). If the carrier frequency is set higher than the Factory setting, the Inverter rated current must be reduced. *2. The motor parameter is for the motor with the same capacity as the inverter, not for the max. applicable motor. G37-04

NOTES:

Cont. 8- 135

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Table 8.1.25 Inverter Capacity Setting (460V, VT Mode, G02-08=1) G45-01 Setting Name Inverter Rated Capacity, KVA

22.7

1.67

1.33

Motor Rated Output Power, 5.5 KW

7.5

18.5

12.6

18.6

24.8

31.1

36.3

48.7

Max. Applicable motor capacity, HP Inverter Rated Current, A G04-01 Carrier Frequency, KHz

Variable Carrier Frequency, Max. Limit, KHz Variable Carrier Frequency G04-06 Min. Limit, KHz G04-05

G07-02 Motor Rated Slip, Hz Factory Setting

G07-03

G07-04 Motor Rated Current, A

10.0

Motor Core Loss for Torque 13.7 11.4 10.1 9.4 6.9 7.9 5.4 Compensation, % Motor Line-to-Line 1.730 1.242 0.788 0.620 0.496 0.418 0.300 G07-11 Resistance R1, â&#x201E;Ś Momentary power Loss G36-02 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Ride-Thru time, sec Minimum B.B Time, sec G36-03 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.0 G07-10

Inverter Overheat pre-alarm 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 o Level, C *1. The factory settings are for Variable Torque mode (VT ,ode, G02-08=1). If the carrier frequency is set higher than the Factory setting, the Inverter rated current must be reduced. *2. The motor parameter is for the motor with the same capacity as the inverter, not for the max. applicable motor. G37-04

NOTES-

8- 136

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Frequency Reference Record (G45-02) Parameter Description

Control Method Factory V/F No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG Disabled G45-02 Freq Ref Record 0: Disabled 0 A A A A 1: Enabled Enabled . This function is available when one of the Multi-function Digital Input terminal inputs (G10-01 to G10-08) is set to 18 (Inhibit ACC/DEC”) or (G10-01 to G10-08 ) is set to 22 or 23 (UP/DOWN) command is selected. Refer to Fig.8.36 for the Acceleration/Deceleration Inhibit Operation, and Fig.8.38 for UP/DOWN operation. ■ User Defined Initial Settings (G45-03) Parameter Description

Control Method Factory V/F No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 0: No change No change G45-03 User Defaults 1: Record 0 A A A A Record 2: Clear Clear . This parameter is used to record or clear the current parameter settings. Once the current parameter settings have been recorded, parameter G01-04 can be used to initialize the inverter parameters to the user defined initial settings. . G45-03 = 0: No change (Retain the current parameter settings). = 1: Record (Records the current parameter settings as user defined initial settings, parameter G01-04 now allows selecting G01-04=1 for user initialization and the Digital Operator display will return to 0 after the settings have been recorded). = 2: Clear (Clears the current saved user defined initial settings, parameter G01-04 no longer allows selecting G01-04=1 for user initialization and the Digital Operator display will return to 0 after the settings have been cleared).

■ LOC/REM Key Enable/Disable (G45-04) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG

Disabled LOC/REM Key 0: Disabled 1 A A A A 1: Enabled Enabled . This parameter enables or disables the LOC/REM key on the LCD Digital Operator. . Set G45-04 to 0 to disable the LOC/REM key on the Digital Operator. . Set G45-04 to 1 to enable the LOC/REM key function. Pressing the LOC/REM key switches control of operation between the Digital Operator keypad (Local) and the (Remote) sources specified in parameters G02-01 (frequency reference selection) and G02-02 (RUN command selection).

G45-04

■ Priority of STOP key (G45-05) Parameter No.

LCD Display

Description

Setting Range

Factory LCD Display Setting

Control Method V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

Disabled G45-05 STOP Key Sel 0: Disabled 1 A A A A 1: Enabled Enabled . This parameter enables or disables the STOP key on the Digital Operator when the run command is from a terminal (G02-02=1) or serial communications (G02-02=2 or 3) when the motor is running. . G45-05= 0: Disabled (The STOP key is disabled when the run command is from a terminal or serial communication). = 1: Enabled (The STOP key is enabled at all times during running).

8- 137

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ Output Frequency UP/DOWN Function (G45-06) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

Factory LCD Display Setting

Control Method V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

0: Disabled Disabled 0 A A A A 1: Enabled Enabled . The output frequency can be increased or decreased (UP/DOWN) through the Digital Operator. . G45-06= 0: Changes output frequency through the Increment/Decrement key. The frequency change will be accepted only after the DATA/ENTER key has been pressed. = 1: Changes output frequency through the Increment/Decrement key. The frequency reference can be recalled even after restarting the inverter if the DATA/ENTER key has been pressed at that time. . The output frequency can be changed (UP or DOWN) through either the LCD Digital Operator or through one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs by setting (G10-01 to G10-08) to 22 or 23). Refer to chapter 8.1.10. for the UP/DOWN operation.

G45-06

UP/DOWN Sel

■ Digital Operator Disconnected Operation Selection (G45-07) Parameter

No.

LCD Display

Description

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Method V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

Continue G45-07 Keypad Loss Sel 0: Continue 0 A A A A 1: Stop Stop . This parameter determines if the inverter will stop when the Digital Operator is removed when in Local Mode or G02-02=0 (RUN command input from the Digital Operator). ■ Elapsed Time Selection (G45-08, G45-09) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Method V/F V/F + SLV SV PG

Power on Time G45-08 Elapsed Time 0: Power on time 0 A A A A Sel 1: Running time Running Time Time 00000 to 65535 Hr G45-09 Elapsed 00000 Hr 00000 Hr A A A A Set . Use G45-08 to select how the time is accumulated for U1-13 (Elapsed Run Time). . G45-08= 0: Time accumulates when the inverter is powered. = 1: Time accumulates only when the inverter is running. . Set the initial value of the elapsed run time (U1-13) in hour units in parameter G45-09. Set G45-09=0 to clear U1-13. ■ Cooling Fan Operating Time Set (G45-10) Parameter Description

Control Method Factory V/f Setting V/f No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display + SLV SV PG G45-10 Fan ON Time Set 0 to 65535 hr Fan ON Time Set 0 hr A A A A . Sets the initial value of cooling fan operating time (U1-35) in hour units in parameter G45-10. Set G45-10=0 to clear U1-35.

8- 138

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

■ Accumulated Data and Fault Trace Data Clear Function (G45-11 to G45-13) Parameter Description Control Method Factory V/f Setting V/f No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display + SLV SV PG Disabled G45-11 Output KWHr Init 0: Disabled 0 A A A A 1: Enabled Enabled G45-12 Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 X X X X 0: Disabled Disabled G45-13 Fault Trace Init 0 A A A A 1: Enabled Enabled . The motor accumulated output energy KWHr (U1-34) display data can be reset using G45-11. . The fault trace/fault history (U2) can be cleared using G45-13.

■ Run Selection after Switching from Local to Remote Mode (G45-14) Parameter Description Control Method Factory V/f No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/f + SLV SV PG LOC/REM 0: Ineffective Ineffective G45-14 0 A A A A RUN Sel 1: Effective Effective . Uses G45-14 to effect or not effect the external run command signals during mode switching from Local to Remote mode. . G45-14=0: Ineffective (If the external run command signals are input when mode switching from local to Remote mode, the inverter will not run. =1: Effective (If the external run command signals are input when mode switching from Local to Remote mode, the inverter will run. ■ JOG / LEFT Key Mode Selection (G45-15) Parameter Description No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

G45-15 JOG/LEFT Key 0: LEFT Key Select Sel 1: JOG Key Select

LCD Display LEFT Key Select JOG Key Select

Factory Setting 0

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG A

8.1.46 Group 46 ─ Copy Function ■ Copy Function Selection (G46-01, G46-02) Parameter

Description

Control Method Factory V/F No. LCD Display Setting Range LCD Display Setting V/F + SLV SV PG 0: Normal Normal READ G46-01 Copy Sel 1: READ (INV → OP) 0 A A A A 2: WRITE (OP → INV) WRITE 3: VERIFY VERIFY 0: Disabled Disabled G46-02 READ Sel 0 A A A A 1: Enabled Enabled . The LCD Digital Operator with built-in memory (EEPROM) can perform the following functions: (1) READ: Stores the inverter parameter settings in the Digital Operator (INV → OP). (2) WRITE: Saves the parameter settings stored in the Digital Operator to the inverter (OP→INV). (3)VERIFY: Compares the parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters. . G46-01= 0: No action = 1: READ (All parameters are copied from the Inverter to the Digital Operator). = 2: WRITE (All parameters are copied from the Digital Operator to the Inverter). = 3: VERIFY (Parameter settings in the Inverter are compared to those in the Digital Operator). . Set G46-02=0 to prevent overwriting the data stored in the Digital Operator by mistake. With G46-02=0, if G46-01=1 and a READ operation is performed (To store inverter parameter settings in the Digital Operator), a “ RDP Read Prohibited ” warning message will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the READ operation will be stopped. . Refer to the following steps for the copy function operation. 8- 139

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ─ When using the WRITE operation, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the Digital Operator. 1 Software Version 2 Control method 3 Inverter product type 4 Inverter capacity and voltage rating ─ When one of the parameters G10-01 to G10-08 (Multi-function Digital Input Selection) is set to 48 (Parameter write enable), all parameters can be written into inverter from the Digital Operator when the terminal is on. When off, all parameters other than frequency reference (G02-01) are write protected. Refer to Chapter 8.1.1 for more details. . See the Read, Write and Verify Steps and resultant displays on the following pages. ■ READ : Use the following steps to store inverter parameter settings in the Digital Operator Step

LCD Display (English)

Explanation

Selects the copy function parameter group (G46) in Advanced programming mode.

Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the copy function selection parameter (G46-01) display.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to display the data Set/Read screen. (The highlighted number blinks)

Change the set value to 1 (READ) using the Increment key.

. Start the READ operation using the DATA/ENTER key. The display is as shown on the left. . A bar graph in the bottom of the LCD Display shows the Reading progress chart.

If the data read is successful, “ READ COMPLETE ” is displayed on the Digital Operator. 6

. An error message “RDP Read Prohibited” may occur while Saving inverter parameter settings to the memory of the Digital Operator. . If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the G46-01 display. .The display returns to the sub directories (G46-01) when a BACK key is pressed. (If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will automatically return to the Mode display.)

NOTES-

8- 140

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ WRITE : Use the following steps to write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter. Step

LCD Display (English)

Explanation

Selects the copy function parameter group (G46) in Advanced programming mode.

Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the copy function selection parameter (G46-01) display.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to display the data Set/Read screen. (The highlight number blinks)

Change the set value to 2 (WRITE) using the Increment key.

. Start the WRITE operation using the DATA/ENTER key. The display is as shown on the left. . A bar graph in the bottom of the LCD Display shows the writing progress chart. If the data write is success, “ WRITE COMPLETE ” is displayed on the Digital Operator.

. An error message “WRE Write Error” may occur while writing parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter. . If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error Display and return to the G46-01 display. The display returns to the sub directories (G46-01) when the BACK key is pressed. (If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will automatically return to the Mode display)

NOTES-

8- 141

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual ■ VERIFY : Use the following steps to compare inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values. 8.1.47 Group 47 ─ Traverse Operation Step

LCD Display (English)

Explanation

Selects the copy function parameter group (G46) in Advanced programming mode.

Press the DATA/ENTER key, and select the copy function selection parameter (G46-01) display.

Press the DATA/ENTER key to display the data Set/Read screen. (The highlight number blinks)

Change the set value to 3 (VERIFY) using the Increment key.

. Start the VERIFY operation using the DATA/ENTER key. The display is as shown on the left. . A bar graph in the bottom of the LCD Display shows the verifying progress chart. If the data verify is success, “ VERIFY COMPLETE ” is displayed on the Digital Operator.

. An error message “VRYE Verify Error” may occur while verifying. . If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the G46-01 display. The display returns to the child directories (G46-01) when the BACK key is pressed. (If the BACK key is not pressed within one minute, the Operator display will automatically return to the Mode display)

NOTES-

8- 142

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual â&#x2013; Traverse operation (G47- 01 to G47- 08) Parameter No.

Description

LCD Display

G47-01 Center Frequency G47-02 Amplitude G47-03 Jump Frequency G47-04 Jump Time G47-05 Wobble Time

Setting Range

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG

005.00 to 100.00% 00.1 to 20.0%

020.00%

10.0%

00.0 to 50.0%

00.0%

00 to 50ms 00 ms 0000.0 to 1000.0 0010.0 sec sec 00.1 to 10.0 01.0

00.0%

00 ms

0010.0 sec

G47-06 Wobble Ratio 01.0 A A X X Upper G47-07 Deviation 00.0 to 20.0% 00.0% 00.0% A A X X G47-08 Lower 00.0 to 20.0% 00.0% 00.0% A A X X Deviation . The traverse operation is defined as adding a triangular wave to the basic inverter output frequency at the preset wobble time. This function is primarily used for synthetic yarn winding applications to move the yarn back and forth in a diamond pattern across the surface of the yarn package. . The traverse operation is active only by selecting the V/f and V/f +PG control mode. To compensate for the inertia in the system a quick frequency jump can be included. . If any functions below is set, the traverse function is ineffective 1. frequency reference and Run direction is controlled by RTC timer (G42-27 = 1 to 5) 2. Auto-Run Function (G05-36 = 1 to 6) . If the traverse function is set, the PID function is ineffective . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.142, for the traverse operation and related parameter settings.

Fig. 8.1.142

Traverse Operation and Related Parameters

.The traverse operation is enabled when one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs (G10-01 to G10-08) traverse run is set to 32 (Traverse run) and the inverter RUN command are input. The traverse operation is ready when the inverter output frequency reaches center frequency (G47-01). During acceleration the to center frequency, the acceleration time is the original preset acceleration time (Tacc 1 to Tacc 4). When the traverse operation is off or the RUN command is removed, the deceleration time is also the original preset deceleration time (Tdec 1 to Tdec4). However, in the traverse operation, the inverter is operated at the wobble time (G47-05, tup + tdown) and wobble ratio (G47-06, tup / tdown). . Set the Multi-function Digital Output terminals (R1A-R1C, R2A-R2C, R3A-R3C or R4A-R4C) to output the traverse-up (During the acceleration period) through setting G11-01 to G11-04 to a value of 20 or 21. . Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.143 for the traverse ON/OFF control. 8- 143

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.144

Traverse ON/OFF Control

. During the traverse operation, the center frequency could be controlled by one of the Multi-function Digital Inputs. However, the upper deviation traverse run (G10-01- 08 = 33) and lower deviation traverse run(G10-01- 08 = 34) command can not be input at the same time, otherwise the inverter will maintain the original center frequency (G47-01). Refer to the following Fig. 8.1.145.

Fig. 8.1.145 Upper/Lower Deviation Traverse Operation . The stall prevention function is idle in the acceleration and deceleration period of the traverse operation. However, it is in effect during the first acceleration to center frequency (G47-01) process when the traverse function is off or when the inverter is in the deceleration period after the run command is removed. This must be taken into consideration when selecting the proper inverter capacity to comply the actual system requirements when designing the equipment. . The frequency range of traverse operation is restricted by the inverter frequency upper bound (G05-18) and lower bound (G05-19). If the (center frequency + amplitude) is larger than the frequency upper bound (G05-18), it will operate at the upper bound (G05-18), and if (center frequency - amplitude) is less than the frequency lower bound it will operate at the lower bound. . During traverse operation, all of the parameter values (G47-01 to G47-08) can be modified.

8- 144

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 8.2 Reserved 8.3 Descriptions of T Code Parameter Settings

This section describes the auto-tuning parameter settings. Parameter Description

No.

LCD Display

Setting Range

T-01 Tune Mode Sel

0: Rotational Auto-tuning 1: Stationary Auto-tuning 2: Stationary Autotuning (Long Cable)

LCD Display

Factory Setting

Control Method V/f V/f + SLV SV PG

Rotational Stationary

Stat.(Long Cable)

Rated Varies by T-02 Motor 0.00 to 600.00 KW 007.5 KW O O O Power KVA Motor Rated Varies by T-03 0.1 to 999.9A 25.1A O O O Current KVA T-04 Motor Rated Volt 0.0 to 255.0V*1 230.0 V 230.0 V*1 O O O *2 Motor Rated T-05 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz O O O 0.0 to 400.0 Hz Freq Rated T-06 Motor 0 to 24,000 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm O O O Speed T-07 Motor Poles 2, 4, 6, 8 poles 4 poles 4 poles O O O T-08 PG pulses 0 to 60,000 ppr 1024ppr 1024 ppr X O X T-09 Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 X X X Motor No-Load 230V:50.0 to 240.0V Motor No-Load Varies by T-10 Volt X X O Volt KVA 460V:100 to 480.0V No-Load 0.01A T-11 Motor X X O 0.01 to 600.00A 0.01A Curr *1. The value is for the 230V class, double the value for 460V class. *2. The setting range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz for CT mode (G02-08=0), and 0.0 to 120.0Hz for VT mode (G02-08=1).

O O O O O O O X O O

. Set the motor nameplate rated output power (T-02), motor rated current (T-03), motor rated voltage (T-04), motor rated frequency (T-05), motor rated speed (T-06) and motor poles (T-07) listed on the motor nameplate before performing the auto-tuning operation. Auto-tuning Mode Selection (T-01) . Use stationary auto-tuning (T-01=1) for a motor that can not rotate during auto-tuning, and use rotational auto-tuning (T-01=0) for a motor that can rotate during auto-tuning to obtain better performance. . The auto-tuning with setting T-01=2 is for long motor cable only. Motor Rated Output Power (T-02) The factory setting depends on the Inverter Capacity set by (G45-01). Motor Rated Current (T-03) . The factory setting depends on the Inverter Capacity set by (G45-01). . The setting range is 10 % to 200 % of the corresponding Inverter rated current. Motor Rated Voltage (T-04) Motor Rated Frequency (T-05) Motor Rated Speed (T-06) . For special inverters or motors such as high-speed motor, constant-horsepower motors or machine tool spindle motors etc., the motor rated voltage or rated frequency maybe lower than for general-purpose motors. Always confirm the information on the nameplate or motor test reports. . To prevent saturation of the inverter’s output voltage while performing auto-tuning when the motor rated voltage is higher than the inverter input power supply voltage. (See Example 1) Example 1: The motor rated voltage (440V/60Hz) is higher than the Inverter input power supply voltage (380V/50 Hz)

8- 145

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 8.1.146 Rated Voltage and Frequency Setting for Auto-tuning

Step 1: Set the motor rated voltage T-04 = 440V Step 2: Set Motor No-Load Volt T-10 =360V, 20V lower than input voltage for torque control. Step 3: Set the motor rated frequency T-05

Step 4: Perform auto-tuning (Refer to Chapter 5.3.5 for the Auto-tuning Key Operations). Parameter G06-04 (Fbase) is set automatically during auto-tuning. Basically, G06-04(Fbase) is set to motor rated frequency T-06. Step 5: If the maximum output frequency (G06-03,Fmax) and base frequency (G06-04, Fbase) are different, set the maximum output frequency (G06-03, Fmax) after auto-tuning. . To set the motor rated voltage (T-04) and motor rated frequency (T-05) from motor nameplate for auto-tuning when the inverter input power supply voltage is higher than the motor rated voltage.

Example 2: The Inverter input power supply voltage (380V/50Hz) is higher than the motor rated voltage (380V/33Hz) set T-04 = 380V (motor rated voltage for auto-tuning) and T-05=33Hz (motor rated frequency for auto-tuning). Number of Motor Poles (T-07)

. Set the number of motor poles, the setting range is 2, 4, 6 and 8 poles. Number of PG Pulse (T-08)

. Set the number of PG pulse per resolution without any multi-function factor. The PG must be mounted on the motor shaft without any reduction gear ratio. Motor No-Load Volt(T-10) . Motor no load voltage is for SV or SLV mode. Set this value 10~50V lower than the inverter input voltage to ensure torque performance in rated frequency. . The bigger the motor is, the more the No-Load voltage is. . Smaller No-Load voltage will reduce No-Load current, weaken the flux and increase current when load is applied. . Larger No-Load voltage will increase No-Load current, enhence the flux and reduce current when load is applied. The enhenced flux also cause larger back electromotive force which saturates inverter output and makes torque control failed. Motor No-Load Curr. (T-11) . Motor no load current is for SV or SLV mode and stationary autotune (T-01 = 1) only. Set this value as the no-load current of the motor, . If this parameter is not set, the inverter will use the internal no-load current data to calculate motor parameters. 8- 146

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Â&#x201E; Long wire between motor and inverter

. When the wire between motor and inverter is longer than 50m, always perform stationary autotuning for long cable (T-01=2). For better vector control performance, use short wire and perform rotational autotuning (T-01=0) first, then use the long wire and perform stationary autotuning for long cable (T-01=2) again. . If rotational autotuning (T-01=0) canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t be performed, input mutual inductance(G07-15), excitation current(G7-07), core saturation compensation factor 1~3(G07-08~G07-10) manually. .For V/F control with long motor cable always perform stationay autotuning.

NOTES-

8- 147

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 9.

FAULT MESSAGE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

9.1 General The Inverter has fault detection and warning / self- diagnostic functions. When the Inverter detects a fault the fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contacts output operate, and the inverter output voltage goes to zero causing the motor to stop. The stopping method can be selected for some faults. When the inverter detects a warning / self-diagnosis, the Digital Operator will display the warning / self-diagnostic code, however the fault output contacts do not operate. The system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.

9.2 Fault Detection Function Table 9.2.1 below shows the LCD displayed fault, with possible causes and corrective actions. One of the following methods can be used to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter: 1. Set one of the Multi-function Digital Input terminals (G10-01 to G10-08) to 3 (Fault Reset) and turn it on, or press the RESET key on the Digital Operator. 2. Turn the main circuit power supply off and then on. When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault Information (U2 group parameters). Table 9.2.1 Fault Message and Corrective Actions Description Possible Causes Corrective Actions . Extremely rapid accel or decel. . A magnetic switch was operated Over current: . Extend the accel / decel at the inverter output. The inverter output current time. OC . A special-purpose motor or motor . Check the load wiring. Overcurrent exceeds the over-current with a capacity greater than the detection level (approx.260% inverter rating has been started. . Remove the motor and run of rated current) the inverter without the motor . A short circuit or ground fault has occurred at the inverter output. A short-circuit or ground fault has occurred at the inverter output (A Short Circuit: SC short-circuit or ground fault can Check the load wiring inverter output or load Short Circuit The be caused by motor damage, was short-circuited. worn insulation or a damaged cable). Ground Fault: . Check the motor wiring Inverter output leakage . Motor load is shorted to ground impedance and the load current has exceeded and/or a DCCT current sensor is wiring. GF approx. 50% of the inverter . Check the DCCT current defective. Ground Fault rated output current and . This is an equipment protection sensor function using the and not the personnel. status monitor parameters G37-03 = 1 (GF function U1-38,U1-39 or U1-40 enabled). The output IGBT has failed . Check the motor and cables because of a short-circuit at the FU for short circuits or insulation DC Fuse Open: inverter output. Check that there DC Fuse The DC fuse is open. failures. is not a shortâ&#x20AC;&#x201C;circuit between . Repair/replace the Inverter Open terminalsâ&#x160;? and U/T1, V/T2, after correcting the cause. W/T3. . The deceleration time is set too Main Circuit Over voltage: short and the regenerative . Extend the deceleration time. The DC bus voltage has energy from the motor is too high. . Check the input circuit and exceeded the OV detection OV . The power supply voltage is too reduce the input voltage to 410Vdc: 230V class Over Voltage level- 820Vdc: high. within specifications. 460V class . Remove the power factor . Power factor correction (700Vdc for input voltage capacitors are being used on the correction capacitors. G06-01 set less than 400V) input. . The input power supply voltage is too low. Main Circuit Under voltage: The DC bus voltage is below . One of the input power supply phases is open. Possibly the the under-voltage detection . Check the input circuit and wiring terminals for the input level while the inverter is in the power supply voltage. UV power supply are not secure. Under Voltage the operating. Approx. . Extend the acceleration 190Vdc: 230V class; . The acceleration time is set too time. Approx. 380Vdc: 460V class short. (The detection level is . The voltage fluctuation of the adjustable by G37-10). Input power supply is too large. . A momentary power loss occurred. LCD Display

Cont. 9-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display

Description

Possible Causes . An open-phase has occurred in Input phase Loss: the input power supply. The inverter input power IPL supply has an open phase or . Loose terminal screws at R/ L1, S/L2 or T/ L3. Input Phase has a large voltage . A momentary power loss has Loss imbalance. This fault is occurred. detected When G37-01=1 . Input voltage fluctuations are too (enabled). large. . There is a broken wire in the output cable or in the motor Output Phase Loss: windings. OPL An open-phase occurred at . Loose terminal screws at U/T1, the inverter output. This fault Output Phase or W/T3. Loss is detected when G37-02=1 . V/T2 The motor capacity less than (enabled) 10% of the inverter’s max. applicable motor capacity. Heat Sink Overheat Pre-Alarm: . The ambient temperature is too The temperature of the heat high. OH sink exceeds the setting in . The cooling fan has stopped. HS G37-04 (Overheat Pre-Alarm The carrier frequency setting is Pre-Overheat Level)and the inverter stops . too high without de-rating the upon an OH pre-alarm output current. detection (G37-05=0 or1). . The ambient temperature is too high. Heat Sink Over heat: OH1 . The cooling fan has stopped. HS Overheat The temperature of the heat . The carrier frequency setting is sink exceeded 105°C too high without de-rating the output current. Motor Overheat Pre-Alarm: The motor temperature sensor (PTC thermistor) input exceeds the pre-alarm OH3 detection level (RT=550Ω or Motor The motor has overheated Pre-Overheat Tr-5℃) for the time set by G08-04, and the inverter stops upon an motor overheat pre-alarm operation (G08-02=0 or 1). Motor Overheat Alarm: The motor temperature sensor (PTC thermistor) OH4 input exceeds the detection Motor level (RT≥1330Ω) for the The motor has overheated. Overheat time set by G08-04. The inverter will stop according to the setting of G08-03.

OH5 IGBT Overheat

IGBT Virtual Junction Temperature (Tj) Overheat: The calculated virtual junction temperature of the power semiconductor(s) has exceeded the maximum permitted temperature(125°C), and the inverter is baseblocked according to the setting of G37-08 =1 (enabled)

. The equivalent duty cycle of the load is too high. . The ambient temperature is too high. . The carrier frequency setting is too high, without de-rating the output current.

Corrective Actions

. Check the input voltage . Tighten the terminal screws.

. Check the wiring to the motor. . Check the motor and Inverter capacities. . Check the ambient temperature around the inverter. . Check for dust and dirt build-up on the fan or heat sink. . Check the carrier frequency setting. . Check the ambient temperature around the inverter. . Check for dust and dirt build-up on the fan or heat sink. . Replace the cooling fan. . Check the carrier frequency setting. . Check the cycle time and the size of the load. . Check the accel / decel time and the V/f pattern setting (G06-03 to G06-11). . Check the motor rated current. . Check the cycle time and the size of the load. . Check the accel / decel time and the V/f pattern setting (G06-03 to G06-11). . Check the motor rated current.

. Check the duty cycle of load. . Check the ambient temperature around the inverter. . Check the carrier frequency setting.

Cont.

9-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display

OL1 Motor Overload

OL2 INV Overload

OT1 Overtorque Det1

OT2 Overtorque Det2

UT1 Undertorque Det1

UT2 Undertorque Det2

OS Overspeed

Description Possible Causes Motor Overload: The motor overload . The voltage setting of V/f pattern is too high, causing the motor to protection function has over excite. operated based on the internal motor overload . The motor rated current setting curve, and when G08-01 = 1 (G07-03) is incorrect. . The motor load is too high. to 4 (motor overload protection enabled) Inverter Overload: . The voltage setting of V/f pattern The inverter overload protection function has is too high. . The inverter capacity is too small. operated based on the . The motor load is too large. internal inverter overload curve. Overtorque Detection 1: The inverter output current is greater than the setting in G33-02 (torque detection 1 The mechanical load is excessive level) for more than the time set in G33-03 , and the inverter baseblocked upon over torque detection 1 (G33-01=2 or 4). Overtorque Detection 2: The inverter output current is greater than the setting in G33-05 (torque detection 2 level) for more than the time The mechanical load is excessive set in G33-06, and the inverter baseblocked upon overtorque detection 2 (G33-04 = 2 or 4) Undertorque Detection 1: The inverter output current is less than the setting in G33-02 (torque detection 1 A Sudden lightening of the level) for more than the time mechanical Load. (e.g. belt set in G33-03, and the broken) inverter baseblocked upon the undertorque detection 1 (G33-01=6 or 8). Undertorque Detection 2: The inverter output current is less than the setting in G33-05 (torque detection 2 A Sudden lightening of the level) for more than the time Mechanical Load. (e.g. belt set in G33-06, and the broken) inverter baseblocked upon the undertorque detection 2 (G33-04 = 6 or 8) Motor Overspeed: The motor speed has been greater than the setting in G31-02 (PG overspeed level) for more than the time set in G31-03 (PG overspeed speed reference is too high. time), and the inverter stops .. The Overshooting or undershooting on the PG overspeed Speeds are occurring. selection (G31-01=0 or 1). This fault is detected only for V/f + PG and SV control modes (G01-03 = 1 or 3). The motor speed can be monitored by U1-07.

Corrective Actions . Check the V/f pattern. . Check the motor rated current. . Check the size of the load and the operation cycle time. . Check the V/f pattern. . Replace inverter with one of a higher capacity. . Check the size of the load and the operation cycle time. . Check the application or Machine operated status. . Check the the settings of G33-02 and G33-03 are appropriate.

. Check the application or machine operated status. . Check that the settings of G33-05 and G33-06 are appropriate.

. Check the operation or Machine operated status. . Check that the settings of G33-02 and G33-03 are appropriate.

. Check the operation or Machine operated status. . Check that the settings of G33-05 and G33-06 are appropriate.

. Check that the speed Reference gain and the settings of G31-02 and G31-03 are appropriate. . Adjust the ASR setting in the G30 group parameter.

Cont.

9-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display

PGO PG Open

DEV Speed Deviation

Description Possible Causes PG Open Detected: The PG pulses were not detected for more than the time set in G31-08 (PG open . The PG is wired incorrectly. detection time) when the . Power is not being supplied to inverter was operating . The the PG. inverter stops on the PG . There is a break in the PG wiring. open selection (G31-07= 0 or . Braking mechanism is engaged. 1). This fault is detected only for V/f +PG and SV control mode (G01-03= 1 or 3). Excessive Motor Speed Deviation: The motor speed deviation is . The load is too high. greater than the setting in The load is locked. (e.g. braking G31-05 (PG deviation level) . mechanism is engaged). for more than the time set in . PG wiring is incorrect. G31-06 (PG deviation time). . PG settings (G31 group The inverter stops on the PG parameters) are incorrect. deviation selection (G31-04=0 or 1). This fault is . The accel / decel time is too detected only for V/f+PG and short. SV control mode (G01-03 = 1 or 3).

Internal Braking Transistor . Short - circuit or ground - fault in BTF Fault: braking resistor. Brk Transistor The braking transistor is not . Insufficient resistance of braking Fault operating properly resistor. Installed Braking Resistor Overheating: BRH The installed braking resistor Brk R is overheating and the Overheat braking resistor protection function is enabled (G37-13 = 1). Modbus Communication Error: . Control data was not CE received correctly for 2 Comm Err seconds or longer. . This fault is detected when G38-05 = 1 and G38-04 = 0 to 2 Digital Operator Connection Fault: The connection to the Digital Operator was broken during OPR an operation for a RUN OP Removed command from the Digital Operator (G02-02 = 0) and when G45-07 = 1 (Inverter will stop when the Digital Operator is removed). PID Feedback loss: A PID feedback loss is detected (When G23-15=2, motor coasts to stop during PID feedback loss FBK detection), and when the PID PID FBK Loss feedback input < PID Feedback Loss Detection Level (G23-16) for the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time (G23-17).

The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too high.

Connection was broken and/or the Master has stopped communicating.

Corrective Actions

. Check the PG wiring. . Check the PG power supply. . Check the PG wiring . Check the motor braking mechanism.

. Check the mechanical load. . Check that the brake is Released when using brake, or reduce the load. . Check the PG wiring. . Verify the parameter settings are correct. Check the settings in G31-05 and G31-06. . Lengthen the accel / decel time. . Check the resistance of the braking resistor and braking duty cycle. . Turn off power, then turn on. If fault is persistent, replace the inverter. . Lighten the load, increase the deceleration time, or reduce the motor speed. . Replace the braking resistor unit with a higher braking capacity.

Check all connections and verify all user-side software configurations.

The Digital Operator was not attached properly, or the Digital Operator connector was broken.

. Attach the Digital Operator. . Check the Digital Operator connector. . Check the setting of G45-07.

The PID feedback signal from the feedback transducer is not functioning or not installed properly.

. Check that the setting of PID feedback input method is correct. . Check to ensure that the PID feedback signal is working and Installed properly.

Cont.

9-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display

Fault (RS-485)

Description External Fault input from RS-485 communication (group A communication option cards or R(+),R(-), S(+) ,S(-), RS-422/485 communication port).

EF1 External Fault (terminal S1) Ext Fault (S1) EF2 External Fault (terminal S2) Ext Fault (S2) EF3 Ext Fault (S3) External Fault (terminal S3) EF4 External Fault (terminal S4) Ext Fault (S4) EF5 External Fault (terminal S5) Ext Fault (S5) EF6 Ext Fault (S6) External Fault (terminal S6) EF7 External Fault (terminal S7) Ext Fault (S7) EF8 External Fault (terminal S8) Ext Fault (S8) CF02 Circuit fault at Control Circuit Control power-up Fault CF03 NVRAM (SRAM) fault NVRAM Fault CF04 NVRAM BCC NVRAM BCC Code Error Err CF05 CPU ADC AD Converter fault in CPU Fault CF06 Watch-Dog Watchdog timer fault Err CF07 Motor Control Motor Control fault Fault CF08-CF09 Reserved CF10 fault in external option Option ADC ADC card. Fault CF11 RS485 Comm. Fault 1

RS-485 communication error or transmission fault during communications and the inverter stops after communication error (G38-04 = 0 to 2)

CF12 RS485 Comm. Fault 2

RS-485 communication protocol error and the inverter stops on the communication error (G38-04=0 to 2).

Possible Causes

Corrective Actions . Check the RS-422/485 communication signal. An external fault condition has . occurred and the inverter stops on the Check for an external problem. RS-485 External fault detection . Check the RS-422/485 selection (G38-04=0 to 2). communication related parameters.

When an external fault is input from one of the Multi-function Digital Input . Check the cause of external terminals (G10-01 to G10-08) is set to fault. 2, and is on the inverter stops on the . Reset external fault inputs to external fault. (from Multi-function the Multi-function Digital Digital Input) operation selection Input. (G37-11= 0 or 1, a major fault).

ASIC hardware failed during power-up

. External noise is on the control circuit input terminals . The control circuit is failed.

. Perform initialization. . Turn off power, then turn on. If fault is persistent, replace the control board or the inverter.

. Perform rotational autotuning . If it is possible to perform . Unable to start-up during SLV control rotational autotuning, perform mode stationary autotuning or increase G06-07 Reserved

Option card ADC fault. . RS-422/485 communication (option card or R(+),R(-), S(+) ,S(-), port) option card fault. . Excessive external noise or vibration. The RS-422/485 Communication protocol setting (G38-02 and G38-03) and the RS-485 communication option card are inconsistent.

Reserved . Perform initialization. . Turn off power and turn on. If fault is persistent, replace the option card or the control board. Turn off power and turn on. If fault is persistent, replace the communication option card.

Check the settings of G38-02 and G38-03.

Cont.

9-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display Description Possible Causes CF13 Profibus communication RS485 option card (VA-P) dual port Comm. Fault3 RAM fault. Profibus communication CF14 option card (VA-P) EEPROM RS485 Comm. Fault4 checksum error. CF15 Profibus communication VA-P option card fault RS485 option Comm. Fault5 card (VA-P) RAM fault. CF16 Profibus communication RS485 option card (VA-P) Comm. Fault6 communication IC fault. CF17 Profibus communication RS485 option card (VA-P) Watchdog Comm. Fault7 timer active.

Corrective Actions

. Turn off power, then turn on. If error is persistent replace the VA-P option card.

9.3 Warning / Self-Diagnosis Detection Function.

When the inverter detects a warning, the Digital Operator will display the warning code (blinking), and the fault contacts output do not operate. The system will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the warning has been removed. When the inverter detects a self-diagnostic function (e.g. if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings), the Digital Operation will display the self-diagnosis code, and the fault contacts output do not operate. The inverter will not start until the parameters have been set correctly. When a warning or self-diagnosis error has occurred, refer to Table 9.3.1 to identify and correct the cause of the errors. The warning message (blinking) disappears when the RESET key is pressed. The warning will reappear in 5 seconds if conditions remain unchanged. Table 9..3.1 Warning / Self-Diagnosis and Corrective Actions.

LCD Display

OV (blinking) OverVoltage

UV (blinking) UnderVoltage

OH (blinking) HS Pre-Overheat

Description Main Circuit Overvoltage: The DC bus voltage has exceeded the overvoltage detection level while the inverter is stopped. 410Vdc: 230 V class 820Vdc: 460 V class (G06-01 setting affects the trip level) Main Circuit Undervoltage: The DC bus voltage is below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is stopped. 190Vdc: 230V class 380Vdc: 460V class (The detection level is adjustable by G37-10) Heat sink Overheat Pre-Alarm: The temperature of the heat sink exceeds the setting of G37-04 (Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm Level), and the inverter operation continues (G37-05=2).

Causes

The input lower supply voltage is too high.

Corrective Actions

Check the input power supply voltage.

. The power supply Voltage is too low. . A momentary power loss has occurred.

. Check the input power supply voltage. . Check the input circuit.

.The ambient temperature is too high. . The cooling fan has stopped. . The carrier Frequency setting is too high without de-rating the output current.

. Check the ambient temperature around the inverter. . Check for dust and dirt build-up on the fan or heatsink. Replace the cooling fan. . Check the carrier Frequency setting.

Cont.

9-6

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display OH2 (blinking) INV OH Warning

OH3 (blinking) Motor Pre-Overheat

OT1 (blinking) Overtorque Det1

OT2 (blinking) Overtorque Det2

UT1 (blinking) Undertorque Det1

UT2 (blinking) Undertorque Det2

OS (blinking) Overspeed

Description Inverter Overheat Warning: An inverter overheat warning signal (OH2) was input from one of the Multi-function Digital Input terminals (G10-01 to G10-8) set to 19. Motor Overheat Pre-Alarm: The motor temperature sensor (PTC thermistor) input exceeds the pre-alarm detection level for the time set by G08-04, and the inverter operation continues. (G08-02=2) Overtorque Detection 1: There has been a inverter output current greater than the setting in G33-02 (torque detection 1 level) for more than the time set in G33-03, and the inverter operation continues upon overtorque detection 1 (G33-01=1 or 3) . Overtorque Detection 2: The inverter output current is greater than the setting in G33-05 for more than the time set in G33-06, and the inverter operation continues on overtorque detection 2 (G33-04 = 1 or 3). Undertorque Detection 1: The inverter output current is less than the setting in G33-02 for more than the time set in G33-03, and the inverter operation continues upon the undertorque detection 1 (G33-01 =5 or 7). Undertorque Detection 2: The inverter output current is less than the setting in G33-05 for more than the time set in G33-06, and the inverter operation continues upon the undertorque detection 2 (G33-04= 5 or 7) Motor Overspeed: The motor speed is greater than the setting of G31-02 for more than the time set by G31-03, and the inverter operation continues upon the PG over speed detection (G31-01=2). This fault is detected only for V/f + PG and SV control modes.

Cont.

9-7

Causes An external overheat warning condition occurred that was connected to one of the Multi-function Digital Input terminals.

Corrective Actions

Check external conditions.

The motor has overheated

. Check the cycle time and the size of the load. . Check the accel/decel time and the V/f pattern setting. . Check the motor rated current.

Excessive mechanical load

. Check the application or machine operating status. . Check the settings of G33-02 and G33-03.

Excessive mechanical load

. Check the application or machine operating status. . Check the settings of G33-05 and G33-06.

Sudden lightening of the mechanical load (e.g. belt broken)

. Check the application or machine operated status. . Check the settings of G33-02 and G33-03.

Sudden lightening of the mechanical load (e.g. belt broken)

. Check the application or machine operated status. . Check the settings of G33-05 and G33-06.

. The speed reference is too high. . Overshooting or undershooting of speed is occurring.

. Check the speed reference gain and check the settings of G31-02 and G31-03. . Adjust the ASR setting in the G30 group parameter.

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display

PGO (blinking) PG Open

DEV (blinking) Speed Deviation

CF00 OP Comm. Err1

CF01 OP Comm. Err2

CE (blinking) Comm. Err

CALL (blinking) Comm. Call

BUS RS-485 Comm. Err

EF0 (blinking) Ext Fault (RS-485)

Description PG Open Detected: The PG pulses were not detected for more than the time set in G31-08 when the inverter was operating, and the inverter operation continues on the PG open detection (G31-07=2). This fault is detected only for V/f + PG and SV control modes. Excessive Motor Speed Deviation: The motor speed deviation is greater than the setting of G3-04 for more than the time set in G31-06, and the inverter operation continues upon the PG deviation detection (G31-04 = 2).This fault is detected only for V/f + PG and SV control modes. Digital Operator Communication Error 1: Transmission between the inverter and digital operator cannot be established within 5 seconds after power on. Digital Operator Communication Error 2: Transmission between the inverter and digital operator is established once after power on, but later transmission fault occurs for more than 2 seconds. Modbus Communication Error: Control data was not received correctly for 2 sec or longer when G38-05 = 1 and G38-04 = 3. RS-485 communications on standby: RS-485 communication does not receive correct data from master controller when power is turned on. RS-485 Option Communications Error: After initial communication was established, the connection was lost. External fault input from RS-485 communication (group A communication option cards R(+),R(-), S(+) ,S(-), RS-485 communication port).

Cont. 9-8

Causes

Corrective Actions

. The PG is wired incorrectly. . Power is not being supplied to the PG. . There is a break in the PG wiring. . Braking mechanism is engaged.

. Check the PG wiring. . Check the PG power supply. . Check the motor braking mechanism.

. The load is too high. . The load is locked (e.g. braking mechanism is engaged). . PG wiring is incorrect. . PG settings are incorrect. . The accel / decel time is too short.

. Check the mechanical load system. . Check that the brake is released, or reduce the load. . Check the PG wiring. . Verify the parameter settings. . Lengthen the accel / decel time.

. The Digital Operatorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s connector is not connected properly. . The inverterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s control board is faulty.

. Reinsert the Digital Operator connector. . Check the wiring between Digital Operator and control board. . Replace the control board.

Connection was broken and/or the Master has stopped communicating. . RS-485 Communication connection was not made properly. . The user S/W was not configured to the proper configuration (e.g. baud rate, parity etc.).

Check all connections and verify all user-side software configurations. . Check the connections of communication devices and signals. . Check all user side S/W configurations.

Connection is broken and/or the master controller has stopped communicating.

Check the connections and all user side S/W configurations.

An external fault condition has occurred and the inverter operation continues on the RS-485 External fault detection selection (G38-04=3).

. Check the RS485 communication signal. . Check for an external condition. . Check the RS485 communication related parameters.

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display EF1 (blinking) Ext Fault (S1) EF2 (blinking) Ext Fault (S2) EF3 (blinking) Ext Fault (S3) EF4 (blinking) Ext Fault (S4) EF5 (blinking) Ext Fault (S5) EF6 (blinking) Ext Fault (S6) EF7 (blinking) Ext Fault (S7) EF8 (blinking) Ext Fault (S8)

Description

Causes

Corrective Actions

When an external fault is input from one of the Multi-function Digital Input terminals (G10-01 to G10-08) is set to 2, the inverter operation continues on the external fault (Multi-function Digital Input) operation selection (G37-11=2, a minor fault).

. Remove the cause of external fault. . Reset external fault input to the Multi-function Digital Input.

External Fault (terminal S1) External Fault (terminal S2) External Fault (terminal S3) External Fault (terminal S4) External Fault (terminal S5) External Fault (terminal S6) External Fault (terminal S7) External Fault (terminal S8)

EF9 (blinking) FWD-REV Error

Both the forward-run and reverse-run commands (2 wire mode operation) are input simultaneously for 500ms or more. This error stops the motor according to the stopping method selection (G02-03). The inverter will return to normal after the error has cleared.

SE01 Set Range Error

Parameter Setting Out of Range: When a parameter is set beyond an allowable range permitted by related parameter(s).

SE02 DI Terminal Error

Multi-function Digital Input Setting Error.

An external forward-run and reverse-run commands were input simultaneously. (refer to 2-wire Mode Operation)

The parameter setting is outside of the valid range. In some cases, the parameter settings may depend on other parameter settings (e.g. G07-04>G07-17, G35-04>G35-07 or G05-18>G05-19 etc.). One of the following errors has been made in the Multi-function Digital Input (G10-01 to G10-08) settings: 1.Duplicate functions were selected for two or more multi-function inputs. 2.UP/DOWN commands were not set simultaneously (They must be used together). 3.The UP / DOWN command (22 and 23) and Inhibit ACC/DEC command (18) are both on at the same time. 4.Speed search 1 (26, from max. frequency) and speed search 2 (27, from setting frequency) were set simultaneously. 5.PID is enabled (G23-01) and UP/DOWN command (22 and 23) were selected. 6.Trim control increase and decrease commands (45 and 46) have not been set at the same time.

Check the external sequence logic.

Check the parameter settings.

Check the parameter settings

Cont.

9-9

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display

Description

SE03 V/f Curve Error

V/f pattern Setting Error:

SE04 AI Setting Error

Multi-function Analog Input Selection Error:

SE05 PID Select Error

PID Selection Error:

SE06 KVA Setting Error

FBK (blinking) PID FBK Loss

RDP Read Prohibited

Inverter capacity Setting Error: The Inverter capacity setting in G45-01 does not match the hardware voltage rating. PID Feedback Loss: A PID feedback loss was detected (when G23-15=1), operation continues, and the PID feedback input < PID Feedback Loss Detection Level (G23-16) for the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time (G23-17). Digital Operator write protected

Cont.

9-10

Causes The V/f parameter settings do not satisfy the following hierarchies: 1.G06-03>G06-04>G06-05> G06-06>G06-07; (Fmax) (Fbase) (Fmid1) (Fmid2) (Fmin) 2.G34-01 > G34-02 > G34-03 > G34-04; (Fmax(2)) (Fbase(2)) (Fmid(2)) (Fmin(2)) Duplicate functions were selected for the Multi-function Analog Inputs (AI2 and AI3) or for the Multi-function Analog Inputs (AI2 or AI3) and the pulse train input (PI) selection. e.g.: 1. G12-04=10 (AI2=PID feedback) G12-09=10 (AI3=PID feedback) 2.G12-04=10 (AI2=PID feedback) and G14-01=1(Z=PID feedback When G02-01=4) 3.G12-04=11 (AI2=PID target) and G14-01= 2 (Z=PID target when G02-01=4). The following settings have been made at the same time: 1 PID enabled (i.e. 23-01= 1- 8) 2 PID sleep function enabled (i.e. 23-20=1 or 2, and G23-21â&#x2030; 0). 3 DC injection to stop (i.e. G02-03=2) or Coast to stop with timer (i.e. G02-03=3).

Corrective Actions

Check the V/f parameter settings.

Check the parameter settings (G02-01, G12-04, G12-09 and G14-01).

Check the parameter settings (G23-01,G23-20, G23-21, G02-03).

The Inverter capacity setting (in G45-01) does not match the power unit hardware voltage rating.

Check that the Inverter capacity setting (in G45-01) matches the hardware voltage rating.

The PID feedback signal (e.g. transducer) is not operating or not installed properly.

. Check that the setting of the PID feedback input method is correct. . Check to ensure that the PID feedback signal is operating and installed properly.

G46-01 is set to 1 (User is attempting to store inverter parameter settings in the Digital Operator) when the Digital Operator is write-protected (G46-02=0).

Set G46-02=1 to enable, the Read operation.

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual LCD Display

USP (blinking) USP Trip

RDE Read Data Error WRE Write Error

Description

Unattended Start Protection (USP) activated at power-up

Unable to store inverter parameter settings in the Digital Operator, The product code or S/W version of the inverter being stored is different from the data in the Digital Operator.

KVAE INV KVA Error

Inverter capacity and voltage not matched.

CTRLE Control Error

Inverter control method not matched.

SUME Checksum Error

VRYE Verify Error

Checksum Error.

Verify Error.

Causes When the Unattended Start Protection (USP) (Set by the Multi-function Digital Input) is enabled, the inverter will not accept a RUN command at powerup. The Inverter does not go into the RUN mode until the alarm message is cleared. (Refer to Chapter 8.1.10, the USP operation). Digital Operator EEPOM failed. The inverter product code or S/W version is different. The capacity and voltage of the Inverter be copied and the capacity in the Digital Operator are different. The control method of the inverter being copied and the control method in the Digital Operator are different. After writing is complete, the comparison between the checksum of the inverter parameter area and the checksum of the Digital Operator parameter area show they are different. The settings in the Digital Operator and the inverter do not match.

Corrective Actions .Turn the RUN command off, or perform a reset operation by the terminal by setting one of the (G10-01 to G10-08) to 3 or use the RESET key on the Digital Operator. .Turn off the USP signal and turn off the power supply then turn on. Replace the Digital Operator. Repeat the READ operation. Use the write operation for the same product code and S/W version. Use the write Operation for the same inverter capacity and voltage. Use the write operation for the same control method.

Retry the write operation.

Retry the write operation and verify again.

9.4 Auto-tuning Faults When a fault has occurred during auto-tuning, the fault is displayed on the Digital Operator and the motor will coast to stop. The fault contact output does not operate. Press the RESET key to clear the fault displays. Refer to Table 9.4.1 below to identify and correct the cause of the faults. Fault ATE01 Motor Data Error ATE02 R1 Error ATE03 Llkg Error ATE04 R2 Error ATE05 Lm Error

ATE06 I-det Error

Table 9.4.1 Auto-tuning Fault and Corrective Actions Description Causes Corrective Actions · There is an error in the data · Check the auto-tuning Input for auto-tuning. · There is an error in the Input Data (T-01 to T-10). Motor data input error · Check the capacity of the relationship between the inverter and motor. motor output current and the motor rated current. Motor line-to-line resistance R1 tuning error · Auto-tuning is not · Check the auto-tuning Motor leakage Input data (T-01 to T-10). Completed within the inductance Llkg tuning specified time. · Check the motor wiring. error · The results of auto-tuning · Disconnect the motor Motor rotor resistance exceeds the related from the load if R2 tuning error parameter setting range. connected. Motor mutual inductance Lm tuning error · Check the inverter Current detection circuit · The current exceeded the including the DCCT. motor rated current. · Check the motor wiring. Current detection error · There is a open-phase in · Check the motor the inverter output U/T1, installation and insure the V/T2 or W/T3. motor is uncoupled or brake is released). Cont. 9-11

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Fault

Description

ATE07 Rated-I Error ATE08 Accel Error

ATE09 Warning

Motor rated current error.

Causes The calculated motor rated current (G07-04 or G35-04) is greater than the set value (T-03) during auto-tuning.

Motor acceleration error (effective only for rotational auto-tuning).

The motor did not accelerate within the specified time (G03-01 + 20 sec)

Auto-tuning minor error.

A minor error (except the ATE-01 to ATE-08 error) is detected during auto-tuning (such as the no-load current being higher than 70% of the rated current or the torque reference exceeds 100 % during auto-tuning.

Corrective Actions Check the motor rated current (G07-04, G35-04 and T-03). · Increase the acceleration time (G03-01). · Disconnect the motor from the load if connected. · Check the motor wiring installation. · Check the auto-tuning Input data (T-01 to T-10).

9.5 Display for Diagnostic Assistant When a fault or an alarm (warning/self - diagnosis) occurs, press the MENU/HELP key to show the descriptions, causes or corrective actions for the fault or alarm. One LCD screen can display a maximum 8 lines × 25 alphabetical characteristics. Refer to “5.4 Diagnostic Assistant” for diagnostic assistant operations. Fault Message Fault Description

The inverter output current exceeded the over-current detection level (approx 200% of rated current).

The inverter output or Load is short-circuited.

The inverter output ground-fault current has GF exceeded 50% of the inverter rated output current and G37-03=1. Others: please refer to Table 9.1

Causes · Extremely rapid acc/dec. · An MC was switched at INV output. · A special-purpose or a motor with a higher rating than the inverter was started. · An SC or GF occurred at Inverter output. A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the inverter output. · Motor load was shorted to ground. · A DCCT current sensor is defective.

Warning / Self-Diagnosis Message Fault Description The DC bus volt exceeds OV the OV detection level while the inverter stopped. The DC bus volt is below the UV detection level UV while the inverter is stopped. OH

The temperature of the heatsink exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level (G37-04).

Others: please refer Table 9.2

Causes

Corrective Actions · Extend acc/dec time. · Check the load wiring. · Run the inverter without the motor.

Check the load wiring. · Check the motor wiring. · Check the DCCT current sensor function (using U1-38,39 or 40).

Corrective Actions

The power supply voltage is too high.

Check the input power supply voltage.

·The power supply voltage is too low. ·A momentary power loss has occurred. ·The ambient temperature is too high. ·The cooling fan stopped. ·The carrier frequency is too high.

·Check the input power supply voltage. ·Check the input circuit.

9-12

·Check the ambient temp. ·Check the fan or heatsink. ·Check the carrier frequency.

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 10. INSTALLING AND WIRING OPTION CARDS 10.1. Option Card Models and Specification UP to two option cards can be mounted in the V31. using the two option slots on the control board (CN3 and CN4)as shown in Fig.10.2.1 Table10.1.1 below lists the type of option cards available and the specifications.

Group

Option Card PG CARD

PG CARD

Table 10.1.1 Option Card Specifications Model Specifications (Code No.) A/B/Z phase input /A/B phase ratio output JNPG-O 5V/12V open collector type. A/B/Z phase input /A/B phase ratio output JNPG-L 5V/12V line drive type.

Install Location CN4 CN4

10.2. Installation . Before mounting an Option Card, remove power from the inverter and wait for the CHARGE LED to be off. . Remove the LCD Digital Operator and front cover. . Use the mounting spacer to secure the option card to the control board. Insert the mounting spacer as show in the following Fig.10.2.1. . Refer to the documentation provided with the Option Card for detailed mounting instructions for option slots A and B.

Fig. 10.2.1 Mounting Option Cards

10-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 10.2.1 PG-O Encoder Feedback Option Card A. PG-O Encoder Feedback Card Installation (1) Turn off the power and remove front cover, after Charge LED became dark, Do NOT connect the wire or install PG card while Charge LED is bright. (2) Insert the PG-O card into CN4 connector of control board and fasten the card by a plastic standoff. (The plastic standoff can penetrate the hole, which is located on the right side of PG-O card.) (3) Connect the grounding wire from the PG-O to the control board grounding terminal â&#x20AC;&#x153;Eďź&#x201A;.

CN4(36pin) JNPG-O Plastic Standoff Fig. 10.2.2

JNPG-O Feedback Card Installation

B. Terminal Block Designation and Main Circuit Diagram

Pulse Monitor Output Terminal

PG Power Supply Switch Jumper (5V/12V)

CN1 Connector (Connect to CN4) Fig. 10.2.3

Terminal Block Designation

10-2

PG Signal Input Terminal

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 10.2.4

JNPG-O Main Circuit Diagram

C. Terminal Specifications and Parameter Setting Table 10.2.1 JNPG-O Terminal Specifications Terminal Symbols Vcc IG24 A, B, Z AO, BO, ZO E

Function Power Supply for PG : 12V/5V±5%, 200mA Power Source and Input Signal Common PG Signal Input Terminal (Open Collector Type) Pulse monitor output* : Open Collector Type, 24V ,30mA Grounding Terminal

*Use G31-01 to set PG pulse output ratio for A/B-phase (AO/BO), the terminal “ZO” can be used to monitor Z-phase PG pulse. Table 10.2.2 Parameter Settings Function Group Control Mode G01-03 Selection G30-01~07

Speed Control(ASR)

G31-01~13

PG Feedback Set up

Description Selects VF+PG or SV control mode for close loop control. Adjusts the speed control (ASR) to reduce speed fluctuation. Sets the PG pulse resolution, output ratio and related PG functions.

* Please read the latest V31 instruction manual for detailed parameter setting. Notes: (1) PG-O feedback card is designed for V31 series drive, please read through V31 instruction manual before installation. (2) Use shielding cable to reduce noise effect, separate wiring the control cable and power cable (3) Support Open Collector type and Complementary type pulse (encoder) signal, the maximum wire length is 50m and 70m separately. (4) The maximum response frequency of PG- O is 100 kHz.

10-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 10.2.2 PG-L Encoder Feedback Option Card A. PG-L Encoder Feedback Card Installation (1) Turn off the power and remove front cover, after Charge LED became dark, Do NOT connect the wire or install PG card while Charge LED is bright. (2) Insert the PG-L card into CN4 connector of control board and fasten the card by a plastic standoff. (The plastic standoff can penetrate the hole, which is located on the right side of PG-L card.) (3) Connect the grounding wire from the PG-L to the control board grounding terminal â&#x20AC;&#x153;Eďź&#x201A;.

CN4(36pin) JNPG-L Plastic Standoff Fig. 10.2.5

JNPG-O Feedback Card Installation

B. Terminal Block Designation and Main Circuit Diagram

Pulse Monitor Output Terminal

PG Power Supply Switch Jumper (5V/12V)

CN1 Connector (Connect to CN4) Fig. 10.2.6

Terminal Block Designation

10-4

PG Signal Input Terminal

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual

Fig. 10.2.7

JNPG-L Main Circuit Diagram

C. Terminal Specifications and Parameter Setting Table 10.2.3 JNPG-L Terminal Specifications Terminal Symbols Vcc GND A, A\, B, B\, Z, Z\ AO, AO\, BO, BO\, ZO, ZO\ E

Function Power Supply for PG : 12V/5V±5%, 200mA Power Source and Input Signal Common PG Signal Input Terminal (Line Driver Type), RS-422 Level Input Pulse monitor output* : Line Driver Type, RS-422 Level Output Grounding Terminal

*Use G31-01 to set PG pulse output ratio for A/B-phase (AO-AO\, BO-BO\), the terminal “ZO-ZO\” can be used to monitor Z-phase PG pulse. Table 10.2.4 Parameter Settings Function Group Control Mode G01-03 Selection G30-01~07

Speed Control(ASR)

G31-01~13

PG Feedback Set up

Description Selects VF+PG or SV control mode for close loop control. Adjusts the speed control (ASR) to reduce speed fluctuation. Sets the PG pulse resolution, output ratio and related PG functions.

* Please read the latest V31 instruction manual for detailed parameter setting. Notes: (1) PG-L feedback card is designed for V31 series drive, please read through V31 instruction manual before installation. (2) Use shielding cable to reduce noise effect, separate wiring the control cable and power cable (3) Support Line Driver type pulse (encoder) signal, the maximum wire length is 300m. (4) The maximum response frequency of PG-L is 300 kHz.

10-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 10.3

PG (Encoder) Connection Examples and Specifications.

Pulse Output Signals

Pulse Input Signals

PO1

Multi-function Pulse Train Output 1

P02

Multi-function Pulse Train Output 2

GND

Analog reference common

PI GND A

PG input signals

B-phase input

B-phase pulse - input B-phase - pulse input

VSS

Power supply for PG (+5V or +12V) GND (0V)

Power supply for PG +5V or +12V selected by JP3

E (G)

Earth Ground

Shield connection terminal

Multi-function contact output 1

Function set by G11-01. R1A-R1C: Closed during fault condition R1B-R1C: Open during fault condition

Default: fault signal

R2A-R2C Multi-function contact output 2

Multi-function digit output. Function set by G11-02. Closed during running.

Default: running signal

R3A-R3C Multi-function contact output 3

Multi-function digit output. Function set by G11-03. Closed during zero speed

Form A Default: Dry contacts capacity: zero 1A max. at 250Vac speed 1A max. at 30Vdc

R4A-R4C Multi-function contact output 4

Multi-function digit output. Function set by G11-04. Closed during inverter ready

Default: inverter ready

R1B R1C

MT GND R (+)

RS-422/ 485 Port

R (-) S (+) S (-) E (G)

USB port

Line driver input (RS-422 level input) (max. response frequency: 300 KHz)

+ B-phase + pulse input

R1A

PTC Thermistor Input

L: 0.0 to 0.5V H: 4.0 to 13.2V 0-300 KHz (resistance: 3.89 KΩ)

+ A-phase + pulse input

A-phase pulse - input A-phase - pulse input

VCC

Relay output

Pulse input frequency reference. (duty cycle 30% to 70 %) Factory Setting: Frequency reference (G14-01=0 )

pulse

0 to 32 KHz +5V output (load: 2.2kΩ)

Multi-function Pulse train Input Analog reference common A-phase pulse input

Pulse train output 1 Factory setting: output frequency (G14-06=2) Pulse train output 2 Factory setting: PG A-phase pulse monitor output (G14-08=7)

USB

5VDC/12VDC ±5% 200mA max. ----

Motor temperature sensor input Analog common

Motor temperature sensor input (PTC thermistor) 0V

MODBUS communications input

. When using 2-wire RS-485 communications, connect R (+) to S (+) , and R (-) to S (-) . . Set the terminating resistor by setting the dip switch SW1-1 for the last Inverter only.

MODBUS communications output Earth Ground USB communications port

Form C Dry contacts capacity: 1A max. at 250Vac 1A max. at 30Vdc

Active: 1330Ω return: 550Ω Photo isolation, differential input Photo isolation, differential input

Shield connection terminal

----

Mini USB ports (connection to a PC)

----

10-6

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 10.3.1. PG Interface for Terminal Cards TER-001. A. PG Interface Card TER-001 wiring. The built-in PG interface of terminal card TER-001 only allows a single A/B phase open-collector / complementary interface. The wiring and terminal specifications are shown in the following Fig. 10.3.1.

Fig. 10.3.1 PG Interface on TER-001 1 Shielded twisted-pair cables must be used for signal lines, and the shield connected terminal (E). 2 The signal lines should not exceed a maximum of 100 meters, between the PG and inverter and kept separate from power lines. 3 Do not use the pulse generator for anything other than the PG (encoder). 4 The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in G31-10. The factory default is A-phase leads B-phase by 90° for forward rotation. The PG phase-A or B pulse can be monitored using the pulse output terminal PO1 (Set G14-06 to 07) or PO2 (Set G14-08, to 09), and G31-11 for the pulse output ratio. 5 Place the shorting pin of JP3 on ‘+5V’location when using the internal +5V as PG power supply and on ’+12V’ for +12V PG power supply. 6 Set dip switch SW2 (SW2-1, SW2-2) toward ’ON’ for an open collector PG, and ‘OFF’ for a complementary PG. B. Terminal Specifications. Terminal

Contents

A-Phase pulse input

B-Phase pulse input

VCC VSS

Specifications H level: 3.5V to 13.2V L level: 0.0V to 0.8V Max. response frequency : 100Khz Open-collector or Complementary inputs.

Internal power supply for PG (+5V or +12V selected by JP3) Ground for internal power supply (A, B phase , 0V common )

5Vdc/12Vdc ±5% @ 200mA max.

Cont.

10-7

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual C. Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses. The maximum response frequency of the built-in PG interface is 100,000 Hz. Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 65,534Hz for the maximum speed of the motor. Motor speed at max. frequency output (min-1) f PG ( Hz ) = 60

× PG pulses (pulse/rev) = 65,534Hz

Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in the following Table 10.3.1. Table 10.3.1 PG Pulse Selection Examples Max. output frequency of Motor’s max. speed (min-1) *1 PG pulse ( P/rev ) *2 PG output (Hz) 1,800 2,000 60,000 1,500 2,500 62,500 1,200 3,000 60,000 900 4,096 61,440 *1 - The motor’s maximum speed is expressed as the synchronous speed. *2 - Refer to parameters G31-01 to G31-13 for the PG Feedback set-up. D. Using A Separate Power Supply. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200mA. Refer to The following Fig. 10.5.2 for connection example. A PG B External PG Power supply

Vcc Vss

+ C

+12V

E(G) *1 - If momentary power loss must be prevented, use a backup capacitor (C) or other method. *2 - Select the external PG power supply voltage according to the PG specification. Fig. 10.3.2 A Separate Power Supply for TER-001 PG Interface (12V PG example)

NOTES -

10-8

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 11. DERATING GUIDELINES The inverter is designed for the maximum ambient operating temperature of 45°C without derating using the factory default setting for the carrier frequency (G04-01). If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting or the operating ambient temperature is higher than 45°C, the inverter rated output current will need to be reduced. Refer to the following carrier frequency vs. rated output current de-rating curves. HP (KW)

Table 11.1.1 230V class at CT mode (G02-08=0) Derating Curve HP (KW) Derating Curve

7.5(5.5)

20(15)

10(7.5)

25(18.5)

15(11)

30(22)

Note 1. Conditions: . Input Voltage: 200 - 240V, 3-phase, 50/60Hz (230V class) 380 - 480V, 3-phase, 50/60Hz (460V class) . Power Factor: 0.85 . Enclosure: IP20 (NEMA 1) . Altitude: Less than 1000m. Note 2. Definitions: . FLA: Inverter rated output current. . fc: Carrier frequency (KHz) Note 3. Related Parameter Settings: a. The carrier frequency will automatically be reduced if the inverter internal protection detects an excessive heatsink temperature when G04-03=1 (Auto Carrier Change is enabled). Refer to Chapter 8.1.4 “Carrier Frequency Selection”. b. The output frequency will automatically be reduced by 30 % of rated output frequency if the inverter internal protection detects an excessive heatsink temperature when G04-04=1 (Auto De-rating is enabled). c. Enable the Soft-PWM control by setting G04-02=1 to change the motor acoustic noise quality when the carrier frequency is lowered because of the higher operating ambient temperature.

11-1

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual HP (KW)

Table 11.1.2 230V class at VT mode (G02-08=1) Derating Curve HP (KW) Derating Curve

10(7.5)

25(18.5)

15(11)

30(22)

20(15)

40(30)

Cont.

11-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual HP (KW)

Table 11.1.3 460V class at CT mode (G02-08=0) Derating Curve HP (KW) Derating Curve

7.5(5.5)

25(18.5)

10(7.5)

30(22)

15(11)

40(30)

20(15)

11-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual HP (KW)

Table 11.1.4 460V class at VT mode (G02-08=1) Derating Curve HP (KW) Derating Curve

10(7.5)

30(22)

15(11)

40(30)

20(15)

50(37)

25(18.5)

11-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 12.

Peripheral Devices and Options

12.1 AC and DC Reactor There is a DC reactor built-in for 25HP and greater. An external DC reactor is available for 20HP and below. Refer to the following Table 12.1.1 for DC reactor suggestion.

Voltage (V)

HP 7.5 10 15 20 7.5 10 15 20

230V

460V

Table 12.1.1 DC Reactor Inverter DC Reactor rated input current(A), Current (mH) CT/VT (A) 29 / 36 53 0.1 38 / 52 53 0.1 58 / 68 85 0.18 77 / 86 85 0.18 17 / 19 28 0.4 22 / 27 28 0.4 33 / 36 45 0.65 38 / 45 45 0.65

Externally connect an AC reactor when, 1 The input power capacity is significantly larger than the inverter capacity. (A large peak current can flow in the power input circuit which can destroy the converter section). 2 If a thyristor converter (e.g. a DC drive) is connected in the same power supply system. 3 The power factor needs to be improved. Refer to the following Table12.1.1 for AC reactor selection. Table 12.1.1

AC Reactor

Inverter Voltage (V)

230V

460V

HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40

AC Reactor

rated output current(A), CT/VT 24 / 30 32 / 43 48 / 57 64 / 72 80 / 87 96 / 111 14 / 16 18 / 22.7 27 / 30 32 / 38 40 / 46 50 / 61 65 / 76

Current (A) 35 46 60 95 95 124 16 21 35 46 60 60 95

12-1

(mH) 0.84 0.64 0.49 0.3 0.3 0.23 1.8 1.4 0.84 0.64 0.49 0.49 0.3

Code NO RWK212-35-KL RWK212-46-KL RWK212-60-KL RWK-212-95-KL RWK-212-95-KL RWK212-124-KS RWK212-16-KL RWK212-21-KL RWK212-35-KL RWK212-46-KL RWK212-60-KL RWK212-60-KL RWK-212-95-KL

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 12.2 Input Noise Filter An input noise filter, RFI (i.e. JNV31-4 口口口口-口口 F 口口) is built-in internally for entire 460V class models. To reduce the noise flowing back from the inverter into the power supply line, externally connect an input noise filter other than the RFI built-in type. Refer to the following Table, 12.2.1 for an optional external or internal RFI filter. These filters comply with EN61800-3 (2004). Inverter Voltage (V)

230V

460V

(HP) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 7.5 10 15 20 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 7.5 10 15 20 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40

Table 12.2.1 Input Noise Filter Input Noise Filter Rated Output Rated Model Type current (A), CT/VT Current 42A FS29020-42-99 External 24 / 30 42A FS29020-42-99 External 32 / 43 75A FS29020-75-99 External 48 / 57 75A FS29020-75-99 External 64 / 72 120A FS29020-120-99 External 80 / 87 120A FS29020-120-99 External 96 / 111 42A FS29021-42-99 External Footprint 24 / 30 42A FS29021-42-99 External Footprint 32 / 43 75A FS29021-75-99 External Footprint 48 / 57 75A FS29021-75-99 External Footprint 64 / 72 30A FS29040-30-99 External 14 /16 30A FS29040-30-99 External 18 /22.7 42A FS29040-42-99 External 27 / 30 42A FS29040-42-99 External 32 / 38 75A FS29040-75-99 External 40 / 46 75A FS29040-75-99 External 50 / 61 75A FS29040-75-99 External 65 / 76 30A FS29041-30-99 External Footprint 14 /16 30A FS29041-30-99 External Footprint 18 /22.7 42A FS29041-42-99 External Footprint 27 / 30 42A FS29041-42-99 External Footprint 32 / 38 30A FS28000-32-99 Internal 14 /16 30A FS28000-32-99 Internal 18 /22.7 42A FS28000-42-99 Internal 27 / 30 42A FS28000-42-99 Internal 32 / 38 75A FS28000-75-99 Internal 40 / 46 75A FS28000-75-99 Internal 50 / 61 75A FS28000-75-99 Internal 65 / 76

Connection Example:

Fig.12.2.1 External option RFI connection

12-2

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 12.3 Braking Resistor and Braking Unit .There is a braking transistor built-in for models:JNV31-4 口口口口-B3 口口口 and JNV31-2 口口口口-B3 口口口 Externally a braking resistor can be installed between terminals B1 and B2 if needed. . For models without a built-in braking transistor an external braking unit with braking resistor must be connected externally. . When connecting a braking resistor or braking unit with braking resistor, set stall the prevention during deceleration invalid, parameter (G09-04=0). . Refer to Table 12.3.1 below for the braking resistor and braking unit selection. Table 12.3.1 Braking Resistor Selection Inverter Voltage (V)

230V

460V

HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40

Braking Resistor Rated Current (A) CT/VT 24/30 32/43 48/57 64/72 80/87 96/111 14/16 18/22.7 27/30 32/38 40/46 50/61 65/76

Code No.

Specs

Qty. used

Approx Braking Torque(%)

JNBR-520W30 JNBR-780W20 JNBR-2R4KW13R6 JNBR-3KW10 JNBR-4R8KW8 JNBR-4R8KW6R8 JNBR-600W130 JNBR-800W100 JNBR-1R6KW50 JNBR-1R5KW40 JNBR-4R8KW32 JNBR-4R8KW27R2 JNBR-6KW20

520W/30Ω 780W/20Ω 2400W/13.6Ω 3000W/10Ω 4800W/8Ω 4800W/6.8Ω 600W/130Ω 800W/100Ω 1600W/50Ω 1500W/40Ω 4800W/32Ω 4800W/27.2Ω 6000W/20Ω

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

110% ,10%ED 122% ,10%ED 120% ,10%ED 122% ,10%ED 122% ,10%ED 120% ,10%ED 103% ,10%ED 102% ,10%ED 128% ,10%ED 122% ,10%ED 122% ,10%ED 119% ,10%ED 122% ,10%ED

Min. Braking resistor (Rmin) 19Ω 19Ω 12.Ω 8Ω 6Ω 6Ω 45Ω 45Ω 23Ω 23Ω 12Ω 12Ω 12Ω

Note - Since the externally install braking resistor generates heat during dynamic braking operation, install it on a noncombustible metal plate in a location away from other equipment. If multiple braking units are being installed, the master/slave jumper of braking unit must be selected, refer to Braking Unit Installation Manual for more details.

12.4 Sinusoidal Output Filter Since there is inductance (L) and stray capacitance (C) in wiring between the inverter and the motor, the peak value of the voltage on the motor terminals can reach up to twice of the inverter DC voltage (√2 × 460V × 2 = approx.1300V for an input voltage of 460Vac) depending on the switching speed of the inverter elements and the wiring. The surge voltages originating in the LC resonance of the wiring may be applied to the motor input terminals and can sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation. Installing an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter can reduce the voltage (dv/dt) however, if the wiring length becomes too long, suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may be difficult. Installing a sinusoidal output filter on the output side of the inverter, results in the reduction of the peak value of the motor terminal voltage. Refer to Table 12.4.1 below for the sinusoidal filter selection. The sinusoidal filter is not needed for the 230V class inverters due to the lower peak voltage on the motor terminals.

Voltage (V)

460V

Table 12.4.1 Sinusoidal Filter Selection (for 460V class Inverter) Inverter Sinusoidal Filter Motor Rated output Rated rated HP Model current(A) CT/VT current (A) current (A) 7.5 14/16 10 SNF44015 15 10 18/22.7 13 15 27/30 19 SNF44025 25 20 32/38 25 SNF44030 30 25 40/46 31 SNF44040 40 30 50/61 36 SNF44050 50 40 65/76 49 SNF44060 60

12-3

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual Notes 1 - The V31 inverter utilizes improved latest generation IGBT devices and soft-switching gate control circuits. This improves the dv/dt by approximately 50% compared to the previous model, which in turn reduces the motor peak terminal voltage. 2 - The purpose of sinusoidal output filter is: . Increased motor service life. . Reduction of parasitic motor noise. . Reduced pulse load of the inverter. . Improved system reliability & efficiency. Connection Example:

Fig.12.4.1 Sinusoidal Filter Connection

12-4

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 12.5 AC FUSES Semiconductor fuses may be required between the AC main circuit power supply and the Inverter input terminals L1(R), L2(S), and L3(T) for branch circuit short circuit protection. When selecting semiconductor fuses to provide inverter input I2t protection and to comply with UL, CSA, NEC branch circuit short circuit protection requirements, select one of the following fuse types: Fuse type: UL designated time-delay or non-time-delay fuse. (According to IEC-60269 standard) Class: CC, J, T, RK1 or RK5. Designators: KTK, FNQ, FRS, LPJ, LPS, JKS, JIS or JJN. Refer to Table 12.5.1 for the recommended fuses. Equivalent fuses from other manufacturers can also be used. Inverter

230V

460V

Table 12.5.1 AC Fuses Recommended 1

UL Model Recommended Rated Rated *1 *1 Input Output Fuse HP Current Model No. Rating Fuse Mfg. Model No. Rating Mfg. Current (A) (A) 7.5 29 24 Ferraz A50P50-4 50A/500V Bussmann 63FE/50FE 63A/50A/690V 10 38 32 Ferraz A50P80-4 80A/500V Bussmann 63FE 63A/690V 15 58 48 Ferraz A50P80-4 80A/500V Bussmann 63FE 63A/690V 20 77 64 Bussmann FWH-100B 100A/500V Ferraz A50QS100-4 100A/500V 25 88 80 Bussmann FWH-175B 175A/500V Ferraz A50QS150-4 150A/500V 30 106 96 Bussmann FWH-175B 175A/500V Ferraz A50QS150-4 150A/500V 7.5 17 14 Ferraz A60Q30-2 30A/600V Bussmann 40FE/30FE 30A/30A/690V 10 22 18 Ferraz A60Q30-2 30A/600V Bussmann 40FE 40A/690V 15 33 27 Ferraz A70P50-4 50A/700V Bussmann 50FE 50A/690V 20 38 32 Ferraz A70P70-4 70A/700V Bussmann 63FE 63A/690V 25 44 40 Ferraz A70P80-4 80A/700V Bussmann 63FE 63A/690V 30 55 50 Bussmann FWH-125B 125A/500V Ferraz A50QS100-4 100A/500V Bussmann FWH-125B 125A/500V Ferraz A50QS100-4 100A/500V 40 72 65 *1 - Rated input and output current are based on the constant torque (CT mode) current rating. *2 - The larger (upper) value is for single phase power input, and lower value is for three phase input.

12-5

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual 12.6

Others

A) Digital Operator with Extension Cable Used for the operation of LCD (JNEP-40) Digital Operator or monitor when removed from the front of inverter unit. FAULT

FWD

-DRV-

REV

SEQ

REF

00:00 Freq Ref U1-01=00.00Hz U1-02=00.00Hz U1-03=0.0A

Inverter

DIGITAL OPERATOR JNEP - 40

MENU HELP

LOC REM

BACK

FWD REV

DATA ENTER

JOG

RESET

RUN

STOP

L Fig. 12.6.1 Extension Cable

Table 12.6.1 Extension Cable Cable Extension Cable Set*1 Length 3.28 ft. / 1m 4H332D0010000 6.56 ft. / 2m 4H332D0030001 9.8 ft. / 3m 4H332D0020005 16.4 ft. / 5m 4H332D0040006 32.8 ft. / 10m 4H332D0130005 *1 - Includes special cable for LCD operator, screws and installation manual. The physical dimension of LCD Digital Operator is shown in the following Fig. 12.6.2.

Fig. 12.6.2 LCD Digital Operator Dimension B) Back-UP Battery for LCD Keypad An optional battery can be installed inside the LCD Digital Operator (JNFP-40) to keep the real time clock (RTC) operating during power interruptions. The optional back-up battery is rechargeable. To activate the battery, set the dip switch to ‘ON’ on the back of the LCD keypad. The back-up battery rating can keep the 12-6

V31 Inverter Instruction Manual RTC operating more than 1 year after power interruptions, and the expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. Normally, replacement is not required.

0 Off

Fig. 12.6.3 Back-up Battery operation

NOTES-

12-7